M §111 IBM K u HV.p MiKvff«Ml£BUKh .■■..■■■■■••■ mamm m KHflflu m m Qass Book. COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT FRENCH GRAMMAR: PRESENTING, IN A CONCISE AND SYSfEMATIC FORM, THE ESSENTIAL PRINCIPLES OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE: INCLUDING ENGLISH EXERCISES TO BE TRANSLATED INTO FRENCH, AND A CAREFULLY GRADUATED SERIES OF FRENCH EXERCISES, WITH FULL VOCABULARIES; AN ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE MOST COMMON FRENCH IDIOMS, AND A COPIOUS INDEX. TO WHICH IS ADDED A FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND LATIN VOCABULARY, CONTAINING THE MOST COMMON WORDS IN FRENCH WHICH ARE DERIVED FROM THE LATIN. BY / EDWARD H. MAGILL, A. M., PEOFESSOE OP ANCIENT AND MODEEN LANGUAGES IN SWAETHMOEE COLLEGE, PA. ATJTHOE OF "AN INTEODTJCTOET FEENCH EEADEE," " FEENCH PEOSE AND POETEY," ETC. ELE VENl'H EDITION, ENLARGED AND IMPROVED. BOSTON AND CHICAGO: WOOLWORTH, AINSWORTH & CO. 1870. n ^^K» TC a\0^ Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1866, by Edward H. Magill, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1869, by Edward H. Magill, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. Electrotyped at the Boston Stereotype Foundry, No. 19 Spring Lane. OPINION DE M. BESCHERELLE, ain^, SUR LES OUVRAGES DE M. MAGILL. Avec les chernins de fer, les lignes telegraphiques, le cable sous-ma- rin, les locomobiles de toutes sortes, voire raeme les velocipedes a deux, trois et quatre roues (car n'a-t-on pas vu tout recemment un velocipe- diste, aux cris de : Au voleur ! au voleur ! imprimer une triple vitesse a son vehicule de nouvelle invention et courir sus au delinquant, en se frayant un passage a travers une foule compaete ; puis le saisir au col- let et le livrer aux mains des agents de police), — avec ces puissants et ingenieux moyens de locomotion et de transmission, disons-nous, les langues ont incontestablemc, « ?quis un nouvel element de propagation. Sous ce rapport, la langue ftv iqaise est peut-etre la plus privilegiee ; car son universalite, deja parfaitement etablie depuis longues annees, ne fait que s'etendre encore davantage. Aussi est-elle aujourd'bui, s'il est permis de le dire, le trucbeman, reinterprete du globe entier. Tous les souverains de l'Europe, tous les chefs de tribus meme, sont venus, a l'occasion de la grande Exposition de 18G7, visiter la capitale de la Erance, et tous ou presque tous parlaient la langue framjaise. Nous n'en voulons pour preuve que la reine de Moheli, qui, quoique venue Jes pays les plus excentriques, ne s'exprimait pas moins dans notre ^.ngue avec autant d'elegance que de correction. II ne faut done pas a'etonner de voir chaque jour s'accroitre le nombre des ouvrages desti- les a repandre, a faciliter l'etude des langues en general, et de la langue "ran apprenant la langue franqaise, ils verront en quoi different le mecanisme et le genie des deux idiomes. C'est une etude comparative des plus at- trayantes, pleine de resultats, et qui ne peut que fortifier les eleves dans la connaissance approfondie de leur propre langue. Le plan suivi par M. Magill est tres simple, tres clair et tres methodique. On voit qu'il (l) 2 OPINION DE M. BESCHERELLE. a lu et longuement medite les meilleurs ouvrages de grammaire publies tant en France qu'en Angleterre. Son livre est un excellent resume de tout ce qu'on a dit de mieux sur la matiere qu'il traite. Aussi est-ce le guide le plus sur qu'on puisse prendre pour l'etude de notre langue. Apres avoir consacre quelques pages aux lettres et aux sons, il passe en revue les voyelles, les diphthongues et les consonnes, il s'attache a raontrer en quoi differe la prononciation francaise de la prononciation anglaise, et comme cette partie exigerait un volume entier, il termine ce chapitre substantiel quoique concis par cette observation pleine de justesse : "La prononciation d'une langue etrangere ne peut etre parfaitement ensei- gnee par les livres ; il faut l'entendre de la bouche m&me des naturels du pays." Viennent ensuite les parties du discours qu'il traite chacune d'une maniere claire et suffisante. Sachant que la theorie sans la pra- tique ne donnerait que des resultats steriles, il a soin d'ajouter a chacun de ses chapitres un petit vocabulaire compose de mots fran^ais dont il donne la traduction, puis des exercices qui presentent l'application des regies, et que l'eleve est force de traduire en fran^ais. Naturellement apres cette partie elementaire arrive la syntaxe, qui est developpee avec beaucoup de tact et de savoir. Toutes les difficultes que presente notre langue sous le rapport de la construction y sont passees en revue. Enfin l'ouvrage est termine par un petit vocabulaire des mots les plus usuels, chose infiniment precieuse pour les commen^ants, qui ne sauraient trop tot se familiariser avec la nomenclature francaise. La ne se sont pas bornes les efforts de M. Magill. A sa Grammaire franqaise il a cru devoir ajouter un autre volume qu'il intitule : "An Introductory French Reader." Ce volume supplementaire est d'une utilite incontestable, car il contient une foule de choses propres a hater les progres des eleves. On y trouve d'abord une serie d'exercices gra- dues et pratiques sur toutes les parties du discours et sur la syntaxe ; des conversations familieres ; puis un choix de morceaux tires de nos meilleurs ecrivains ; viennent ensuite des notes explicatives tant sur les exercices grammaticaux que sur les morceaux litteraires ; des observa- tions sur la prononciation, et enfin un petit Dictionnaire fran^ais-an- glais, dans lequel on trouve tout a la fois la prononciation figuree des mots et leur etymologie. En resume, les deux volumes qu'a publies M. Edward H. Magill sont traites d'une maniere claire, exacte et precise. La theorie et la pratique y marchent d'un m&me pas, et grace a la simplicite et a la clarte de sa methode, au choix varie et delicat des exemples, a l'ordre parfait qui regne dans ses deux volumes, le travail est tellement simplifie que les eleves trouvent un charme dans une etude qui d'ordinaire est fort peu gojtee des jeunes esprits. BESCHEKELLE, aine, Ancien Bibliofhecaire au Louvre, Auteur du Dictionnaire National et du Grand Dictionnaire de Geographic universelle. OPINION OF M. BESCHEEELLE, Sk., UPON THE WORKS OF MR. MAGILL. With the railroads, the telegraphic wires, the submarine cable, the means of locomotion of every kind, even to the two, three, and four- wheeled velocipede (for have we not seen quite recently a velocipedist, at the cry of " Stop thief ! stop thief ! " put to full speed his newly in- vented vehicle, and give chase to the culprit, forcing his way through a dense crowd, seizing him by the collar, and delivering him into the hands of the police), — with these powerful and ingenious means of locomotion and transmission, the languages have unquestionably acquired a new element of propagation. In this regard the Frencli language is perhaps the most fortunate ; for its universality, already for many years well established, is still more extended. It is in truth, to-day, if I may be allowed the expression, the mediator, the interpreter of the entire globe. All the sovereigns of Europe, all the chiefs of tribes even, came, on the occasion of the Great Exhibition of 18G7, to visit the capital of France ; and all, or nearly all, spoke the French language. As a proof of this assertion, we need only refer to the queen of Mohilla, who, although coming from realms the most remote, expressed herself, nevertheless, in our language, correctly, and even elegantly. We should not, then, be astonished to see daily increasing the number of works designed to ex- tend and facilitate the study of languages in general, and of the French language in particular. • Such is the end proposed by Mr. Edward H. Magill, formerly professor in the Boston Latin School. In order to give thorough instruction to the pupils entrusted to his care, and to cause them to make rapid progress, he has composed expressly for them a complete course of French Gram- mar. This course of grammatical study, a copy of which the author lias forwarded to us, requesting us to examine it and express our opin- ion of it, appears to merit the success which it has already attained. The old author of the National Dictionary eagerly embraces the opportunity offered him to do justice to a foreign grammarian. Let us begin by giving an account of Mr. Magill's French Grammar. This work, written in English, may serve at once the people of Great Britain and of America. Whilst learning the French language, they will see wherein the structure and the idioms of the two languages dif- fer. It is a study of comparative grammar of the mos>t attractive kind, fruitful in results, and which can but strengthen the pupils in the thor- ough knowledge of their own language. The plan followed by Mr. Magill is very simple, very clear, and very methodical. It is obvious (3) 4 OPINION OF MR. BESCHERELLE. that he has read and carefully considered the best grammatical works published in Prance and England. His book is an excellent resume of all that has been best said upon the subject of which it treats, and it is the surest guide which can be taken for the study of our language. Having set apart some pages for the consideration of the letters and sounds, he passes in review the vowels, the diphthongs, and the conso- nants, and proceeds to show wherein the French pronunciation differs from that of the English ; and as this portion of the work would demand an entire volume, he closes this valuable though concise chapter by the following very just observation : " The sounds of the French language must be heard from the master. They can be correctly learned only by hearing them from the lips of a native." Next come the parts of speech, each of which he treats in a manner clear and satisfactory. Knowing that theory without practice would give but unfruitful results, he has taken care to add to each of his chapters a small vocabulary, composed of French words, of which he gives the translation; then ex- ercises which present the application of the rules, and which the pupil is to translate into French. Naturally, after this elementary part, comes the syntax, which is developed with much tact and knowledge. All the difficulties which our language presents in the matter of construction are there passed in review. Finally, the work is concluded by a brief vocabulary of the most usual words, a very valuable thing for beginners, who cannot too early become familiar with the French nomenclature. Nor do the labors of Mr. Magill stop here. To his French Grammar he has seen fit to add another volume, which he entitles "An Introduc- tory French Reader." This supplementary volume is one of unques- tionable utility, for it contains very many things well adapted to hasten the progress of the pupils. We find there, first, a series of exercises regularly graduated, and adapted to all the parts of speech and to the syntax; familiar conversations; then a selection of pieces taken from our best writers ; then come explanatory notes, both upon the grammat- ical exercises and the selections; observations upon the pronunciation; and finally, a small French-English Dictionary, in which we find at once the indicated pronunciation of the words and their etymology. In conclusion, the two volumes which Mr. Edward H. Magill has pub- lished are treated in a manner clear, exact, and precise. Theory and practice in these volumes advance with equal step; and, thanks to the simplicity and clearness of his method, to the varied and felicitous choice of his examples, and to the perfect order which prevails throughout his two volumes, the work is so simplified that the pupils find a charm in a study which ordinarily is very little relished by young minds. BESCHERELLE, Sr., Former Librarian at the Louvre, Author of the National Dictionary, and of the Great Universal Gazetteer, PREFACE This Grammar is designed especially for a class-book, and not for a book of reference, and therefore contains only such matter as is to be thoroughly mastered by the student. It aims to exhibit the general principles of the language in rules clearly and concisely stated, and to render these famil- iar by sufficient illustrations. The exercises upon the rules are carefully selected English phrases and sentences to be rendered into French ; and the reverse process, of rendering French into English, in which the pupil has sufficient prac- tice in his reading books, has been avoided. Experience has taught that when a principle is stated abstractly, with the briefest and simplest illustration possible, it is better to require the student to apply it for himself, even at the cost of more time and labor at first, than to place before him numerous illustrations, which he is but too apt to imitate mechanically, as models, entirely overlooking the principle. The study of a modern language conducted upon the method here indicated becomes a source of discipline second only to the study of the ancient languages. Of course, it is very desirable that this study should be constantly com- bined with the oral instruction of a teacher to whom the spoken language is vernacular, or, at least, familiar. But even without this advantage, the study of the language in the manner above indicated will give the student a far better preparation to become, readily and rapidly, familiar with (5) 6 PREFACE. the spoken language upon visiting France, than he could obtain by those mechanical methods which familiarize him with certain set forms and phrases, but leave him wholly incapable of any independent expression of his own thought. At each step in the course herein pursued, a thorough familiarity with all that precedes is supposed, and to that end, frequent reviews are recommended ; or, rather, each lesson should, as far as practicable, begin at the beginning of the book, that, when it is completed, the pupil may have entirely at command an amount of grammar sufficient to explain all the more common forms and constructions of the language. On finishing the First Part, or the Etymology, or even earlier, a simple reading book may be placed in the hands of the pupil, and he should be required to apply the principles which he has learned to the words in his reading lesson. Thus, a lesson in French, instead of being a mere imitative and memoriter exercise, may be made an excellent means of drill and discipline. Following the general principle of avoiding arbitrary and mechanical processes, and cultivating thought, the genders of nouns, the feminine of adjectives, and the conjugations of verbs are not given in the vocabulary when these may be ascertained by the rules and exceptions. Particular attention is invited to the tabular view of the the irregular verbs. In this table the Jive primitive tenses, or principal parts, of the verbs are given, with which the student should be made perfectly faiiiiliar, and the other parts are readily obtained from these by the introductory rules. The inflection, in full, of the present indicative, which is the most useful, as well as the most irregular tense, is given by some grammarians. It is hoped that Tables I. and II., at the beginning of the list, with the explanatory rule, will be found of essential service, materially diminish- ing the difficulties and apparent irregularities which this tense presents. The classification of the tenses into two great divisions, PREFACE. 7 those denoting completed or perfect action, and those denot- ing incomplete or imperfect action, and the change of name of the fast definite to the past indefinite, or aorist, and of the past indefinite to the -present perfect, will, it is believed, commend themselves to all who will give the sub- ject a careful examination, in the light of reason, unbiassed by the ordinary nomenclature. Aside from the propriety of calling things by their right names, it may be mentioned, as an incidental advantage, that the difference between the English and French idioms, by which, in French, the pres- ent perfect is so often used for the past indefi?iite, is more impressively taught by this than by any other method. The names of the cases used in some European French. Grammars have been preserved in this work, as a large and increasing number of those who study French in this country are more or less familiar with Latin, and to such it was be- lieved that both the etymology and the syntax of the lan- guage could be much more clearly and briefly taught by this means, while, for those not familiar with Latin, a brief comparison of the Latin and English cases is given at the beginning of the inflections. The arrangement of the work is systematic and pro- gressive, the etymology of the different parts of speech occupying Part I., and the syntax of these, in the same order, occupying Part II. This arrangement, together with the complete vocabulary of all the French words to be used in the exercises, the alphabetical list of the more common idioms of the language, and the copious Index, — all of which will be found at the close of the volume, — must greatly facilitate the labor of both teacher and student. As an initiatory exercise in comparative philology, towards which modern scholarship is tending, and which has made so great progress during the present century, there is added, as an Appendix to this work, "^4 JFrencJi, English, and Latin Vocabulary" based upon a work by Gibson, upon the deri- vation of French from Latin, with additions and changes >v 8 PREFACE. from Bescherelle's " Dictionnaire National" and especially from Scheler's more recent work, " Dictionnaire d'JSty- mologie frangaise d'afires les Resultats de la Science Aloderne" In using this vocabulary it is recommended that the kindred English word and the Latin original of words which occur in the reading lessons be required of the student. The pupil who is familiar with Latin will thus soon acquire the ability to translate nine tenths of the words in his French lesson into their Latin equiva- lents — an exercise exceedingly interesting, and of great service in the acquisition of modern languages ; while those not familiar with Latin may readily acquire a knowl- edge of many common Latin roots by a comparison with their English and French derivatives. To all, therefore, it is believed that this portion of the work will be found both interesting and profitable. It will be borne in mind that this work is not intended to take the place of the living teacher ; but in the hands of a judicious and skilful instructor, it is confidently believed that it will prove a valuable auxiliary. Were the author to acknowledge his indebtedness to the different grammarians upon whose works he has drawn in the preparation of this volume, it would be simply enu- merating many of the principal Grammars of the French language published in France, in England, and in this country, during the present century. He desires, however, to express his great indebtedness to his friend, Francis Gardner, LL. D., Master of the Latin School, for the gen- erous use of his library, containing many valuable works to which access would otherwise have been impossible, and also for many important suggestions during the progress of the work. Boston Latin School, Sept. 1, 1866. PREFATORY NOTE TO THE ELEVENTH EDITION The very great favor with which this Grammar has been received by the public has induced the author to spare no pains to insure its entire accuracy, and to render it worthy, in every respect, of the continued confidence of teachers and students of the French language. With this end in view, it has been subjected, during the past year, to the critical examination of M. Bescherelle, aine, author of the " Dic- tionnaire National." Some changes and corrections sug- gested by him have been incorporated into the body of the work ; and a Supplement has been added, containing a trea- tise on Pronunciation as complete as a work of this nature would allow ; the inflections, in full, of Negative, Interrog- ative, and Negative Interrogative forms of Verbs ; Passive and Reflective Verbs, and Neuter Verbs conjugated with the auxiliary Etre; also an alphabetical list of Irregular Verbs whose tenses are formed irregularly from the prin- cipal parts, or are defective, with the inflection of the irreg- ular tenses. In accordance with the desire of many French teachers (9) 10 PREFATORY NOTE. the author has introduced at the close of the English Ex- ercises a series of Exercises in French from Part I. of his Introductory French Reader. These are carefully graduated and regularly arranged to correspond with the various sec- tions of the Grammar, and are followed by very full and elementary notes and references, and by a Vocabulary of the words which they contain. This portion of the w T ork may be commenced at once, and carried on in conjunction with the study of those portions of the Grammar to which reference is made at the commencement of each exercise. It is believed that these additions will not prove unaccept- able to the public, and will tend to lessen materially the labors of the teacher in the class-room. The opinion of M. Bescherelle upon this Grammar, and the supplementary Reader which accompanies it, will be found at the commencement of the volume. Swarthmore College (Pa.), September i, 1S69. TO TEACHERS. The author's "Introductory French Reader" and the Grammar should be begun together. The first part of this Reader is a series of French exercises arranged according to the sections of the Grammar ; and their use together facilitates the labor of both teacher and pupil. CONTENTS Pagb Letters and Sounds, 13 Etymology of the Article, 18 Noun, 24 Adjective, 29 Pronoun, 37 Verb, 49 Adverb, 93 Preposition, 95 Conjunction, 97 Interjection, 99 Syntax op the Article, 102 " Noun, 109 " Adjective, 112 " Pronoun, 120 " Verb, 132 " Adverb, 158 '« Preposition, 162 " Conjunction, 168 Idioms, Phrases, &c, 170 Vocabulary, English - French, 185 Grammatical Exercises in French7 201 Notes to Grammatical Exercises 275 Vocabulary, French - English, 289 Appendix — French, English, and Latin Vocabulary, . . 321 Supplement, 389 Index, 425 (ID FRENCH GRAMMAR. P^I&T I. ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. I. LETTERS AND SOUNDS. $ 1. (I.) The French alphabet contains the same letters as the .English, but w and k are found only in foreign words. (2.) The vowels and conso?iants are the same as in English. § 5M. (1.) There are three accents in French, the acute ('), the grave ( s ), and the circumflex ( A ). (2.) The acute accent is used only over e / the grave over e, and on the words d, to, dejd, already, Id, there, oit, where, and some compounds of Id, as hold, ho there ; the circum- flex on all the five vowels, a, e, i, o, and u. (3.) The acute accent gives the e the sound of a in mate. Ex. bonte, goodness. (4.) The grave accent gives the e the open sound of e'e in e'er / as, proces, process ; on other letters it does not affect the sound. (5.) The circumflex accent denotes a contraction or syn- cope [see App. § 2. (10.)], and gives a long sound to the vowel over which it is placed. Ex. dme, soul ; reve, dream; epitre, epistle ; apotre, apostle ; bruler, to burn. (6.) The cedilla ( J, placed under c, before a, o, and u, gives it the sound of s. Ex. fagoii, fashion (pronounced fasson). (7.) Other marks, as the diaeresis, hyphen, etc., are used as in English. (13) . 14 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 3. VOWELS. § 8. (1.) There are seventeen simple vowel sounds in French, four being nasal vowels. They are written and pro- nounced as follows : — 1. a, nearly like a in hat. Ex. ami, friend. 2. a, nearly like a in bark. Ex. pate, paste. 3. e, nearly like e in hatter. Ex. tenir, to hold. 4. e, like a in paper. Ex. ete, summer. 5. e, nearly like e'e in e'er. Ex. modele, model. 6. e, nearly like e in £/iere. Ex. £ete, head. 7. i, nearly like i in timid. Ex. imiter, to imitate. 8. o, nearly like o in roo. Ex. ecole, school. 9. 6 like o in note. Ex. cote, rib. 10. u;* to pronounce this letter begin to pronounce long £, and gradually close the lips as in whistling. Ex. vertu, virtue. 11. eu{[ somewhat like a in paper, with the lips placed as in whistling; but the sound is not so much prolonged. Ex. jeune, young. Note. Eu in the forms of avoir is pronounced like u. Ex. feus, I had ; fetes eu, I had had. 12. 6w,f like eu prolonged. Ex. jeune, fasting. 13. ou, like ou in soup. Ex. soupe, soup. 14. an, nearly like an in loant. Ex. ange, angel. 15. in, nearly like an in angry. Ex. lin, flax. 16. on, nearly like on in long. Ex. long, long. 17. un, nearly like un in hunger. Ex. Jrom, brown. Note. The circumflex merely prolongs the sound of i and u. Ex. ipxtre, epistle : bruler, to burn. * The correct pronunciation of the French u is acquired with difficulty by the English student. To remove this difficulty, it is better not to think of any sound of the English u. but to take as the guide the English e. Thus, if the first and last syllables of the English Avord verity be pronounced, and the lips be placed as in whistling when uttering the last syllable, this syllable being slightly prolonged, the French word vertu will be very correctly pronounced. t The sound of eu and eh may be produced quite accurately by placing the lips as in whistling, and attempting to utter the English a ; shortening the sound for eu, without changing the quality; thus pronounce the English pay quite rapidly, fol- lowing the above direction, and the sound of the French pew is produced; while the English pair, similarly pronounced, produces the French peur. §§ 3, 4. LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 15 (2.) Several combinations of letters may represent the first thirteen of these sounds : these must be learned by observa- tion. (3.) The combinations which may represent the nasal vow- els, Nos. 14, 15, 16, and 17, are as follows: — No. 14, an = < 'am. ean. em. Ex. jambe, leg. Ex. affligeant, afflicting. Ex. membre, member. 3 CD en. Ex. entendre, to hear. 0* CD ' im. ym. Ex. impoli, impolite. Ex. symbole, symbol. O a o No. 15, in = < yn. aim. ain. Ex. syntaxe, syntax. JZx.faim, hunger. Ex. crainte, fear. 0* CD ein. Ex. peinture, picture. 00 3 CD -L-r „ n ( 0m " No. 16, on — \ ( eon. Ex. ombre, shade. Ex. pigeon, pigeon. JNo. 17, un— 1 ( eun. Ex. parfum, perfume. Ex. djeun, fasting. 1 CD"" Note. En, following i cept when n follows. Ex is usually pronounced like the Frenc . bien, well ; je viens, I come. i tn, ex- DIPHTHONGS. § 4, The sounds of most diphthongs may be produced by the rapid utterance of the vowel sounds of which they are composed. The following diphthongs form the principal exceptions to this rule : — 1. ai, pronounced like a in fate. Ex. balai, broom. ais, pronounced like e. Ex. mais, but. 2. ei, pronounced nearly like a in fate. Ex. neige, snow. Note. Ai and ei are pronounced separately before a liquid I. Ex. lail, bail ; sommeil, sleep, the e being pronounced like e. 3. an, pronounced nearly like o in no. Ex. cliaud, warm. 4. oi, pronounced nearly like ica in twa?ig ; but rather more prolonged. Ex. mouchoir, handkerchief 16 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 4, 5. 5. y, between two vowels, and in pays, country, and its derivatives, has the power of two Vs. Elsewhere it has the sound of the French i. Ex. payer (pai-ier), to pay ; paysan (pai-i-san), peasant ; lyre (lire), lyre. CONSONANTS. §5. (1.) Consonants, when pronounced, are sounded as in English. (2.) The following are the principal exceptions : — ch is pronounced like sh in she. Ex. cheval, horse. c is pronounced like g hard in second, second ; and fecond, fruitful ; so in the derivatives of second ; as, seconder, to second. d, final, when pronounced before a vowel sound, has the sound of t. Ex. vend-ilf does he sell? f in neuf, nine, before a vowel sound, has the sound of v. Ex. neuf amis, nine friends. g before e, i, and y, has the sound of s in pleasure. Ex. gemir, to groan; gingembre, ginger; gymnique, gym- nastic. gn is pronounced like ni in union. Ex. signer, to sign. g final, when pronounced before a vowel sound, has the sound of k. Ex. sang humain, human blood. h is not pronounced in French ; h " aspirate " (so called) being merely a more forcible utterance of the following vowel. Rem. 1. h unaspirated does not, while h " aspirated " does, prevent link- ing and elision. Ex. Vhomme, the man ; le Mros, the hero. Rem. 2. The following words, with their derivatives, are the most com- mon examples of the " aspirated " h : — Hdbler, to romance, tell stories. Haleter, to pant, Hache, axe. Halle, market-place. Hagard, haggard, fierce. Hallebarde, halbert. Ilaie, hedge. Hanche, hip. Haillon, rag, tatter. Ranter, to keep company with. Hair, to hate. Happer, to snap at. H&le, sunburnt. Haquct, dray. LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 17 Harangue, speech, oration. Havre-sac, knapsack. Harasser, to harass, tire. Hennir, to neigh. Harceler, to tire, tease. Htraut, herald. Hardes, clothes* Hirisser, to stand on end. Hardi, bold, daring. H6ron, heron. Hareng, herring. Hdros,* hero. Hargneuz, cross, peevish. Herser, to harrow. Haricots, French beans. Heurter, to knock. Harnacher, to harness. Hibou, owl. Harpe, harp. Hideux, hideous, dreadful. Harpie, harpy. Hollande, Holland. Harpon, harpoon* Honte, shame. Hasard, chance. Horde, horde. Hate, haste. Hors, out of. Hausser, to raise. Huit, eight. Haut, high. Hurler, to howl. Hdvre, haven. Hussar d, hussar. j is pronounced like s in pleasure. Ex. je, I. I in il, ill, in the middle or at the end of words, has the sound of III in brilliant.^ It is called the liquid I. Ex. tailleur, tailor; travail, labor. m, n, when following vowels in the same syllable, have no sound of their own. They simply indicate that the pre- ceding vowel has the nasal sound. Ex. bon, good; en- fin, at last. q : qu is pronounced like k. Ex. qui, who. r : the French r is trilled more than the English. Ex. parler, to speak. s has the sound of z only when it occurs in the middle or at the end of a word, between two vowels. Ex. oser, to dare; pas encore, not yet. t is pronounced like c soft in tial, tiel, and Hon, in the mid- dle, or at the end of a word, and in atie final in words derived from Greek. Ex. partial, partial ; essentiel, es- sential; nation, nation; democratie, democracy. th is always pronounced like t. Ex. the, tea. w is generally pronounced like v. Ex. Wolga, Volga. x initial is pronounced like gz. Ex. Xenophon, Xenophon. * The' derivatives of Mros are unaspirated. t ifi conversation it has the sound of y in ye. 18 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 5-7. x is pronounced like ss in six, six ; dix, ten ; soixante, sixty ; JBruxelles, Brussels; Auxonne / . Auxerre / and u4ia>m- x is pronounced like 2 in sixihne, sixth ; dixieme, tenth; dix- sept, seventeen ; dix-huit, eighteen ; dix-neuf, nineteen. x final, when pronounced before a vowel sound, has the sound of z. Ex. dix hommes, ten men. z final, in a few proper names, especially in Spanish names, sounds like ss. Ex. Alvarez. (3.) Final consonants are generally silent, but c,f, I, and r are usually pronounced. Exc. R, preceded by e, is usually silent in words of more than one syllable. Ex. chanter, to sing. In such cases, pronounce the e like 6. (4.) Final consonants are usually pronounced in connected discourse when the following word begins with a vowel sound. Ex. un grand homme, a great man. (5.) The exceptions to the rules are best learned by prac- tice and observation. The foregoing are the general rules for pronunciation ; but it must be remembered that, in the words of Levizac, "The sounds of the French language must be heard from the mas- ter. They can be correctly learned only by hearing them from the lips of a native."* II. ETYMOLOGY. § 6. The Parts of Speech in French are the same as in English, viz., Article, Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjec- tion. THE ARTICLE. § 7. The article is of three kinds, the indefinite, the definite, and the partitive. The indefinite is the English a or an; as, un livre, a book; the definite is * For full rules on the subject of Pronunciation, see Supplement, pp. 269-281. § 7. ETYMOLOGY. — THE ARTICLE. 19 the English the; as, le crayon, the pencil ; and the par- titive is the English some or any, before a noun, some- times expressed in English, but very generally omitted, as, du papier, (some) paper. Note. There are but two genders in French, the Masculine and Femi- nine. Rem. The names of the cases, used in many European French Grammars, and adopted in this work, may be thus compared with the English. The Nominative Case corresponds with the English nomi- native. Ex. Le livre est utile, the book is useful. The Genitive Case is indicated in French by the preposition de, of, and usually corresponds with the English possessive, or the objective after the preposition of. Ex. De la mere, the mother's, or of the mother. The Dative Case is indicated in French by the preposition a, to, and usually corresponds with the English objective after the preposition to. Ex. A la mere, to the mother. The Accusative Case corresponds with the English objective after an active verb, or after other prepositions than of (de), or to (a). Ex. Elle lit le livre, she reads the book ; avec la mere, with the mother. 1. The Indefinite Article, un, one, is inflected as follows : — Nominative, un, mas. une, fern. one. Genitive. d'un, " d'une, " of one. Dative. a un, " a une, " to one. Accusative. un, " une, " one. 2. The Definite Article, le, la, les, the, before consonant sounds, is inflected as follows : — Singular. Plural. JVbm. le, m. la, f. les, m. and f. the. Gen. du,* " de la, " des,* " " of the. Dot. au* " a la, " aux * « « to the. Ace. le, « la, « les, « " the. * Du is contracted from de le ; ate from a le ; des from de Zes, and aux from a les. 20 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §7. 3. The Definite Article before vowel sounds omits the final c or a, and is thus inflected : — Singular. Plural. JVom. 1', m. and f. les, m. and f. the. Gen. de 1', « des, " of the. Bat. a 1', aux, " to the. Ace. 1', les, « the. 4. The Partitive Article, die,* de la,* des,* some, before consonant sounds,^when no adjective follows before the noun, may be inflected as follows : — Singular. Plural. JVbm. du,* m. de la, f. des,* m. and £ some. Gen. de,f « de,t " de,f of some. Dat. adu,*« a de la, « a des,* " to some. Ace. du,* " de la, « des,* u some. 5. The Partitive Article before vowel sounds, when no adjective follows before the noun, omits the final e or a, and is inflected as follows : — Singular. Plural. JVbm. de P, m. and f. des, m. and f. some. Gen. d\ « d', <( of some. Pat. a de P, « & des, (C to some. Ace. de P, des, « some. ■ 6. The Partitive Article before an adjective beginning with a consonant sound % is inflected as follows: — Singular and Plural. JVbm. de, m. and f. some. Gen. de, " of some. Pat. a de, " to some. Ace. de, " some. * It will be observed that the nominative and accusative of the partitive article correspond in form with the genitive of the definite. Du and des are in all cases formed by contraction from de le and de les. f The genitive of the partitive article, in both numbers, consists of the preposi- tion de only. X So when the noun is omitted, in which case the adjective is used substantively, and en, of it, of them, usually precedes. Ex. II a de bonnes plumes, et j'en ai de mauvaises, he has some good pens, and I have some bad ones. §§7, ETYB10L0GY. THE ARTICLE. 21 7. The Partitive Article before an adjective beginning with a vowel sound omits the final e, and is inflected as follows : — Singular and Plural. JSTom. d', m. and f. some. Gen. d', " of some. Bat. a d', " to some. Ace. some. §8. Vocabulary. Arbre, m. tree. Arc-en-ciel, m. rainbow. Argent, ra. money. Avoine, f. oats. Ble, m. wheat. Bois, m. wood. Bon, m. s. good. Bonne, f. s. good. Bons, m. p. good. Bonnes, f. p. good. Boucher, m. butcher. Boulanger, m. baker. Chateau, m. castle. CAer, m. s. dear. Chere, f. s. dear. Chers, m. p. dear. Cheres, f. p. dear. Cheval, m. horse. J)ieu, m. God. i&m, f. water. Farine, f. flour. Femme, f. woman, wife. Feuille, f leaf. j?We, f. daughter, girl. jP*7s, m. son. Frere, m. brother. Grand, m. s. large. Grande, f. s. large. Grands, m. p. large. Gr ancles, f. p. large. Habit, m. coat. Heros, m. hero. Homme, m. man. jSTdfe, m. landlord. Hotesse, f. landlady. Lion, m. lion. Livre, m. book. Livre, f. pound. Maison, f. house. Mauvais, m. s. bad. Mauvaise, f. s. bad. Mauvais, m. p. bad. Mativaises, f. p. bad. Mere, f. mother. Meunier, m. miller. Oncle, m. uncle. Pain, m. bread. Papier, m. paper. Passe-port, m. passport. Pere, m. father. .Pefttf, m. s. small. Petite, f. s. small. Petits, m. p. small. Petites, f. p. small. 22 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 8. Plume, f. pen. Tante, f. aupt. Porte, f. door. The, m. tea. Sel, m. salt. Viande, f. me?.t. Sozur, f. sister. Fm, m. wine. Table, f. table. Vinaigre, m. vinegar. Note 1. Natural gender is determined as in English. For the rules for gender, see the etymology of the noun, §§ 10, 11. Note 2. The plural of nouns and of adjectives is regularly formed bf adding s to the singular. Ex. arbre, tree, arbres, trees ; bon, good (s.£ bons, good (p.). Note 3. Articles stand before their nouns, and agree with them u* gender and number. Ex. Un homme, a man. D'une femme, of a woman. Du boulanger, of the baker. Desfeuilles, (some) leaves. De Varbre, of the tree. Les petites tables, the small tables. . De vin, of (some) wine. A des hommes, to some men. EXERCISE I. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 1. A father. 2. A mother. 3. A woman. 4. Of a son. 5. To a woman. 6. A sister. 7. To a brother. 8. Of a mother. 9. Of a tree. 10. To a tree. 11. A lion. 12. A pen. 13. A pound. 14. A book. 15. Of a pound. 16. A castle. 17. Of a castle. 18. To a castle. 19. A miller. 20. A table. 21. A door. 22. Of a table. 23. To a door. 24. A horse. 25. Of a horse. 26. Of a landlord. 27. A land- lady. 28. A leaf. 29. Of a leaf. 30. Of a baker. 31. Of an uncle. 32. Of a coat. 33. To a lion. 34. Of a god. 35. To a hero. 36. Of a pen. 37. A butcher. 38. Of a hero. 39. Of a landlady. 40. Of a sister. 41. Of a door. 42. Of a house. 43. To a father. 44. A rainbow. 45. A man. 46. Of a rainbow. 47. To a man. 48. A passport 49. Of a man. 50. An aunt. 51. Of a passport. 52. To an aunt. 53. Of an aunt. § 8. ETYMOLOGY. — THE ARTICLE. 23 EXERCISE II. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 1. The father. 2. Of the father. 3. Of the mother. 4. To the father. 5. To the daughter. 6. The money. 7. To the money. 8. Of the bread. 9. Of the meat. 10. The fathers. 11. To the fathers. 12. To the mothers. 13. Of the brothers. 14. The sisters. 15. The daughters. 16. Of the coats. 17. To the coats. 18. Of the water. 19. Of the salt. 20. To the salt. 21. The woman. 22. To the woman. 23. The door. 24. Of the door. 25. Of the money. 2G. Of the vinegar. 27. To the wood. 28. Of the leaf. 29. Of the aunt. 30. To the mother. 31. Of the man. 32. To the man. 33. Of the uncle. 34. Of the wine. 35. Of the meat. 36. To the miller. 37. Of the miller. EXEHCISE III. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. Note. The " some," after of or to, in the following phrases, is very often omitted in English. Ex. tin seau d'eau, a pail of (some) water. 1. Some bread. 2. To (some) bread. 3. Of (some) bread. 4. Some books. 5. Of (some) books. 6. To (some) books. 7. To (some) meat. 8. Some wine. 9. Of (some) wine. 10. To (some) wine. 11. To (some) salt. 12. Some trees. 13. To (some) trees. 14. Some oats. 15. To (some) oats. 16. Of some oats. 17. Some water. 18. Of (some) water. 19. To (some) water. 20. Some coats. 21. Of (some) coats. 22. Some tea. 23. Of (some) tea. 24. To (some) tea. 25. Some good tea. 26. Of (some) good tea. 27. To (some) good tea. 28. Some good pens. 29. Some good flour. 30. To (some) good flour. 31. To (some) good men. 32. Of (some) small trees. 33. Of (some) large lions. 34. Of (some) dear sisters. 35. Some dear sisters. 36. To (some) sisters. 37. To (some) dear sisters. 38. Some small brothers. 39. Of (some) small brothers. 24 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 9-11. THE NOUN. § 9. To nouns, in French, belong gender, number, and case ; the changes for case being made by the dif- ferent forms of the article. GENDER. GENDEE BY SIGNIFICATION. § 10, 1. Natural gender is determined as in Eng- lish, except that there is no neuter gender. Ex. lion, lion; lionne, lioness. 2. Names of the days of the week, months, seasons, trees, winds, mountains, metals, and colors, words and phrases used substantively, including many compound words, and names of the letters of the alphabet, are masculine. Examples. Dimanche, Sunday ; Janvier, January ; le printemps, Spring; le chtne, the oak; le Borte, the north wind; le Jura, Mount Jura ; le fer, iron ; le jaune, yellow ; rendez-vous, rendezvous ; porte- feuille, pocket-book ; un a, an a. 3. The names of virtues, vices, festivals, and mountain chains, are feminine. Examples. La chariti, charity ; la m6chancet6, wickedness ; la Saint Jean, Saint John's day ; les Alpes, the Alps. GENDER BY TERMINATION. §11. 1. Nouns ending in a consonant, or in any vowel except e, are masculine. Ex. pied, foot; aca- tia, acacia ; cri, cry ; indigo, indigo ; lieu, place. Exc. 1. Nouns ending in ion and aison are feminine, as production, production ; r aison, reason : but bastion, bas- tion ; champion, champion ; million, million ; septentrion, north ; and scorpion, scorpion, are masculine. Exc. 2. The following are feminine : boisson, drink; chair, flesh ; chaleur, heat ; chanson, song ; clef, key ; cour, yard ; croix, cross ; cuiller, spoon ; dot, dowry ; eau, water ; /aim, § 11. ETYMOLOGY. THE ARTICLE. 2& hunger; fin, end; fleur, flower, and many in eur ; foi, faith ; fois, time ; foret, forest ; legon, lesson ; loi, law ; main, hand ; mer, sea; merci, mercy; moeurs, manners ; mort, death ; nuit, night ; paix, peace ; part, part ; peau, skin ; plupart, most part ; rancon, ransom ; S0^y, thirst : tour, tower ; toux, cough ; trahison, treason ; vertu, virtue ; voix, voice. 2. Nouns ending in e or ie, not preceded by t, are masculine ; when preceded by t, feminine. Ex. ble, m. wheat; allie, m. ally; bonte, f. goodness; amitie, f. friendship. Exc. The following are masculine : comite, committee ; comte, county ; cote, side ; ete, summer ; pate, pie ; traite, treaty. 3. Nouns ending in e (mute) are frequently femi- nine, but when g or r precedes, they are generally mas- culine. Exc. The following nouns ending in ge and re are femi- nine : affaire, business ; chaire, pulpit ; chambre, chamber ; cire, wax ; ecriture, writing ; epitre, epistle ; fenetre, window ; foire, fair ; gloire, glory ; grammaire, grammar ; heure, hour ; histoire, history ; huitre, oyster ; image, image ; lettre, letter ; lumiere, light ; memoir e, memory ; montre, watch ; neige, snow; paire, pair ; page, page ; poire, pear ; terre, earth ; victoire, victory ; vitre, pane of glass ; gravure, engraving. 4. The following are masculine or feminine according to signification : — Masculine. Feminine. Aigle, eagle, Aigle, standard. Aune, alder, Aune, ell. Exemple, example, Exemple, writing-copy. JLivre, a book, JLivre, a pound. Manche, a handle, Manche, a sleeve. Memoire, bill, memorandum, Memoire, memory. Mode mode (gram.), Mode, fashion. Pendule, pendulum, Pendule, clock. 3 26 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 11, 12. Poele, stove, Poele, frying-pan. Poste, place, office, Poste, post-office. Somme, nap, sleep, Somme, sum. Souris, smile, Souris, mouse. Tour, turn, tour, Tour, tower. Vase, vase, vessel, Vase, mire, slime. Voile, veil, Voile, sail. NUMBER. § 12. 1. There are two numbers in French, as in English, and the plural is generally formed by adding $ to the singular. Ex. le vase, the vase ; les vases, the vases. 2. Nouns ending in s, x, or z, do not change for the plural. Ex. Singular. Plural. lefils, the son ; lesfils, the sons. la voix, the voice ; les voix, the voices. le nez, the nose ; les nez, the noses. 3. Nouns ending in au and eu add x for the plural. Ex. Singular. Plural. bateau, boat ; bateaux, boats. feu, fire ; feux, fires. Note. The folio-wing add a;; bijou, jewel ; caillou, pebble; chou, cab- bage ; genou, knee ; hibou, owl ; joujou, plaything. 4. Nouns ending in al change this ending into aux for the plural. Ex. cheval, a horse ; chevaux, horses. Note. The following change ail to aux: bail, lease; corail, coral; imail, enamel ; soupirail, air-hole ; sous-bail, under-lease ; and travail, labor. Exceptions in al. Bal, ball ; chacal, jackal ; carnaval, carnival ; and rfgal, treat, add s for the plural. 5. The following form their plurals irregularly : — bitail,* cattle ; bestiaux,f cattle. a'ieul, grandfather ; aleux, ancestors. del, heaven ; cieux, heavens. ceil, eye ; yeux, eyes. bercail, sheepfold ; plural wanting. * The species. f The individuals of the species taken collectively. §§ 13, H. ETYMOLOGY . - - HlfC NOUN. 27 COMPOUND NOUNS. § 13. 1. Substantive and adjective forms in com- pound nouns change regularly for the plural ; other parts of speech do not. Ex. chef -lieu, county town ; vice-amiral, vice admiral passe-partout, master key chefs-lieux, county towns. vice-amir aux, vice admirals. passe-partout, master keys. 2. When two nouns are joined by a preposition, the first only is changed for the plural. Ex. arc-e?i-ciel, rainbow; arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. §14, Vocabulary. Air, air, look. Animal, animal. An, year. Annee, year. Astre, star. Avril, April. Bord, bank. Canne, cane. Capitaine, captain. Chapeau, hat. Chien, dog. Chose, thing. Coeur, heart. Colonel, colonel. Cousin, cousin. Cousine, cousin. Creation, creation. Delwrance, deliverance. Devoir, duty. Dimanche, Sunday. Eclair, lightning:. Education, education. Eglise, church. Fermier, farmer. Fortune, fortune. Fruit, fruit. Grand-pere, grandfather. Herbe, herb. Jbuissance, delight, enjoy- ment. Jour, day. Marchand, merchant. Matin, morning. Mois, month. Mont, mountain. Mot, word. JVom, name. Oiseau, bird. Orphelin, orphan. Orpheline, orphan. Ouvrage, work. Parole, word. Petit-fils, grandson. Plante, plant. Poisson, fish. Promenade, walk. 28 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 14. Ttosee, dew. Temps, time. Route, road. The, head. Semaine, week. Vie, life. Soleil, sun. Village, village. Coup, blow. Volume, volume. EXERCISE IV. — NOUNS. 1. To an orphan. 2. Of the head. 3. To the work. 4. To the works. 5. Of the names. 6. Of the captain. 7. To the horse. 8. (Some) horses. 9. The birds. 10. To the dew. 11. To a church. 12. To the church. 13. Of the farmer. 14. A year. 15. A year. 16. The time. 17. The tree. 18. The plant. 19. Of the plant. 20. A mountain. 21. A week. 22. Some farmers. 23. Some fruit. 24. To the bank. 25. A morning. 26. To a village. 27. Of the volumes. 28. To some volumes. 29. The duties. 30. Some hats. 31. To some hats. 32. A road. 33. The light- nings. 34. Of the heart. 35. To the heart. 36. To the villages. 37. The perfume. 38. To the thing. 39. Of the thing. 40. To the things. 41. To some things. 42. Some things. 43. Of (some) things. 44. The animals. 45. Some animals. 46. The cousins (f.). 47. The cousins (m.). 48. The schools. 49. A Sunday. 50. Of the Sunday. 51. The word. 52. The road. 53. The sun. 54. The suns. 55. Of the cane. 56. Of the leaf. 57. Of the herb. 58. Of the dew. 59. Of the bird. 60. Of the day. 61. An education. 62. Of a walk. EXERCISE V. — NOUNS. 1. Of a scorpion. 2. To a song. 3. A key. 4. The spoon. 5. Of the heat. 6. Some heat. 7. Of (some) heat. 8. Of a large flower. 9. Of the voice. 10. Of the pie. 11. The committee. 12. To the virtue. 13. To the virtues. 14, Of the summer. 15. Some wax. 16. Of the wax. 17. To an epistle. 18. Of a grammar. 19. To a tower. 20. The death. 21. The most part. 22. A pulpit. 23. The flesh. 24. Some £§ H, 15. ETYMOLOGY. — THE ADJECTIVE. 29 flesh. 25. An oyster. 26. Of a history. 27. To a farmer. 28. A tour. 29. Of a bill. 30. A page. 31. The sons. 32. The crosses. 33. The skins. 34. Some cabbages. 35. Of (some) pebbles. 36. The owls. 37. Of a pear. 38. Some labors. 39. Of the labors. 40. Of (some) labors. 41. To the jackals. 42. The ancestors. 43. The grandfathers. 44. Of the rainbows. 45. The passports. 46. The rainbow. 47. A rainbow. 48. A passport. 49. A standard. 50. The sleeve. 51. Of the clock. 52. Of the pendulum. 53. The stove. 54. Of the sail. 55. A mouse. 56. The sun. 57. Of a vase. 58. To the post-office. 59. Some cattle. 60. A smile. THE ADJECTIVE. GENDER. § 1*5. Adjectives ending in e (mute) are unchanged in the feminine ; others add e (mute) . Ex. Un jeune liomme, a young man. Une jeune femme, a young woman. Un enfant aime, a beloved child. Unefille aimee, a beloved daughter. Exc. 1. Adjectives ending in el, eil, en, et, on, and s, double the last letter ; those ending in f, change f to v, and those in x change x to s, before adding e (mute). Mas. Fem. Ex. quel, quelle, what. pareil, pareille, like. ancien, ancienne, ancient. muet, muette, mute. bon, bonne, good. gras, grasse, fat. neuf, neuve, new. heureux, heureuse, happy. Exc. 2. These five adjectives have two forms for the mas- culine, singular, and form their feminine as follows : — 30 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 15, 16. Mas. before conso- nant sounds. Mas. before vowel sounds. Fem. beau, bel, belle, handsome. fou, M folle, foolish. mou, mol, molle, soft. nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new. vieax, vieil, or vieux, vieille, old. Exc. 3. The following adjectives form their feminine irregularly : — Mas. Fem. benin, benigne, benign. blanc, blanche, white. doux, douce, sweet. faux, fausse, false. favor i, ' favorite, favorite. frais, fraiche, fresh. franc. franche, free. frangais, franpaise, French. g entil y gentille, genteel. grec, grecque, Greek. jumeau, jumelle, twin. long, longue, long. malin, maligne, malignant. mauvais, mauvaise, bad. nul, nulle, null. picblic, publique, public. sec, seche, dry. sot, sotte, silly. turc, turque, Turkish. § 16, The feminine always, and the masculine gen- e rally, acid s for the plural. Ex. morte, s. f. mortes, p. f. dead. mort, s . m. morts, p. m. dead. Exc. S or x final remains unchanged ; eau adds x, and al becomes aux, for the plural. Ex. frais, s. m. frais, p. m. fresh. doux, s. m. doax, p. m. sweet. beau, s. m. beaux, p. m. handsome. rural, s. m. ruraux, p. m. rural. §§ 16-19. ETYMOLOGY. — THE ADJECTIVE. 81 Note. Participles, when they change for gender and number, change like adjectives, and when used as adjectives may be compared. Ex. aimant, s. m. aimants, p. m. loving. aimante, s. f. aimantes, p. f. loving. COMPARISON. § 17. There are two kinds of comparison, one re- ferring to quality, the other to quantity. § 18. Comparisons of quality are thus expressed : — 1. Equality. Aussi, as (adj.), que, as. Ex. Aussi brave que lui. As brave as he. Note. After negatives use si for aussi. Ex. Pas si brave que lui. Not so brave as he. 2. Superiority. Plus, more (adj.), que, than. Ex. Phis brave que lui. More brave than he. 3. Inferiority. Moins, less (adj.), que, than. Ex. Moins brave que lui. Less brave than he. § 19. Comparisons of quantity are thus expressed : — 1. Equality. Autant de, as much of (substantive), que de, as of. Ex. Autant de vertu que de courage. As much virtue as courage. 2. Superiority. Plus de, more of (substantive), que de t than of. Ex. Plus de vertu que de courage. More virtue than courage. Note. Davantage may be used for plus at the end of sentences, a comparison being not expressed, but implied. Ex. J' en ai peu, mais il en a davantage. I have a little, but he has more. 3. Inferiority. Moins de, less of (substantive), que de, than of. Ex. Moins de vertu que de courage. Less virtue than courage. 32 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 19-21. Note 1. For que de use que alone when the following word does not refer to quantity. Ex. II a plus de courage qxie moi. He has more courage than I. Note 2. Use plus de, moins de, for more than, less than, before a number. Ex. Plus de dix, more than ten. Rem. 1. These three adjectives have irregular compara- tives. (§ 40.) bon, good ; meilleur, better. mauvais, bad ; pire, worse. petit, small ; moindre, less. Ex. II est meilleur que moi. He is better than I. Je suis pire que lid. I am worse than he. II est moindre que moi. He is less than I. Rem. 2. For pire and moindre, the regular comparatives are also used. (§ 40. K.) Ex. Je suis plu i mauvais que lui. (Hare.) I am worse than he. 11 est plus petit que moi. He is smaller than I. § 20. 1. The superlative relative is formed by pre- fixing the definite article to the comparative of superi- ority or inferiority. Ex. Le plus brave, the bravest. Le moindre, the least. Note. The article is omitted when a possessive pronoun precedes the adjective. Ex. Le meilleur livre, the best book. Son meilleur livre, his best book. 2. The superlative absolute is formed by prefixing tres, fort, or Men to the positive. Ex. Tres mauvais, very bad. Fort brave, very brave. Bien aise, very glad. § 31. Proper adjectives in French, unless used sub- stantively, and applied to a person, do not begin with a capital letter ; otherwise, except in je, I, and in the names of the months and the days of the week, use capitals, as in English. §22. ETYMOLOGY. — THE ADJECTIVE. 33 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § SS k 1. The follow ing are the cardinal numbers: — Tin, une, , 1 Cinquante, .... . 50 Deux, . , 2 Cinquante et un, . . . 51 Trois, . . 3 Cinquante-deux, &c, . . 52 Quatre, . 4 Soixante, . 60 Cinq, . . 5 Soixante et un, . . . . 61 j#KG, . . . 6 Soixante-deux, &c, . . 62 Sept, . . 7 Soixante-dix, . . . . 70 i?m£, . . 8 Soixante-onze, . . . . 71 JVeuf, . . 9 Soixante-douze, &c, . . 72 2>ia^ . 10 Quatre-vingts, . . . . 80 £tee, . . 11 Quatre-vingt-un, . . . 81 Douze, . . 12 Quatre-vingt-deux, . 82 Treize, . . 13 Quatre-vingt-dix, . . . 90 Quatorze, . 14 Quatre-vingt-o?ize, . 91 Quinze, . 15 Quatre-vingt-douze, &c , 92 Seize, . . 16 Cent, . . . . . . . 100 JDix-sept, . 17 Cent-un, . 101 Dix-huit, . 18 Cent-deux, &c, . . . . 102 Dix-neuf, . 19 Deux-cents, .... . 200 Vingt, . . . 20 Deux-cent-un, . . . . 201 Vingt et un, 21 Deux-cent-deux, &c, . . 202 Vingt-deux, &c. » 22 Trois-cents, .... . 300 Trente, . . . , 30 Trois-cent-un, . . . . 301 Trente et un, . 31 Trois-cent-deux, &c, . . 302 Trente-deux, &c ■? . 32 Mille, 1,000 Quarante, . . , 40 Deux-mille, .... 2,000 Quarante et un, . 41 Tin million, . . . 1,000,000 Quarante-deux, &c •> 42 Tin billion, . 1,000,000,000 Rem. 1. Vo weh 5 ar e n Dt e lided b ?fore onze and onzikme. Ex. Le onzieme, the eleventh. Rem. 2. Un is the indefinite article as well as a numeral adjective. It takes a plural form in the expressions, — Les uns et les mitres, both. Les uns ou les mitres, either (party). 34 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 22. Ni les wis ni les autres, neither (party). Les uns les autres, one another. (See § 24. 9. B. (l)-(7-) Rem. 3. Vingt and cent, when multiplied by one number and not followed by another, take s for the plural, except when used to indicate a particular epoch. Ex. Quatre-vingts hommes, eighty men. Quatre-vingt deux hommes, eighty-two men. Deux-cents hommes, two hundred men. Deux-cent deux hommes, two hundred and two men. En cinq-cent, in the year five hundred. Rem. 4. Mille is written mil in dates from 1000 to 2000 A.D. Ex. L'an mil huit-cent soixante-six. The year eighteen hundred and sixty-six. Rem. 5. Million and billion add .9 for the plural. Ex. Dix millions, ten millions. 2. The following are the ordinal numbers: — Premier, m. premiere, f. first. C Second, m. seconde, f. second. £ Deuxieme, second, when one of a series. Troisieme, third, &c. Rem. 1. All the ordinals, except premier, first, and second, second, are formed directly from the cardinals, thus : — Change final f to vieme. Ex. neuf, neuvieme, ninth. " e ieme. Ex. mille, millieme, thousandth. Add ieme to a final consonant. Ex. dix, dixieme, tenth. Add uieme to final q. Ex. cinq, cinquieme, fifth. Rem. 2. Unieme is used only in composition. Ex. Vingt et unieme, twenty-first. Rem. 3. In compounds use et before un, except Quatre-vingt-un, eighty-one. Cent-un, one hundred and one. Deux-cent-un, two hundred and one. Trois-cent-un, three hundred and one, &c. §23. ETYMOLOGY. THE ADJECTIVE. 35 § 23. VOCABUL Beau, handsome, fine, beautiful. Bon, simple, good. Brave, worthy. Cher, dear. Grand, great, large. Gros, large, big. Jeune, young. Joli, pretty. Mauvais, bad. Meilleur, better. Petit, small. Vieux, old. Vilain, ugly. Aigre, sour, sharp. JBleu, blue. Boiteux, lame. Creux, hollow. Ditr, hard. Ennuyeux, wearisome. Eternel, eternal. Facile, easy. Farouche, fierce, wild. Fra?igais, French. Grand, tall. Guerrier, warlike. Heureux, happy. Indien, Indian. Ingrat, ungrateful. Jaune, yellow. Leger, light. Mutuel, mutual. JVecessaire, necessary. Noir, black. Odieux, odious. Oiseux, idle. Oisif, unoccupied. Pareil, like. Paresseux, idle. Penible, painful. Rouge, red. Saint, sacred. Sauvage, savage, wild. Semblable, similar. Sourd, deaf. Triste, sad. Unique, only, sole. Utile, useful. Venerable, venerable. Vert, green. Voisin, neighboring. EXERCISE YI. — ADJECTIVES. Note 1. Place the numerals before their nouns. Ex. Neuf hommes, nine men. Note 2. Place the first thirteen adjectives in § 23 before their nouns ; the others after. Ex. Un cher e?ifa?it, a dear child. Un chien noir, a black dog. Note 3. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender and number. Ex. Unefille ingrate, an ungrateful daughter. Lesfils ingrats, the ungrateful sons. 3G FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 23. 1. Three lame men. 2. Some black dogs. 3. A venerable woman. 4. An ugly church. 5. A yellow hat. 6. Of the sad year. 7. An Indian child. 8. A bad life. 9. A mutual enjoyment. 10. A warlike air. 11. The red fruits. 12. A fierce lion. 13. Some great men. 14. Of the great men. 15. The life eternal. 16. (Some) things alike. 17. Of a hard heart. 18. The fine hats. 19. An empty (hollow) head. 20. The unoccupied colonel. 21. The idle colonel. 22. A wearisome morning. 23. The dear cousins (f.). 24. The easy works. 25. A public affair. 26. The French word. 27. The French (ladies). 28. The pretty cousin (f.). 29. Some happy sisters. 30. A similar book. 31. An ungrate- ful daughter. 32. The old cane. 33. Some old animals. 34. A light word. 35. The useful book. 36. A necessary thing. 87. The blue mountains. 38. An odious man. 39. A green house. 40. The neighboring castles. 41. An only son. 42. Of a deaf hostess. 43. The wild horse. 44. The sacred day. 45. The useful words. 46. A painful duty. 47. A white door. EXERCISE VII. — ADJECTIVES. 1. A handsome child (m.). 2. A handsome child (f.). 3. The foolish (mad) cousin. 4. Of an old house. 5. A new book (just out). 6. The soft wax. 7. As light as easy. 8. As dear as the father. 9. Happier than the cousin. 10. Less fierce than the lion. 11. More idle than warlike. 12. Less red than green. 13. As much meat as wine. 14. As much bread as the miller. 15. More books than the farmer. 16. More books than houses. 17. Fewer pens than the merchant. 18. Less wheat than flour. 19. More than five. 20. Less than twenty-one. 21. The most deaf. 22. A very deaf woman. 23. The best miller. 24. A smaller book. 25. A very easy duty. 26. The easiest duty. 27. The eleventh day. 28. The eleven captains. 29. Two hundred men. 30. Two hun- dred and twelve men. 31. Two hundred A. D. 32. Twenty- five billions. 33. Eighteen hundred and twelve A. D. 34. §§ 28, 24. ETYMOLOGY. — THE PRONOUN. 37 The first time. 35. The first dew. 36. The fifth word. 37. The twenty-first year. 38. The second volume. 39. Tho ninth week. 40. Eighty-one books. THE PRONOUN". § £4. Pronouns, in French, may be divided into nine classes : personal, possessive adjective, possessive substantive, demonstrative adjective, demonstrative sub- stantive, absolute demonstrative, relative, interrogative, and indefinite. 1. The personal pronouns may be inflected as fol- lows : — (1.) FIRST PERSON. Singular. Plural. N^om. je, I. nous, we. Gen. de moi, of me. de nous, of us. Dot. a moi, me, to me. a nous, nous, to us. Ace. me, me. nous, us. (2.) SECOND PERSON. Singular. Plural. Norn, tu, thou. vous, you. Gen. de toi, of thee. de vous, of you. Dot. a toi, te, to thee. a vous, vous, to you. Ace. te, thee. vous, you. (3.) (a.) THIRD PERSON, MASCULINE. Singular. Plural. Npm. il, he. ils, they. Gen. de lui, of him. d'eux, of them. Dat. a lui, lui, to him. a eux, leur, to them. Ace. le, him. les, them. (3.) (b.) THIRD PERSON, FEMININE. Singular. Plural. JVbm. elle, she. elles, they. Gen. d'elle, of her. d'elles, of them. 4 38 FEENCH GRAMMAR. §24. Dat. a elle, lui, to her. a elles, leur, to them* Ace, la, her. les, them. (4) REFLECTIVE. Singular. Plural. Gen. de soi, of himself, &c. Dat. a soi, se, to himself &c. se, to themselves. Ace. se, himself &c. se, themselves. Rem. 1. For de £m, cVelle, cVeux, d 'elles, use en before the verb when referring to things previously mentioned. Ex. II parle de lui, he speaks of him. U en parte, he speaks of it. Rem. 2. For lui and fewr, use y before the verb when re- ferring to things previously mentioned. Ex. Je vais a lui, I go to him. iTy vais, I go to it (there). Note 1. The second forms of the dative precede the verb, except in affirmative imperatives, where me and te become moi and toi: so me and te accusative become moi and toi when they follow the verb. Ex. E lui parle, he speaks to him. Parlez-lui, speak to him. B me parle, he speaks to me. Parlez-moi, speak to me. H me voit, he sees me. Voyez-moi, see me. Note 2. Meme, singular, memes, plural, joined with the first dative forms, omitting the preposition, add self selves. Ex. Moi-meme, myself. Elle-m&me, herself. Eux-m£mes, themselves, m. Lui-meme, himself, &c. Note 3. All prepositions are followed by the same forms of pronouns as those which follow a. Ex. Avec eux, with them. Pour moi, for me. Sans lui, without him. Sans elle, without her. §24. ETYMOLOGY. THE PRONOUN. Note 4. Je, me, te, le, la, se, also ce and que, drop their final letter, and take the apostrophe before vowel sounds. Ex. Je I'aime, I love him. ficris, I write. 2. The following are the possessive adjective pro- nouns, which agree in gender with the object possessed, and not with the possessor. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. M. and F. mon, ma, mes, my. ton, ta, tes, thy. son, sa, ses, his, her, its. notre, notre, nos, our. votre, votre, vos, your. leur, leur, leurs, their. Note. Mon, ton, son, are used for ma, ta, sa, before vowel sounds. Ex. Mon amie, f. my friend. Son ecole, f. his school. 3. The following are the possessive substantive pro- nouns, which agree in gender with the object possessed, and not with the possessor : — Plural. Masc. Fcm. les miens, les miennes, mine. les tiens, les tiennes, thine. les siens, les siennes, his,&c. les notres, les notres, ours. les votres, les votres, yours. les leurs, les leurs, their». Singular. Masc. Fem. le mien, la mienne, le tien, la tienne, le sien, la sienne, le notre, la notre, le votre, la votre, le leur, la leur, Note. Inflect le, la, les, as under the definite article. Ex. Du mien, of mine, m. s. object. De la notre, of oars, f. s. object. Des siennes, of his, f. p. object. Des tiens, of thine, m. p. object, &c. 40 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §24. 4. The following are the demonstrative adjective pro* nouns : they are always followed by a noun, and in contrasts, ci, this, and Id, that, follow the noun. Masc. ce, this or that, before consonant sounds. Masc. cet, this or that, before vowel sounds. Fern, cette, this or that. Plural masc. and fern., ces, these or those, Ex. Ce livre, this book. Cet homme, this man. Cette femme-ci, this woman. Ce garqon-la, that boy. Ces Jllles-la, those girls. 5. The following are the demonstrative substantive 'pronouns: they always refer to nouns, and are followed by a relative or de. In contrasts, ci 3 this, and Id, that, are added, in which case they are not followed by a relative or de. Sing, celui, m. celle, f. this or that. JPlur. ceux, m. celles, f. these or those. Ex. Celui de mon plre, that of my father. Ceux-ci oti ceux-la, these or those. Note. Ce, he, she, it, they, is a demonstrative substantive pronoun, Ex. Ce sont eux, it is they. Cest ?noi, it is I. 6. The following are the absolute demonstrative pro- nouns : they refer to things, and not to persons. Ceci, this, cela, that. Note. These have no plural. 7. The relative pronoun may refer to persons, or to things, or to either persons or things. (1.) The relative referring to ywsons may be thus in- flected : — Singular. JVom. qui, who. Gen. de qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle, of whom. §24. ETYMOLOG Y . — 1 HE PJtONOUN. 41 Dat. Ace. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. a qui, auquel, a laquelle, to whom. que, whom. Plural. qui, who. de qui, dont, desquels, desquelles, ofichom. a qui, auxquels, auxquelles, to whom. que, whom. Ex. Celui de qui vous parlez, he of whom you speak. Celui quefaime, he whom I love. Celui qui est brave, he who is brave. (2.) The ed: — Nom. relative referring to things may be thus inflect= Singular. qui, which. Gen. Bat. Ace. dont, duquel, de laquelle, auquel, a laquelle, que, of which, to which, which. Nom. Plural. qui, which. Gen. Bat. Ace. dont, desquels, desquelles, auxquels, auxquelles, que, of which, to which, which. Ex. Les choses dont il parle, the things of which he speaks. Les livres que fai, the books which I have. Les livres qui sont ici, the books which are here. (3.) The relative referring to persons inflected : — Singular. or things may be thus Nom. Gen. K Bat. Ace. Masc. lequel, duquel, auquel, lequel, Fern. laquelle, de laquelle, a laquelle, laquelle, Plural. which one. of v^hich one. to which one. which one. Nom. Gen. lesquels, desquels, 4* lesquelles, desquelles, which ones, of which ones. 42 FRENCH GRAMMAR. Dat. auxquels, auxquelles, to which ones. Ace. lesquels, lesquelles, which ones. Ex. L'komme auquel il parle, the man to whom he speaks. Les livres desquels il parle, the books of ichich he speaks. 8. The interrogative pronoun may be used in' direct or indirect * questions, and may refer either to persons or things. (1.) The interrogative referring to persons may be thus inflected : — Singular and Plural. JVbm. qui ? qui est-ce qui ? who f Gen. de qui? of whom? Dat. a qui ? to whom f Ace. qui ? whom f Ex. De qui parlez-vous ? of whom do you speak ? Qui appelez-vous ? whom do you call ? Qui est-ce qui vons aime f who loves you ? (2.) The interrogative referring to things may be thus inflected : — Singular and Plural. JVbm. qu'est-ce qui? que? what? Gen. de quoi? of what? Dat. a quoi ? to what f Ace. que, qu'est-ce que? what? Ex. De quoi parlez-vous ? of what do you speak ? Qu'est-ce qui vous afflige? what vexes you ? Qu' avez-vous ? what have you ? Rem. The following idiom presents an irregular form of the nomina- tive : — Qu'est-ce que e'est ? what is that ? Qu'est-ce que e'est que ga? what is that ? Note 1. Que? accusative becomes quoi when it follows the verb. Ex. Je ne sais quoi, I do not know lohat. * Indirect questions, as here used, are not " questions which cannot be answered by yes or no," but questions stated in an indirect form; that is, in subordinate clauses. Ex. Direct. Qui demeure ici 1 ivJio dwells here ? Indirect. Je ne sais qui demeure ici, I do not know icho dwells here. § 24. ETYMOLOGY. — THE PRONOUN. 43 Note 2. Quoi ! what! is used in exclamations. Ex. Quoi! icrivez-vous encore? What I are you still writing ? Note 3. Leqael? m. laquelle? f. which one? referring to persons or things, is inflected as under relatives. Ex. Lequel pr6f6rez-vous ? which do you prefer ? De laquelle parlez-vous ? of which one (f.) do you speak ? Desquels parlez-vous ? of which ones (in.) do you speak? Note 4. "When a noun follows, quel, quels, quelle, quelles, &c, are used instead of lequel, lesquels, laquelle, lesquelles, &c. Ex. Quel livre priferez-vous ? which book do you prefer ? De quelle femme parlez-vous ? of xchich woman do you speak? De quels livres parlez-vous f of which books do you speak ? Note 5. The English compound relative is always writ- ten separately in French, thus : — JVbm. Ce qui, what, that which. Ace. Ce que, " " Ex. II fait ce qui est juste, he does what is just. Jaime ce que vous aimez, I love what you love. (a.) For ce use celui, celle, ceux, celles, referring to an antecedent noun. Ex. Celui qui croit cela, he who believes that. Celui quej'aime, he whom I love. 9. A. The indefinite pronouns which are always used without a substantive are the following : — (1.) Autrui, other people, others. (2.) Chacun, every one, each. (3.) On, one, somebody, people, they. (4.) Per sonne, no one, nobody. (5.) Quelquhm, some one, somebody. ra \ 5 Quiconque, whoever, whichever. ^ '' \ Rien, anything, nothing. (1.) Autrui may be thus inflected : — Gen. d'autrui, of others. Dat. a autrui, to others. Note. Autrui is used only of persons. Ex. II depend d'autrui, he depends on other$. 44 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 24. (2.) Ghacun may be thus inflected : — Masculine. Feminine. Nora, chacun, chacune, each one. Gen. de chacun, de chacune, of each one. Dat. a chacun, a chacune, to each one. Ace. chacun, chacune, each one. Note. Chacun has no plural, and changes for gender only when fol- lowed by the genitive. Ex. Chacun a ses defauts, every one has his faults. Chacune de ces midailles, each of these medals. (3.) On, the indefinite personal pronoun, is used only in the nominative, with the verb in the singular. Ex. On dit, they say, people say, it is said. Note. Use Von for on after a vowel sound, unless an I sound follows. Ex. Si Ton me croit, if I am believed. (4.) Personae, when an indefinite pronoun, is always in the singular, masculine. Ex. Personne ne le fait, no one does it. (5.) QuelqySun may be thus inflected : — Singular. Mas. Fem. Nom. quelqu'un, quelqu'une, some one. Gen, de quelqu'un, de quelqu'une, of some one, Dat. a quelqu'un, a quelqu'une, to some one. Ace. quelqu'un, quelqu'une, some one. Plural. Nom. quelques uns, quelques unes, some persons. Gen. de quelques uns, de quelques unes, of some persons. Dat. a quelques uns, a quelques unes, to some persons. Ace. quelques uns, quelques unes, some persons. Note 1 . Quelqu'un refers to persons ; quelque chose is used for things. Ex. Tax vu quelqu'un, I saw some one. J'ai vu quelque chose, I saw something. Note 2. E 'or quelqu'un and quelque chose use ne — personne and we — rien in negative sentences. Ex. Je n'ai vu personne, I saw no one. Je n'ai rien vu, I saw nothing. Autrui becomes Chacun a On u Quelqu'un a Mien u § 24. ETYMOLOGY. — THE PRONOUN. 45 Note 3. Quelqu'un changes for gender only when followed by the genitive. Ex. Quelqu'une de ces dames, some one of these ladies. (6.) Quiconque, whoever, and rien, nothing, do not change for gender or number. Ex. Quiconque nous flatte nous trahit, whoever flatters us betrays us. II ne dit rien, he says nothing. Rem. When a substantive follows, the foregoing pronouns are changed thus : — Sing. Plu. autre, autres. chaque. quelque, quelques. quelque, quelques. mil, m. nulle, f. Ex. Une autre chose, another thing. Chaque matelot, each sailor. Quelques difficult6s, some difficulties. De nulle f aeon, by no means. Nulle part, nowhere. Note. Autres may be added to nous and vous for emphasis or contrast. Ex. Nous autres, we. Vous autres, you. Note 2. Nul takes a plural form with nouns which want the singular. Ex. Nulsfrais, no expense. Nulles funir allies, no funeral. 9. B. The following indefinites may be used with or without a substantive : — (1.) Aucun, no, not any. (2.) I?un et Vautre, both. (3.) Eun ou Vautre, either. (4.) JVi Tun ni V autre, neither. (5.) Phcsieurs, several. (6.) Tout, all, every. (7.) ISun V autre, one and another, one another. 46 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 24 (1.) Aucun may be thus inflected: — Mas. Fern. Nom. aucun, aucune, no, not any. Gen. d'aucun, d'aucune, of no, of none. Dat. a aucun, a aucune, to no, to none. Ace. aucun, aucune, no, not any. Note. Aucun takes a plural form with nouns which want the singular. Ex. Aucuns frais, not any expense. Aucunes fun&r allies, not any funeral. (2.) Eun et V autre may be thus inflected : — Singular. Mas. Fem. Nom. l'un et l'autre, l'une et l'autre, both. Gen. de l'un et de l'autre, de Puue et de l'autre, of both. Dat. a l'un et a l'autre, a l'une et a l'autre, to both. Ace. l'un et l'autre, l'une et l'autre, both. Plural. Nom. les uns et les autres, les unes et les autres, both. Gen. des uns et des autres, des unes et des autres, of both. Dat. aux uns et aux autres, aux unes et aux autres, to both. Ace. les uns et les autres, les unes et les autres, both. Note. L'un et l'autre requires a plural verb. Ex. L'un et l'autre sont bons, both are good. (3.) Hun ou Vautre may be inflected like Vun et Vautre, inserting ou for et. Note. L'un ou l'autre takes a singular, and les uns ou les autres a plural verb. Ex. L'un ou Vautre le fera, either will do it. Les uns ou les autres le feront, either (party) will do it. (4.) Ni Vun ni Vautre may be inflected like Vun et Vautre, placing ni first, and inserting ni for et. Note. For the number of the verb, see § 98. 5. Ex. Ni Vun ni l'autre * ne lisent, neither reads. Ni Vun ni l'autre * n'est mon p&re, neither is my father. * For this use of ne, without pas, see § 125. 1. §24. ETYMOLOGY. THE PRONOUN. 47 (5.) Plusieurs is always plural, and does not change for gender. Ex. Plusieurs le pensent, many think so. (6.) Tout may be thus inflected : — Singular. Mas. Fern. JVbm. tout, toute, all, every. Gen. de tout, de toute, of all, of every. Dat. a tout, a toute, to all, to every. Ace. tout, toute, Plural. all, every. JSTom. tous, toutes, all, every. Gen. de tous, de toutes, of all, of every. Dat. a tous, a toutes, to all, to every. Ace. tous, toutes, all, every. Ex. lis ne sont pas tous braves, they are not all brave. Note. Tout, every one, everything, used indefinitely, is indeclinable. Ex. Son ginie embrassait tout, his genius embraced everything. (7.) The indefinite Tun Vautre, one and another, les uns les autres, some and others, when used reciprocally,, may be thus inflected : — Gen. Dat. Ace. Gen. Dat. Ace. Mas. l'un de l'autre, l'un a l'autre, Fun l'autre, Singular. Fem. l'une de l'autre, l'une a l'autre, l'une l'autre, Plural. of one another, to one another, one another. les uns des autres, les unesdes autres, of one another. les uns aux autres, les unesaux autres, to one another. les uns les autres, les unes les autres, one another. Note. The singular of the reciprocal pronoun refers to two, the plu- ral to more than two. The verbis always plural. Ex. lis sontjaloux les uns des autres, they are jealous of one another. lis se parlent les tins aux autres, they speak to one another. lis s' aiment I' tin Vautre, they love one another. 48 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 25. § 25. EXERCISE VIII. — PRONOUNS. Note 1. Pronouns, like adjectives, agree with their nouns in gendei and number ; and adjective pronouns precede their nouns. Ex. Mo?i pere, my father. Ma sosur, "my sister. Sesfrtres, his brothers. Lews litres, their books. Cette plume, this pen. Ces crayons-la, those pencils. 1. Of them (f.). 2. To them (m.). 3. Themselves (f.). 4. Of me. 5. Of him. 6. Himself. 7. Yourselves. 8. To her. 9. To him. 10. Of her. 11. To me. 12. To us. 13. Of them (m.). 14. To thee. 15. To one. 16. Of one. 17. Of it. 18. Her- stif. 19. My young son. 20. Thy worthy brother. 21. My ao;ed aunt. 22. Our young; brothers. 23. Our younff brother. 24. Of their dear father. 25. To their happy mother. 26. My only son. 27. His child. 28. A harder table than mine. 29. Easier books. 30. A happier fortune than his. 31. Men more warlike than ours. 32. Words less sad than theirs. 33. A book as good as mine. 34. A child as ungrateful as his. 35. A child as ungrateful as hers. 36. Of your father and (of)* mine. 37. To their brother and (to)* ours. 38 Of his house and (of)* mine. 39. Of his brothers and (of)* yours. 40. Of my sister and (of) * thine. EXERCISE IX. — PRONOUNS. 1. This book and that pen. 2. This lame man. 3. These and those children. 4. This black dog. 5. This table. 6. My hat and my brother's (that of my brother). 7. Their children and the neighbor's. 8. Her pen and her brother's. 9. This and that. 10. Of which. 11. To which. 12. Of whom. 13. Of which (pi.). 14. Whom. 15. Of whom. 16. To which (pi.). 17. To whom. 18. Which ones. 19. Who? 20. To whom? 21. To what? 22. Of what? 23. Of whom? 24. Whom? * Repeat the preposition in French. (See § 120 and Rem.) §§ 25, 26. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 49 25. What! 26. Of which books? 27. To which houses? 28. What pen ? 29. Of what hero ? 30. He who. 31. Those whom (m.). 32. Those who (£). 33. She whom. 34. Thai which. 35. That which (ace). 36. Of some one. 37. Of some books. 38. To some (f.). 39. Some and others (f.). 40. Of several houses. 41. Of others. 42. To one another (m.). 43. Of each man. 44. Of another man. 45. To one another (pi.). 46. Of one another (pi. f.). 47. One another (pi. m.). 48. To all (pi. f.). 49. Of all (pi. m.). 50. Of neither (s. m.). 51. Of either (s. m.). 52. To either (pi. m.). 53. To both (s. f.). 54. Of several men. 55. To some persons (in.). 56. Of some one (f.). THE VERB. § 26. French verbs may be divided, with reference to their meaning, into active and neuter, which are dis- tinguished as in Latin or English. Ex. Active. Je chante une chanson, I sing a song. Neuter. 11 parte a sonpere, he speaks to his father. 1. Active verbs may take an active, passive, or reflective form. Ex. Active. Nous flattons nos amis, we flatter our friends. Passive. Nous sommes flattis, we are flattered. Reflective. Nous nous flattons, we flatter ourselves. 2. Unipersonal or impersonal verbs, as in Latin or English, are used only in the third person singular. Ex. Ilfaut, it is necessary. Ilpleut, it rains. 3. Verbs may be divided, with reference to their form, into four conjugations, distinguished by the terminations of the 'present infinitive, thus : — In the 1st conjugation it ends in er. " 2d " " ir. " 3d " " evoir, oir (irreg.). " 4th " " re. 5 50 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 27, 28. § S7. 1. There are six modes; the indicative, the conditional, the subjunctive, the imperative, the ^i/£>i- zfo've, and the participle. (a.) The conditional mode indicates a condition or supposi- tion, and is used in the conclusion or apodosis of a conditionai sentence. Ex. Sifavais un couteau,je le couperais. If I had a knife, I would cut it. (b.) The definitions of the other modes are the same as in Latin or English. 2. There are eight tenses, for the names and meanings of which see the paradigms and § 121, I.-III. § 28. The usual auxiliary verbs, which are used in the conjugation of other verbs, are avoir, to have, and etre, to be. Ex. fai 6te aimd, I have been, loved. Elle a 6t6 aimie, she has been loved. lis ont tie aimes, they have been loved. Note. For the change of the participle in the compound forms of verbs, to agree in gender or number with the subject or the object, see § 99, 1-5. 1. Active verbs, verbs always unipersonal, and most neuter verbs take the auxiliary avoir. Ex. Je l'aivu,l have seen him. II afallu, it was necessary. II a par le, he has spoken. 2. Passive verbs and reflective verbs take the auxiliary etre. Ex. Nous sommes aimes, we are loved. II s'estjlatte, he has flattered himself. 3. A few neuter verbs take avoir when denoting an action, and etre when denoting a state ; as, — Accourir, to run towards. Descendre, to go down. Cesser, to cease. Disparaitre, to disappear. Croitre, to grow. §38. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 51 Grandir, to grow large. Mo?iter, to ascend. Partir, to depart. Passer, to pass. Tomber, to fall. Pester, to remain. Sortir, to go out. Vieillir, to grow old. 4. The following neuter verbs expressing action take etre as an auxiliary : — Alter, to go. Arriver, to arrive. Peceder, to die. Pevenir, to become. Mourir, to die. Naitre, to be born. Parvenir, to succeed. Pevenir, to return. PJntrer, to enter. Venir, to come. 5. The auxiliary verbs are inflected as follows : — J'ai, I have. Tu as, thou hast. II a, he has. Nous avons, we have. Yous avez, yow Aave. lis ont, they have. PAST PROGRESSIVE. J'avais, Phad. Tu avais, thou hadst. II avait, Ae had. (1.) Avoir, #o have. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT PERFECT.* J'ai eu, Phave had. Tu as eu, thou hast had. II a eu, he has had. Nous avons eu, we have had. Yous avez eu, you have had. lis ont eu, they have had. past PERFECTf (Principal). J'avais eu, Phad had. Tu avais eu, thou hadst had. 11 avait eu, he had had. * This name is adopted instead of "past indefinite,'''' because the compound tenses, in French as in English, regularly denote completed action; that is, action completed either in the present, the past, or the future. The frequent use of this tense in an aoristic sense, to express an indefinite past action, is a peculiarity of the French language which can be most successfully taught if treated as irregular and exceptional. t This tense is regularly used in principal or independent sentences. Ex. N~ott* avions dine lorsqu'il arriva, we had dined when he arrived. 52 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §28> Nous avion s, we had. Vous aviez, you had. lis avaient, they had. PAST INDEFINITE.* J'eus, I had. Tu eus, thou hadst. II eut, he had. Nous eiim.es, ice had. Yous elites, you had. lis eurent, they had. FUTURE. J'aurai, I shall have. Tu auras, thou wilt have. tl aura, he will have. K"ous aurons, we shall have. Yous aurez, you will have. [Is auront, they will have. Nous avions eu, we had had. Vous aviez eu, you had had. lis avaient eu, they had had. past perfect,! (subordinate). J'eus eu, I had had. Tu eus eu, thou hadst had. II eut eu, he had had. Nous eumes eu, ice had had. Yous elites eu, you had had. lis eurent eu, they had had. FUTURE PERFECT. J'aurai eu, I shall have had. Tu auras eu, thou wilt have had. 11 aura eu, he vnll have had. Nous aurons eu, we shall have had. Yous aurez eu, you will have had. lis auront eu, they will have had. CONDITIONAL MODE. J'aurais, Tu aurais, II aurait, Nous aurions, Yous auriez, lis auraient, I should have. thou wouldst have. he would have. we should have. you would have. they would have. * This tense has usually been called the "past definite,'''' and sometimes the "preterite." It is really the aorist tense, for, in itself, it does not point out an action as having occurred at a definite point of time in the past. When, in connec- tion with this tense, a definite time is pointed out, it is done by some adverb or other word or words in the sentence, and not by the verbal form, which simply indicates momentary action, in a period of time wholly past. t This tense is regularly used in subordinate or dependent sentences. Ex. Quand Us euront aeheve de jouer, Us se mirent a chanter, when they had done playing, they began singing. 28 ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 53 PAST. J'aurais eu, I should have had, Tu aurais eu, thou ivouldst have had. II aurait eu, he would have had. Nous aurions eu, we should have had. Vous auriez eu, you woidd have had. lis auraient eu, they would have had. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. Que j'aie, that I may have. Que tu ales, that thou mayst have. Qu'il ait, that he may have. Que nous ayons, that we may have. Que vous ayez, that you may have. Qu'ils aient, that they may have. PAST. Que j'eusse, that I might have. Que tu eusses, that thou mightst have. Qu'il eut, that he might have. Que nous eussions, that we might have. Que vous eussiez, that you might have. Qu'ils eussent, that they might have. PRESENT PERFECT. Que j'aie eu, that I may have had. Que tu aies eu, that thou mayst have had. Qu'il ait eu, that he may have had. Que nous ayons eu, that we may have had. Que vous ayez eu, that you may have had. Qu'ils aient eu, that they may have had. PAST PERFECT. Que j'eusse eu, that I might have had. Que tu eusses eu, that thou mightst have had. Qu'il eut eu, that he might have had. Que nous eussions eu, that toe might have had. Que vous eussiez eu, that you might have had. Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might have had. 5* 54 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §28. IMPERATIVE MODE. Aie, have. Ayons, let us have. Ayez, have. Note. The third persons of the present subjunctive are used for the third persons of the imperative. INFINITIVE MODE. Present. Avoir, to have. Past. Avoir eu, to have had. PARTICIPLES. Present. Ay ant, having. Past. Eu, had. Compound. Ayant eu, having had. Rem. For many common idioms with avoir, see § 139. (2.) £tre, to be. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. PRESENT PERFECT. Je suis, I am. J'ai ete, I have been. Tu es, thou art. Tu as ete, thou hast been. II est, he is. II a ete, he has been. Nous somrues, we are. Nous avons ete, we-have been. Vous etes, you are. Vous avez ete, you have been. lis sont, they are. lis ont ete, they have been. PAST PROGRESSIVE. J'etais, Tu etais, II etait, Nous etions, Vous etiez, lis etaient, past perfect (principal). I was. J'avais ete, I had been. thou wast. Tu avais ete, thou hadst been. he was. II avait ete, he had been. we were. Nous avions ete, we had been. you were. Vous aviez ete, you had been. they were. lis avaieut ete, they had been. §28. ETYMOLOGY. tIie VERB. bb PAST INDEFINITE Je fus, Tu fus, II fut, Nous fumes, Vous futes, lis furent, I was. thou wast. he was. we were. you were. they were. past perfect (subordinate). J'eus ete, I had been. Tu eus ete, thou hadst been. II eut ete, he had been. Nous eumes ete, we had been. Vous eutes ete, you had been. lis eurent ete, they had been. FUTURE. future perfect. Je serai, I shall be. J'aurai ete, I shall have been. Tu seras, thou wilt be. Tu auras ete, thou wilt have been. II sera, he will be. II aura ete, he will have been. Nous serons, we shall be. Nous aurons ete, we shall have been, Vous serez, you will be. Vous aurez ete, you will have been. lis seront, they will be. lis auront ete, they will have been. CONDITIONAL MODE. present. Je serais, Tu serais, II serait, Nous serions, Vous seriez, lis seraient, I should be. thou wouldst be. he would be. we should be. you would be. they would be. J'aurais ete, Tu aurais ete, II aurait ete, Nous aurions ete, Vous auriez ete, lis auraient ete, I should have been. thou wouldst have been. he would have been. we should have been. you would have been. they would have been. 56 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 28. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. Que je sois, that I may be< Que tu sois, that thou mayst be. Qu'il soit, that he may be. Que nous soyons, that ice may be. Que vous soyez, that you may be. Qu'ils soient, that they may be. PAST. Que je fusse, that I might be. Que tu fusses, that thou mightst be. Qu'il fut, that he might be. Que nous fussions, that ice might be. Que vous fussiez, that you might be. Qu'ils fussent, that they might be. PRESENT PERFECT. Que j'aie ete, that I may have been. Que tu aies ete, that thou mayst have been. Qu'il ait ete, that he may have been. Que nous ayons ete, that vie may have been. Que vous ayez ete, that you may have been. Qu'ils aient ete, that they may have been. PAST PERFECT. Que j'eusse ete, that I might have been. Que tu eusses ete, that thou mightst have been. Qu'il eut ete, that he might have been. Que nous eussions ete, that ice might have been. Que vous eussiez ete, that you might have been. Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might have been. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sois, be. Soyons, let us be. Soyez, be. § 28. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 57 INFINITIVE MODE. Present. Etre, to be. Past. Avoir ete, to have been. PARTICIPLES. Present. fitant, being. Past. Ete, been. Compound. Ay ant ete, having been. (3.) The following is a synopsis of the forms of the imper- sonal y avoir, there to be. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. II y a, there is, there are. Past Prog. II y avait, there was, there were. Past Indef. II y ent, there icas, there were. Future. II y aura, there will be. CONDITIONAL MODE. Present. Ily aurait, there would be. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. PAST. Qu'il y ait, that there may be. Qu'il y eut, that there might be. IMPERATIVE MODE. Qu'il y ait (subjunctive), let there be. INFINITIVE MODE. Present. Y avoir, there to be. PARTICIPLE. Present. Y ayant, there being. Rem. Add eu to the above forms to form the compound tenses. Ex. II y a eu, there has been. II y avait eu, there had been, &c. 58 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §20. § 29. The following is a comparative view of the 1. FIRST CONJUGATION. 2. SECOND CONJUGATION. Chanter, to sing. Je chante, Tu ch antes, H chante, Nous chantons, Vous chantez, lis chantent. Present, Finir, to finish. INDICATIVE Je finis, Tu finis, II finit, Nous finissons, Yous finissez, lis finissent. Past Progressive, Je chantais, Tu chantais, II chantait, Nous chantions, Yous chantiez, lis chantaient. Je chantai, Tu chantas, II ehanta, Nous chantames, Yous chantates, lis chanterent. Je chanterai, Tu chanteras, II chantera, Nous chanterons, Yous chanterez, lis chanteront. Je finissais, Tu finissais, II fiuissait, Nous finissions, Yous finissiez, lis finissaient. Past Indefinite, Je finis, Tu finis, II finit, Nous finimes, Yous finites, lis finirent. Future, Je finirai, Tu finiras, II finira, Nous finirons, Yous fiuirez, lis finiront. § 29. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 59 inflection of Verbs of the Four Regular Conjugations : 3. THIRD CONJUGATION. 4. FOURTH CONJUGATION. Becevoir, to receive. MODE. Je recois, Tu recois, II recoit, Nous recevons, Yous recevez, lis recoivent. Vendre, to sell. Je recevais, Tu recevais, II recevait, Nous recevions, Yous receviez, lis recevaient. Je recus, Tu rec.us, 11 recut, Nous recumes, Yous refutes, lis recurent. Je recevrai, Tu recevras, II recevra, Nous recevrons, Yous recevrez, lis recevront. I sing, &c. Je vends, Tu vends, II vend, Nous vendons, Yous vendez, lis vendent. I was singing, &c. Je vendais, Tu vendais, II vendait, Nous vendions, Yous vendiez, lis vendaient. . I. sang, &c. Je vendis, Tu vendis, II vendit, Nous vendimes, Vous vendites, lis vendirent. I shall sing, &c. Je vendrai, Tu vendras, II vendra, Nous vendrons, Yous vendrez, lis vendront. 60 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §29. Present Perfect, J'ai chante, Tu as chante, II a chante, Nous avons chante, Yous avez chante, lis ont chante. J'ai fini, Tu as fini, II a fini, Nous avons fini, Vous avez fini, lis ont fini. Past Perfect (principal), J'avais chante, Tu avais chante, II avait chante, Nous avions chante, Vous aviez chante, lis avaient chante. J'avais fini, Tu avais fini, 11 avait fini, Nous avions fini, Vous aviez fini, lis avaient fini. Past Perfect (subordinate), J'eus chante, Tu eus chante, II eut chante, Nous eumes chante, Vous elites chante, lis eurent chante. J'eus fini, Tu eus fini, H eut fini, Nous eumes fini, Vous eutes fini, lis eurent fini. Futurb Perfect, J'aurai chante, Tu auras chante, 11 aura chante, Nous aurons chants, Vous aurez chante, Us auront chante. J'aurai fini, Tu auras fini, II aura fini, Nous aurons fini, Vous aurez fini, lis auront fini. §20. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 61 I" have sung, or, / sang, &c. J'ai regu, Tu as regu, II a re£u, Nous avons regu, Vous avez regu," lis ont regu. J'ai vendu, Tu as vendu, II a vendu, Nous avons vendu, Vous avez vendu, lis ont vendu. J'avais regu, Tu avais regu, II avait regu, Nous avions regu, Vous aviez regu, lis avaient regu. 1 had sung, &c. J'avais vendu, Tu avais vendu, II avait vendu, Nous avions vendu, Vous aviez vendu, lis avaient vendu. J'eus regu, Tu eus regu, II eut regu, Nous eumes regu, Vous elites regu, lis eurent regu. I had sung, &c. J'eus vendu, Tu eus vendu, Ii eut vendu, Nous eumes vendu, Vous eutes vendu, lis eurent vendu. I shall have sung, &c. J'aurai re£u, Tu auras regu, II aura regu, Nous aurons regu, Vous aurez regu, lis auront regu. J'aurai vendu, Tu auras vendu, II aura vendu, Nous aurons vendu, Vous aurez vendu, Us auront vendu. 62 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 29. Je shanterais, Tu chanterais, II chanterait, Nous chanterions, Vous chanteriez, lis chanteraient. Present, CONDITIONAL Je finirais, Tu finirais, II finirait, Nous'finirions, Vous finiriez, lis finiraient. Past, J'aurais chante, Tu aurais chante, II aurait chante, Nous aurions chante, Vous auriez chante, lis auraient chante. J'aurais fini, Tu aurais fini, II aurait fini, Nous aurions fini, Yous auriez fini, lis auraient fini. SUBJUNCTIVE Present, Que je chante, Que tu chantes, Qu'il chante, Que nous chantions, Que vous chantiez, Qu'ils chantent. Que je chantasse, Que tu chantasses, Qu'il chantat, Que nous chantassions, Que vous chantassiez, Qu'ils chantassent. Past, Que je finisse, Que tu finisses, Qu'il finisse, Que nous finissions, Que vous finissiez, Qu'ils finissent. Que je finisse, Que tu finisses, Qu'il finit, Que nous finissions, Que vous finissiez, Qu'ils finissent. §29. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 63 MODE. Je recevrais, Tu recevrais, II recevrait, Nous recevrions, Vous recevriez, lis recevraient. I should sing, &c. Je vendrais, Tu vendrais, II vendrait, Nous vendrions, Vous vendriez, lis vendraient. I should have sung, &c. J'aurais recu, Tu aurais regu, II aurait recu, Nous aurions rec,u, Vous auriez rec,u, lis auraient recu. J'aurais vendu, Tu aurais vendu, II aurait vendu, Nous aurions vendu, Vous auriez vendu, lis auraient vendu. MODE. that I may sing, &c. Que je receive, Que je vende, Que tu receives, Que tu vendes, Qu'il recoive, Qu'il vende, Que nous recevions, Que nous vendions, Que vous receviez, Que vous vendiez, Qu'ils re^oivent. Qu'ils vendent. that I might sing, &c. Que je re§usse, Que je vendisse, Que tu recusses, Que tu vendisses, Qu'il rectit, Qu'il vendit, Que nous recussions, Que nous vendissions, Que vous recussiez, Que vous vendissiez, Qu'ils recussent. Qu'ils vendissent. 64 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 29. Pkesent Perfect, Que j'aie chante, Que tu aies chante, Qu'il ait chante, Que nous ayons chante, Que vous ayez chante, Qu'ils aient chante. Que j'aie fini, Que tu aies fini, Qu'il ait fini, Que nous ayons fini, Que vous ayez fini, Qu'ils aient fini. Que j'eusse chant6, Que tu eusses chante, Qu'il eut chante, Que nous eussions chante 1 , Que vous eussiez chante, Qu'ils eussent chante. Past Perfect, Que j'eusse fini, Que tu eusses fini, Qu'il eut fini, Que nous eussions fini, Que vous eussiez fini, Qu'ils eussent fini. Chante, sing ; Chantons, let us sing ; Chantez, si7 imperative Finis, finish / Finissons, let us finish / Finissez, finish. I IS - in in i T i "v E Pees. Chanter, to sing ; Finir, to finish ; Past. Avoir chante, to have Avoir fini, to have finished* sung. parti- Pees. Chantant, singing ; Finissant, finishing ; Past. Chante, sung / Fini, finished / Comp. Ayant chante, having Ayant fini, having finished, sung. §29. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 65 that I may have sung, &c. Que j'aie recu, Que tu aies recu, Qu'il ait recu, Que nous ayons recu, Que vous ayez recu, Qu'ils aient rec,u. Que j'aie vendu, Que tu aies vendu, Qu'il ait vendu, Que nous ayons vendu, Que vous ayez vendu, Qu'ils aient vendu. Que j'eusse recu, Que tu eusses recu, Qu'il eut recu, Que nous eussions recu, Que vous eussiez recu, Qu'ils eussent recu. that I might have sung, &c. Que j'eusse vendu, Que tu eusses vendu, Qu'il eut vendu, Que nous eussions vendu, Que vous eussiez vendu, Qu'ils eussent vendu. MODE. Recois, receive; Recevons, let us receive ; Recevez, receive. Vends, sell; Yendons, let us sell ; Vendez, sell. MIOIDE Recevoir, to receive; Yendre, to sell; Avoir recu, to have received. Avoir vendu, to have sold. CIPLES. Recevant, receiving ; Yen d ant, selling. Recu, received ; Yendu, sold. Ayant recu, having received. Ayant vendu, having sold. 6* 66 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 30, 31. § SO. Passive verbs are conjugated by adding the past participle to tlie tenses of the auxiliary litre, thus:— (§ 99. 3.)* PRESENT. Je suis aime, I am loved, Tu es aime, thou art loved. II est aime, he is loved. Nous sommes aimes, we are loved. Vous etes aimes, you are loved. lis sont aimes, they are loved, &c, &c. PRESENT PERFECT, J'ai ete aime, I have been loved. Tu as ete aime, thou hast been loved. 11 a ete aime, he has been loved. Nous avons ete aimes, we have been loved. Vous avez ete aimes, you have been loved. lis ont ete aimes, they have been loved. &c, &c. § 31. Reflective verbs are conjugated with a subjec- tive and objective pronoun, referring to the same per- son; thus:— (See §§ 83, 99.4.)* PRESENT. Je me flatte, I flatter myself. Tu te flattes, thou flatterest thyself. 11 se flatte, he flatters himself. Nous nous flattons, we flatter ourselves. Vous vous flattez, you flatter yourselves. II se flattent, they flatter themselves. PRESENT PERFECT. Je me suis flatte, J have flattered myself . Tu t'es flatte, thou hast flattered thyself II s'est flatte, he has flattered himself. 31-33. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 67 Nous nous sommes flattes, vie have flattered ourselves. Yous vous etes flattes, you have flattered yourselves. lis se sont flattes, they have flattered themselves. &c, &c. Rem. 1. The imperative of a reflective verb is inflected as follows, the objective pronoun following the verb (§ 83. Exc. 6): — Flatte-toi, flatter thyself. Flattons-nous, let us flatter ourselves. Flattez-vous, flatter yourselves. Rem. 2. The simple form of the past participle of a re- flective verb, being passive, does not take the objective pro' noun. • The following, therefore, are the participles of the reflective verb se flatter: — Present. Se flattant, flattering one's self Past. Flatte, flattered. Compound. S'etant flatte, having flattered one's self § 32. Uhipersonal verbs, as in Latin and English, are used only in the third person singular, the subject il representing no noun previously expressed ; thus : — PRESENT. II faut, it is necessary. &c, &c. PRESENT PERFECT. II a fallu, it was necessary. &c, &c. § 33. The following are examples of the negative , the interrogative, and the negative interrogative forms, for the arrangement of which see the syntax of pro- nouns and adverbs (§§ 80, 125) *: — * For the full inflection of Passive, Reflective, Negative, Interrogative, and Neg- ative Interrogative forms, also of Neuter I'erbs conjugated with Eire, see Sup- plismknt, pp. 2S-.J-290. 68 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 33 - 1. NEGATIVE. PRESENT. Je ne chante pas, I do not sing. Tu ne chantes pas, thou dost not sing. II ne chante pas, he does not sing. Nous ne chantons pas, we do not sing. Yous ne chantez pas, you do not sing. lis ne chantent pas, they do not sing. &c, &c. PRESENT PERFECT. Je n'ai pas chante, I have not sung. Tu n'as pas chante, thou hast not sung. II n'a pas chante, he has not sung. Nous n'avons pas chante, ice have not sung. Vous n'avez pas chante, you have not sung. lis n'ont pas chante, they have not sung. &C, &G. 2. INTERROGATIVE. PRESENT. Est-ce que je chante? do I sing f Chantes-tu ? dost thou sing f Chante-t-il ? does he sing f Chantons-nous ? do we sing? Chantez-vous ? do you sing f Chantent-ils ? do they sing? PRESENT PERFECT. Est-ce que j'ai chante ? have I sung? As-tu chante ? hast thou sung f A-t-il chante ? has he sung f Avons-nous chante? have we sung? Avez-vous chante? have you sungf Ont-ils chante ? have they sung f &c, &c. § 33. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 69 3. NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE. PRESENT. N'est-ce pas que je chante? do I not sing? Ne chantes-tu pas ? dost thou not sing f Ne chante-t-il pas ? does he not sing f Ne chantons-nous pas? do we not sing? Ne chantez-vous pas ? do you 7iot sing f Ne chantent-ils pas ? do they not sing ? &c, &c. PRESENT PERFECT. N'est-ce pas que j'ai chante? have I not sung? N'as-tu pas chante ? hast thou not sung f N'a-t-il pas chante ? has he not sung ? N'avons-nous pas chante ? have we not sung f N'avez-vous pas chante ? have you not sung f N'ont-ils pas chante ? have they not sung f &c, &c. 4. NEGATIVE REFLECTIVE. PRESENT. Je ne me flatte pas, J do not flatter niyself. Tu ne te flattes pas, thou dost not flatter thyself. II ne se flatte pas, he does not flatter himself. Nous ne nous flattons pas, we do not flatter ourselves. Vous ne vous flattez pas, you do not flatter yourselves. lis ne se flattent pas, they do not flatter themselves. PRESENT PERFECT. Je ne me suis pas flatte, I have not flattered myself. Tu ne t'es pas flatte, thou hast not flattered thyself . II ne s'est pas flatte, he has not flattered himself. Nous ne nous sommes pas we have not flattered ourselves. flattes, Vous ne vous etes pas flattes, you have not flattered your- II s ne se sont pas flattes-, they have not flattered then" selves. 70 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §3; Rem. The negative imperative of a reflective verb is inflected as follows, the objective pronoun preceding the verb (§83): — Ne te flatte pas, do not flatter thyself. Ne nous flattons pas, let us not flatter ourselves. Ne vous flattez pas, do not flatter yourselves. 5. INTERROGATIVE REFLECTIVE. Est-ce que je me flatte ? Te flattes-tu ? Se flatte-t-il ? Nous flattons-nous ? Vous flattez-vous ? Se flattent-ils ? do I flatter myself? dost thou flatter thyself f does he flatter himself? do we flatter ourselves ? do you flatter yourselves ? do they flatter themselves ? PRESENT PERFECT. Me suis-je flatte? T'es-tu flatte ? S'est-il flatte ? Nous sommes-nous flattes? Vous etes-vous flattes ? Se sont-ils flattes ? have I flattered myself? hast thou flattered thyself? has he flattered himself ? have we flattered ourselves ? have you flattered yourselves ? have they flattered themselves ? &c, &c. 6. NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE REFLECTIVE. Est-ce que je ne me flatte do I not flatter myself ? pas r Ne te flattes-tu pas ? Ne se flatte-t-il pas? Ne nous flattons-nous pas? Ne vous flattez-vous pas ? Ne se flattent-ils pas ? dost thou not flatter thyself? does he not flatter himself? do we not flatter ourselves ? do you not flatter yourselves? do they not flatter themselves ? &c, &c. C3-34 ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB, 71 PRESENT PERFECT. Ne me suis-je pas flatte? Ne t'es-tu pas flatte ? Ke s'est-il pas flatte ? Xe nous sommes-nous pas flattes ? Ne vous etes-vous pas flat- tes? Ne se sont-ils pas flattes ? have, I not flawed mysvlf? hasi thou not flattered thy- self? has he not flattered himself? have we not flattered our- selves f have you not flattered your- selves ? have they not flattered them. selves f rendre. " tiennent, tc tenir. " viennent, u venir. " veulent, « vouloir. In like manner inflect the compounds, except those of dire, which are regular, except redire. Examples. {Table Z) 1. Je viens, Je veur, Je vais, Je vaincs, Je prends, 2. Tu viens, Tu veux, Tu vas, Tu vaincs, Tu prends, 3. II vien*, II veu£, II va, II vaine, II prend, §36. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 77 1. Nous venons, Nous voulows, Nous allows, Nous vainquows, Nous prenons. 2. Vous venez, Vous voulez, Vous allez, Vous vainquez, Yous prenez. 3. lis vienuent. lis veulent. lis vont. lis vainquerc*. lis prennent. TABLE II. Singular. 1. e. 2. es. 3. e. Plural. 1. oris. 2. es. 3. ent. PRESENT INDICATIVE. Change ant of the pres. part, to ons. Examples. (Table II) 1. Je chante, 2. Tu chantes, 3. II chart te, 1. Nous chantons, 2. Vous chantez, 3. lis chanten*. J'ouvre, Tu ouvres, II ouvre, Nous ouvrorcs, Vous ouvrez, lis ouvren*. J'envoie, Tu envoies, 11 envoie, Nous envoyows, Vous envoyez, Us envois. The following synopsis of the forms of a verb is given as an illustration of the method of using the Table of Irregular Verbs. Tenir, to hold. Tenir, je tiendrai, je tiendrais (§ 34. 1. N. 2). Tenant, je tenais (§ 34. 2), que je tienne (§ 34. 2. N. 2). c j'ai tenu, j'avais tenu, &c, } Tenu ' \ je suis tenu, j'etais tenu, &c. 5 C§ d4, d > Je tiens, tiens, tenons, tenez (§34. 4). Je tins, que je tinsse (§ 34. 5). In the inflection of the present indicative follow § 36, N., and in the inflections of the other forms follow the endings of regular verbs, ob- serving that the first and second persons plural of the irregular subjunc- tives in § 34. 2 N. 2 (except queje fasse and que je puisse, which make que nous fassions, que vous fassiez, and que nous puissions, que vous puissiez) arc- formed, as in regular verbs, by changing ant of the present participle to ions and iez. Ex. Que nous tenions, que vous temez. 78 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 36. * PRINCIPAL PARTS OF THE IRREG- Note. For the inflection of the irregular tenses of irregular verbs, and PRES. INFIX. Absoudre, to absolve, Acheter, to buy, Achever, to complete, Acquerir, to acquire, Aller, to go, Amonceler, to heap, Appeler, to call, Appuyer, to support, Asseoir, to seat, Astreindre, to compel, Atteindre, to attain, Atteler, to harness, Battre, to beat, Boire, to drink, Bouillir, to boil, Bourreler, to torment, Braire, to bray, Bruire, to roar, Caeheter, to seal, Ceindre, to gird, Chanceler, to stagger, Changer, to change, Circonscrire, to circumscribe, Clore, to close, Colleter, to collar, Conclure, to conclude, Conduire, to conduct, Confire, to preserve, Congeler, to congeal, Connaitre, to knoio, Conquerir, to conquer, Construire, to construct, Contraindre, to constrain, Coqueter, to coquet, Coudre, to sew, Courir, to run, PRES. PART. absolvant, achetant, achevant, acquerant, allant, amoncelant, appelant, appuyant, asseyant, astreignant, atteignant, attelant, battant, buvant, bouillant, bourrelant, bruyant, cachetant, ceignant, chancelant, changeant, circonscrivant, eolletant, concluant, conduisant, confisant, congelant, connaissant, conquerant, construisant, contraignant, coquetant, cousant, courant, * For convenient reference the verbs which undergo the changes explained in the principal parts of the auxiliaries, and of the regular verbs, see the end of §36. ETYMOLOGY. — VERB. 79 ULAK A1STD DEFECTIVE VERBS. for the forms of defective verbs in use, see Supplement, pp. 299-304. PAST PART. absous, achete, acheve, acquis, alle, amoncele, appele, appuye, assis, astreint, atteint, attele, battu, bu, bouilli, bourrele, PRES. INDIC. j'absous, j'achete, j' acheve, j'acquiers, je vais, j'amoncelle, j'appelle, j'appuie, j'assieds, j'astreins, j'atteins, j'attelle, je bats, je bois, je bous, je bourrele, r il brait, } \ ils braient, 5 il bruit, PAST INDEF. j'achetai. achevai. acquis, 'allai. 'amoncelai. 'appelai. appuyai. astreignis. 'atteignis. 'attelai. je battis. je bus. w e bouillis. je bourrelai. cachete, je cachette, je cachetai. ceint, je ceins, je ceignis. chancele, je chancelle, je chancelai. change, je change, je changeai. circonscrit, je circonscris, je circonscrivis. clos, je clos, collete, je collete, je colletai. conclu, je conclus, je conclus. conduit, je conduis, je conduisis. confit, je conns, je conns. congele, je congele, je congelai. connu, je connais, je connus. conquis, je conquiers, je conquis. construit, je construis, je construisis. contraint, je contrains, je contraignis. coquete, je coquete, je coquetai. cousu, je couds, je cousis. couru, je cours, je courus. § 35 are included in this list; also the verbs which are always unipersonal. Fot this list, pp. 84, 85. 80 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §36. PRES. INFIN. PRES. PART. Couvrir, to cover, couvrant, Craindre, to fear, craignant, Croire, to believe, croyant, Croitre, to grow, croissant, Cueillir, to gather, cueillant, Cuire, to bake, cook, cuisant, Deceler, to detect, decelant, Dechoir, to decay, Detruire, to destroy, detruisant, Devoir, to owe, devant, Dire, to say, disant, Dissoudre, to dissolve, dissolvant, Dormir, to sleep, dormant, Echoir, to fall due, echeant, Eclore, to hatch, Ecrire, to write, ecrivant, Employer, to employ, employant, Empreindre, to imprint, empreignant, Enduire, to plaster, enduisant, Enfreindre, to infringe, enfreignant, Enrmyer, to weary, ennuyant, S'enquerir, to inquire, s'enquerant, Envoyer, to send, envoyant, Essayer, to try, essayant, Eteindre, to extinguish, eteignant, Etinceler, to sparkle. etincelant, Etiqueter, to label, etiquetant, Etreindre, to press, etreignant, Exclure, to exclude, excluant, Faillir, to fail, C faillissant, ) (. faillant, } Faire, to do, faisant, Falloir, to be necessary, Feindre, to feign, feignantf Ficeler, to cord, ficelant, Frire, to fry, Fuir, to flee, fuyant, Geler, to freeze, gelant, Gesir, to lie (§ 82. N. 2), gisant, Grasseyer, to lisp, grasseyant, Greler, to hail, grelant, Hair, to hate, halssant, Harceler, to torment, harcelant, §36. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 81 PAST PART. couvert, craint, cru, cru, cueilli, cuit, decele, dechu, detruit, dfl, dit, dissous, dormi, echu, eclos, ecrit, employe, empreint, enduit, enfreint, ennuye, enquis, envoye, essay e, eteint, etincele, etiquete, etreint, exclu, exclus, failli, fait, fallu, feint, ficele, frit, fuit, gele, grasseye, gr£le, hat, harcele, PEES. INDIC. je couvre, je crains, je crois, je crois, je cueille, je cuis, je decele, je dechois, je detruis, je dois, je dis, je dissous, je dors, il echoit, il echet, il eclot, j'ecris, j'emploie, j'empreins, j'enduis, j'enfreins, j'ennuie, je m'enquiers, j'envoie, j'essaie, j'eteins, j'etincelle, j'etiquete, j'etreins, j' exclus, C je faillis, ) \ je faux, 5 je fais, il faut, je feins, je ficelle, je fris (no plural), je fuis, il gele, il git (reg. plural), je grasseie, il grele, je hais, je harcele, PAST INDEF. je couvris. je craignis. je crus. je cr&s. je cueillis. je cuisis. je decelai. je dechus. je detruisis. je dus. je dis. je dormis. il echut. j'ecrivis. j'employai. j'empreignis. j'enduisis. j'enfreignis. j'ennuyai. je m'enquis. j'envoyai. j' essay ai. j'eteignis. j'etincelai. j'etiquetai. j'etreignis. j'exclus. je faillis. je fis. il fallut. je feignis. je ficelai. je fuis. il gela. je grasseyai. il gr&la. je haYs. je harcelai. 82 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §3G. PRES. INFIX. PEES. PART. Induire, to induce, induisant, Inscrire, to inscribe, inscrivant, Instrnire, to instruct, instruisant, Introduire, to introduce introduisant, Issir, to issue, Jeter, to throw, jetant, Joindre, to join, joignant, Lire, to read, lisant, Luire, to shine, luisant, Maudire, to curse, maudissant, Mener, to lead, to take, menant, Mentir, to lie, mentant, Mettre, to put, mettant, Moudre, to grind, moulant, Maurir, to die, mourant, Mouvoir, to move, mouvant, Naitre, to be born, naissant, Negliger, to neglect. negligeant, Neiger, to snow, neigeant, Niveler, to level, nivelaht, Nuire, to injure, nuisant, Offrir, to offer, offrant, Oindre, to anoint* oignant, Guir, to hear, Ouvrir, to open, ouvrant, Paitre, to graze, paissant, Paraitre, to appear, paraissant, Partir, to depart, partant, Payer, to pay, payant, Peindre, to paint, peignant, Peler, to peel, pelant, Plaindre, to pity, plaignant, Plaire, to please, plaisant, Pleuvoir, to rain, pleuvant, Poindre, to dawn, Pouvoir, to be able, pouvant, Prendre, to take, prenant, Prescrire, to prescribe, prescrivant, Produire, to produce, produisant, Proscrire, to proscribe, proscrivant, Querir, to fetch, §36. ETYMOLOGY. THE VaHB. 66 PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST JSDEF. induit, j'induis, j'induisis. inscrit, j'inscris, j'iiiScrivL. instruit, j'instruis, j'instruisis. introduit, j'introduis, j'introduisis. issu. jete, je jette, je jetai. joint, je joins, je joignis. lu, je lis, je lus. [pounds). lui, je luis, je luisis (in com. maudit, je maudis, je maudis. mene, je mene, je menai. menti, je mens, je mentis. mis, je mets, je mis. moulu, je mouds, je moulus. mort, je meurs, je mourus. mu, je meus, je mus. ne, je nais, je naquis. neglige, je neglige, je negligeai. neige, il neige, il neigea. nivele, je nivelle, je nivelai. nui, je nuis, je nuisis. offert, j'offre, j'offris. oint, j'oins, j'oignis. OUT, j'ouls, ouvert, j'ouvre, j'ouvris. [pounds). pu, je pais, je pus (in com- paru, je parais, je parus. parti, je pars, je partis. paye, je paie, je payai. peint, je peins, je peignis. pele, je pele, je pelai. plaint, je plains, je plaignis. plu, je plais, je plus. plu, il pleut, il plut. il point, pu, je puis,* je pus. pris, je prends, je pris. prescrit, je prescris, je prescrivis. produit, je produis, je produisis. proscrit, je proscris, je proscrivis. * Pouvoir makes je puis or jepeux ; but never use peux-je ? 84 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 36. PRES. INFIN. Ratteindre, to reach again, Reduire, to reduce, Se repentir, to repent, Requerir, to require, Resoudre, to resolve, Restreindre, to restrain, Rire, to laugh, Rompre, to break, Saillir, to project, Savoir, to know, Seduire, to seduce, Semer, to sow, Sentir, to feel, Seoir, toft, to become, Servir, to serve, Sortir, to go out, Souffrir, to suffer, Souscrire, to subscribe, Sufnre, to suffice, Suivre, to follow, Surseoir, to supersede, Taire, to keep silent, to keep } to one's self, > Teindre, to dye, Tenir, to hold, (Tistre) (obs.), to weave, Traduire, to translate, Traire, to milk, Transcrire, to transcribe, Vaincre, to conquer, Valoir, to be worth, Venir, to come, Vetir, to clothe, Vivre, to live, Voir, to see, Youloir, to be willing, PRES. PART. ratteignant, reduisant, se repentant, requerant, resolvant, restreignant, riant, rompant, saillant, sachant, seduisant, semant, sentant, seyant, servant, sortant, souffrant, souscrivant, suffisant, suivant, sursoyant, taisant, teignant, tenant, traduisant, trayant, transcrivant, vainquant, valant, venant, vetant, vivant, voyant, voulant, Avoir, to have, Etre, to be, Chanter, to sing, Finir, to finish, Recevoir, to receive, Vendre, to sell, ayant, etant, chantant, finissant, recevant, vendant, 36. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 85 PAST PART. PRES. INDIC. PAST INDEF. ratteint, je ratteins, je ratteignis. reduit, je reduis, je reduisis. repenti, je me repens, je me repentis. requis, je requiers, je requis. resolu, resous, je resous, je resolus. restreint, je restreins, je restreignis. ri, je ris, je ris. rompu, je romps, je rompis. sailli, il saille, il saillit. su, je sais, je sus. seduit, je seduis, je seduisis. seme, je seme, je semai. senti, je sens, je sentis. sis, il sied, servi, je sers, je servis. sorti, je sors, je sortis. souffert, je souffre, je souffris. souscrit, je souscris, je souscrivis. suffi, je suffis, je suffis. suivi, je suis, je suivis. sursis, je sursois, je sursis. tu, je tais, je tus. teint, je teins, je teignis. term, je tiens, je tins. tissu, traduit, je traduis, je traduisis. trait, je trais, - transcrit, je transcris, je transcrivis. vaincu, je vaincs, je vainquis. valu, je vaux, je valus. venu, je viens, je vins. vetu, je vets, je v6tis. vecu, je vis, je vecus. vu, je vois, je vis. voulu, je veux, je voulus. eu, j'ai, j'eus. ete, je suis, je fus. chante, je chante, je chantai. fini, je finis, je finis. requ, je re. Vocabulary. Allemand, German. Paresse, idleness. Amerique, America. Poignet, wrist. Casser, to break. Pomme, apple. Choisir, to choose. Present, present. JEpicier, grocer. Province, province. Eviter, to shun. devolution, revolution. Faute, fault, blunder. Savoie, Savoy. Habile, skilful. Tarcl, late. Mlustre, illustrious. Tot, soon (in composition). Langue, language. Tot ou tard, soon or late. EXERCISE XXII. — ARTICLES. 1. He gives me a pen, and we give him paper. 2. My un- cle is not French, but your uncle is a Frenchman of a*n illus- trious family. 3. Your cousin is a grocer. 4. He is a mer- chant of Washington Street. 5. They (on) have sold some butter this week for a dollar a pound. 6. Let us shun idle- ness. 7. I have sold cloth for three dollars a yard. 8. She has very beautiful eyes. 9. My cousin has broken his wrist. 10. A history of the French revolution. 11. A grammar of the English language. 12. Wicked men are always unhappy. 13. The first king was elected. 14. We like apples. 15. Have you apples? 16. The rich [man] does not always give. 17. France is a beautiful country. 18. He is in Spain. 19. I come from France. 20. I do not understand German, but I speak French. 21. Savoy is a province of France, at present. 22. She has gone to Savoy. 23. She has returned from France, and she resides (demeurer), at present, in Amer- ica. 24. Virtue always has its reward, soon or late. 25. The ablest (habile) men chose them. 26. They made the greatest blunders. 108 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § Qo. . Vocabulary. Bdionnette, bayonet. Liqueur, liquor. En, in. Poesie, poetry. Etdblir, to establish. Begner, to reign. Etat, state. Uni, united. Se /aire mat d f to hurt Vent, wind. one's self. Vbild, that is, there is, be- Eormer, to form. hold. Lieutenant, lieutenant. Vrai, true. EXERCISE XXLTI. — ARTICLES. 1. I have something good. 2. Have you not bayonets? Yes. 3. I do not want any wine, but some water. 4. That is true history. 5. I do not drink liquor, brandy especially. 6. I shall go to France next year. 7. We shall establish a school in Boston next spring. 8. Mont Blanc is the highest mountain of Europe. 9. Zephyrus is the mildest wind. 10. General Sherman is the Lieutenant-General of the United States. 11. They have returned, undoubtedly (without doubt). 12. His sister is very beautiful. 13. Her father was a rich farmer. 14. Have you seen the master of the house. 15. No; but I have seen the mistress. 16. Your cousins are the captain's friends (the friends of the captain). 17. O, yes, captain, I am going, if you wish. 18. Charles -the Third (§ 76), called the Fat, reigned in 884 A. D. 19. I have hurt my hand. 20. They are tailors. 21. She is a. French woman. 22. His wife is an English woman. 23. Those children love their father. 24. Do you like tea ? 25. I tako tea and coffee. 26. Tea is ready. Vocabulary. Apres-midi, (f.) afternoon. Egalement, equally. Bible, Bible. Encre, ink. Cri, cry. Gens, people. §§ 65-67 SYNTAX. THE NOUN. 109 Jnstituteur, instructor. Tuer, to kill. Objet, object. Tidipe, tulip. Rose, rose. Violette, violet. /Soin, care. EXERCISE XXIV. — ARTICLES. 1. He goes to the theatre on Thursdays. 2. He returns to school in the afternoon. 3. She sees her father on Tuesdays or Wednesdays. 4. He reads the Bible in the morning. 5. My cousin has paper and pens. 6. Your cousin has (§ 125. 1) neither paper nor pens. 7. There were many people at the theatre. 8. My father has many (Men) friends. 9. The teacher has sent away the most of the scholars. 10. Have you anything good ? 11. No, sir; I have nothing good. 12. What good do you see in that? 13. Have you books, pens, ink, and paper ? 14. Yes, sir ; I have the books, pens, ink, and paper, which you gave me. 15. The good and the bad man are equally the objects of his care. 16. The good and brave captain was killed. 17. The rose is more beauti- ful than the violet. 18. The tulip is not so beautiful as the rose. 19. The violet is less beautiful than the rose. 20. Un- derstand, my children, that wheat does not grow everywhere. 21. God never (§ 125. 1) abandons unhappy children. 22. They heard great cries this morning. THE NOUN. § 66. The general principles of the construction of the noun are the same as in English. § 67. In interrogative sentences the subject, if a noun, precedes the verb, and a pronoun of the same gender and number immediately follows the verb. Ex. Vos amis so?it-ils riches? are your friends rich? Voire pere a-t-\\parl6 ? has your father spoken ? 10 110 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 67-71. Exc. In interrogative and relative sentences beginning with oil, where ; que, what ; quel, which ; combien, how much (or many) ; or quand, when, the noun which is the subject may immediately follow the verb. Ex. Ou demeure voire ami ? where does your friend live ? Qu' ecrit voire ami ? what does your friend write ? Quel livre a voire frere ? which book has your brother ? Combien de plumes a sa soeur ? how many pens has his sister? Quand vient M. voire pere ? when does your father come ? Je perds les mouchoirs que me donne grand-papa, I lose the handker- chiefs which grand-papa gives me. § 68. Direct regimens, after verbs, precede indi- rect ; but place the longest last. Ex. II donne le livre a son ami. He gives the book to his friend. II donne a son ami le livre qu'il a lu. He gives to his friend the book which he has read. § 69, Possessives and nouns used as adjectives in English, must, in French, be placed after their words, with de, denoting possession or material; otherwise a. Ex. La maison de mon pere, my father's house. Une robe de soie, a silk dress. Les bas de coton, the cotton stockings. Les Etats a coton, the Cotton States. § 70. The possessive in English with the verb to be is expressed in French by the dative with d (Latin da- tive of the possessor). Ex. Cette montre est a ma sceur, this watch is my sister's. Ce n'est pas a elle, it is not hers. § 71. The name of a profession or occupation follows the noun representing the person, and (Ze'connects them. Ex. Le maitre d'ecriture est-il venuf has the writing master come ? §§72,73. SYNTAX. — THE NOUN. Ill § 73. Nouns indicating parts of the body or qual- ities of the mind do not change their number to refer to one or more individuals. Ex. II a les cheveux noirs, he has black hair. II a V esprit juste, he has a correct mind, lis ont Fesprit correct, they have correct minds. § 73. Vocabulary. Apres, after. Demoiselle, young lady. Armes, arms, fencing. Drop, cloth. Blond, fair. Intelligent, intelligent. Chemin, road. Jusqti'd, as far as. Chemin de fer, railroad. San Francisco, San Fran- Danse, dancing. cisco. EXERCISE XXV. — NOUNS. 1. The children receive a letter from their father. 2. Do the children receive a letter from their mother? 3. The father sends his children a present. 4. Has your brother sent his friends a present? 5. The mother loves her chil- dren. 6. Does the mother love her children? 7. What were your friends reading when you saw them? 8. "Where were your parents last year? 9. What books has your father? 10. How many children has the captain? 11. Has your cousin given your sister a book? 12. He has given my sister the book which you were reading. 13. Have these young ladies correct minds? 14. The captain has black hair (pi.). 15. These ladies have light hair. 16. The dan- cing master has come. 17. Has the dancing master returned ? 18. Is this book yours, sir? 19. Yes, sir; it is mine. 20. The Cotton States will be very poor after this war. 21. He has sold three cloth coats. 22. Has my father's house been sold ? 23. Is the railroad finished as far as San Francisco ? 24. The king has not done his duty to his subjects. 25. Where does Mr. L. live ? 26. When did your father read that book? 112 FRENCH GRAMMAR, § 74. THE ADJECTIVE. § 74L. Adjectives (§ 99. 1, 2) agree with their nouns in gender and number ; but when referring to two or more nouns of different genders, are put in the plural masculine.* Ex. Notre servante est tres diligente. Our maid servant is very diligent. Notre servante et notre valet sont tris diligents. Our maid and man servant are very diligent. Exc. 1. Feu, late, is indeclinable when separated from its noun by an adjective word. It does not change for the plural, and never follows the noun. Ex. Eeu la reine, the late queen (another queen still living). La feue reine, the late queen (no other queen still living). Exc. 2. Demi, half, and nu, bare, are indeclinable when coming before their nouns. Ex. H sortira dans tine demi-heure, he will go out in half an hour. II est tine heure et demie, it is half past one. II va nu-pieds (or les pieds nus), he goes barefoot. Note. So some other adjectives and adjective phrases are indeclinable when coming before their nouns, being used as prepositions or adverbs ; after the nouns, they are declined. Ex. Tous sont venus excepte ma tante, all came except my aunt. U trouve ci-inclusf copie de sa lettre, he finds enclosed a copy of his letter. II trouva ci-jointf copie des vers, he found annexed a copy of the verses. Nous recevons franc-de-port des lettres, we receive letters postage free. II y en a trois y compris ma sceur, there are three, including my sister. * If the nouns refer to things, an adjective immediately following- the last may agree with the last. - Ex. II avait les yeux et la bouche onverte, he had his eyes and mouth open. t Omit the indefinite article after ci-inclus and ci joint. £§ 74-77. SYNTAX. — THE ADJECTIVE. 113 Exc. 3. Gens, m., people, takes a feminine adjective before it, but a masculine adjective after it. Ex. De fort dangereuses gens, very dangerous people. Des gens fort dangereux, very dangerous people. Note. Tout, tel, quel, and certain, preceding gens, are masculine when separated from it by an adjective word Avhich has the same form for both genders. Ex. Tous les gens d'honneur, all people of honor. Toutes ces bonnes gens, all those good people. Quelles gens ! what people ! Quels braves gens ! what worthy people ! § 75. Tout, m., toute, f, are used for the whole, and their plurals, tous, m., toutes, f., for every, the definite article follow- ing them before the noun. Ex. Toute lajournie, all the day. Tous les jours, every day. § 7G. In speaking of days of the month and sovereigns, use cardinal numbers ; but use premier for un, and for sov- ereigns use second or deux. S' Ex. Le treize avril, the thirteenth of April. Louis seize, Louis the Sixteenth. Charles premier, Charles the First. Henri second, Henry the Second. PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 77. 1. The following thirteen adjectives generally pre- cede their nouns : — Beau, handsome, fine. Joli, pretty. Bon, simple, good. Mauvais, bad. Brave, worthy. Meilleur, better. Cher, dear. Petit, small. Grand, great. Vieux, old. Gros, large, big. Vilain, ugly. Jeune, young. Note. The following adjectives have different significations according as they are used before or after nouns. 10* 114 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 77. 1 . Un bon homme, a simple man, a good man. Un homme bon, a good man, a benevolent man. 2. Z7n brave homme, a worthy man. ZJtt homme brave, a oraue man. 3. ?7we certaine histoire, a certain story. ZJrae histoire certaine, a reliable story. 4. £7w cher enfant, a dear child. l/rce ro&e chere, an expensive dress. 5. Une commune voix, a unanimous voice. line voix commune, an ordinary voice. 6. Un cruel homme, a tiresome man. Z7w homme cruel, a cruel man. 7. ia derniere annee, the £as£ year (of a series). L'annee derniere, last year. 8. Z7«e fausse clef, a false key. ZTwe clef fausse, a wrong key. 9. C7m furieux poisson, a prodigious fish. Z7w ftora furieux, & furious lion. 10. Dw galant homme, a gentleman. Z7» homme galant, a gallant. 11. Le grand air, the air o/" ^ooff society. Hair grand, a noble appearance. Un grand homme, a great man. Un homme grand, a tall man. 12. Z7?i gros arbre, a /ar^e tree. Un ceil gros, a swollen eye. 13. Z7?i haut arbre, a taW tree. £/n homme haut, a proud man. 14. Z7» honnete homme, an honest man. £fo homme honnete, a polite man. 15. Mauvais air, awkward appearance. Z/ mauvais, malicious appearance 16. Un mechant livre, a poor book. Lfo fo'we mechant, a caustic book. 17. Morte eau, lowest tides. Eau morte, stagnant water. 18. Un nouveau livre, a new book (another booJi). Un livre nouveau, a hookjust out. Un livre neuf, a new book (not tooni). 19. Un pauvre historien, a wretched historian. Un historien pauvre, a poor historian (pecuniarily). 20. Un petit homme, a small man. I/h. homme petit, a mean man. § 77. ' SYNTAX. — THE ADJECTIVE. 115 21. Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous man. Un homme plaisant, an agreeable man. 22. Mes propres mains, my own hands. Mes mains propres, my clean hands. 23. Un seul enfant, a single child. Un enfant seul, a child alone. Un unique enfant, an only child. 24. Efo simple soldat, a private soldier. Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier. 25. Un triste homme, a pitiful man. £7ra homme triste, a sorrowful man. 26. £7w vilain homme, an «#Zy man. £7rc homme vilain, a sordid, miserly man. 2. Monosyllabic adjectives very often, and numerals and adjective pronouns regularly, precede their nouns. Ex. Un long discours, a long discourse. Dix-neuf hommes, nineteen men. Votre pere, your father. Ces animaux, those animals. 3. (1.) Participial adjectives, adjectives of (2.) form, (3.) color, (4.) taste, (5.) hearing, (6.) touch, (7.) material, (8.) nationality, (9.) those referring to defects of the body, those ending in (10.) al, (11.) able, (12.) ible, (13.) ique, and (14.) if, and most ending in (15.) e mute, follow their nouns. Ex. (1). Unefemme charmante, a charming woman. (2.) Un table ronde, a round table. (3.) Des bas blancs, white stockings. (4.) Un fruit amer, a bitter fruit. (5.) Des sons harmonieux, harmonious sounds. (6.) Une peche molle, a soft peach. (7.) Des animaux laineux, xooolly animals. (8.) La guerre americaine, the American war. (9.) Un garcon boiteux, a lame boy. (10.) Disposition amicale, friendliness. (11.) Des manitres aimables, agreeable manners. (12.) Un pays paisible, a peaceful country. (13.) Une illusion magique, a magical illusion. (14.) Un esclave fugitif, a fugitive slave. (15.) Un homme sincere, a sincere man. 116 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 77, 78. 4. Adjectives not enumerated in § 77. 1, 2, 3, either pre- cede or follow, but more frequently follow, their nouns. § 78. 1. The complement of an adjective is a noun s pronoun, or verb, connected with it by a preposition. Ex. Je suis content de mon ami, I am pleased with my friend. Je suis content de lui, I am pleased with him. Je suis content de le faire, I am pleased to do it. 2. The complement of an adjective following il est (im- personal) is always connected by de / but c'est requires a. Ex. II est beau de mourir pour sa patrie, it is noble to die for one's country. Cest horribU a voir, it is horrible to see. 3. The connecting preposition is often different in French and English. (1.) The following take de in French, but not of in Eng- lish;— Absent de, absent from. Amour eux de, in love with. Bien aise de, glad to.* Content de, pleased with, pleased to.* Disoli. de, grieved for, grieved to.* Eloigni de, far from.* Etonne de, astonished at, astonished to.* Exempt de, exempt from. Fdche de, sorry for, sorry to.* Fort de, confident in. Inquiet de, uneasy about, uneasy to.* • t Ivre de, intoxicated with. Mdcontent de, displeased with, displeased to.* Reconnaissant de, thankful for. Ravi de, delighted with, delighted to.* Rempli de, filled with. (2.) The following take a in French, but not to in Eng- lish : — Bon a, good for. Exact a, exact in. * Words marked thus take the infinitive or the genitive. §§ 78, 79. SYNTAX. — THE ADJECTIVE. 117 Interess6 a, interested in. Prop re h, fit for. Rebelle a, rebellious towards. (3.) The following also take different prepositions in French and English : — Bon pour, kind towards. Civil envers, polite to. Indulgent pour, indulgent towards. Insolent avec, insolent to. Poll envers, polite to. 4. A noun may be followed by two or more adjectives which form their complement by the same preposition. Ex. II avail Ste plus impatient que digne de regner, he had been more im- patient than worthy to rule. Rem. If the adjectives form their complement by different prepositions, another form must be given to the sentence. - Ex. II est utile a ses amis et en est ch6ri, he is useful to and beloved by his friends. § 79. Vocabulary. Amiral, admiral. Intruit, well informed. Chez, at the house of. Liberte, liberty. Commis, clerk. Oreille, ear. Croire, irr. to believe. /Sec, dry, thin. Etouffant, suffocating. Trop, too much. EXERCISE XXYI. — ADJECTIVES. 1. The heat had been suffocating all day. 2. God has given liberty to all men. 3. Your brother and (§ 94) sister are well informed. 4. He had his ears and eyes open. 5. Was the colonel a rich man ? 6. The captain is a tall, thin man. 7. The merchant is a great man, and his clerk is a tall man. 8. My neighbor is a worthy man, and his son is a brave man. 9. The little boy was bareheaded, but his 118 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 79. feet were not bare. 10. He remained at my house an hour and a half. 11. A half an hour was too much time. 12. You will find annexed a copy of his letter. 13. The annexed copy is very exact. 14. He has received a letter postage free. 15. She receives a letter, postage free, every week. 16. I received yesterday the enclosed letter. 17. You will find enclosed a copy of my letter. 18. All perished, includ- ing my sister. 19. All those people are Germans. 20. All good people believe it. 21. Those people are dangerous. Vocabulary. Arbre, tree. JVbn compris, not including. Avant, before (of time). Octobre, October. Clovis, Clovis. Poirier, pear tree. Coin, corner. Professeur, professor. Couronnement, coronation. Heine, queen. Dagobert, Dagobert. Rond, round. Devant, before (of place). Thierry, Thierry. Doux, sweet. Vouloir dire, to mean, to Magasin, storehouse, store. wish to say. Monde, m. world, company. EXERCISE XXVH. — ADJECTIVES. 1. There are twenty-five (§ 86. N. 1), not including the captain. 2. I saw the late queen before her coronation. 3, The company had come, except my cousin. 4. Clovis the Third was the son of Thierry the First, and Clovis the Sec- ond was the son of Dagobert the First. 5. My sister set out on (§ 130) the sixteenth of October. 6. The professor has good books, and my father has interesting books. 7. The merchant has handsome cloth, but I have better cloth in my store. 8. He has bought the dearest cloth. 9. There was a large tree in my father's garden. 10. There was an old pear tree before the door. 11. My brother is a small man ; I do not mean a mean man. 12. He has bad children, § 70. SYNTAX. THE ADJECTIVE. Ill) but his youngest son is hot bad. 13. He has three pretty little daughters. 14. Mr. N. is a well-informed man. 15. Does your brother want a new book? 16. Is that table round? 17. The round table is in the corner. 18. The sweetest apples are the best. Vocabulary. Acttf, active. Frugal, frugal. Bonte, kindness, goodness. Inferieur, inferior. JBouteille, bottle. Opaque, opaque. Corps, body. Paysan, peasant. Credule, credulous. Suisse, Swiss. Cruel a, cruel to. Tdche, task. Drape, woollen. Tout le monde, everybody. JEtoffe, cloth. VeritdblemZnt, truly. EXERCISE XXVIII. — ADJECTIVES. I 1. I heard sweet sounds this morning. 2. The moon is an opaque body. 3. He has three hard eggs. 4. The merchant has much woollen cloth. 5. He saw some Swiss peasants yesterday. 6. The lame soldier and his blind son are very poor. 7. Your sister is a credulous woman. 8. The caj> tain is an agreeable man. 9. My father has a frugal ser- vant. 10. He has finished a painful task. 11. An intelligent and active man will succeed. 12. Those children are rebel- lious towards their father. 13. A truly polite child is polite to his inferiors. 14. A bad boy is cruel to animals. 15. This bottle is filled with liquor. 16. Good boys are kind to animals. 17. He is insolent towards his mother. 18. That knife is good for something. 19. This knife is fit for nothing. 20. My cousin is grateful for your goodness. 21. He is exact in nothing. 22. His friends are displeased with him. 23. I am sorry for my error. 24. He is very uneasy about that. 25. You are angry with me. 26. The little boy is pleased with his books. 27. She is beloved by everybody. 120 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 79, 80. Vocabulary. Acteur, actor. Opinion, opinion. Aoiit, August. Place, place, situation. ■Fier, proud. Succes, success. Ignorance, ignorance. Triste, sad. EXERCISE XXIX.— ADJECTIVES. 1. It is honorable (beau) to give one's life for one's country. 2. It is sad to see. 3. He is inferior to his cousin. 4. I am grieved for that. 5. Everybody is astonished at your igno- rance. 6. Are you pleased (§ 80) with your horse? 7. My brother is fit for that place. 8. I am glad to learn that. 9. My brother is not glad to see you. 10. That actor is intox- icated with his success. 11. You are not intoxicated with your success. 12. Is your brother proud of his success? 13. Your aunt will come on the fifteenth of August. 14. My son is uneasy about his eyes. L5. My father is not a tall man. 16. My mother has bought some expensive dresses. 17. The American war is finished. 18. Many fugitive slaves live in Canada. 19. His friend is a tiresome man. 20. He has given his sister a new book. 21. She was an only child. 22. They have the air of good society. 23. There are some large trees in my garden. 24. I have done it with my own hands. 25. I am very glad to see that. 26. He is very glad of that. 27. We live far from you. 28. They are confident in their opinion. 29. I am delighted to see you. 30. We are interested in that. THE PRONOUN. § 8©. To conjugate a verb interrogatively, place the pronoun after the verb in the simple tenses, and be- tween the auxiliary and participle in the compound tenses. §§80,81. SYNTAX. THE PRONOUN. 121 Ex. Que voulez- vous /aire ? what do you wish to do ? Qu'avez-Yousfait? what have you done ? Exc. In the first person singular of the present indicative, monosyllabic forms, and many others, especially those ending in e (mute), or nj sound, are exceptions to this rule. Prefix to these est-ce que (affir.), and n'est-ce pas que (neg.), which may be used for all interrogative forms. Ex. Est-ce queje chante Men? do I sing well ? Est-ce que ,/e vous qfflige? do I trouble you ? Est-ce que nous vous affligeons ? do we trouble you ? N'est-ce pas que j'etudie toujour s ? * am I not always studying ? Est-ce quej'ouvre laporte ?* do I open the door ? Note 1. The monosyllabic first persons of the following words may follow the regular rule (§ 80) : alter, to go ; avoir, to have ; devoir, to owe ; faire, to do ; savoir, to know ; and voir, to see. Ex. Vais-je ? do I go ? Fais-je f do I do ? Ai-je ? have I ?. Sais-je f do I know ? Dois-je f do I owe ? Vois-je ? do I see ? Note 2. Exclamatory sentences may take the interroga- tive form. Ex. Avons-nous Vair bete ! we have a stupid appearance ! Sont-ils heureux ! how happy they are ! § 81. Answers, when not simply oui or non, should be complete sentences. Ex. Qui a perdu cette bourse ? who has lost that purse ? Je Vai perdue, I lost it. As-tufini ton travail? hast thou finished thy work ? Ow, monsieur, mon travail estfini, yes, sir, my work is finished. * Rem. When je follows an e mute in these cases, the e (mute) is changed to e; but the above forms are preferred. Ex. N'etudie-je pas toujours ? am I not always studying ? Ouvr6-je la porte ? do I open the door ? 11 122 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 82, 83. § 821. After (1.) ainsi, (2.) a peine, (3.) au moins, (4.) aussi, (5.) die nioins, (6.) encore, (7.) en vain, (8.) peut-etre 9 (9.) recrement, (10.) te/, and (11.) toitjours, the nominative, whether a noun or a pronoun, way follow the verb fof greater grace and energy. Ex. (1.) Ainsi poursuivit-il son voyage, thus he pursued his way. (2.) A peine avait-il parli, scarcely had he spoken. (3.) Au rnoins dois-tu le voir, at least you ought to see him. (4.) Aussi ne Tai-je pas fait, therefore I did not do it. (5.) Du moins ne Va-t-il pas fait, at least he has not done it. (6.) Et encore ne V emploie-t-on pas, and even then it is not used. (7.) En vain travaillez-vous, you labor in vain. (8.) Peut-etre Vavez-vous vu, perhaps you have seen him. (9.) Rarement Vai-je vu, seldom have I seen him. (10.) De tels homtnes a-t-il parU, he spoke of such men. (11.) Si je ne puis lefaire, toujours tacherai-je de lefaire, if I cannot do it, I will nevertheless try. Rem. The above forms, except (6), (8), and (11), which must always be used in these senses, are more frequently used in poetry and elevated prose. Note 1. The subject also follows the verb, as in English, in narration, when the speaker is referred to. Ex. " Volontiers," repondit-il, "willingly," replied he. C'est unjoli nom, ajouta Charles, it is a pretty name, added Charles. Note 2. The subject also follows the verb in the forms ci-git and ci-gisent, used on tombstones. Ex. Ci-git Charlemagne, here lies Charlemagne. § 83. Personal pronouns in the accusative or dative precede the verb ; and when ne pas comes before infini- tives, they are placed between ne and^?as. Ex. II nous aime, he loves us. II nous donne le canif he gives us the knife. Ne le pas avoir, not to have it. Exc. 1. The dative of the possessor follows the verb to le, with a preposition. Ex. Le livre est-il a lui ? i& the book his t § 83. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 123 Exc. 2. The dative of a pronoun referring to persons, except the reflective pronoun, follows reflective verbs with a preposition. (See § 87.) Ex. II se compare a lui, he compares himself to him. II s'est achete une maison, he has bought himself a house. Exc. 3. When two or more datives of pronouns occur, or of nouns and pronouns, they may follow the verb with prep- ositions, or a different turn may be given to the sentence. Ex. Je parle a vous et a eux, I speak to you and to them. Je parle a vous et a mon frere, I speak to you and my brother. Or, Je vous parle et aussi a eux. Je vous parle et a mon frere aussi. Exc. 4. When the direct object is a pronoun of the first or second person, the dative of a pronoun referring to a per- son follows the verb with a preposition. Ex. II vous presentera a elle, he will present you to her. II nous recommande a vous, he recommends us to you. Exc. 5. After accourir, to run to ; aller, to go ; courir, to run ; /aire attention, to pay attention ; penser and songer, to think ; and venir, to come, — indirect objects, when referring to persons, follow the verb with a preposition. Ex. lis accourent a eux, they run to them. Nous irons a lui, we shall go to him. II court a nous, he runs to us. Nous faisons attention k lui, we pay attention to him. Ma mhre pense a moi, my mother thinks of me. Nous songeons a elle, we think of her. 11 vient a moi, he comes to me. Exc. 6. In affirmative imperatives, pronouns, as direct and indirect objects, follow the verb ; but when two imperatives come together, the pronoun may precede the last. Ex. Donnez-vtxoi In rose, give me the rose. Lisez-\e vite, read it quickly. Gardez-les ou les renvoyez, keep them or send them back. 124 FEENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 84-86. § 84. When two or more pronouns accompany a verb without a preposition, the following order must be observed : — • (1.) Me, te, se, nous, vous. (2.) Le, la, les. (3.) Lui, leur. (4.) T. (5.) En. Ex. II me le donne, he gives it to me. Je te le donne, I give it to you. lis se le diseni, they say it to themselves, B s'y devoue, he devotes himself to it. II nous le donne, he gives it to us. Je vous le donne, I give it to you. II le lui donne, he gives it to him. Nous les lui do?i?ions, we give them to him. II le leur donne, he gives it to them. Nous les leur donnons, we give them to them. H m'y envoie, he sends me there. U lui y en a donne, he gave Aim some there. Exc. After affirmative imperatives, le, la, les, are always placed first, and moi follows y ; otherwise follow the rule. Ex. Donnez-le-moi, give it to me. Conduisez-\es-y, conduct them thither. Menez-y-moi, take me there. Menez-no\xs-j, take us there. § 85. Pronouns as indirect objects, not in the da- tive, always follow the verb, w T ith prepositions ; except the pronoun en. Ex. Nous parlons d'eux, we speak of them. II rit d'autrui, he laughs at others. II ecrit pour lui, he writes for him. Nous en parlons, we speak of it. § 8G. En, of it, of them, some, or any; y, to it, at it, at that place, there, — stand before the verb, and refer to something previously mentioned. §§ 86-88. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 125 Ex. Si votes n'avez pas de manteau, je vous en preterai un, if you have no cloak, I will lend you one. Si vous allez au theatre, je veux y aller, if you go to the theatre, I wish to go. Note. Mn is thus used, especially in answers to ques- tions, and with words of number and quantity, when the cor- responding English words must be supplied. Ex. Avez-vous un canif ? Oui, j'en ai un. Have you a penknife ? Yes, I have one. A-t-il des plumes ? Oui, il en a beaucoup. Has he pens ! Yes, he has many. § 87. l^anci en refer to things, but y may be used of persons with se Jier, and with jpenser, referring to a dead person ; aud en, of persons, with words of number and quantity, and when two connected words govern different regimens. Ex. Vous pouvez vous y fier, you may trust him. II est mort, et je n'j pense pas, he is dead, and I do not think of him. Combien defrcres avez-vous f J'en ai trois. How many brothers have you ? I have three. II est rebelle au maitre, cependant il en est cheri. He is rebellious to- wards the master, but beloved by him. Note 1. ]Fand en may be used of persons who have just been mentioned ; thus : — Ex. Pensez-vous a moi ? Oui, j'y pense. Do you think of met Yes, I do (I think of y oil). Parlez-vous de moi ? Oui, j'en parle. Do you speak of me? Yes, I do (I speak of you). Note 2. Y is omitted for the sake of euphony before the future and conditional of aller. Ex. J'irai demain, I will go there to-morrow. J'irais demain, I would go there to-morrow. § 88. When a pronoun takes the place of a noun, preceded by d, that pronoun will be in the dative, and will be y, referring to things. 11* 126 FKENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 88-90. Ex. H pense a son pere, he thinks of his father. II pense a lui, he thinks of him. Ilparle a son pere, he speaks to his father. II lui parle, he speaks to him. • II pense a ses livres, he thinks of his books. II y pense, he thinks of them. § 89. «VVhen a pronoun takes the place of a noun, preceded by de, that pronoun will be en, referring to things. Ex. Ilparle de son pere, he speaks of his father. Ilparle de lui, he speaks of him. Ilparle de ses livres, he speaks of his books. II en parle, he speaks of them. § 90. Pronouns, as subjects, are generally repeated with every verb to which they belong ; as objects, they are regularly repeated. Ex. Nous apprenons nos lecons et nous les recitons, we learn our lessons and recite them. lis nous aiment et Us nous loue?it, they love and praise us. ISTote 1. Pronouns, as subjects, should be repeated (1.) when the first verb is followed by a direct object; (2.) when the first verb is negative, and the second affirmative ; (3.) when the verbs are in different tenses ; (4.) when the prop- ositions are connected by other conjunctions than et, ou, ni, mais. Ex. (1.) II aime son pere et il lui obeit, he loves his father and obeys him. (2.) Je ne plie pas, et je romps, /do not bend, and /break. Je plie et ne romps pas (or repeat je), I bend and do not break. (3.) II a ete, il est, et il sera votre ennemi, he has been, is, and will be your enemy. (4.) II est savant, quoiqu'il soit bien jeune, he is wise, although very young. Note 2. In " rfimporte" no . matter, and " qxtimporte? what matters it, the subject il is omitted. Ex. Donnez-moi une plume ; n'importe laquelle. Give me a pen ; no "{natter which. 11 ne vien-dra pas ; qu'importe ? He will not come ; what matters it ? §§90-93. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 127 Note B. When the ce of ce qui is nominative another ce may be repeated before the verb etre-, unless this verb is fol- lowed by an adjective or participle. Ex. Ce qui Vaffiige, c'est de ri 'aboir pas reussi, what troubles him is not hav- ing succeeded. Ce que je ne puis souffrir, c'est V insolence, what I cannot endure, is in- solence. Ce dont vous me parliez est arrive, that of which you spoke to me has happened. Ce qui est juste est utile, what is just is expedient. Note 4. Which, standing for that which, a thing which, and having a sentence for its antecedent, is rendered by ce qui in French. Ex. II a plu, ce qui nous a empeches de sortir, it rained, which prevented our going out. § 91. For je, tu, il, and Us, use moi, toi, lui, and eux, (1.) when predicate nominatives; (2.) when dis* joined from the verb; and (3.) when the verb has several subjects ; also, (4) these forms may sometimes be used for emphasis. Ex. (1.) C'est moi, it is /. (2.) 11 lit mieux que lui, he reads better than he. (3.) Lui et moi, nous * etudions, he and /study. (4.) lis m'ont releve, et il m'a panse ; or, Eux m'ont releve, et lui m'a panse, they picked me up, and he dressed my wounds. § 93. Possessive pronouns, both adjective and sub- stantive, agree with the object possessed, and not with the possessor. Ex. Sa plume et son livre, his pen and her book. Leur plume et ses livres, their pen and his books. § 93. When speaking of inanimate possessors, use son (like sui and suus in Latin) , referring to the sub- ject of the proposition in which it stands, and en when * When a verb has several subjects consisting of pronouns, or of nouns and pronouns, repeat a direct pronoun of the chief person before the verb. 128 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 93-95. not referring to the subject : with en the definite article is also used. Ex. Paris a ses agrements, Paris has its pleasures. J'aime Paris, fen admire les bdtimenis, I like Paris, I admire its build- ings. Note. When the thing possessed is governed by a preposition, en should not be used. Ex. J'aime Paris, f admire la beaute de ses bdtiments, I like Paris, I ad- mire the beauty of its buildings. § 94t. Possessive and demonstrative adjective pro- nouns are repeated before every word to which they belong, and the relative pronoun is never omitted. Ex. Donnez-moi mon habit et mon chapeau, give me my coat and hat. ~M.on pere et ma mere* sont venus, my father and mother have come. Apportez-moi ce livre et cette plume, bring me that book and pen. L'homme que vous respectez et que vous estimez, the man whom you re- spect and esteem. Rem. When addressing relations and friends use mon, ma, mes, and repeat them before each noun. Ex. Mon pere, ma mire, mes amis, veuillez vous approcher, father, mother, friends, have the goodness to come near me. § 9*>. Use le indeclinable for so or it, and decli- nable for he, she, or they. These words are usually omitted in English. Ex. Madame, etes-vous malade f Oui, je le suis. Madame, are you sick ? Yes, I am. Madame, etes-vous file de M. le due? Oui, je le suis. Madame, are you a daughter of the duke ? Yes, I am. Madame, etes-vous la file de M. le duct Oui, je la suis. Madame, are you the daughter of the duke ? Yes, I am. Je suis riche, et vous le serez. I am rich, and you shall be (so). * The following forms are used, but the above are preferred : — Mes pere et mere, my parents. Vos pere et mere, your parents. Jjeurs pere et mere, their parents. §§ 95-97. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 129 Je le ferai si je le puis. I will do it if I can. Etes-vous content de cela? Oui, je le suis. Are you pleased with that ? Yes, I am. Note. The le indeclinable is used adverbially, the le declinable as a predicate nominative. Ex. Madame, etes-vous couturiere? Oui, je le suis. Madame, are you a seamstress ? Yes, I am. Madame, etes-vous la couturiere? Oui,je la suis. Madame, are you the seamstress. Yes, I am. § 96. The indefinite on has no antecedent, and is often used as the subject of an active verb which is passive in English. Ex. On m'a dit que le roi va en Irlande, I have been told that the king is going to Ireland. Note 1. On may be used where in English we use we for I. Ex. On n'a pas avance un seul fait sur lequel on n'ait (§ 125. 3) consults des temoins oculaires. We have not advanced a single fact upon which ice have not consulted eye-witnesses. Note 2. On may be used for you in speaking to inferiors. Ex. Jean, a-t-on passe chez mon fr&re? John, did you call at my brother's ? Finira-t-on bientdt ce bruit? will you put an end to that noise very soon? § 97. Vocabulary. Amitie, friendship. Ithaque, Ithaca. Cause, cause. Marque, sign, token. Changer, to change. Raconter, to relate. Goncevoir, to conceive, un- JSelon, according to. derstand. Sincere, sincere. Tie, island. Verger, orchard. 130 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 97. EXERCISE XXX. — PRONOUNS. 1. He related his history. 2. Did he relate his history? 3. Has he read his book ? 4. Do you read every day ? 5. Do I swim very well ? 6. Do you not swim better than I ? 7. Have I many faults ? 8. Does your father live here ? 9. Am I too proud of that? 10. You are too proud of it. 11. Is not your father too proud of his daughter ? 12. He is too proud of her. 13. Am I going too fast now, in your opin- ion? 14. Can I write all that this afternoon? 15. You can. 16. O, how fine all that iff! 17. Ought I to go there to-mor- row? 18. Is he still at work in the fields? 19. Do I know my lesson well enough? 20. You do not know it well enough (124. N. 2). 21. Do I do all my duty? 22. You do. it very well. 23. Do you receive many letters? 24. I do. 25. Do you see clearly? 26. Perhaps he will write to-mor- row. 27. He has labored in vain. 28. I have rarely seen so many peaches in one orchard. 29. Our native country is the Island of Ithaca, said he. 30. Pie had scarcely arrived when they gave him all the tokens of a sincere friendship. 31. You are indeed (Men) changed; I understand clearly the cause of it. Vocabulary. Aine, elder. Ladie, base. A present, now. Miserable, miserable. Comme, as. 3Ioitie, half. Foin, hay. Henvoyer, to send back. Garder, to keep. Trouver, to find. EXERCISE XXXI. — PRONOUNS. 1. He was always speaking thus of his friends. 2. Thus he dwelt in Paris, poor and miserable. 3. At least, he told me so. 4. Do you love your country ? Not to love it is base. 5. They give each other their hands. 6. Pay attention to me. 7. § 97. SYNTAX. THE PRONOUN. 181 They pay attention to you. 8. I will go to him. 9. He gives it to him. 10. Does he dream of (songer a) his mother? 11. Yes, he dreams of her. 12. What do you think of (judge of, § 117) that? 13. O, I find it very handsome. 14. Do you think of that every day ? i5. I think of it every day, but I do not think of you every day. 16. My dog comes to me when I call him. 17. Read it to me. 18. He always reads it to me. 19. Give it to me, but do not give it to him. 20. Give me the half of it. 21. Keep them or send them back. 22. His dog runs to him. 23. He never speaks of it, but he always speaks of him. 24. How much hay has he now? 25. He has twenty-five thousand pounds. 26. How many brothers have you ? 27. I have three. 28. My eldest brother is dead. 29. I trust in (se Jier) him as in a beloved father. • Vocabulary. Admirable, admirable. tfetonner, to be astonished. Agrement, delight, pleasure. Excellent, excellent. Appliquer, to apply. Faux, -sse, false. j&attendre a, to expect, to Journal, newspaper. rely upon. Machine, machine. Brebis, f. sheep. Marche, market. Campagne, country. Philadelphie, Philadelphia. Comete, comet. Simplicite, simplicity. Estimer, to esteem. Vache, cow. EXERCISE XXXII. — PRONOUNS. 1. I apply myself to it. 2. We expect it. 3. We expect him. 4. I speak to him and his brother. 5. Look for my cane, and bring it to me. 6. That man is beloved by his family. 7. This man is useful to his family. 8. My father is useful to and well beloved by his family. 9. The grocer will send me some. 10. I will send him some there. 11. Send me some. 12. Send me some there. 13. He sends me 132 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 97, 98. some there. 14. Take (lead) me there. 15. He takes me there. 16. Take him there. 17. Take John there. 18. Does he always think about his books? 19. Yes, he always thinks of them. 20. He speaks of his horses every day. 21. Do they speak of them ? 22. He speaks of his brother. 23. Does he speak of him always ? 24. He studies now, and will always study. 25. Does that child love his father and mother? 26. He loves and esteems them. 27. He reads very well, but he does not write. 28. Read, me a paper, no matter which. 29. I know nothing of it. 30. We believe it. 31. Who is called the father of his country ? He. 32. You do not love me : what matters it ? 33. Those children do not love their father, but he loves them. 34. My brother and I will come to-morrow. 35. The brother loves his sis- ter, and the sister loves her brother. 36. I like Philadelphia; its streets are excellent. 37. Those machines are admirable.. Everybody is astonished at their simplicity. 38. The country has its pleasures. 39. Her brother and sister are here. 40. Those sheep and cows are mine. 41. Are they yours? 42. They are (so). 43. Are you the woman who was here yes- terday? 44. I am (she), sir. 45. The story (histoire) which you tell is false. 46. Silver is found everywhere in that country. 47. It is said that a comet is seen. THE VERB. § 98. 1. The verb agrees with its subject or sub- jects, as in English ; so, after the relative qui, it takes the person and number of the antecedent. Ex. Nous obeissons a nos parents, et vous desobeissez aux vdtres. We obey our parents, and you disobey yours. Ce sera vous qui irez. It will be you who will go. 2. When several nouns not connected by conjunctions are nearly synonymous, or the nearest is most emphatic, the verb §98. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 133 agrees with the nearest. So when the subjects are connected by oil Ex. Richesse, dignites, honneurs, gloire, plaisir, perd ses charmes. Wealth, dignities, honors, glory, pleasure, lose their charms. La crainte ou V impuissance les empecha de remuer. Fear or weakness prevented them from moving. 3. JJun et V autre takes a plural verb. L\m ou Vautre takes a singular verb. Xes uns ou les autres takes a plural verb. Ex. L'u?i et Vautre font dit, both said so. L'uri ou Vautre Va dit, one or the other said so. Les uns ou les autres Vont dit, the one party or the other said so. 4. A noun and. pronoun, or two pronouns, not both in the third person, connected by ow, take a plural verb in the chief person. Ex. Vous ou moi parlerons, you or I will speak. Monpere ou moi irons, my father or I will go. Note. In the above examples nous may be inserted before the verb (91. N.), or the sentences may be thus expressed : — Ex. Nous parlerons, vous ou moi. Nous irons, mon pere ou moi. 5. JVi Vun ni Vautre, or two nouns joined by hi repeated, take a plural verb when the subjects might perform together the action denied; otherwise the verb is singular. Ex. Ni Vun ni Vautre ne sera V ' ambassadeur, neither will be the ambassador. Ni la force ni la douceur riy peuvent rien, neither force nor gentleness can avail anything. Ni Vun ni Vautre ne savent lire, neither can read. 6. (1.) A collective noun, when not followed by the geni- tive, takes a singular verb. Ex. Lafamille est encore en ville, the family is still in town. Lepeuple s'est r6volt6, the people have revolted. 12 134 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 98. (2.) A collective noun, when followed by the genitive, takes a plural verb when referring to the action of the individuals which the noun denotes. Ex. Une nuee de barbares desolerent le pays, a cloud of barbarians deso- lated the country. Un nuee de traits obscurcit Vair, a cloud of arrows darkened the air. Unefoule de citoyens remplissaient les rues, a crowd of citizens filled the streets. . 7. Cest becomes ce sont when the predicate nominative is third person plural, especially when qui follows. Ex. Sont-ce eux qui vendent ces .beaux chdles ? is it they who sell those beautiful shawls ? Cest nous qui avoiis cela, it is we who have that. Note 1. For it is, it was, &c, use il est, il etait, &c, in the following cases: (1.) before an adjective or adjective phrase referring in sense to w r hat comes after ; (2.) directly before the word temps/ (3.) before the hour of the day; and, (4.) when directly referring to an antecedent noun. Use Jest, c'etait, &c, in other cases. Ex. (1 .) II est necessaire d'y alter, it is necessary to go there. (2.) 11 est temps d'ecrire, it is time to write. (3.) II est onze heures, it is eleven o'clock. (4.) J'ai casse ma montre ; elle est chez Vhorloger. I have broken my watch ; it is at the watchmaker's. Note 2. For he, she, or they, before the verb to be, use ce when a noun follows, accompanied by an article (def., indef., or part.), or a possessive or demonstrative adjective. Ex. Cest un Anglais, he is an Englishman. Ce sont des Anglais, they are Englishmen. Cest la couturi&re, she is the seamstress. Cest mon oncle, he is my uncle. Rem. Cest introduces many sentences in French, the proper subject following with que. Ex. Qu'est-ce que voire oncle ? what is your uncle ? Cest un marchand que mon oncle, my uncle is a merchant. §99. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 135 § 99, 1. The present participle, (1.) as a participle, is invariable; (2.) as an adjective, it agrees in gender and number with its noun. Ex. (1.) Les tribus errant dans I'Afrique, the tribes icandering in Africa. (2.) Les tribus errantes de I'Afriqtie, the icandering tribes of Africa. 2. The past participle, when used without an auxiliary, always agrees in gender and number with its noun. Ex. II a trois enfants cheris, he has three beloved children. U)ie femme bien elevee toujours le fait, a well-edticated woman always does it. ' 3. In passive verbs, and neuter verbs not impersonal, con- jugated with etre, the past participle agrees in gender and number with the subject. Ex. Leurs maisons so?it vendues, their houses are sold. Mes freres sont sortis, my brothers have goire out. Note. When nous or vous is used, referring to one person, the agree- ing adjective or participle is in the singular. Ex. Nous sommes aime de nos sujets, tee are beloved-by our subjects. Vous Stes le seul, you are the only one. Vous y ties alle, you went there. 4. In reflectiye verbs, and verbs conjugated with avoir, the past participle agrees in gender and number with the direct object when that object precedes it. Ex. Lucrece s'est tuee, Lucretia killed herself. Quelles maisons avez-vous achetees ? what houses have you bought ? 5. Fait, before an infinitive, the past - participle of an im- personal verb, and all participles not included in 2, 3, 4, are invariable. Ex. Les livres que vous avez fait venir, the books which you have sent for. 11 est arrive des malJieurs, misfortunes have happened. Nous avons requ des lettres, we have received letters. 136 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 100-104. § 10©. Faire before an active infinitive in French means, to have the act performed ; before a neuter in- finitive, it gives it an active signification, and means, to do the act indicated by the verb. Ex. Je ferai batir une maison, I will have a house built. Le cuisinier fait rotir la viande, the cook roasts the meat. § lOl. Use il fait, active, impersonal, referring to the weather, but use est when temps is the subject. Ex. II fait beau temps ce matin, it is fine weather this morning. Le temps est couvert aujoura" hui, the weather is cloudy to-day. § 1©2« English participial nouns after other prepo- sitions than en, and verbs after other verbs (not auxilia- ries), are turned into French by infinitives. Ex. lis sont revenus sans voir la France, they have returned without seeing France. Ilsfurent obliges de venir plus a" une fois, they were obliged to come more than once. Note. En precedes no form of the verb except the present participle. Ex. En arrivant dans Vile il rencontra son phe, on arriving at the island he met his father. § 103. Reflective verbs, and active verbs with on as a subject, also active infinitives, often take the place in French of passives in English. Ex. Les mauvaises nouvelles se repandent bientot, bad news is soon spread. On leflatte, mais on ne Vaime pas, he is flattered, but he is not beloved. Us sont bien a plaindre, they are much to be pitied, § 104o 1. Avoir is used to express age, the object, an, s., ans, pi., being always expressed. Ex. Quel age a voire frtre ? how old is your brother ? II a seize ans, he is sixteen years old. Quel age avez-vous ? how old are you ? J'ai vingt ans, I am. twenty. §§ 104-106. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 137 2. Avoir is generally used, etre sometimes, to express the day of the month. Ex. Nous avons le douze avril, it is the twelfth of April. C'etait le quatorze mai, it was the fourteenth of May. 3. litre, impersonal, is used to express the time of the day, heure, s., heures, pi., being always expressed. Ex. II est trois heures ct demie, it is half past three. Note 1. Instead of douze heures, always use midi for noon, and minuit for midnight. Ex. // est vemc a minuit, he came at midnight. II y restera jusqu' a midi, he will remain there until noon. Note 2. For fractions of hours use additive and sub- tractive expressions, with et, and, and moins, less. Ex. II est midi moins un quart, it wants quarter of twelve (noon). II est minuit et quart, it is quarter past twelve (midnight). § IO«I. II est alle, he has gone, and has not re- turned ; il a ete, he has been, or he went, and has returned. Ex. M. B. est alle en France, Mr. B. has gone to France. J"'ai ete a Paris et a Rome, I have been to Paris and Rome. § 106. Falloir, to be necessary, to need, to want, is used, (1.) absolutely; (2.) it takes the dative of the person needing, and the infinitive; (3.) it takes the dative of the person needing, and the accusative of the thing needed ; or, (4.) it takes the subjunctive with que. Ex. (1.) II a fallu, it was necessary. (2.) 11 luifaut aller chercher son livre, he must go for his book. (3.) 11 mefaut cet argent, i" must have that money. (4.) Ilfaut queje sache tout cela, I must know all that. 12* 138 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 106-109. Note. JSeoir, to become, and tarder, to long (impersonal)^ take the dative of the person, and the infinitive with de / and seoir may take the dative alone. Ex. II ne vous sied pas de dire cela, it do.es not become you to say that. II me tarde de vous voir, mon ami, I long to see you, my friend. Cette robe vous sied, that dress becomes you. § 107. "Pcfetr, devoir, and aZ?er may be used as auxiliaries, thus : — Je viens de le faire, I have just done it. Je venais de le faire, I had just done it. Je dois fe faire, I am to Jo it. Je devais le faire, I was to do it. Je vais fe faire, I am going to do it. .Tallais le faire, I zcas going to do it. And so through the different persons of the present and imperfect indica- tive. § 108, Render will by the present of vouloir when a principal verb ; when an auxiliary, by the future of the verb. Ex. Voulez-vous revenir cette apres-midi? tcill you return this afternoon? Reviendrez-vous cette apres-midi ? shall you return this afternoon ? § 109. Mener, to lead, conduct, is generally said of animate objects : porter, to carry, of inanimate objects. In composition with these words, en = from, a = to. Ex. Elle mene sa petite jille avec elle, she leads her little daughter with her. II porte ses livres sans diffi,culte, he carries his books without difficulty. Amenez voire Jille avec vous, bring your daughter with you. Emmenez ce chien-la, take away that dog. Apportez-moi ces livres-la, bring me those books. Emportez ceux-ci, et apportez-moi ceux-la, take these away, and bring me those. Note. Porter means also to wear, and se porter, to do, referring to one's health. Ex. II porte toujours un habit noir, he always wears a black coat. Comment se porte M. voire ph -ef how is your father r §§ 110-112. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 139 § 110. Prendre, to take ; voter, to rob, steal ; ache- ter, to buy ; demander, to ask for, inquire for ; and payer, to pay, govern the accusative alone, or the accusative of the thing and the dative of the person. Ex. II prend le canif a son frere, he takes the penknife from his brother, lis out void des livres a mon pere, they have stolen some boohs from my father. Achetez-vous du pain au boulanger ? do you buy bread of the baker f lis nous les demandent, they ask tis for them. A-t-ilpaye le livre au libraire ? has he paid the bookseller for the book? § 11 1. Marier and epouser are thus distinguished : — Marier (active), to give in marriage, to marry. Marier (passive), to be married. Se marier, to get married. Epouser, to take in marriage. Ex. L'archeveque de Paris les a maries, the archbishop of Paris married them. Voire cousin est marie avec ma cousine, your cousin is married to my cousin. Elle se mariera Vannee prochaine, she will get married next year. II a epouse une de mes cousines, he has married a cousin of mine.* § 112. To express size, use avoir before the number, and de before the noun of dimension. Ex. Notre maison a trente pieds de largeur, our house is thirty feet broad. Note 1. When the size is assumed, and not affirmed, use de also before the number. Ex. II a tine maison de trente pieds de largeur, he has a house thirty feet broad. Note 2. In comparing sizes, use etre, and de before the number expressing the excess. Ex. Votre maison est plus large que la mienne de trente pieds, your house is thirty feet broader than mine. * A friend, &c, of mine, a friend, &c, of yours, &c, is thus expressed : — Un de mes amis, a friend of mine. Un de vos amis, a friend of yours. 140 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 113-115. § 113, Two imperatives in English, connected by a conjunction, are sometimes expressed in French by an imperative and an infinitive, without a conjunction. Ex. Allez faire voire ouvrage, go and do your work. Allez voir mon frere, go and see my brother. § 114, Verbs, adjectives, and prepositions can have a common regimen only when they govern the same case in the same way. Ex. II attaqua la ville, et s'en empara. He attacked and took possession of the city. Je suis sensible aux preuves de voire amitie, eij'en sids content. I am sensible of and satisfied with the proofs of your friendship. II parte contre ses amis et en leur faveur. He speaks against and in favor of his friends. § 11*5. The following verbs govern an infinitive without an intervening preposition : — Aimer mieux, to prefer. Laisser, to let. Avoir beau, to be in vain. Oser, to dare. Alter, to go, to be on the point of. Penser, to think, to fancy. Compter, to intend. Pouvoir, to be able. Courir, to run. Preferer, to prefer. Daigner, to deign. Pretendre, to pretend. Desirer, to desire. Savoir, to know. Devoir, to owe, to have to. Sembler, to seem. Entendre, to hear. Souhaiter, to wish. Envoyer, to send. Valoir mieux, to be better. Esperer, to hope. Venir, to come and. Faire, to make. Voir, to see. Falloir, to be necessary. Vouloir, to wish, to be willing. Ex. J'aime mieux lire, I prefer to read. Vous avez beau le dire, it is in vain that you say so. Je vais voir mes amis, I am going to see my friends. Je compte y alter, I intend to go there. Courez ouvrir cette porte, run and open that door. Note 1. Aimer mieux and valoir mieux take que de before the 6econd infinitive. 115-117. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 141 Ex. Jaime mietix lire que d'ecrire, I had rather read than write. II vaut mieux travailler que d'etre oisif, it is better to work than to be . idle. Note 2. The above verbs are not separated, as in English, from the following verb ; except that the object of the latter verb, if a pronoun, may come between them. Ex. II laisse tomber son couteau, he lets his knife fall. Je veux le voir, I wish to see him. § 116. The following verbs govern the infinitive through the preposition de ; — Achever de, to finish. Bruler de, to long. Cesser de, to cease. Commander de, to command. Conseiller de, to advise. Defendre de, to forbid. Se depecher de, to make haste. Dire de, to say, to tell. Dispenser de, to exempt from. Se dispenser de, to dispense with. Empecher de, to prevent. Eviter de, to avoid. Se fatter de, to flatter one's self. Se hdter de, to make haste. Jurer de, to swear. Menacer de, to threaten. Negliger de, to neglect. Oublier de, to forget. Se passer de, to do without. Per?nettre de, to permit. Prier de, to beg. Promettre de, to promise. Se proposer de, to propose. Se rappeler de, to remember. Refuser de, to refuse. Regretter de, to regret. Se rejouir de, to rejoice. Supplier de, to entreat. Tarder de, to long. Trembler de, to tremble. Venir de, to have just. Manquer de, to fail. Ex. Avez-vous acheve de lire? have you finished reading? Je bride de voir mon cousin, I long to see my cousin. II ne cesse de lefaire, he does not cease to do it. II lux commande de le faire, he commands him to do it. Nous lew conseillons de partir, we advise them to set out. § 117. The following verbs govern the genitive with de .: — Abuser de, to abuse. S'affliger de, to grieve for. S'approcher de, to approach. Changer de, to change. Se defer de, to mistrust. Dispenser de, to exempt from. Douter de, to doubt. S' eloigner de, to withdraw from. Sefdcher de,* to be angry with. Feliciter de, to congratulate for. * See List of Idioms, &c, § 139. 142 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 117-119. Ge'tnir de, to grieve for. Penser do, to judge of. S'informer de, to inquire. Profiler de, to profit by. Jouir de, to enjoy. . .Se rejouir de, to rejoice in. Sejouer de, to. make sport of. Remercier de, to thank for. Louer de, to praise for. Eire de, to laugh at. Medire de, to slander. Rougir de, to blush at. Se mefier de, to mistrust. Se servir de, to use. Se passer de, to do without. Se souvenir de, to remember. Ex. II abuse de ma confiance, he abuses my confidence. Nous nous affiigeons de cela, we grieve for that. Approchez-vous d.\ifeic, approach the fire. II change de nom, he changes his name. Nous nous defions de ltd, we mistrust him. Note. When the object of these verbs is a pronoun referring to things, it becomes en before the verb. Ex. Nous nous en servo?is, we use it. -lis s'enjouent, they make sport of it. § 118. The following verbs govern the infinitive through the preposition a : — Aimer a, to like. Sefatiguer a, to weary one's self in. S'appliquer a, to apply. Se mettre a, to commence. Apprendre a, to learn. Penser a, to think of, to intend. & ' attacher a, to stick to. Se plaire a., to delight in. S'attetidre a, to expect. Reussir a, to succeed in. Avoir a, to have. Servir h, to serve. Avoir peine a, to have difficulty in. Songer a, to think, to intend. Chercher d, to strive. Tarder a, to be long about. Engager a, to induce. Tenir a, to intend, to aim. Enseigner a, to teach. Venir a, to happen. Eire a, to be engaged in. Ex. Jaime kfaire cela, I like to do that. Je m' applique a itudier, I apply myself to study. Bs apprennent a lire, they learn to read. II ^attache a ecrire, he sticks to writing. II s 1 'attend a alter, he expects to go. § 119. The following verbs govern the dative with S'amuser a, to take pleasure in. Dd plaire a, to displease. Convenir a, to suit. Desobeir a, to disobey. §§ 119, 120. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 143 Dispenser d, to bestow upon. Plaire a, to please. Echapper a, to escape. Se plaire a, to take pleasure in. Manquer a, to offend. Ressembler a, to resemble. Obeir a, to obey. Songer a, to think of. Pardonner a, to forgive. Survivre a, to survive. Penser a, to think of. Ex. Notts nous amusons a cela, we take pleasure in that. Cela convient a mon p&re, that suits my father. Nous deplaisons a nos amis, we displease our friends. II desobeit a son maitre, he disobeys his teacher. II dispense ses faveurs a tous ses amis, he bestows his favors upon all his friends. Note. "When the object of these verbs is a pronoun, it takes its regu- lar place before the verb without a preposition. Ex. II lui survivra, he will survive him. II songe a lui (§ 83, Ex. 5), he thinks of him. § 120. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 1. Yerbs expressing consent, command, doubt, de- sire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, joy, regret, fear, or apprehension, are followed by que with the sub- junctive. Ex. Je per /nets qu'il vie?ine, I permit him to come. J'ordonne qu'il aille, I order him to go. Je ne doute pas qu'il ne le fasse, I do not doubt that he will do it. Je veux que vous alliez, I wish you to go. Je suis surpris que vous veniez, I am surprised that you should come. Je desire que vous le voyiez, I desire you to see him. Ilfaut quej'ecrive, I ought to write. Je suis ravi que nous soyons ici, I am delighted that we are here. Je suis f ache que vous soyez malade, I am sorry that you are sick. Je crains qu'il ne vienne, I fear that be will come. Je crams qu'il ne vienne pas, I fear that he will not come. Note 1. Verbs of joy and regret take the infinitive with de when the subject does not change ; so generally use the infinitive when the s»bject does not change. Ex. Je suis ravi d'etre ici, I am delighted to be here. JesuisfdcM d'etre malade, I am sorry to be sick. 144 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 120. 2. Verbs expressing affirmation, or something certain and positive, take que with the indicative ; but when negative or interrogative, they take que with the subjunctive to express a doubtful idea. Ex. Je suis sur qu'il le fera, I am sure that he will do it. Je ne suis pas sur qu'il le fasse, I am not sure that he will do it. Etes-vous sur qxCil le fasse ? are you sure that he will do it ? 3. A verb in a relative or other subordinate clause is put in the indicative to express a reality, in the subjunctive to express a mere conception, whether actual or not. Ex. II cherche un precepteur qui sache lui enseigner le franqais. He is seeking for a teacher who can teach him French. II a un precepteur qui sait enseigner le franqais. He has a teacher who can teach him French. 4. A verb in a relative clause after superlative relatives, after le seul, le premier, le dernier, or after negative or interrogative clauses, is put in the subjunctive. Ex. V Evangile est le plus beau present que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. The Gospel is the best gift which God has given to man. Voila le seul chapeau quej'aie. That is the only hat I have. Cest la premiere personne quej'aie vue. He is the first person whom I saw. Cest le dernier volume que nous ayons. It is the last volume that we have. II n'a pas de precepteur qui sache lui enseigner le franqais. He has no teacher who can teach him French. A-t-il un prdcepteur qui sache lui enseigner le franqais f Has he a teacher who can teach him French ? 5. As a clause after the following conjunctions, and con- junctive words and phrases, denotes a mere conception, wheth- er actual or not, its verb must be put in the subjunctive. Afin que, that, in order that. Be.crainteque, 7 ,. A moms que, unless. JJepeur que, ) Avant que, before. En eas que, in case of. Bien que, though, although. Jusqxtb, ce que, till, until. j 120, 121. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 145 Loin que, far from. Quelque . . . que, Malgre" que, although. Quel . . . que, \ whatever. Nonobstant que, notwithstanding. Quoi que, Non que, non pas que, not that. Quoique, although. Pose que, supposing that. Sans que, without. Pour que, in order that. Si peu que, however little. Pourvu que, provided that. Soit que y whether. Que, until. Suppose que, suppose that. Ex. Je ne puis parler sans qu'il m'interrompe. ; I cannot speak without his interrupting me. Soit que vous ayez raison ou tort. Whether you are right or wrong. Je ne le ferai pas que je ne Z'aie vu. I will not do it until I have seen him. Note. Use quelque, s., quelques, pi., before a noun ; quel, quelle, quels, quelles (adj.), and que (conj.), before a verb; and quelque, however, as an abverb, and therefore indeclinable, before an adjective. Ex. Quelques vertus qu'il aie, whatever virtues he has. Quelles que soient ses vertus, whatever his virtues may be. Quelque grandes que soient ses vertus, however great his virtues may be. 6. The subjunctive is used in elliptical phrases, where the principal proposition is omitted. Ex. Queje vienne, let me come. Qu'il vienne, let him come. § 131. USE OF THE TENSES. I. SIMPLE TENSES. 1. The present tense refers to present time, and is both progressive and indefinite. Ex. J'icris, I write, or I am writing. Note 1. The present historical is used, as in English and Latin, in ani- mated narration. Ex. On m'appela, j'accourus ; je le vois etendu par terre. They called me, I ran up ; I see him stretched on the ground. 13 146 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 121. Note 2. The present may be used of an action or state begun in the past and still continuing. Ex. 11 y a trois a?is qiieje suis ici, I have been here three years. 2. The past progressive is the descriptive tense in French, and, besides being the progressive past, may express repeated or customary past action. Ex. J'ecrivais qiiand vous entrdtes, I was writing when you entered. .Tallais au Louvre tous les jours, I used to go to the Louvre every day. 3. The past indefinite is the narrative tense in French (aorist in Greek), and is used only of momentary action, in a period of time entirely elapsed. Ex. Je vis voire frire la semaine dernilre, I saw your brother last week. Note. This tense is rarely used except in historical narration, its place being supplied by the present perfect. Ex. J'ai vu voire frere la semaine dernihre, I saw your brother last week. 4. The future tense is both future progressive and future indefinite. Ex. J'ecrirai, I shall write, or I shall be writing. Note. All the tenses denoting progressive action mag also be ex- pressed by the corresponding tenses of etre, followed by the infinitive with &. Ex. Je suis a ecrire, I am writing. J'etais a ecrire, I was writing. Je serai a ecrire, I shall be writing. II. COMPOUND TENSES. 1. The present perfect is used of a period of time not yet elapsed ; and also very generally for the past indefinite, especially in familiar conversation. Ex. Nous avons vu voire frere aujourd'hui, we have seen your brother to- day. Notes avons vu voire frere hier, we saw your brother yesterday. 2. The past perfect {principal) denotes action completed in the past, and is used generally in principal, sometimes in subordinate clauses. §121. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 147 Ex. iTavais fini quand il entra, I had finished when he came in. Note. When this tense is used in subordinate clauses, it follows the past progressive in the principal clause. Ex. Des que j'avais lu quelques pages je me promenais, as soon as I had read a few pages I used to take a walk. 3. The past perfect {subordinate) denotes action completed in the past, and is generally used in subordinate clauses, which are introduced by des que, aussitot que, as soon as ; quand or lorsque, when. Des que /eus lu quelques pages je sortis, as soon as I had read a few pages I went out. Quand feus fini il entra, when I had finished he came in. 4. The future perfect denotes action which will be com- pleted at some definite future time. Ex. J"aurai fini mon ouvrage, I shall have finished my work. Note. After adverbs of time, use a future or future perfect, where, in English, a present or perfect is used in a future sense. Ex. Quand votis serez pret notis irons nous prome?ier, when you are ready we will go to walk. Quand j'aurai fini mon ouvrage je viendrai, when I have finished my work, I will come. III. CONDITIONALS. 1. The conditional present denotes that a thing would happen on a certain condition, and corresponds to the imper- fect subjunctive in the apodosis (in Latin), the protasis being expressed by the imperfect indicative. Ex. J'irais avec vous si J'avais le temps. I would go with you if I had the time. Or, I xcould go with you if I should have the time. Note. This tense is also used in sentences of wishing. Ex. Je voudrais qu'ilfit beau dimanche. I wish it would be fair weather on Sunday. 2. The conditional past denotes that a thing would have hajypened on a certain condition, and corresponds to the plu- 148 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 121, 122. perfect subjunctive in the apodosis (in Latin), the protasis being expressed by the pluperfect indicative. Ex. E lui aurait donne cette place s'il Tavait demandee. He would have given him that place had he asked for it.* § 122. CONNECTION OF TENSES. 1. The present or future, whether simple or compound, is followed by the present subjunctive, or by the perfect for completed action. Ex. Pensez-vous gu'ils le fassent ? do you think that they will do it ? J'ai ordonne qu'il y aille, I have ordered him to go. J'ordonnerai qu'il y aille, I "will order him to go. Croyez-vous qu'il y soit alle ? do you believe that he has gone f Note 1. The present may be followed by the past subjunctive when some conditional expression occurs in the sentence. * The following is a comparative view of the forms of conditional sentences in Greek, Latin, and French. 1. Certainty. Et ti t'x w > SiSiajii. "} Si quid habeo, do. C If I have anything, I give it. Si fai quelque chose, je le donne. j 2. Present Impossibility. Ei' ti si\ov, iSi5cL)v av. ~\ Si quid haberem, darem. C If I had anything, 1 would give it. Si j'avais quelque chose, je le donnerais. ) 3» Past Impossibility. Si quid habuissem, dedissem. C If I had had anything, I would have El' tl eaxov sdcoica av Si quid habuissem, ( Si j'avais eu quelque chose, je Vaurais donne. ) given it 4. Uncertainty. 'E ti i'x&>, Scoacj. ~\ Si quid habeam, dabo. C If I have any thing, I will give it. Si j'ai quelque chose, je le donnerai. j 5. Possibility. EI' ti s^oipn, SiSoirjf av. ~\ Si quid haberem, darem. C If I should have anything, I would give it. Sij'avais quelque chose, je le donnerais. ) ^§ 122, 123. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 149 Ex. Je ne crois pas qu'ils eussent ete pendus si les temoins fussent arrives plus tdt. (137. 3. Exc.) I do not believe that they would have been hanged if the witnesses had come sooner. Note 2. When the present perfect is used for the past indefinite, it is followed by the past subjunctive. Ex. Je le ltd ai envoye hier afin qu'il le lut. I sent it to him yesterday that he might read it. 2. Past tenses and conditionals, both simple and compound, are followed by the past subjunctive, or by the past complete for completed action. Ex. C'etait le meilleur acteur qu'il eut jamais vu, He was the best actor that he had ever seen, II serait juste qu'il participat a vos profits. It would be just that he should share in your profits. Croyiez-vous qu'il s'en fut alle sans vous voir t Did you believe that he had gone without seeing you ? t § 123. Vocabulary. Ambassadeur, ambassador. Foide, crowd. JBiens, riches. Gazelle, gazelle. Chagrin, vexation. Honneur, honor. Chdle, shawl. Honte, shame. Dignite, dignity. JVbuvelle, news. Douceur, gentleness. Parti, party. Ensemble, together. Seduction, persuasion. Entrainer, to attract, draw. Tendrement, tenderly. Force, violence. Terreur, terror. EXERCISE XXXin. — VERBS. 1. Gazelles love roses, violets, and many other flowers. 2. A friend of mine, who is in Paris, has written to me. 3. You, who are my friend, will write to me. 4. My father, my son, and myself have finished our task. 5. Was it I who told tfiatnews? 6. You, your brother, and I read together. 7. 13* 150 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 123. My father and mother love me tenderly. 8. Persausion or terror has drawn him into the party of the rebels. 9. Wealth, dignities, honors, everything disappears. 10. What will be his shame and his vexation (chagrins) ! 11. Neither the one nor the other will be elected president. 12. Neither violence nor gentleness avail (pottvoir) anything here. 13. The crowd of the poor is very great. 14. A crowd of poor peo- ple came every day. 15. Most (la plupart) men think so. 16. A nation of heroes dwells there. 17. A crowd of young people were coming in. 18. Is it they who have done all that? 19. Yes, it is they. 20. It is we who will do it. 21. They are Frenchmen. 22. They are French. 23. It is as- tonishing that you believe that. 24. Has not your brother come? 25. It is astonishing. 26. It is half past ten o'clock. 27. It is time to finish this lesson. Vocabulary. Admirer, to admire. Jambe, leg. Pouillir, irr. to boil. - Juillet, July. Copier, to copy. Parceque, because. Cordonnier, shoemaker. Pourquoi, why. Danser, to dance. Prendre, to take. Doigt, ringer. Proposer, to propose. Fraise, strawberry. Pacommoder, to mend. Frequenter, to* frequent, Soldier, shoe. crowd. Spectacle, show. Grace, grace, favor. EXERCISE XXXIV. — VERBS. 1. His sister, dancing with grace, is much admired. 2. Is your house to sell or to let ? 3. They are much es- teemed. 4. I have seen many crowded shows. 5. Are not those flowers admired ? 6. The night will soon be over. 7. A woman passed. 8. My sisters came this morning. 9. They have copied the lesson. 10. That little boy has cut § 123. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 151 his finger. 11. Have you eaten the strawberries which you picked? 12. My brother, why did you come ? 13. Because my cousins came. 14. Have you picked any flowers? 15. I have picked them. 16. I have picked some. 17. Give me the letter which I told you to copy. 18. He has broken his leg. 19. I do not know how he broke it. 20. Have you had my shoes mended? 21. Yes, sir, I have had them mended. 22. Has the shoemaker made my shoes? 23. He has made them. 24. Has the cook boiled the meat? 25. Has she boiled it ? 26. It is fine weather this morning. 27. The weather was cloudy yesterday. 28. I have an affair to propose to you. 29. Will you set out without taking a glass of wine? 30. I never take wine. 31. Come and see me. 32. I have just seen my sister. 33. All that is easily seen. 34. My little brother is three years old. 35. How old is your sister? 36. Is it not midnight? 37. No, it is half past eleven. 38. It is the twenty-first of July. 39. It is the third of July. 40. It wants ten minutes of ten. Vocabulary. Arrivee, arrival. Assurer, to assure. Avertir, to inform. Blesser, to wound, to offend against. Cacher, to conceal. Combattre, irr. to combat, fight. Construire, irr. to construct. Gouleur, color. Dessein, design, intention. Florir, to flourish. Hospitalite, hospitality. Instruire, irr. to instruct. Jupiter, Jupiter. Nation, nation. Hivage, shore, bank. Sacrifice, m. sacrifice. Sentir, irr. to perceive. Vaisseau, vessel. Verite, truth. Voyage, voyage. EXERCISE XXXV.— VERBS. 1. Thus flourished the new city upon the sea shore. 2. They made haste to inform the king of the arrival of Ulysses' 152 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 123. son. 3. He claimed his hospitality, telling him his name. 4. I feel the misfortune of not being able to find my father. 5. You remember the voyage that you made with me. 6. I would rather displease you than offend against the truth. 7. Labors make us grow old before the time. 8. He came and informed him of that. 9. He was to make a sacrifice to Jupiter. 10. He had just killed his enemy. 11. He changed color. 12. He let my knife fall. 13. He cannot do it. 14. Against whatever nation (that) you have to fight, the vic- tory will be in your hands. 15. Profit by what (ce que) the gods give you. 16. You take pleasure in making sport of an unhappy one. 17. They wish to conceal their designs. 18. You assure me that you have been there. 19. They have served to instruct me. 20. As soon as he finished re- lating his troubles, he asked assistance of them. 21. I will send you back as soon as the war is finished. 22. I will send you back with the best vessels which have ever been made. 23. Dream not of acquiring glory. 24. Do we delay taking arms? 25. He does not allow us to doubt it. 26. Why does he doubt my word? Vocabulary. Accompag?ier,to accompany. Menacer, to threaten, Chirurgien, surgeon. Vitrier, glazier. Diner, to dine. Washington, Washington. Frapper, to strike. EXERCISE XXXVI. — VERBS. 1. Has your sister begged you to accompany her ? 2. She has promised to come and dine with me. 3. Our friend knows how to read many languages. 4. She prefers to dwell here. 5. I desire to do it. 6. Where do you intend to dwell? 7. I must remain here. 8. I intend (penser) to give it to my son. 9. He has forbidden me to speak to my brother. 10. He has commanded me to do it. 11. My sister has neglected § 123. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 153 to speak to her cousin. 12. I advise you to take it. 13. Do you not long to go with him? 14. Have you refused to sell him any? 15. I have refused to do it. 16. Do not fail to pay the grocer this evening. 17. He stops writing to me. 18. He told me to come to-morrow. 19. I threatened to strike him. 20. Do you propose to intrust that money to him? 21. Your brother is not there; where has he gone? 22. He has been to Philadelphia this week, and he has gone to Washington now. 23. You need a watch. 24. I need one also. 25. I long to see him. 26. Has he taken his brother with him? 27. I have brought my two little daugh- ters. 28. Have you brought the books ? 29. I will bring them. 30. It is becoming for you to go there. 31. I am going to write, to my brother to-morrow morning. 32. It is better to go there than to remain here. 33. We must send him our horse ; his is sick. 34. Have you paid him for the windows? 35. I have paid the glazier. 36. Have they (on) taken your money? 37. They have stolen my books. 38. Did you buy your books of that bookseller ? 39. I took my sister with me. 40. Shall you wear a black coat to-morrow? 41. Come and dine with me to-day. 42. What must the surgeon have ? Vocabulary. Age, old. Nymphe, nymph. Conseil, counsel. Pouce, thumb, inch. Deesse, goddess. Presser, to urge, press. Eveque, bishop. ' Profondeur, depth. Grandeur, size. Putts, well. Lapin, rabbit. Peconnaitre, irr. to perceive, Pargeur, breadth. to recognize. Longueur, length. JSagesse, wisdom. Mentor, Mentor. Theme, m. exercise, theme. 154 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 123. EXERCISE XXXVII. — VERBS. 1. Is Captain A. married ? 2. Is your youngest sister mar- ried ? 3. She will marry when she is old enough. 4. Who married the general and Miss N. ? 5. The bishop married them. 6. My brother was married last week. 7. Is Mr. G. going to marry Miss M. ? 8. Yes, sir; he is going to marry her. 9. My sister is not married, but she will be married to- morrow. 10. Whom will she marry? 11. She will marry Mr. L.'s brother. 12. The archbishop will marry them. 13. Of what size is this chamber? 14. It is twenty-five feet long and ten feet wide. 15. My house is larger than yours by ten feet. 16. Do you know how deep this well is? 17. It is forty feet deep. 18. He is three inches taller than I. 19. He writes to, and receives news from, his sister every day. 20. The nymphs began to sing. 21. He perceived the wisdom of the counsels which Mentor had just given him. 22. O god- dess ! pardon my grief. 23. She did not dare to urge him more. 24. I long to know them. 25. He prevents me from doing it. 26. I mistrust him as my most dangerous enemy. 27. He pleases my father. 28. He is pleased (seplaire) with that. 29. She resembles her mother. 30. He takes pleasure in his books. 31. The rabbit escaped from the dog. 32. I intend (penser) to remain here. 33. He was engaged in writing all day. 34. He had difficulty in finishing his lesson. 35. It suits me and my brother. 36. I will do without that. 37. We have finished (achever) writing this exercise. Vocabulary. Assister, to help. Drapeau, flag. Avenir, the future. Gagrner, to earn, gain. Confiance, confidence. Phrase, phrase. Difficult^, difficulty. JSavoir, to know, to be able § 123. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 155 EXERCISE XXXVIII. — VERBS. 1. Why did you not obey your father? 2. He looked for that phrase in vain. 3. I looked in vain : I saw neither man nor house. 4. In vain they earn money: they will never be rich. 5. Run and look for my pen and pencil. 6. Do you deign to do that ? 7. Whom did you hear say all that ? 8. He sends me to look for my father. 9. I hoped to receive a letter to-day. 10. I saw him writing this morning. 11. Do you wish to go with us? 12. He pretended to be sick. 13. I hear him speak. 14. Send for (ckercher) him. 15. I hope to meet him. 16. I see your sister coming. 17. We can dispense with reading this afternoon. 18. He avoids study- ing, and he cannot read without difficulty. 19. He flatters himself that he knows all that. 20. We have sworn to de- fend the flag of the United States. 21. The future of my country : I tremble to look upon it. 22. I beg you to come and assist me. 23. I recollect seeing (having seen) some beautiful flowers there. 24. Captain H. abuses his men (sol- dats). 25. He has abused my confidence. 26. The dog ap- proache'd the fire. 27. We can dispense with that. 28. Withdraw from the fire. 29. They enjoy the confidence of the president. 30. We make use of your books. 31. Do you mistrust us ? 32. We do. 33. They slander everybody. 34. Everybody is angry with them. Vocabulary. Action, deed, action. Indiquer, to tell, show. Pienfait, benefit, blessing. Latin, Latin. Ponheur, good fortune. Malheur, misfortune. Constamment, constantly. JVier, to deny. Dompter, to subdue. Perte, loss. Effronterie, shamelessness. Pluie, rain. Endroit, place. Prudent, prudent. JErreur, error. Pespecter, to respect. 156 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 123. EXERCISE XXXIX. —VERBS. 1. We are grieved at your misfortune. 2. We blush for his shamelessness. 3. He laughs at his cousin's errors. 4. We rejoice at your good fortune. 5. They praised us for our brave deeds. 6. He thanks you for it. 7. They have inquired about you. 8. I congratulate you upon your arrival. 9. They groan over (de) their sad loss. 10. He loves to read and write. 11. God bestows upon us many blessings. 12. He bestows them upon all his children. 13. They obey their parents. 14. We are learning to respect them. 15. He con- fines himself to {s\ittacher a) study constantly. 16. You apply yourself to reading. 17. We become weary of study- ing. 18. His scholars take pleasure in studying French and Greek. 19. They begin to succeed. 20. We fail in our duty. 21. Our courage fails us. 22. We have induced them to re- main with us. 23. We have succeeded in conquering that country. 24. We intended to do it last year. 25. They ex- pected to conquer us, but they hoped for it in vain. 26. They have survived all their friends. 27. Have they survived them ? 28. I do not believe that he is coming. 29. I feared that he would come. 30. He is the tallest man that I know. 31. Come in without his seeing you. 32. I will wait until {que) the rain is over (passed). 33. I saw no one whom I knew. 34. Show me a place where that can be found. 35. Choose a wife who is prudent. 36. He has a wife who is prudent. 37. Let me tell you what happened. 38. I deny that's being so. 39. I do not deny that's being so. 40. I doubt whether {que) he will do it. Vocabulary. Assista?ice, assistance. Hecompenser, to sepay. Courage, courage. Resulter, to follow. Douteux, doubtful. Richesses, pi. riches. Enchanter, to delight. Suivre, irr. to follow. Montrer, to show. Traduire, irr. to translate. Prix, price, prize. § 123. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 157 EXERCISE XL. — VERBS. 1. Do you doubt that he will do it ? 2.1 fear that that may- cause you pain. 3. I do not fear that that may cause you pain. 4. I am delighted at your being here. 5. I am de- lighted at being here. 6. He spoke to me yesterday. 7. He spoke to me to-day. 8. I am certain that he is here. 9. It is doubtful whether {que) he is here. 10. This is the most beautiful gift which I have ever received. 11. It is the only volume that we have. 12. He must come. 13. It is right that he should know it. 14. It is certain that he knows it. 15. It follows that you are my friend. 16. It often happens that one is deceived. 17. I believe that we have some. 18. Do you believe that, we have any? 19. I do not believe that we have any. 20. I have a scholar who can translate it. 21. It is not certain that you know my friend. 22. However good you may be, you will not succeed. 23. Whatever cour- age you have, he has more than you. 24. Whatsoever riches he has, he will very soon spend them. 25. Whatever may be your fortune, you may lose it. 26. Whatever may be the pains which you take, you cannot succeed. 27. Whatever pains you take, you cannot succeed. 28. Whatever you do for my father, he will repay you. 29. I know no one who is as good as you. 30. Although she is not very beautiful, she is well beloved. 31. We have written to him in order that he might come. 32. We wrote to him in order that he might come. 33. Have you ever seen a man who has shown more cour- age? 34. Neither one nor the other will obtain the prize. 35. He will wish to be (one) of the party. 36. He will wish that your brother may be one of the party. 37. I doubt whether your brother would have succeeded without our assistance. 38. I should wish him to finish that business. 39. I wish that he who loves me may follow me. 40. (Let him) who loves me, follow me. 41. You would have seen the king if you had come. 42. I did not know whether (si) we should go or not. 43. If he should go he would succeed. 14 158 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 124, 125. THE ADVERB. § 1^4. Adverbs are placed immediately after the verb in simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and participle in compound tenses. Ex. II parte toujours, he always speaks. lis ont toujours p>arle en ma faveur, they have always spoken in my favor. Exc. 1. Adverbs of place and interrogation are placed as in English. Ex. Ou voutez-vous alter? where do you wish to go? Comment fait-on celaf how is that done? Exc. 2. Aujoiu'cVhui, to-day; demain, to-morrow; hier, yesterday, may come first or last, but not between the aux- iliary and participle ; davantage, more, should always, and long adverbs and adverbial phrases generally, come last. Ex. Je Tai vu aujourd'hui, I have seen him to-day. Hierje Vai vu, I saw him yesterday. Je lui ai icrit dernie.rement, I wrote to him lately. II lui a plu davantage, it pleased him more. Note 1. "Use plus, and not davantage, when de or que follows. Ex. U lit plus que moi, he reads more than I. II en a plus de vingt, he has ?nore than twenty. Note 2. Assez, enough, precedes adjectives and nouns, and, generally, other adverbs. Ex. Nous nous portons assez bien, we are pretty well. Vous etes assez exact, you are pretty exact. § lilo. In negative sentences ne precedes the verb, and pas or point follows rule § 124 ; but in the infini- tive both precede the verb. Ex. Voire thtme n'est pas bien fait, your exercise is not well done. II me eonseille de n'y pas alter, he advises me not to go there. §125. SYNTAX. THE ADVERB. 159 Note. Ne point is more emphatic than ne pas, the latter meaning not a step, the former not a point. Ex. Je n'ai point de livres, I have no books. 1. Use ne without pas when the following words occur to express the negative idea : — Aucun, not one. Nullement, by no means. Aucwiement, not at all. Personne, no one, nobody. Guere, but little. Plus, more (when not a com- Jamais, never. parative). JVi, neither. Que, but, only. Nul, not any. Pien, nothing. Ex. Aucun de ses amis ne V a fait, not one of his friends has done it. lis ne leferont aucunement, they will not do it at all. B n'en a guere, he has hut few. Monfrere ne le reverra jamais, my brother will never see him again. Nous n'avons ni livres ni papier, we have neither books ?ior paper. Nul n'est content de sa fortune, no one is pleased with his fortune. II n'est nullement heureux, he is by no means happy. Nous ne voyons personne, we see nobody. II n'en a phis, he has no more. II n'en a que trois, he has but three. lis n'ont rien de bon, they have nothing good. 2. After comparisons of superiority or inferiority, also after expressions of fear and hinderance, when we fear or expect the thing will happen, use ne without pas / no negative being required in English. Ex. II est tout autre qu'il n'itait, he is very different from what he was. 2Z chante mieux qu'il ne chantait, he sings better than he did. Je crains qu'il ne vienne, I fear that he may come. II empiche qu'ils ne sortent, he prevents them from going out. Note. If the first member of the sentence is negative, or implies a neg- ative, ne may be suppressed. &X. Iln'empeche pas qic'ils sortent, he does not prevent them from going out. 3. Nier, douter, and disconvenir, when used negatively, or interrogatively (a negative being implied), if followed by an affirmative clause with que, take ne with its verb, which must be in the subjunctive. 160 • FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 125, 12a Ex. Je ne nie pas que je ne Vaie dit, I do not deny that I said po. Je ne doute pas qa'il ne vien?ie, I do not doubt that he will come. Peut-on nier qiCil n'aie dit celat can it be denied that he said that ? Vous ne sauriez disconvenir quit ne votes ait parte, you cannot deny that he spoke to you. 4. After pouvoir, oser, and cesser, pas may be omitted ; so after saurais, for puis, and other forms of savoir, when uncer- tainty is to be expressed. Ex. Je ne puis comprendre tout cela, I cannot understand all that. Je n'ose lui parler, I dare not speak to him. Vous ne cessez de me gronder, you do not cease scolding me. Je ne saurais lefaire, I cannot do it. Je ne sais que fair e, I do not know what to do. 5. After depuis que, since, il y a, there is, there are, de- noting duration of time, pas and point are omitted when the verb is in a past tense. Ex. II y a trois ans queje ne Vai vu, it is three years since I have seen him. B m'a icrit deux fois depuis que je ne Vai vu, he has written to me twice since I saw him. 6. In conditional clauses, after a moins que or si = a moins que, use ne without pas or point. Ex. Je sortirai a moins qxCil ne pleuve, I shall go out unless it rain. Note 1. Pas is often used alone, without a verb, retaining its nega- tive sense ; and ne, without a verb, becomes non ; non pas = not. Ex. Pas de fumie sans feu, no smoke without fire. Ecrivez-vous ? Non, je n'dcrispas. Are you writing ? No, I am not. Note 2. Encore, still, more, any more, &c, when negative, becomes ne — plus, not any more, &c. ; pas encore = not yet. Ex. Avez-vous encore des legumes, have you any more vegetables ? Je n'en ai plus, I have no more. § 126. Si is used for out when yes is a denial. Ex. Cela n'est pas un crime? Si, e'est un grand crime. That is not a crime ? Yes, it is a great crime. § 127. SYNTAX. — THE ADVERB. 161 § 127. Vocabulary. Absurde, absurd. Milton, Milton. A la hate, hastily. Modestement, modestly. Eclairer, to enlighten. Or, gold. Embrouiller, to perplex. Pare, park. Estimable, estimable. Passablement, passably. Faire beau, &c, to be Pedant, pedant. fine, &c. (said of the Pendre, to render. weather). Science, science. Eremir, to shudder. Stratageme, stratagem. Hate, haste. Sublime, sublime. Homere, Homer. Vraiment, indeed, truly. EXERCISE XLL — ADVERBS. 1. Have you ever seen a pedant more absurd and vain than he ? 2. The most intelligent man is, ordinarily, he who thinks most modestly of himself. 3. We arose in haste. 4. Where are you going ? 5. How do you do? 6. To-day it is fine ; it will rain, perhaps, to-morrow. 7. I saw my sisters yesterday. 8. I have not seen them to-day. 9. He needs no more of it. 10. Your little daughter is quite pretty. 11. I am quite well. 12. Has he enough horses? 13. Yes, sir, he has enough. 14. Milton is not less sublime than Homer. 15. Shall you go to the park this evening? 16. He has no wit. 17. Have you not been there? 18. Have you a friend who knows that? 19. I do not cease speaking of you. 20. I can- not think of it without shuddering. 21. I never go there. 22. I think of it no more. 23. He pleases no one. 24. Do not employ any of those stratagems. 25. I see no one who praises you. 26. Neither gold nor greatness (grandeur) ren- ders us happy. 27. He is neither prudent nor wise. 28. He does nothing but laugh. 29. Too many masters serve only to perplex the mind. 30. How have you been since t saw you? 31. It is three months since I saw him. 32. It is now 14* 162 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 127, 128. six months since I saw him. 33.* Where does he live now that (depuis que) we do not see him ? 34. He writes better than he speaks. 35. I fear that he will not be punished. 36. I fear that he will be punished. 37. You prevent them from singing. 38. I cannot (saurais) do it. 39. He* does not know what he says. 40. He does not know French. 41. Science is estimable, but virtue is more so. 42. Madam has not spoken to him. 43. Yes, indeed, she has. 44. Has he any more cloth ? 45. He has no more. 46. Do you wish for any more cloth ? 47. Not yet, but I should like to have some to-morrow. 48. She sang passably well. THE PREPOSITION. § 128. The preposition a and its compounds gov- ern the dative ; the preposition de and its compounds govern the genitive ; other prepositions govern the ac- cusative.* Ex. II vient a moi, he comes to me. Quant a mot, as for me. Je vais de Paris a Lyon, I go from Paris to Lyons. A force de travail, by dint of labor. Jaifait cela pour les enfants, I did that for the children. Rem. All other prepositions are followed by the same forms of pronouns as those which follow a or de. (§ 24. 1. N. 3.) Ex. Avec eux* with them. Sans hd,* without him. Pour moi,* for me. Sans elle* without her. 1. The following prepositions govern directly, without the aid of an intervening preposition : — * It will be observed tbat these pronouns, although here called accusatives, in conformity with the usual practice of French grammarians, are, in reality, the indirect (genitive or dative) forms, and are, therefore, not given as accusatives in the inflections of the pronouns. § 128. SYNTAX. THE PREPOSITION. 163 A, at, to. Apres, after. Avant, before (of time). Avec, with. Chez, at the house of. Contre, against. Dans, in. De, of, from. Depuis, since. Derriere, behind. Des, from. Dessous, under, below. Dessus, above. Devant, before (of place). Durant, during. En, in. Excepte, except. Rors, except. Nonobstant, notwithstanding. Outre, besides. Par, by. Pendant, during. Pour, for. Sans, without. Selon, according to. Sous, under. Suivant, according to. Sur, upon. A travers, through. Vers, towards. Void, here is. Voilh, there is. Vu, considering. Entre, between. Ex. II demeure a Paris, he dwells at Paris. II vient de Paris, he comes from Paris. Je Vai cru des ce moment, I believed it from that moment. II s'est assis apres le president, he sat down after the president lis marchent devant eux, they walk before them. 2. The following are the pounded with de : — A cause de, on account of. A c6t6 de, by the side of. A force de, by dint of. A Vabri de, under shelter of. A lafaveur de, by means of. A la mode de, according to the fashion of. A Vigard de, with regard to. A V exception de, excepting. A Vinsu de, unknown to. A V opposite de, contrary to. A moins de, unless. A raison de, by reason of, at the rate of. Au deed, de, this way from. Ate dedans de, within. Au dehors de, without. Au dela de, beyond. Au dessoics de, under. principal prepositions com- Au dessus de, above. Au devant de, before, to meet, into the presence of. Au lieu de, instead of. Au milieu de, in the midst of. Au moyen de, by means of. Aupres de, near. Au prix de, at the price of. Au rez de, on a level with. Autour de, around. A u travers de, through. Ensuite de, after. Faute de, for want of. Eors de, out of. Le long de, along. Loin de, far from. Pres de, near. Proche de, near. Vis-a-vis de, opposite. 164 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 128-130 Ex. Aupres dufeu, near the fire. Au dela du Rhin, beyond the Rhine. A Vinsu de nous, unknown to us. A V exception d'elle, excepting her. Le long du chemin, along the road. A Vigard d'eux, with regard to them. 3. The following prepositions are compounded with a: — ■ Attenant a, joining. Par rapport a, with regard to. Jusqu'a, as far as. Quant a, as for. Ex. Jusqu'a Paris, as far as Paris. Quant a moi, as for me. § 129. The prepositions a, de, en, and sans are regularly repeated before each word which they govern. Ex. Je viens de France, d'ltalie, et d' Espagne, I come from France, Italy, and Spain. Rem. The other prepositions are usually repeated, unless they govern words of similar meaning. Ex. Dans lapalx et dans la guerre, in peace and war. Par la force et la violence, by force and violence. § 130. No preposition is used in French before the day of the week or month, pointed out as the time of an event. (§ 62.) Ex. II viendra jeudi, he will come on Thursday. lis Vont fait le quinze mai, they did it on the fifteenth of May. Rem. 1. The preposition is in like manner omitted before a word indicating a portion of the day, pointed out as the time of a customary event. Ex. H revient a Vicole l'apres-midi, he returns to school in the afternoon. Rem. 2. The preposition is regularly omitted before words indicating price. (§ 57. Exc. 1.) Ex. Le beurre se vend dix sous la livre, butter is sold for ten sous a pound. §§ 130-133. SYNTAX. THE PREPOSITION. 165 §■ 131. Chez before a noun or pronoun means to, or at, the house of ; while avec means with, in the com- pany of, Ex. lis demeurent chez nous, they live at our house. Je vais chez ma soeur, I am going to my sister's. II faut savoir avec qui on se lie, we ought to know with whom we associate. Rem. 1. De chez means from the house of. Ex. De chez qui etes-vous venu f from whose house have you come ? Rem. 2. Chez before the names of nations means among,, Ex. Chez les Grecs et chez les Romains, among the Greeks and Romans. § 133. To denote two actions performed by an agent at the same time, use en with the present parti- ciple. (§ 102. N.) Ex. En creusant les fondements on trouva un squelette, while digging the foundation they found a skeleton. § 133. After verbs of motion or rest, en is used for to, in, or into, before the name of a country, state, or province. (§ 59. Exc. 1.) Ex. Elle est allee en Angleterre, she has gone to England. Elle reside en Espagne a present, she resides in Spain at present. Nos amis demeurent en Pennsylvanie, our friends live in Pennsylvania. Note 1. Use a for en before the name of a town, city, or village. Ex. Avez^vous des amis a Philadelphie ? have you friends in Philadelphia t Nous irons a Boston demain, we shall go to Boston to-morrow. Note 2. Use a for en in the following phrases : — A la campagne, to or in the country. A la chasse, to or in the chase; a hunting. A Vecole, to or at school. A Viglise, to or at church. A la maison. to or at home. 166 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 133-135. Au marchd, to or in the market. A la peche, a fishing. A la ville, to or in the city. Aux Etats- Unis, in the United States. Rem. Compare a, dans, and en in the following sentences : — II demeure a la ville, mais il n'est pas dans la ville. II nest pas a la maison ; il est en ville. He lives in the city, but he is not in the city. He is not at home ; he is out (in the city). Note 3. After verbs of motion or rest, quelque part, somewhere, and nulle part, nowhere, are used without a preposition. Ex. Oil sont vos livres ? where are your books ? lis ne sont nulle part, they are nowhere. Note 4. In cases not included in § 133. 1ST. 1-3, use dans for in, referring to place, when the following noun is definite. Ex. Nous avons vu cela dans Racine, we saw that in Racine. Mettez ce crayon dans votre pupitre, put that pencil in your desk. Rem. In expressions of time, use dans for in for a single act, en for in for a progressive one. Ex. Je vous rtpondrai dans trois jours, I will answer you in three days. Je serai a Paris en six heures, I shall be at (reach) Paris in six hours. § 134. The agent, after passive verbs, is usually preceded by de or par; de generally referring to a sen- timent, and par to an outward action. Ex. H est aimi de tout le monde, he is loved by everybody. II fut tu6 par des soldats, he was killed by some soldiers. § 135. Pour, for, before an infinitive, means in order to. Ex. J» suis venu pour vous voir, I came to see you § 136. SYNTAX. — THE PREPOSITION. 167 § 1?$6, YOCABULARY. Alter en voiture, to ride. JVbrmandie, Normandy. JBeaute, beauty. Raraitre, irr. to appear. Honnetete, politeness. Ramener, to reclaim. Jeunesse, youth. Resider, to reside. Juge, judge. Rouen, Rouen. Mollesse, effeminacy. Tout a Pheure, directly. Negotiant, merchant. Trone, throne. New York, New York. EXERCISE XLII. — PREPOSITIONS. 1. Write to my brother and me. 2. Approach the fire. 3. Go away from the fire. 4. My work is near being finished. 5. All the people were around the throne. 6. lie. has gone to France. 7. They reside at Rouen. 8. The king was upon his throne. 9. She has gone to Rome. 10. She dwells in Normandy. 11. My daughters went to school yesterday. 12. My daughters have gone to school to-day. 13. I was in the United States, in the State of New York. 14. My brother was in Philadelphia last week. 15. We shall go to my brother's this afternoon. 16. He studies in the morning, and reads in the evening. 17. He comes to our house in the afternoon. 18. I shall go at ten o'clock, but my sister will go before me. 19. He appeared before the judge. 20. Mr. B. has gone to the country. 21. She has youth, beauty, and intelligence {esprit). 22. I shall go with my father to Mr. L.'s. 23. I am weary of reading while riding. 24. Where is your brother? 25. He is somewhere, I do not know where. 26. I believe that he is in the garden. 27. My father lives in the city. 28. The merchant is not in the city this morning. 29. He was at home at nine o'clock this morning, but he has gone to the country now. 30. His wife is not at home at present; she is out, but she will return directly. 31. I can reclaim them by mildness, 32. He wastes (perdre) 168 FRENCH GRAMMAR. ^ §§ 136, 1C7. his youth in effeminacy. 33. He set out unknown to his wife. 34. They speak of coming without writing to you, and before going to New York. 35. Do they read while riding? 36. Walk before me. 37. I saw him while re- turning from my brother's. 38. I have not seen that any- where. 39. He was beginning to pay attention to you. 40. He did it to show {/aire paraitre) his politeness. THE CONJUNCTION. § 137. Conjunctions are followed by the indicative, infinitive, or subjunctive moods. 1. When the infinitive follows a conjunction, the preposi- tion de intervenes. Ex. Je le verfai avant d'aller a la campagne, I shall see him before going to the country. Rem. When the infinitive with de follows a conjunction, the subject does not change. 2. The indicative after conjunctions expresses certainty, the subjunctive itncertainty. Ex. Je le verrai avant qu'il aille a la campagne, I shall see him before he goes to the country. Je Vai vu aussitot qn'il est revenu, I saw him as soon as he returned. Rem. It will be observed that certainty generally belongs to the present and the past; uncertainty, to the future. For the use of the indicative or subjunctive after conjunctions, see § 120. 3. Si, if, is not followed by the subjunctive, the future, or the conditional. (§ 121. III.) Use instead the indicative present, imperfect, or pluperfect. Ex. Sify vais je leferai, if I go there I will do it. S'il etait ici il leferait, if he were here he would do it ; or, if he should be here he would do it. S'il avait ete ici il Vaurait fait, if he had been here, he would have done it. §§137,138. SYNTAX. THE CONJUNCTION. 169 Exc. The past perfect of the subjunctive may follow si, and it is then considered a second form of the past conditional. Ex. II s'a?reta comme s'il eut vu quelque chose, he stopped as if he had seen something. Note 1. Si, whether, may be followed by the future indicative after present and future tenses, and by the conditional after past tenses. Ex. Sait-elle s'il ira ? does she know whether he will go t Elle ne savait pas s'il irait, she did not know whether he would go. Note 2. When si governs two verbs, the second is in the subjunctive; use que for the second si; so use que generally to repeat any conjunction. Ex. Si vous avez envie d'y aller, et que vous ayez besoin d'tin cheval, je vous preterai le mien. If you are anxious to go there, and need a horse, I will lend you mine. Comme il est tard, et que vous n'etes pas pret, je vaism'en aller. As it is late, and you are not ready, I am going away. 4. Que, that, is never omitted in French. Ex. Je crains qu't7 ne soit un peu tard, I fear it will be a little late. 5. Que is used idiomatically to give greater force to the expression. Ex. Je crois que non, I believe not. Je crois que oui, I believe so. § 138* Vocabulary. Ardeur, ardor, zeal. Ordre, order. Asie, Asia. Se reposer, to repose. JZurope, Europe. Sincerement, sincerely. JEJxecuter, to execute. JSurpasser, to surpass. EXERCISE XLin. — CONJUNCTIONS. 1. Asia is larger than Europe. 2. They speak only of that. 3. How I love my friends ! 4. If your brother come to-morrow, and it be fine weather, we will take him a hunt- . 15 170 FRENCH GRAMMAR. §§ 138, 139. ing. 5. If we loved our country, and. sincerely desired its glory, we should love liberty and hate slavery. 6. Your brother is a singular man. 7. I believe so. 8. I believe not. 9. It is necessary to rest after having worked. 10. He works to surpass you (inf.). 11. You will learn if you are diligent and take pains (de la peine). 12. I wish him to surpass you (subj.). 13. I answered him nothing else except that I had executed his orders. 14. I wish for nothing else except that you study with more zeal. 15. I know that he intends to write me a letter. 16. I wish to remain here until he comes. 17. Unless he be diligent and take pains, he will not succeed. 18. As he is diligent and takes pains, he will succeed. 19. I do not know whether he will go. 20. He, as well as my cousin, said that. 21. Send me that in case I return from Philadelphia this week. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. § 1«". The following is an Alphabetical List of many common Idioms, Phrases, and words requiring especial notice, followed by exer- cises upon them : — Sfaccorder, to agree (said of clocks, watches, &c). Adieu., till we meet again, good by. A droite, to the right. A fleur de, even with. A force de, by dint of. A gauche, to the left. A Vabri de, sheltered from. Eire a Vabri de, to be sheltered from. Mettre a Vabri de, to shelter from. Se mettre a Vabri de, to take shelter from. A V anglaise, &c, (mode), after the English, &c, fashion. A Vigard de, with regard to. A Vinsu de, without the knowledge of. Alter, to go, to fit, to sit (said of dress). Alter a pied, a cheval, en voiture, &c, to go on foot, on horseback, in a coach, &c. (in stating how you go). Alter chercher, to go for. § 139. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. 171 Aller trouver, to go to. S'en aller, to go away. S'amuser a, to take pleasure in, to enjoy one's self in. A raison de, at the rate of. S'asseoir, to sit down. S'attendre a, to await, to expect. Au dec a de, this side of. Au dela de, that side of. Au lieu de, instead of. Ate plaisir de vous revoir, until I have the pleasure of seeing you again. Au revoir, until I see you again, good by. Avancer de, to gain, to put forward, to be fast by so much (said of clocks, &c). Avant, before (of time; see Devanf). Avoir beau (infin.), to be in vain to. Avoir besoin de, to want, to wish to. Avoir chaud, to be warm. Avoir chaud aux mains, &c, to have warm hands, &c. Avoir coutume de, to be accustomed to. Avoir des douleurs a la poitrine, &c, to have pains in the chest, &c. Avoir dessein de, to intend to. Avoir envie de, to desire to. Avoir faim, to be hungry. Avoir froid, to be cold. Avoir froid aux mains, &c, to have cold hands, &c. Avoir honte de, to be ashamed of, to be ashamed to. Avoir le courage de, to have courage to. Avoir le temps de, to have time to. Avoir lieu, to take place. Avoir V intention de, to intend to. Avoir mal a la ttte, &c, to have the headache, &c. Avoir peur de, to be afraid to. Avoir quelque chose, to have something the matter with one. Avoir quelque chose a la mam, to have something the matter with the hand, to hold. Avoir raison de, to be right to. Avoir regret h, to regret to. Avoir soin de, to take care of, to take care to. Avoir sommeil, to be sleepy. Avoir sujet de, to have reason to. Avoir tort de, to be wrong to. 172 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 139. Avoir line douleur a la main, &c, to have a pain in the hand, to have a sore hand, &c. Changer co?itre, to exchange for. Changer de, to change, to exchange one thing for another. Changer d'avis, to change one's opinion. Changer de chapeau, to put on another hat. Changer de climat, to go to another climate. Changer d'habit, to put on another coat. Changer de maison, to move, to change one's residence. Changer de nom, to change one's name. Changer de pays, to go to another country. Changer de place, to go to another place. Note. In the above idioms with changer de, the possessive adjective is not used. Changer pour, to change for, to get change for. Chez, at the house of. Combien de foist how often? Combien de temps t how long ? Combien de milles y a-t-ilf how many miles is it? Combien y a-t-il? how far is it? Se comporter, to behave, to deport one's self. Concemant, touching, concerning. Connaitre, to be acquainted with (used of persons and things ; see Savoir~) . Connaitre quelque chose a quelqxCun, to know one to have. Connaitre a, to know by. Se connaitre a, to be a judge of. Se connaitre en, to be a judge of. Connaitre de nom, to know by name. Connaitre de visage, to know by sight. Connaitre de vue, to know by sight. Convenir a, to suit. Convenir de (impers.), to be expedient to. Se coucher, to retire, to # go to bed. Se dimettre Vepaule, &c, to dislocate one's shoulder, &c. Se demettre de, to resign, to give up. Se depecher de, to make haste to. Derriere, behind. Devant, before (of place; see Avanf). Devenir, to become, to become of, to turn, D'ou, whence (see Par oil). S'emparer de, to seize, to lay hold of. S'endormir, to fall asleep. § 139. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. 173 Ennuyer, to weary the mind, to bore. S'ennuyer, to become mentally weary. Entendre, to hear, to understand. S' 'entendre, to be understood, to understand, to agree with one another. ^entendre d, to be expert in. Entendre parler de, to hear of, or about. Envoy er chercher, to send for. Essay er, to try, to try on. Etre a = appartenir, to belong to. Eire a la hauteur de, to be adequate to, to be equal to. Etre a la veille de, to be on the eve of. Etre a meme de, to be able to. Etre a quelqu'un de, to become any one to. Etre h quelqu'un a, to be any one's turn to. Etre au courant de, to be conversant with. Etre aufait de, to be familiar with. Etre aux prises avec, to be in open rupture with. Etre bien avec, to be on good terms with. Etre brouille avec, to be on bad terms with. Etre d'avis, to be of opinion. Etre de trop, to be unnecessary. Eire en chemin pour, to be on the way to. Etre en itat de, to be able to, to be in a condition to. Etre en peine de, to be uneasy about. Etre en retard, to be late, to tarry. Etre en vie, to be alive, to live. Etre riche de, to be worth (said of persons ; see Valoir'). S'eveiller, to awake. Sefdcher contre, to be or become angry with (a person). Sefdcher de, to be or become angry with (a thing). Faire, to do, to make, to play (a part), to pretend to be, to matter, to concern, to help. Se faire, to become, to turn. Faire attention a, to pay attention to. Faire bonne chlre, to live well. Faire bouillir, to boil. Faire chauffer, to warm. Faire connaissance, to get acquainted with. Faire cuire, to cook. Faire des emplettes, to make purchases. Faire des proyr&s, to make progress. Faire des questions, to ask questions. 15* 174 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 139. Faire dufeu, to make a fire. Faire du mal a, to hurt. Se faire entendre, to make one's self understood. Faire entrcr, to let in, to bid come in. Faire faire, to have made, to bespeak. Faire la cuisine, to cook. Faire Vaumone, to give alms. Se faire mal, to hurt one's self. Faire mal a, to hurt. Faire peur a, to frighten. Faire racommoder, to have mended. Faire rotir, to roast. Faire semblant de, to pretend to. Faire ses adieux, to bid farewell. Faire -son possible pour, to do one's best to. Faire sortir, to send out. Faire tenir, to forward, to send. Faire tort a, to injure. Faire un mille, &c, to go a mile, &c. Faire un tour de promenade, to take a walk. Faire un voyage, to go on a journey. Faire usage de, to make use of. II fait beau temps, it is fine weather. II fait bon ici, it is comfortable here. Falloir (impers.), to be necessary, to need, one must (§ 106). Fois, time (referring to repetitions. Never use temps in this sense). Gener, to trouble, incommode, disturb. Se gener, to constrain or trouble one's self. Gre, consent, will, meaning, opinion. Savoir bon gre" de, to be thankful for. Savoir mauvais gre" de, to be displeased about. Note. These two idioms with savoir gre", take also the dative of the person. Ex. II lui sail bon gr6 de sa bonte, he is thankful to him for his kindness. Se hater de, to make haste to. Hors de, out of. S'i?iquieter de, to be or become uneasy about, to trouble one's self about. Jusqu'a, as far a=. Jusqu'au revoir until I see you again, good by. 139. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. 175 Jusqu'oit ? how far ? Avhat distance ? Jusqu'a quelle Mure? till what hour ? how late ? Laisser, to leave (referring to the person or thing left ; see Quitter'). Se lever, to rise, to get up. Loin de, far from. Marcher, to walk = aller a pied. Mettre, to put, to put on. Se mettre, to place one's self, to dress. Se mettre a, to begin to. Mettre a Vabri, to shelter (see A Fabri). Mettre a la porte, to turn out of doors. Mettre a.l'heure, to set right, to put right, to set. Mettre a V ombre, to put in the shade. Mettre a mtme de, to enable. Se mettre d, table, to sit down to table. Mettre au fait de, to acquaint with. Se mettre en colere, to become angry. Mettre le convert, to lay the cloth, to set the table. Mettre le pied, to set one's foot. Mettre pied a terre, to alight, to land. Mettre un habit a Vendroit, to put on a coat right side out. Mettre un habit a Venvers, to put on a coat wrong side out Monde, world, people, company, retinue, servants, &c. Tout le monde, everybody. Oser prier de, to thank for (a request interrogatively). Oser demander de, to thank for (a request interrogatively). Oter, to take off, take away, take out. Oter le couvert, to remove the cloth, to clear the table. Outre, besides. Par ou, which way ? in what direction (see D'oii) ? Se passer de, to do without. Plaire a, to please. Se plaire a, to take pleasure in. S'il votes plait, if you please. Porter, to carry, to wear. Se porter, to do, to be. Pour, to, in order to. Prendre du cafe, du the, &c, to take coffee, tea, &c. Prendre garde, to take heed. Prendre garde de, to take heed not to. Prendre la peine, to take the trouble. Prendre le deuil, to go into mourning. Prendre les devants, to go on before. 176 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 139. Prendre tin parti, to take a determination. Prier de, to thank for (a request). Quant a, as far as, as for. Quelle distance y a-t-il f how far is it ? Qu'est-ce que f what is r what are ? Quest-ce que c'est? what is that? Qu'est-ce que c'est que f a ? what is that ? Quitter, to leave (referring to the person who leaves ; see Laisser) . Se rappeler, to remember. Se rappeler de, to remember to. Recevoir des nouvelles de, to hear from. Regarder, to look at, to concern. Se rijouir a, to rejoice at. Remercier, to thank (a refusal). Rester a (impers.), to have left. De reste, left (to have left). Retarder de, to lose, to put back, to be slow (by so much ; speaking of clocks, &c). Savoir, to know (said of things ; i. e., things are the object). Selon, according to. Seoir a, to suit, to become (personal and impersonal). Seoir a. quelqu'wi de, to become one to. Servir quelque chose a quelqu'wi, to help one to (at table). Se servir de, to use. Souhaiter le bon jour a quelqu'un, to wish any one good day, good by. Se souvenir de, to remember. Taire, to conceal. Se taire, to be silent. Tarder a, to tarry in, to be long in. Tarder de (impers.), to long to, to wish to. Tenir, to hold, to be fast (said of a color). Se tenir, to remain. Tenir a, to be attached to, to be tenacious of. S' en tenir h, to abide by, be satisfied with. Tenir compagnie a, to stay or remain with. Tenir des discours, to make statements. Tenir des propos, to hold discourse. Tenir la porte ouverte, to keep the door open. Tenir la tete droite, to keep one's head upright. Tenir les fenetres ouvertes, to keep the windows open. Tenir les yeuxfermes, to keep one's eyes closed. Tenir les yeux ouverts, to keep one's eyes open. Tenir sa chambre propre, to keep one's room clean. ! 139, 140. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. 177 Tenir sa parole, to keep one's word. Tenir table ouverte, to keep open house. • Tenir un hotel, to keep a hotel. Tenir un langage singxdier, to use peculiar expressions. Un de mes amis, a friend of mine. Valoir, to be worth (said of things ; see Eire riche). Valoir la peine, to be worth the while. Valoir mieux (impers.), to be better. Ne pas valoir grand ' * chose, not to be good for much. Ne rien valoir, to be good for nothing. Venir (infin.), to come and, to come to, = in order to. Venir a (infin.), to happen to. Venir de (infin.), to have just. Venir pour (infin.), to come to = in order to. Venir trouver, to come to. Void, voila, here is, there is. En voidoir a, to have a design against or upon, to have a grudge against. Vouloir dire, to mean, to wish to say. II y a, there is, there are, also ago, before expressions of time. Y 6tre, to be at home, to be in. § 140. Vocabulary. Approbation, approval. La JVbuvelle Orleans, New Bras, arm. Orleans. Cependant, nevertheless. Mechcin, physician. Epaule, shoulder. Meriter, to deserve. Horloge, f. clock. Ouir, to hear. Justement, precisely. Orage, storm. EXERCISE XLIV. — IDIOMS, ETC. 1. We took shelter from the storm. 2. We sheltered them from the wind. 3. They are sheltered from it. 4. Adieu, sir ; I am going for the physician. 5. This coat fits you exactly. 6. My brother goes afoot, and I go in a carriage. 7. I like to go on horseback when I have a good horse. 8. I am * Grande, f., is written grand' before the words chose, mere, peine, peur, pitte, pitie, messe, and a few others. Grand'' chose is always used with a negative. 178 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § UO going to my father now. 9. I shall go away to-morrow morn- ing. 10. He takes pleasure in that: it is after the English fashion. 11. Here is a chair: take a seat, sir. 12. I have been expecting that these three hours. 13. This clock is five minutes fast. 14. My son put it forward. 15. It gains three minutes a day. 16. The scholars came before (earlier than) the master every morning. 17. Is anything the matter with you? 18. Yes; something is the matter with my hand. 19. Are you not warm? 20. No, sir; I am cold and hungry. 21. Who is sleepy ? 22. I wish to sleep. 23. He takes care to deserve the approval of his masters. 24. We are ashamed to go there. 25. Are you ashamed to do that, sir? 26. I am not accustomed to be afraid. 27. I intended to read this evening; but I wish to retire now, for I must rise early. 28. Have you courage to do it ? 29. I have not time to re- main with you. 30. You are right to say that; but I regret to hear it, nevertheless. 31. Are you not wrong to be in a hurry ? or have you reason to be so ? 32. I have a sore finger. 33. He had a pain in his breast every morning. 34. I have pains in my arms and shoulders. Vocabulary. Billet, bill, note. Xondres, London. Compagnie, company. JParfaitement, perfectly. Emploi, employment. Paris, Paris. EXERCISE XLV. — IDIOMS, ETC. 1. He will not exchange his coat for mine. 2. Will you change this note for gold? 3. He changes his hat every morning. 4. We do not change our opinions easily. 5. Mr. L. is sick; he has gone to another climate this winter. 6. They move every summer. 7. They say that he has changed his name. 8. Mr. D. and I will go to another country next winter. 9. She goes to another place every week. 10. She lives with us at present. 11. How many times have you seen § 140. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. 179 her this week? 12. How far is it from here? 13. How many miles is it from London to Paris ? 14. Your grandson behaves very well. 15. He has said much about that. 16. He does not know my brother. 17. I know that he has cour- age. 18. He knew his brother by his gait. 19. Do you know that child by name ? 20. I do not know him by name, but I know him by sight. 21. Do you understand skating? 22. I do not understand it. 23. That employment would have suited him. 24. It is expedient to be just. 25. He lives this side of Providence. 26. Who lives on that side of your house ? 27. He dislocated his shoulder. 28. We intend to resign that place. 29. They are in haste to be rich. 30. He walked before me, and behind his brother. 31. I do not know what will become of you. 32. What distance is it from Philadelphia, and from New Orleans ? 33. He turns neither to the right nor to the left. 34. I knew nothing with regard to that. 35. He seized the boy. 36. He went to sleep while talking. 37. You bore me, I tell you. 38. We are weary of the country. 39. I have heard all that they have said. 40. We understand one another perfectly. Vocabulary. JBotte, boot. Metier, trade. Circonstances, pi. emergency. Puis, then, afterwards. JEtroit, narrow, tight. Hencontrer, to meet. Maintenant, now. Savant, learned man. Mendiant, beggar. Tente, tent. EXERCISE XLVI. — IDIOMS, ETC. 1. They are expert in that trade. 2. Have you heard of my dear friend ? 3. Make haste ; send for the physician at once. 4. I have tried on my boots, and they are too tight. 5. We are on the eve of moving. 6. This house belongs to Mr. E. 7. They are not equal to the emergency. 8. We are familiar with all that. 9. Are you conversant with the 180 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 140. history of this war? 10. They quarrel with everybody, and are on good terms with nobody. 11. Those children are on bad terms with their father. 12. It becomes them to do that. 13. I am not of your opinion. 14. They are in the way here. 15. We were on the way to London. 16. They are able to do that very well. 17. Are they uneasy about you ? They ought to be uneasy about themselves. 18. You are late this morning. 19. They are now ninety years old, yet they are still living (en vie). 20. His father is worth one hundred thousand francs. 21. My brother awakes every morning at the same hour. 22. Everybody had gone out except me. 23. He pre- tends to be a learned man. 24. They bade adieu, and then went out. 25. Pay attention to me when I speak to you. 26. The children gave alms to the beggar. 27. Our soldiers live well now. 28. They are boiling their vegetables and warming their meat. 29. Have you got acquainted with many of these soldiers? 30. I have not. 31. They cook their food themselves. 32. I made several purchases in Washington Street. 33. Bid the general and his suite come in. 34. Have three hundred coats made this week. 35. The soldiers made a fire in their tents. 36. O ! I have hurt me. 37. We had gone but three miles when we met them. 38. He has frightened the children. 39. I will do my best to finish my task. 40. Do you not make progress ? 41. My hands are cold, but my feet are warm. 42. I hold his hand. 43. You say all that in vain. Vocabulary. Avocat, lawyer. Facteur, factor, agent. Bas, bottom. Gras, fat. Brun, brown. Lecteur, reader. Clientele, clients. Moyens, means. JDindon, turkey. Pendule, clock. Docht, plump. Possible, possible.. § HO. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. 181 EXERCISE XL VII. — IDIOMS, ETC. 1. Cease your questions ; you ask too many. 2. Have you had my boots mended ? 3. They have roasted three fat tur- keys. 4. They pretend to serve the people ; is it true ? 5. He sent everybody out. 6. Have you forwarded that letter to my factor? 7. Why did you injure that tree? 8. I did not injure it. 9. We take a walk every evening. 10. I have made use of all the means in my power. 11. Let us go on a journey this winter. 12. I believe that he will become a briefless barrister. 13. Make yourself heard, if that is possi- ble here. 14. Have you hurt yourself, sir? 15. If it is fine weather to-morrow, I shall go to the city. 16. Is it comfort- able there ? It is not so here. 17. We are not angry with you. 18. We must be equal to you this time. 19. He does it by dint of labor. 20. My boots trouble me, because they are too tight. 21. Do not incommode yourself, sir ; it is very comfortable here. 22. The reader will be thankful to me for that. 23. My father was displeased with me for my conduct. 24. Make haste to retire. 25. He is beside himself. 26. Do not trouble yourself about that. 27. He has gone out without his father's knowledge. 28. How far have you read ? 29. We have read to the bottom of the page. 30. I am going to-morrow morning; and now good by. 31. How late do you intend to write ? 32. I left my daughter at her grandfather's. 33. I rose at seven o'clock this morning; but that does not take place every morning. 34. She reads instead of studying; does she not? 35. Far from that; she studies more than she ought. 36. We walk instead of going in a carriage. 37. He put on his black hat and his brown coat. 38. I will enable you to do that easily. 39. Put him out of doors. 40. Set that clock ; it is twenty minutes too fast. 41. They had just come from Pennsylvania. 42. His brother kept open house (table). 43. He has nothing left; it is a great pity. 44. I long to assist him. 16 182 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 140. Vocabulary. Danois, Danish. Jfeuble, piece of furniture. Janibon, ham. JPromesse, promise. Lait, milk. Tranche, slice. Marguerite, Margaret. Se vendre, to sell, to be sold. EXERCISE XLVLTL — IDIOMS, ETC. 1. They have put us in the shade. 2. Who has acquainted you with that? 3. Do not set your foot in my house again. 4. Margaret, at what hour do you set the table? 5. The Danes have landed. 6. Did he put on his coat wrong side out, or right side out? 7. The children rose, and began to dress immediately. 8. My father and I sat down to table. 9. They are always getting angry. 10. The company had arrived when I returned. 11. Everybody had departed be- fore midnight. 12. I will thank you for some ham. 13. I will thank you for a slice of the beef. 14. Take away all this furniture, sir. 15. Waiter, clear the table. 16. Where does your friend come from? 17. Which way must we go? 18. She has three lessons to study this evening, besides that. 19. We cannot do without paper. 20. Does not his good conduct please his father? 21. I take pleasure in studying and reading. 22. Give me some apples and some milk. 23. I wish you good day, until I have the pleasure of seeing you again. 24. He wears a large white hat. 25. How is your mother? 26. He came to see his children. 27. Do you take coffee or tea for breakfast ? 28. That father has lost his sons, and he has just gone into mourning. 29. Go on before, and I will follow you very soon. 30. Take care, my children ; do not hurry. 31. We will take care not to fall. 32. I will not do that; I have taken my determination. 33. You can do it; but I will not take the trouble. 34. I will thank you for that cotton. 35. As for me, I do not intend to leave the city at present. 36. Who are those gentlemen ? 37. They are the § HO. IDIOMS, PHRASES, ETC. 183 sons of the king. 38. What is that down there ? 39. How do apples sell? 40. They sell at the rate of five dollars a barrel. 41. Do you recollect your promise, sir? 42. We have heard from our friends. 43. That does not concern me, 44. We rejoice at your good fortune. 45. I thank you. Vocabulary. Convoi, train. Habitude, custom. Debout, standing. JPensee, thought. Fourchette, fork. Principe, principle. Gaulois, a Gaul. Vainer 'e, to conquer. EXERCISE XLIX. — IDIOMS, ETC. 1. How much time have we left ? 2. We have but three hours left. 3. My watch is five minutes slow. 4. Good by ; I start for London in an hour. 5. She does not know her lesson, for she has not studied it. 6. According to him, virtue is only a habit, not a principle. 7. It does not become you to say that. 8. What shall I help you to, sir ? 9. He uses a knife, and not a fork. 10. I remember my father's words very well. 11. Why do you conceal your thoughts, sir? 12. I am silent because I have nothing to say. 13. I long to see him ; he is very long in coming. 14. This color is very beau- tiful ; is it a fast color? 15. He is not right, but he adheres to his opinion. 16. Does she keep her chamber neat? 17. He has accompanied your son for five days. 18. It is very warm this evening ; keep the windows open. 19. Mr. L. keeps a hotel in London. 20. He is a stranger, for he uses peculiar expressions. 21. I would not do it, but I must keep my word. 22. You must not keep the door open, sir. 23. He is holding a conversation with my brother. 24. He is rich, but he remembers the poor. 25. Hold your head up, my little boy. 26. He does not keep his eyes shut. 27. We keep our eyes open. 28. We remained standing for an hour. 29. We abide by our word. 30. A friend of mine told me so. 31. 184 FRENCH GRAMMAR. § 140. That is worth nothing at all. 32. It is not worth while to go there. 33. It is better to remain here. 34. Have you chosen that ? It is not worth much. 35. He came to his mother. 36. He has just conquered the Gauls. 37. He hap- pened to succeed. 38. He came and conquered the Gauls. 39. He came to conquer the Gauls. 40. Here is the train ; it is time to go. 41. He does not love me, and has a grudge against my son. 42. What does the word "printemps" mean f 43. There are three of them. 44. Is Mr. F. in ? 45. Mr. P. is at the house, or he was there an hour ago. VOCABULARY. ENGLISH — FRENCH. Note 1 . The numerals, pronouns, prepositions, conjunctions, interjec- tions, and idioms, being found under their respective heads, are generally omitted in this vocabulary. Note 2. The genders of nouns and the feminine of adjectives are not given when they can be determined by the rules and the exception*, §§10, 11, 15. Note 3. For the conjugations of the verbs see the Etymology of the Verb, §§ 26-36. Note 4. "Words used in the translated illustrative sentences* not oc- curring in the exercises, are omitted in this vocabulary. ABBREVIATIONS. act active. adj adjective. adv adverb. ex exercise. /. feminine. imp impersonal. inf. infinitive. irr irregular. m masculine. n noun. neut neuter. v verb. ABANDON Abandon, abandonner. Able (an able man), habile. Able (to be), pouvoir, irr. About, concernant, sur, a Vigard de. Absurd, absurde. Abuse, abuser de. Achieve, achever de. Accompany, accompagner. Accurate, juste. Accurately, juste, justement. Accuse, accuser. Acknowledge, reconnaitre, irr. 16* AFTER Acquire, acquerir, irr. Action, action. Active, actif. Actor, acteur, m., -trice, f. Adhere to, tenir a, irr. Admiral, amiral. Admirable, admirable. Admire, admirer. Advise, conseiller a. " to, conseiller a de. Afflicted (to be afflicted about), fiiger de. After, apr&s. (185) '«/- AFTERNOON 186 BEFORE Afternoon, apres-midi, m. and f. Again, encore. Against, contre. Aged, age. Agent, facteur, m. Agreeable, agreable. Agreement, agrement. Air, air. Air-hole, soupirail. Albertine, Albertine. Alike, pareil. Alike (to be), se ressembler. All, tout. Alms, aumdne. Alone, seul. Also, aussi. Alternately, alter nativement. Although, bieti que, quoique. Always, toujours. Ambassador, ambassadeur, m. America, Amirique. Amiable, aimable. Ancestors, aleux, ancetres. Angry with (to be), sefacher contre. Animal, animal. Annexed, ci-joint. Answer, repoxidre. Any (not any), aucun. Any thing, quelque chose. Apple, pomme. Apply, appliquer. " one's self to, s' appliquer a. Approach, s'approcher. " =to draw near to, s'ap- procher de. Approbation, approbation. April, avril. Archbishop, Archeveque. Ardor, ardeur. Arm, bras. Arms, armes. Arrival, arrivee. Arrive, arriver. Artifice, artifice, m. As, comme, aussi, que. As — as, aussi — que. Ascend, monter. As far a.s,jusqic'a. Assist, aider, assister. Assistance, assistance. Assure, assurer. Astonish, etonner. Astonished at (to be), s'etonner de. Astonishment, etonnement. At, d, en. At once, tout a Vheure. " all, du tout. " any one's house, chez qtielqu'un. " home, a, la maison. " least, au moms, du moins. " present, a present. Attached (to become attached to), sattacher a. August, aout. Aunt, tante. Autumn, automne. Avoid, 6viter. AAvake, v. s'eveiller. B. Backbite, midire de, irr. Bad, mauvais, michant. Badly, mal. Bail, bail. Baker, boxdanger. Ball, bal. Bank, bord, rivage. Bare, mi. Basket, corbeille. Bastion, bastion. Battle, bataille. Bayonet, baionnette. Beast, bete. Because, parce que. Become, devenir. Before, devant, avant, avant de (inf.) . BEG 187 CHILD Beg, prier de. Beggar, mendiant, m., e, f. Begin, commencer a, se mettre a, irr. «« again, repre?idre, irr. Beginning, principe, m., commence- ment. Believe, croire, irr. Belong to, etre h, irr. Beloved by, cheri de. Bemoan, ge"mir de. Benefit, bienfait. Beseech, supplier de. Bestow upon, dispenser d,. Better, meilleur. Bible, Bible. Big, gros. Bill, note, mimoire. Billet, billet. Bird, oiseau. Birthday, ftte. Bishop, 6veque. Black, noir. Blue, bleu. Blush, rougir. Blush at, rougir de. Blow, coup. Body, corps. Boil, bouillir, irr. Book, livre. Bookseller, libraire. Boot, botte. Border, bord. Boreas, Boree. Born (to be), naitre, irr. Bottle, bouteille. Bottom, bas. Boy, gargon, enfant. Brandy, eau-de-vie. Brave, brave. Bread, pain. Breadth, largeur. Break, casser. Bright, clair, brillant. Bring from, emporter, emmener. " to, apporter, amener. " back, rapporter, r amener. Brother, frire. Brown, brun. Brute, bete. Build, construire, irr. Burn (to burn with), bruler de. Business, affaire. But, mais, que. Butcher, boucher. Butter, beurre. Buy, acheter. Cabbage, chou. Calamity, calamiti. Calculated for, propre &. Call, appeler. Cane, canne. Captain, capitaine. Care, soin; soins, Ex. 24. Carnival, carnaval. Carry away, emporter. Castle, chdteau. Cause, cause. Cause, v.faire, Ex. 13. Cease, cesser, finir. Cease (from or to), cesser de. Celebrate, celebrer. Certain, certain. Chagrin, chagrin. Chair, chaise. Chamber, chambre. Champion, champion. Change, changer, changer de. Charles, Charles. Chase, chasse. Chest, poitrine. Child, enfant, fits, fille. CHOOSE 188 DENY Choose, choisir. Church, eglise. City, viOe. Clear, Clearly, clair. Clerk, commis. Clever, habile. Clients, clientele. Clock, horloge, f., pend'jle. Close, fermer. Cloth, drop. Cloth (table), couvert. Clovis, Clovis. Coach, voiture, f. Coat, habit. Coffee, cafe". Colonel, colonel. Color, couleur. Come, venir, irr., arriver. " and, venir (infin.). " to, venir pour. Comet, comete. Command, commander de. Committee, comite. Companion, compaction. Company, compagnie. Conceal, cachet" Conceive, concevoir. Confide in, se fier a. Confidence, confiance. Confuse, embrouiller. Congratulate upon, filiciter de. Conquer, conquirir, irr., dompte vainer e, irr. Consecrate, consacrer. Constantly, constamment. Converse, causer, s' 'entretenir ', Cook, cuisinier, m., -ire, f. Copy, n. copie. Copy, v. copier. Coral, cor ail. Corner, coin. Coronation, couronnement. Cough, toux. Counsel, conseil. Count, comte. Country, campagne, pays. " (native), patrie. County, comte. Courage, courage. Court-yard, cour. Cousin, cousin, m., e, f. Cover, couvert. Cow, vache. Cowardly, lache. Create, creer. Creation, creation. Credulous, cridule. Cross, croix. Crowd, foule. Crowded, frequente. Cruel to, cruel a. Cry, cri. Cry out, s'ecrier. Cultivate, cidtiver. Custom, habitude. Dagobert, Dagobert. Dance, n. danse. Dance, v. danser. Dangerous, dangereux. Danish, danois. Dare, oser. Dark, opaque, sombre. Daughter, fille. Day, jour. Deaf, sourd. Dear, cher, precieux, chert, petit. Death, mort. Deceive, tromper. Deep, prqfond. Deign, daigner. Delay, tarder. Delighted, enchante. ^Deliverance, delivrance. Demand, demander, requirir, irr. Deny, nier. DEPART 189 ESTIMABLE Depart, partir, irr. Depth, profondeur. Descend, descendre. Deserve, meriter. Design, dessein. Desire, disirer. Dew, ros6e. Dictate, dieter. Die, decider, mourir, irr. Difficulty, difficult6, peine: to have difficulty in, avoir peine a, irr. Dignity, digniti. Dine, diner. Dinner, diner. Disappear, disparaitre, irr. Discuss, causer. Disobey, desobdir. Dispense to, dispenser h,. V with, se dispenser de. Displease, deplaire a, irr. Dissatisfied with, mecontent de. Distrust, se ddfier de, se mefier de (less emphatic). Do, f aire, irr. Do (speaking of one's health), se porter. Do without, se passer de. Dog, cJiien. Door, porte. Doubt, n. doute, m. Doubt, v. douter de. Doubt whether, douter que. Doubtful, douteux. Down (to go), descendre. DoAvry, dot. Drag away, entrainer. Dream, v. songer. Dream of, songer a. Dress, s'habiller. Drink, n. boisson. Drink, v. boire, irr. Dry, sec. During, pendant. Duty, devoir. Dwell, demeurer, resider, " in, habiter. Ear, oreille. Earth, terre. Easily, facilement," Easy, facile. Eat, manger. Edge, bord. Education, education. Effeminacy, mollesse. Effrontery, effronterie. Elder, aini. Embrace, embrasser. Embroil, embrouiller. Employment, emploi. Enamel, email. Enchant, enchanter. Enclosed, ci-inclus. End, /n. Engage, engager a, s'occuper a. Enjoy, jouir de. Enjoyment, jouissance, plaisir. Enlighten, eclairer. Enough, assez. Enter, entrer. Enticement, seduction. Entrust, Jier. Epistle, epitre. Equal, egal. Equally, egalement. Error, erreur. Escape from, s'echapper de. Escape notice, echapper it. Especially, surtout. Espouse, epouser. Establish, etablir. Esteem, estimer. Estimable, estimable. ESTIMATE 190 FUTURE Estimate, estimer. Eternal, Mernel. Even, uni. Evening, soir. Ever, jamais. Ever since, depuis que. Everybody, tout le monde. Everywhere, paHout. Exact, exact. Exact in, exact a. Exactly, juste, exactement. Excellent, excellent, admirable. Except, excepte. Exclusive of, 7io)i compris. Execute, execute?: Exercise, exercice, m., thhme, m. Expect, s'attendre a. Expect (to wait for), attendre. Expression, expression. Eye, ceil. Factor, facteur, m., trice, f. Fail in, manquer a. Fail to, manquer de. Fair, adj. blond. Fair, n. foire. Faith, foi. Fall, tomber. False, faux. Family, famille. Farmer, fermier. Fat, gras. Father, pbre. Fault, faute. Favor, grdce. Fear, v. craindre, irr. Feather, plume. Feel, sentir, irr. Fertile, fertile. Festival, fete. Field, champ. Fierce, farouche. Fight, combattre, se combattre, irr. Filled with, rempli de. Find, trouver. Finger, doigt. Finish, finir, achever de, accomplir. Fire, feu. First, premier. Fish, poisson. Fishing, peche. Fit for, propre a. Flag, drapeau. Flatter (one's self), se flatter. Flesh, chair. Float, flotter. Flock, troupe. Flour, farine. Flourish, florir. Flower, fleur. Follow, suivre, irr., re" suiter. Foolish, fou, sot. For, pour, d,, Ex. 22. Forbid to, defendre de. Force, force. Forest, fortt. Fork, fourchette. Form, v. former. Fortnight, quinze jmirs. Fortune, fortune. Free, libre. Freeze, geler, imp. French, francais. Frequent, v. frequenter. Friday, vendredi. Friend, ami, m., e, f. Friendship, amitie. Frighten, effrayer. Frugal, frugal. Fruit, fruit, des fruits, Ex. 19. Furniture, meubles, m. ; a piece furniture, meuble, m. Future, futur, avenir. GAIN 191 HIGH G. Gam, gagner. Gait, marche. Gallic, gaulois. Gather, cueillir, irr. Gayly, gaiemetit, gaiment. Gazelle, gazelle. General, g6?i6ral. Generally, giniralement. German, allemand. Give, donner. Give back, rendre. Glad of, bien aise de. Glazier, vitrier, m., e, f. Glory, gloire. Go, aller, irr. ; partir, irr., Ex. 15. Go out, sortir, irr. Go away, s'en aller, irr. Go (in a coach, &c), aller, irr., en voi- ture, &c. God, Dieu. Goddess, deesse. Gold, or. Good, bon. Goodness, bonte. Goods, Metis. Good for, bon pour. Good fortune, bonheur, m. Good to, bon a. Gospel, tvangile, m. Grammar, grammaire. Grandfather, aleid, grand-phre. Grandmother, grand'mere. Grandson, petit-fils. Grass, herbe. Great, grand, noble, Ex. 15. Greatness, grandeur. Greek, grec. Green, vert. Grief, chagrin, douleur. Grieved for, disoli de. Groan, gemir. Grocer, epicier, m., -e, f. Grow, croitre, irr., venir, irr., pousser, Grow large, grandir. Grow old, vieillir. Guest, hdie, m., hotesse, f. Guide, v. metier. H. Hail, greler, imp. Hair, cheveu. Half, adj. demi. Half, n. moitie. Ham, jambon. Hand, main. Handkerchief, mouchoir. Handsome, beau. Happen to, venir a, irr. Happy, heureux. Hard, dur. Hardly, a peine. Haste, hdte : to make haste to, se d&pecher de, se hater de. Hasten, se presser. Hastily, a la hdte. Hat, chapeau. Hateful, odieux. Have, avoir. Hay, foin. Head, tSte. Hear, entendre, oulr, Oe . Heart, cazur. Heat, chaleur. Heaven, ciel. Henry, Henri. Herb, herbe. Here, ici. Here is, void. Hero, Mros. High, haut. HIRE 192 KING Hire of, louer de. History, histoire. Hold, tenir, irr. Hold to, tenir h, irr. Holiday, conge. Hollow, creux. Home (to or at home), h la maison. Homer, Homtre. Honest, honnete (before the noun). Honor, honneur, m. Hope, esperer. Horrible, horrible. Horse, cheval. Hospitality, hospitality. Host, hote. Hostess, hotesse. Hour, heure. House, maison. House (to or at the house of), chez. How, comment, comme, que. How much ? combien ? Hunger, faim. Hurt one's self, scfaire mal, irr. Idle, fainiant, oiseux, oisif, pares- seux, inactif. Idleness, paresse. If, si. Ignorance, ignorance. Illuminate, eclairer. Illustrious, illustre. Image, image. Immediately, aussitdt, tout a Vheure, Implore, supplier de. Import, importer. In, dans, en, a,, Ex. 30. Included, y compris. Including, y compris. Indian, indien. Indicate, indiquer. Inferior to, inferieur a. Inform, apprendre (irr.) a, enseigner a, instruire, irr. Inform one's self, s'informer. Informed, instruit. Inhabit, habiter. Ink, encre, f. Inquire about, s'informer de. Insolent towards, insolent avee. Instruct, instruire, irr. Instructed, instruit. Instructor, instituteur, in., -trice, f. Intelligent, intelligent. Intended (husband or wife),/w^r, -e. Interesting, interessant. Into, dans. Intoxicated with, ivre de. Island, He. Ithaca, Ithaque. Jackal, chacal. Jewel, bijou. Join to, joindre a, irr. Journal, journal. Joy, joie. Judge, n. juge. Judge, v. (to be a judge of), se con- naitre a, se connaitre en, irr. July, juillet. June, juin. Jupiter, Jupiter. Just, juste. Justly, justement. Keep, garder. Key, clef. Kill, tuer. King, roi. KNEE 193 MIDNIGHT Knee, gcnou. Know, connaitre, irr., savoir irr. (§ 139). Labor, travail. Lame, boiteux. Landlady, hotesse. Landlord, hdte, aubergiste. Language, langage, langue. Large, grand, gros. Last, adj. dernier. Last, v. durer. Late, tard : to be late, tarder. Latin, latin. Laugh, rire, irr. Laugh at, rire de. Law, loi. Lazy, oiseux. Lead, mener. Lead from, emmener. Lead to, amener. Leaf, feuille. Learn, apprendre, irr. Learned, savant. Least, le moindre. Leave, laisser, quitter (§ 139). Leg, jambe. Length, longueur. Leon, Leon. Less, adj. moindre. Less, adv. moms. Lesson, lecon. Let to, louer a. Letter, lettre. Liberty, UberU. Lieutenant, lieutenant. Life, vie. Light, adj. Uger (not heavy) ; clair, lumineux (not dark). Light, n. lumibre. 17 Light, v. allumer (to kindle), cclairer (to illumine). Like (to like to), aimer a. Lion, lion. Liquor, liqueur. Little (but little), gu&re. Listen to, tcouter. Live, vivre, demeurer. London, Londres. Long for, tarder de. Long to, briller de. Look at, regarder. Lord, seigneur. Lose, perdre. Loss, perte. Love, aimer : in love with, amou*> reux de. M. Machine, machine. Madam, Madame, la dame. Maiden, demoiselle. Make, /aire, irr. Man, homme. Manners, mosurs. Many, beaucoup. March, mars. Margaret, Marguerite. Mark, marque. Market, marchi. Marry, ipouser, marier. (See Index.) Master, maitre. Mean, vouloir dire, irr. Means, moyen. Meat, viande ; nourriture, Ex. 12. Memory, mdmoire. Mend, racommoder. Mentor, Mentor. Merchant, marchand, nigociant. Mercy, merci. Merit, mcriter. MILK 194 OYSTER Milk, lait. Miller, meunier. Million, million, Milton, Milton. Miserable, miserable. Misfortune, malheur, m. Miss, Mademoiselle. Miss (to fail of), manquer de. Modestly, modestement. Monday, lundi. Money, argent. Month, mois. More, plus, davantage. Morning, matin. Most part, plupart. Mount, monter. Mountain, rnont. Move, remuer, mouvoir, irr. Mr., Monsieur. Mrs., Madame. Much, beaucoup : as much, autant ; as many, autant. Mutual, mutuel. N. Naked, nu. Name, n. nom. Name, v. nommer. Narrow, etroit. Nation, nation. Near (to be), sejoindre a. Necessary, necessaire. Necessary (to be),falloir, irr. Neglect, negliger. Neighbor, voisin, m., -e, f. Neither, ni; ni Vun ni V autre. Neither — nor, ni — ni. Never, jamais. Nevertheless, cependant. New, nouveau, neuf. N.. j w Oilcans, la Xouvelle Orleans. New York, New York. News, nouvelle. Newspaper, journal. Next, prochain. Night, nuit. No, non, point. No = not any, nul: by no means, nullement. Nowhere, nulle part. Nobody, personne. Noon, midi. North, septentrion, nord. [par.. Not, ne — pas, ne — point, non, non " any, attain : by no means, nullement, aucunement; not at all, pas du tout, point du tout. Nothing, ne — Hen. Now, maintenant, a prisent. Nymph, nymphe. Obey, obiir a, servir a, irr. Object, objet. Observe, observer. [46. Occasion, occasion ; cir Constances, Ex. October, octobre. Often, souvent. Old, age, vieuz. Only, seulement, unique, ne — qut. Opaque, opaque. Open, adj. ouvert. Opinion, opinion, avis. Opportunity, occasion. Or, ou. Orchard, verger. Order, ordre. Ordinarily, ordinairement. Orphan, orphelin, m., -e, f. Other, autre. Over, sur. Owe, devoir. Owl, hibou. Own, propre. Oyster, huitre. PAGE 195 PROGRESS Page, page. Pain, tnal. Painful, phxible. Pair, paire. Pane, vitre. Paper, papier, journal. Pardon, n. grace. Pardon, v. pardonner d. Parent, parent, m., 7. une petite fourchette. 34. Donnez-moi 4 deux petits couteaux et deux petites fourcliettes. 35. Cet animal est cruel et vin- dicatif. 36. Ces animaux sont cruels et vindicatifs. 37. Cette bete est cruelle et vindicative. 38. Ces betes sont cruelles et vindicatives. 39. Notre amour est mutuel. 40. Nos senti- ments sont mutuels. 41. Notre crainte est mutuelle. 42. Nos craintes sont mutuelles. 43. J'ai 5 un bon feu dans ma chambre. 44. J'ai deux bons feux dans ma maison. THE ADJECTIVE. Comparison. §§ 17-20. § 7. 1. La 1 France est plus etendue 2 que 1' ^ngleterre, l'Irlande, et l^Ecosse. 2. Les rues de Londres sont plus larges que celles de 3 Paris. 3. Mes livres sont plus chers que les votres. 4 4. II est plus paresseux que son frere. 5. Votre pere est plus riclie que le sien. 4 6. Sa maison est plus grande que la votre. 7. lis sont plus avances que je ne 5 croyais. 6 8. II m' 7 a donne 8 plus d' argent que je ne 5 demandais. 9 9. Mon livre est aussi bon que le votre. 10. Mon pere a autant d'argent que le sien. 11. Votre oncle a autant de chevaux que le mien. 12. Ma mere est plus belle que la tienne. 10 13. -Mon frere n'est pas aussi studieux que le votre. 14. Votre cousine n'est pas si instruite que votre sceur. 15. Son cousin voit 11 plus de monde 12 que moi. 13 16. II est aussi bon que vous. 17. Vos ennemis sont moins puissants que vos amis. 18. Votre chien est plus grand, plus gros et plus vieux que le notre. 19. Son 14 histoire est plus agreable, plus instructive et plus interessante que la mienne. 20. M. Morin est le plus riche de la ville. 15 21. Votre oncle est le plus af- fable des hommes. 16 22. Cette couleur-ci 17 est la plus ecla- tante des deux. 23. Nous avons 18 plus de plaisir qu'eux. 13 24. J'ai perdu 19 plus de dix francs. 25. Elle est tres aimable. 26. Votre plume est meilleure que la mienne. 27. Son 14 ecriture est tres mauvaise, mais la votre est pire. 20 §§ 8, 9. ETYMOLOGY. — THE PRONOUN. THE VERB. 207 THE PRONOUN. §24. Note. For examples of the relative and indefinite pronouns, and more copious examples of the other classes, see the Syntax of the Pronoun. §8. 1. Je parle. 1 2. Qui parle? Moi. 2 3. II lit. 3 4. Qui lit ? Lui. 2 5. lis dansent. 4 6. Qui danse ? Eux. 2 7. II me 5 parle. 8. Lui 6 et son frere parlent contre moi. 7 9. lis m' 8 aiment. 9 10. Vous les 8 connaissez. 10 11. Vous lui 5 par- lez. 12. Vous parlez d'eux. 11 13. Vous pari ez contre eux. 7 14. Nous vous 8 aimons. 15. Nous les 8 respectons. 12 16. Nous le 8 respectons. 17. II parle a vous et a moi. 13 18. II parle a lui et a elle. 13 19. Mori frere et ma 14 soeur. 20. Mes freres et mes 14 sceurs. 21. De mon jardin. 22. De ma mai- son. 23. De mes livres. 24. De mes tables. 25. A mon pays. 26. A ma nation. 27. A mes chevaux. 28. A mes vaches. 29. Son maitre et sa 14 maitresse. 30. De son plaisir. 31. A son devoir. 32. Notre ami. 33. De notre tableau. 34. A leur chambre. 35. De notre cabinet. 36. A votre lit. 37. De leurs ennemis. 38. De mon" 5 ame. 39. A son 15 hu- meur. 40. Ce vin est bon. 41. Cet homme est savant. 42, Cette femme est savante. 43. Ces pommes sont mures. 44. De cet enfant. 45. De ces plumes-ci. 46. De ces livres-la. 47. Cet oiseau. 48. A ce pays-la. 49. De ces armes. 50. De ces soldats. 51. Donnez-moi ceci ou cela. THE VERB. Auxiliary Verb Avoir. § 28. 5. (1.) simple tenses. § 9. 1. J'ai un ruban neuf. 2. Elle a une robe neuve. 3. Nous avons des bas neufs. 4. Vous avez des manchettes neuves. 5. lis ont un beau bouquet. 6. J'avais un bon maitre. 7. Elle avait une bonne maitresse. 8. J'eus un grand jardin. 9. II eut une grande maison. 10. Vous aviez de bonnes scaurs. 11. J'aurai un cheval blanc. 12. lis auront 208 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 9, 10. une mauvaise excuse. 13. Nous eumes deux grands jardins. 14. lis eurent un jeune dindon pour leur diner. 15. lis au- raient une guerre sanglante. 16. Vous aurez un mauvais souper. 17. J'aurais un fruit delicieux. 18. Elle aurait une poire delicieuse. 19. II aura une veste blanche. 20. lis avaient de bons amis. 21. Que j'aie * des amis sinceres. 22. Qu'il ait 2 des sentiments eleves. 23. Nous aurions un joyau precieux. 24. Vous auriez une pierre precieuse. 25. Qu'ils aient des juges eclaires. 26. Vous eutes deux grandes mai- sons. 27. Nous avions de bons freres. 28. Nous aurons des rideaux blancs. 29. Que nous ayons des paysages delicieux. 30. Que j'eusse une epee, un fusil et des pistolets. 31. Qu'il eut une maison garnie. 32. Aie des gants neufs. 33. Ayez de grands batiments. 34. Que nous eussions des domes- tiques fideles. 35. Ayons un habile jardinier. 36. Qu'il ait des bijoux precieux. 37. Que vous eussiez un joli cabinet de toilette. 3 38. Qu'ils eussent un superbe salon. 39. Qu'ils aient une conduite reguliere. 4 40. Que vous ayez des ma- nieres prevenantes. Auxiliary Verb Etre. § 28. 5. (2.) simple tenses. § 1©. 1. Je suis malade. 2. Elle est malheureuse. 3. lis sont paresseux. 4. Nous etions discrets. 5. Vos scEurs etaient jalouses. 6. Nous fumes genereux. 7. Vos filles furent cruelles. 8. Ce sera une belle femme. 1 9. lis seront nos ennemis mortels. 10. Nous serions tres ridicules. 11. Que je sois si impatient. 12. Que vous soyez humains et gene- reux. 13. Qu'elle fut soigneuse. 14. Qu'ils fussent indiscrets. 15. Soyons reserves. 16. Qu'ils soient doux et compatissants. 17. Qu'il soit ferme et courageux. 18. Que vous fussiez cre- dule. 2 19. Que je fusse reconnaissant. 20. Que nous soyons deraisonnables. 3 21. lis seraient extremement malhonnetes. 22. Elle serait incommode. 23. Vous serez dans des 4 craintes §§10,11. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 209 continuelles. 24. II sera bel homme. 25. lis furent cruels. 26. Elle fut raa 5 plus grande ennemie. 27. lis etaient jaloux. 28. Elle etait prudente. 29. Vous etes raodestes. 6 30. II est malheureux. 31. Tu 7 es jeune. 32. Nous somraes la- borieux. 33. J'etais prudent. 34. Yous etiez studieux. 35. Je fus son intime ami. 36. Vous lutes ingrats. 6 37. Je serai un brave soldat. 38. Nous serous fiddles a notre pays. 39. Je serais pret. 40. Yous seriez trop empresses. 41. Qu'il soit entete. 42. Qu'ils soient coupables. 43. Que nous fus- sions attentifs. 44. Sois bienfaisant. 45. Soyez economes et sobres. Regular Yeebs. — First Conjugation. § 29. 1. simple tenses. § 11. 1. J'aime mon pere. 2 Nous annongons 1 de bonnes nouvelles. 3. II bassinait le lit. 4. lis condamnaient ma con- duite. 5. Nous contentames 2 notre maitre. 6. lis differeront la punition. 7. Nous imprimerions 3 une grammaire. 8. Qu'il propose un avis salutaire. 9. Que je surmontasse 4 les obsta- cles. 10. Qu'ils protegeassent 1 ce mechant homme. 5 11. Apaisez sa colore. 12. Qu'ils evitent le danger. 13. Sacrifie 6 ton interet au bien public. 14. Qu'il renforcat son parti. 15. Que nous admirions la beaute de ce paysage. 16. Yous oublieriez les injures. 17. Elle dejeunera avec nous. 18. Yous corrigeates 1 les fautes. 19. Je recompensai 2 le domes- tique. 20. Elle brodait sa robe. 21. Yousarrosezlejardin. 22. Tu 6 adores Dieu. 23. II seme l'alarme dans le pays. 24. lis at- taquent l'ennemi. 25. Nous cachetions la lettre. 26. II con- sidera 2 la question. 27. lis decacheterent 2 la lettre. 28. Nous desarmerons les mediants. 29. II graverait mes armes. 30. lis reformeraient leur conduite. 31. Que vous pensiez a 7 mes malheurs. 32. Que nous fermassions 4 les volets. 33. Qu'il debrouille cette affaire. 34. Achevons ce livre. 8 35. Que vous commen^assiez 4 cette charmante 9 histoire. 36. Qu'ils oublient une circonstance essentielle. 37. Que je donne ce 18* 210 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ l h 12. jonjou a ma soeur. 10 38. Elle humilierait votre orgueil. 39. Vous detromperez ma soeur. 40. Je deciderai la question. 41. Elle consola 2 sa mere. 42. Vous commenciez votre theme. 43. Je balayais la salle. 44. Elle danse tres bien. Regular Verbs. — Second Conjugation". § 29. 2. simple tenses. § 13. 1. II finissait sa tache. 2. Nous bannissions les mechants de notre societe. 3. Vous choisissiez une mau- vaise couleur. 4. II demolit le mur. 5. Je finirai mon ou- vrage ce soir. 6. Nous affaiblirions leur parti. 7. Qu'il em- bellisse sa maison de campagne. 1 8. Que je cherisse mes parents. 9. Qu'ils flechissent sous un joug injuste. 10. Po- lissez ces cuillers. 11. Qu'ils benissent la providence. 12. Funis 2 tes ecoliers de 3 leur inattention. 13. Qu'elle atten- drit ce coeur insensible. 14. Que nous flechissionsnosennemis. 15. Vous batiriez la maison. 16. lis languiront longtemps. 17. Cet arbre fleurira bientot. 18. Nous desobeimes a notre maitre. 19. lis approfondissent la question. 20. II adoucit leurs cceurs. 21. Elle affranchit ses esclaves. 22. J'avertis- sais votre frere du danger. 23. lis convertissaient les im- pies. 24. Vous envahites leur pays. 25. II meublera cette chambre. 26. lis subiraient la punition. 27. Que vous enrichissiez votre famille. 28. Que nous reflechissions sur la brievete de la 4 vie. 29. Qu'il etablisse des 6 lois sages. 30. Rebatissons notre ferme. 31. Que vous fremissiez d' 6 horreur. 32. Qu'ils ternissent leur gloire. 33. Que je compatisse a 7 ses chagrins. 34. II trahirait mes interets. 35. Nous reus- sirions dans notre entreprise. 36. lis emplirent la bouteille de 6 vin. 37. Je degarnis la maison. 38. II batissait les for- tifications de notre ville. 39. Nous aplanissons les difficultes. 40. Je choisis ce tableau. 41. Le maitre ne vous punissait-il pas severement ? 42. Nous ne ternirons pas l'eclat de notre vie par une action indigne. §13. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 211 Regular Verbs. — Third Conjugation". § 29. 3. simple tenses. § 13, 1. Je con^ois comment cela est 1 arrive\ 2. Us aperc,oivent Je danger. 3. Nous devions 2 deux mille francs. 4. Elle concut de 3 grand es esperances. 5. Us concevront un nouveau 4 projet. 6. Je recevrai une lettre de 5 France sous peu de 6 jours. 7 7. Vous recevez une lettre. 8. Qu'il degut son ami par de 3 belles promesses. 9. Regois 8 mes remerciments de 9 toutes tes bontes. 10. Qu'ils concoivent jusqu'ou 10 leur imprudence les 11 menera. 12 11. Recevez cet etranger avec affection. 12. Que vous apercussiez le chateau de si loin. 13 13. Que je redusse une bagatelle. 14. Qu'il doive plus qu'il ne 14 possede. 12 15. Vous apercevrez aisement 15 s' 16 ils sont 17 coupables. 16. lis concjurent une grande horreur de sa con- duite. 17. Je recus une visite de 6 votre soeur. 18. Nous decevions ses esperances. 19. 11 apenjoit votre intention. 20. Je percevais mes revenus. 21. Vous aperceviez son atrocite. 22. Nous apercumes un voleur. 23. 11 me n devra deux mille francs a 18 la mort de ma mere. 24. Je recevrais son avis. 25. Us recevraient vos presents avec joie. 26. Que vous perceviez des impots injustes. 27. Que nous lui dus- sions du 19 respect a cause de ses malheurs. 28. Qu'il percoive l'interet de cet argent. 29. Concevons l'importance de nos devoirs. 30. Qu'ils concussent la profondeur de son plan. 31. Qu'ils recoivent cette compagnie avec grand respect. 32. Que j' apercoive les defauts de cet ouvrage. 20 33. II devrait ecrire a son frere. 34. Nous recevrons une recompense pour cette brillante 21 action. 35. Vous recutes hier 15 une grande somme d' 6 argent. 36. Us recevaient ses compliments avec mepris. 37. II redevait une grande somme. 22 38. Nous devons dix francs m a votre pere. 39. A midi precis le saint pere recut le corps des officiers francais. 40. Votre ecolier ne concoit-il pas cette regie si simple ? 41. Je recevais une lettre d'elle tous les jours. 212 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § U - Regular Veebs. — Fourth Conjugation. § 29. 4. simple tenses. § 14. 1. J'attends son retour avec impatience. 2. Je connais son caractere bouillant et impetueux. 3. Yous pre- tencliez en vain a 1 cette place. 4. Nous fondimes le plomb. 5. lis correspondront assidument avec leurs amis. 6. Je con- fondrais son orgueil. 7. Yendrions-nous notre liberte? 8. Que vous repandiez les graces de 1' 2 expression dans vos discours. 9. Que nous entendissions la musique du nouvel opera. 10. Qu'il descende sur-le-champ. 3 11. Attendons notre bonheur de nous-rnemes. 4 12. Que vous refondissiez un ouvrage si plein d' 5 erreurs. 13. Souverains, reudez les peuples heureux. 14. Que j'attende son retour avec 6 impa- tience. 15. II atteudrait une reponse. 16. Nous perdrons nos amis. 17. Yous perdites votre temps hier. 18. lis ven- daient 7 leur maison. 19. Je suspendais mon jugement. 20. II repond impudemment. 21. Nous entendons un grand bruit. 22. Ce chien mordait tout le nionde. 8 23. Je vendis ma maison. 24. II condescendit a ses desirs. 25. lis tendirent les 9 bras. 26. Yous tondrez vos brebis. 27. Nous defen- drions cet honnete homme 10 au n peril de notre vie. 28. Qu'il confonde ces notions l'une avec l'autre. 12 29. Que je tendisse a un but honnete. 30. Qu'ils correspondissent avec leurs parents. 13 31. Qu'ils repondent a vos lettres. 32. Entends 14 leur justification. 33. Que nous perdions notre. temps a 15 des bagatelles. 34. Yous rendriez 16 justice a tout le monde. 35. lis vendront leur maison de canipagne. 17 36. Je repon' drai en peu de mots. 18 37. Nous repandions la 19 terreur par- tout. 38. Yous defendez votre pays. 39. Avant cette epoque les libraires vendaient leurs livres broches. 40. J'attends son retour avec impatience. 41. Ne confondez-vous pas ces no- tions l'une avec l'autre ? 42. Je vendis tout ce que j'avais avant mon depart. §15. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 213 Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. Note. The pupil should give from the table (§ 36) the five principal parts of each verb that occurs, and inflect the tense before him, giving the rule for forming it (§ 34, 1-5), if it be not one of the principal parts; and the rule for any euphonic change that may occur (§ 35, 1-8). § I«5. 1. Je vais 1 tous les jours 2 au pare. 2. J'allais 1 chez 3 vous quancl je vous 4 ai rencontre. 3. Vous irez 1 demain chercher 5 mon habit. 4. Que nous allions 1 dans le bois. 5. Va 1 a l'ecole. 6 6. II vous 4 renvoie 7 vos livres. 7. Nous allames 1 hier voir 8 une revue. 8. lis renverront 9 nos chevaux. 10 9. Qu'ils m' 4 envoient mes rasoirs. 10. Allons 1 au Vauxhall. 11. Nous allons 1 ce soir a la comedie. 12, lis vont 1 diner 8 a la campagne. 6 13. Nous enverrons 11 du 12 secours a nos allies. 14. Vous enverrez u trop peu d'argent. 13 15. Que nous allassions 14 a l'eglise. 6 16. II ira 1 a Richmond, 15 la semaine prochaine. 17. II irait 1 sans moi. 16 18. Qu'elle renvoyat 9 sa femme de chambre. 17 19. Envoyez vos enfants a la promenade. 18 20. J'acquiers 19 tous les jours de nouvelles connaissances. 21. Vous cueillez 20 des fruits qui ne sont pas 21 murs. 22. Nous vetions 22 tous les orphelins de notre voisinage. 23. Alexandre conquit 23 une grande partie de l'Asie. 24. Je fuirai 24 les 25 mauvaises compagnies. 25. lis vous accueilleront 26 avec bonte. 27 26. Vous encourriez 28 la disgrace de vos parents. 29 27. Que nous requerions 30 cette faveur de vous. 28. Qu'il recueillit 31 le prix de ses travaux. 29. Cueille 32 ces fleurs et ces fruits pour tes soeurs. 30. Qu'ils nccourent 33 a la voix de cet honnete homme et qu'ils le se- courent. 34 31. II recueille 31 un choix de livres utiles. 32. lis vetent 35 tous les pauvres de leur paroisse. 33. II dis- courut ^ sur l'immortalite de l'ame. 34. Je parcourais 37 toute cette province. 35. Que vous fuyiez 24 le mauvais exemple. 36. Que nous tressaillissions ^ de 39 peur. 37. Cette eau bout 40 trop fort. 38. J'encourais ffl la 41 haine de cet homme cruel. 42 39. Irez-vous cc soir a la campagne ? 214 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 16 » Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § 16, 1. Vous ne le secourutes pas a* temps. 1 2. Nous assaillirons 2 les ennemis demain dans 3 leurs retranchements. 3. II tressaillira de joie. 4 4. Que je recueille du ble et du vin pour deux ans. 5. Qu'ils meurent 5 dans les bras de leurs amis. 6. Que vous vous vetissiez plus a la mode. 6 7. Par- courons la carrie re de la 7 vie avec * patience et 1 resignation. 8. Nous recourons a votre generosite. 9. Cette affaire 8 requerait toute votre attention. 10. J'accourus a sa voix. 11. lis moururent l'annee derniere. 12. Par votre impru- dence, ne concourrez 9 -vous pas 10 a la ruine de votre frere ? 13. Nous courrions plus vite que votre ami. 14. Que je cou- russe apres des 11 chimeres. 15. Que ces dames acquissent l' 12 estime generale par leur modestie. 16. Je consens 13 au mariage 14 de mon fils. 17. lis endorment 15 les enfants. 18. Vous sortiez 16 avant moi. 19. Nous consentimes 17 a payer votre pere. 20. II servira son ami. 21. Je dementirais 18 ce rapport. 22. Les enfants dormiraient. 23. Que vous dor- miez toute la nuit. 19 24. Que nous pressentissions *° vos des- seins. 25. Je dormais tres-bien. 26. lis ressentaient 21 les effets de sa colere. 27. Vous sortites sans ma permission. 22 28. II dormirait sur-le-champ. 23 29. Que je consente a ce marche. 24 30. Qu'ils endorment cet homme credule par cle 25 vaines promesses. 31. Que vous me 26 servissiez avec plus de 27 zele. 32. Nous partons pour la 28 France demain. 38. Je dormis tres-bien hier. 34. lis ressortirent aussitot qu' 29 ils furent 30 revenus. 31 35. Vous consentirez ay 32 aller. 36. Nous vous desservirions plus que nous ne * vous servirions. 37. II mourut d'une maladie cruelle. 38. Tous les jours il acquit de la celebrite par ses ouvrages. 39. Le ressort qui meut toute la machine est tres ingenieux. 40. Ces tyrans concevaient- ils toute la noirceur de leurs crimes? 41. Je n'irai plus a la chasse. §17. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 215 Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § 17. 1. Qu'il demente 1 son caractere. 2. Que je par- tisse plus tot 2 que je ne 3 pensais. 3. Qu'ils sentissent l'hor- reur de leur situation. 4. Vous pressentez les 4 malheurs avant qu' 5 ils arrivent. 5. Nous servions notre pays. 6. II sentit son malheur. 7. Je sortirai demain s' G il fait 7 beau temps. 8 8. lis partiront demain pour Londres. 9. Je croyais 9 que vous repartiriez avant lui. 10. Sens-tu 10 toute ma bonte envers toi? 10 11. Qu'ils sortent quand ils voudront. 11 12. J'offrc 12 mes services a votre pere. 13. lis ouvrent la fenetre. 14. Nous entr'ouvrions 13 la porte. 15. Je decouvris sa malice. 16. Yous couvrites la table d' 14 argent. 17. II decouvrira la fraude. 18. Je decouvrirais 15 le piege. 19. Vous recouvririez ce livre. 20. Que je decouvre le complot forme 10 contre moi. 21. Que vous ouvnez votve coeur a vos amis. 22. Qu'elle decouvrit toute sa perversite. 23. Qu'ils le lT couvrisseut de 18 confusion. 24. Decouvrons la maison. 25. Mori cou- sin sQiuTre beaucoup. 26. Je souffrais avec patience. 59 27. II souurit avec beaucoup de 20 courage. 28. Nous ou- vrirons notre cceur a notre pere. 29. lis entr'ouvraient la fenetre. 30. Que nous souffrions avec patience. 19 31. Que je rouvrisse 21 cette malle. 32. Qu'il souffre sans se plaindre. 22 33. Qu'ils oifrent mes remerciments au ministre. 34. Nous decouvrons votre dessein. 35. II ofLVait trop peu. 23 36. Ils rouvraient toutes les plaies de rnon coaur. 37. Nous offrimes nos secours a votre frere. 24 38. Je souffrirai plus que vous ne 3 pensez. 39. Ils offriront une grande somme 25 d' 20 argent. 40. Nous rouvririons la boutique. 41. Qu'il offre une grande somme d'argent de 26 cette terre. 42. Qu'ils entr'ouvrent les 27 yeux. 43. Que nous souftrissions votre mauvais traitement. 44. Voyez Pordre admirable de l'uiiivers. 45. Si vous ie voulez, il le voudra aussi. 216 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 18 - Ibregulae Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § 18, 1. Je tiens 1 mon livre. 2. Ces chevaux appar- tiennent 2 a mon pere. 3. Yous deteniez mon fils. 4. Nous continmes la populace. 5. Elle revienclra 3 ce soir de la ville. 6. J'entretiendrais ma famille. 7. Que je subvienne aux besoins de cette malheureuse famille. 8. Qu'ils parviennent au plus haut degre de 4 gloire. 9. Qu'ils le retinssent jus- qu'au 5 commencement de la semaine prochaine. 10. Convenez que vous revenez trop tard. 11. Elle vient nous voir 6 tous les quinze jours. 7 12. Je soutenais le fait. 13. lis retenaient une partie de l'argent. 14. Vous intervintes dans l'affaire. 15. Nous parviendrons a notre but. 16. II deviendrait savant. 17. Qu'il circonvienne ses juges. 18. Que j'ob- tinsse de lui de 8 meilleures conditions. 19. Que vous re- vinssiez avant la fin de ce mois. 20. Prevenons les maux qui pourraient provenir 6 de son imprudence. 21. Nous con- venons avec vous qu'il avait tort. 9 22. II obtenait une bonne situation. 23. Je disconvins de 10 ce qu' n il dit. 24. lis tinrent leurs promesses. 25. Vous soutienclrez votre rang. 26. Vous retiendrez 12 le capitaine. 27. Que nous prevenions les mauvais effets des prejuges de leur enfance. 28. Que nous soutinssions le poids de 1' 13 affliction avec courage. 14 29. Tiens ta parole. 15 30. Qu'ils soutiennent le parti 16 des innocents. 81. Vous devenez 17 honnete homme. 32. Nous revenions a l.i maison. ls 33. II maintint la 13 discipline dans l'armee. 34. J'obtiendrai le consentement du roi. 35. lis reviendront sous pen de jours. 19 36. lis obtiendraient ce qu' n ils demandent. 37. Que vous conveniez que mes raisons sont meilleures 20 que les votres. 21 38. Qu'elle devint plus prudente. 22 39. Qu'il devienne savant. 40. Envoyez querir le medecin et suivez exactement son avis. 41. Je cueillerai avec plaisir quelques- unes de ces fleurs et de ces fruits, puisque vous etes bien aise d'en avoir. § 19. ETYMOLOGY. THE VERB. 217 Irregular Veres. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § 19. 1. J'entrevois 1 quelque chose de 2 brillant sous le lit. 2. Nous pouvons vous etre tres utiles dans 3 cette occa- sion. 3. II pleuvait hier. 4. Je previs 4 les consequences dangereuses de cette demarche. 5. Les juges sursirent 5 a I'execution de Farret qu'ils avaient rendu. 6. Yous verrez mieux 6 de cette place. 7. Nous remettrions a un autre temps la poursuite de nos desseins. 8. Je ne pense pas qu'il pleuve 7 aujourd'hui. 9. Que je m'assisse 8 parmi ses juges. 10. Asseyez-vous 9 pres de 10 moi. 11. Vous ne savez pas votre lecon. 12. Nous ne pouvions 11 partir plus tot. 13. II s'assit a 12 l'ombre d'un arbre. 14. Je saurai vous recompenser de 13 votre diligence. 15. Leurs excuses equi- vaudront 14 a un refus. 16. Vous emouvriez le coeur de cet horame insensible. 17. Que nous revoyions ces jours heu- reux. 18. Vois 13 les consequences de ta 15 folie. 19. Qu'ils saehent 16 trois ou quatre pages de leur catechisme avant le diner. 17 20. Le ressort qui meut 18 la machine est fort sim- ple. 21. lis virent qu'ils s'etaient 19 trompes. 20 22. II me le re- vaudra. 21 23. Je voudrais, de 22 tout mon coeur, vous obliger 23 dans cette affaire. 24. lis pourvoiraient a nos besoins. 25. Que vous mouviez cette pierre. 26. Que nous pussions le con- soler. 23 27. Qu'il pourvoie au bonheur de ses enfants. 28. II faut pratiquer ^ la vertu, si 1' 24 on veut etre 23 heureux. 29. Je prevoyais que vous ne reussiriez pas. 30. lis emouvaient les passions des auditeurs. 31. Vous pourvutes a la surete de votre maison. 32. Nous nous rassierons, 25 quand ils seront partis. 26 33. Le roi l'eleverait 27 a une plus haute charge, s'il voulait a seulement paraitre 23 la desirer. 34. Que je pre- yale sur la durete de son coeur. 35. Que leurs terres equi- vaillent aux 28 notres. 36. Que vous sussiez ou le trouver. 2-5 37. Prevoyons le danger. 38. II ne pleuvra pas aujourd'hui; mais je crains qu'il ne 20 pleuve 30 demain. 19 #1-8 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 20, 21. Irregular Verbs. §§ 84-36. simple tenses. § 20* 1. Je ne fais pas de 1 mal. 2. lis extraient 2 tons les plus beaux passages de cet ouvrage. 3. Nous redefimes 3 cinq on six fois le meme ourlet. 4. Je ne le ferais pour rien 4 au monde. 5. lis nous distrairaient par leur babil. 6. Que vous ne vous defassiez pas 5 de vos prejuges. 7. Que nous refissions une promenade. 8. Satisfaisons nos parents. 9. Elle trait ses vaches. 10. Je defaisais toutes les coutures de ma robe. 11. Vous fites une grande meprise. 12. Nous vous satisferons autant que G nous pourrons. 13. Qu'il sur- fasse trop cette mousseline. 14. Qu'ils ne refassent pas leurs themes. 15. Que vous ne contrefissiez pas tout le monde. 16. Faites plus d'attention a votre ecriture/ 17. Nous satis- faisons nos maitres. 18. II distrayait ses camarades. 19. Je refis le voyage de Paris. 8 20. lis contrefirent les ridicules de cette demoiselle. 21. Vous ne soustrairez pas ces coupables a 9 la rigueur des lois. 22. Nous soustrairions nos eleves aux 9 dangers des 10 mauvaises compagnies. 23. Qu'il prenne les pigeons. 24. Que je ne redefisse pas mon ouvrage. 25. Qu'ils ne fissent pas de 11 bruit. 26. Vous surfaites la valeur de cette prairie. 27. Nous soustrayions le quart de la somme. 12 28. II se defit de la fausse opinion qu'il avait concue 13 de leur merite. 29. lis ne me distrairont pas de mes etudes. 30. Que nous vous satisfassions en tout. 14 31. Qu'il ne surfit pas ses marcbandises. Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. §21. 1. Jeplais a x toute la famille. 2. lis se complaisent dans leur ouvrage. 3. Vous vous complaisiez dans vos vices. 4. Nous nous tuuies malgre nous. 5. II plaira au §§ 21, 22. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 219 roi. 6. Je me plairai a 2 lire. 3 7. Ses manieres vous plairaient. 8. Que vous vous plaisiez a tourraenter 3 tout le monde. 9. Que nous deplussions par notre sincerite. 10. Qu'il taise la plus grande partie de ce qu' 4 il a entendu. 11. II se tait quand je parle. 12. Je me taisais contre mon gre. 13. lis taisaient la verite. 14. Vous deplutes a votre oncle. 15. Nous nous plairons aveo lui. 16. Son ami me deplairait. 17. Que je plaise par ma condescendance. 18. Que leurs reponses deplaisent a tout homme vertueux. 19. Que vous vous complussiez dans vos defauts. 20. Plaisons-nous 5 a cultiver les sciences. 21. Nous nous deplaisons dans cette situation. 22. II plaisait a tout le monde. 23. Je me plus a faire cela. 24. lis se plurent a me tourmenter. 25. Vous doplairez a ma mere. 26. Nous tairions cet 6 eveneinent. 27. Qu'elle deplaise par son esprit de 7 contradiction. 28. Que jc me tusse quand je suis tellement outrage. 29. Que ces superbes descriptions plussent en tout temps. 8 30. Vous vous plaisez a* contredire. 31. Nous deplaisons au gouverneur. 32. II deplut par son arrogance. 33. Je me tairai. 34. Ces livres me plairont. 35. Vous vous plairiez a converser avec lui. 36. Que nous taisions les vrais motifs de sa conduite. 37. Que mon fils vous pliit. 38. Plais par ta soumission. Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § 22« 1. Cet homme ne se repait 1 que 2 de 3 sang et de 4 carnage. 2. Virgile naquit a Mantoue. 3. Je souhaite que le 5 bonheur renaisse 6 pour lui. 7 4. Nous naissons tous 8 sujets a beaucoup d' 9 infirmites. 5. Ces insenses se repurent de 3 chirneres. 6. Je ne pensais pas qu'il reput 10 son 11 imagination do 3 cet espoir. 7. L'esperance renaissait dans son cceur. 8- Les arts et les sciences renaitront sous son regne. 9. Leurs troupeaux 12 paissaient l'herbe tenclre. 10. Cet homme repai- trait-il ses yeux de 8 ce spectacle cruel? 11. Je connais 13 votre 220 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ %%, 23. pere. 12. lis paraissent et 14 disparaissent clans un moment. 13. Vous nieconnaissez votre ecriture. 14. Nous pariunes en 15 public. 15. Elle paraitra plus belle. 16. Elle grandirait 16 tons les jours, 17 si elle n'etait 16 pas malacle. 17. Que je con- naisse mon devoir. 18. Qu'ils me connaissent. 19. Que vous reparussiez dans votre pays. 20. Accroissons, tous les jours, notre reputation par de 18 nouveaux actes de 15 courage. 21. II meconnait ses amis. 22. Je me repaissais de 3 cet espoir. 23. lis reparaissaient sur le theatre. 24. Vous parutes in 6- content. 25. Nous connaitrions les forces de Pennemi. 26. Qu'elle reconnaisse ses erreurs. 27. Que je le reconnusse apres une absence de plusieurs annees. 28. Que ces arbres crussent rapidement. 29. Connaissez toute l'etendue do votre folie. 30. Nous accroissons notre revenu. 31. Sa ju- ment paissait dans le^parc. 32. Je reconnus votre sccur quand elle parla. 33. lis reconnureut leur cheval. 34. lis connaitront votre pere et votre mere. 35. Vous paraitriez plus age que moi. 36. Que nous comparaissions devant ce tribunal. Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § Sill, 1. Qu'il meconnut ses amis depuis l'accroisement de son pouvoir. 2. Reconnais ton imprudence. 3. Qu'ils paraissent joyeux et contents. 4. Vous paraissez tres triste. 5. Nous comparaissions devant les juges. 6. Elle connut le monde avant nous. 7. Je connaitrai toute l'affaire. 8. Je reconnai- trais votre innocence. 9. lis connaitraient la verite. 10. Que vous disparaissiez pour quelque temps. 11. Que nous aecrussions nos possessions. 12. Qu'elle paraisse plus reser- vee. 13. Je lis un livre interessant. 14. Je riais de bon cceur. 1 15. Un rayon d'esperance nous conduisit au milieu cle nos mnlheurs. 16. Je ne reboirai pas de 2 cette liqueur. 3 17. Je ne vous dedirais en aucune 4 maniere. 18. lis conn*- §§23,24. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 221 raient des 5 peches a r> P 7 eau-de-vie. 19. Qu'ils maudissent leur perversity. 20. Que vous dissiez une faussete. 21. Qu'ils bussent a la sante du roi. 22. II confisait des concombres. 23. II lui sourit en signe d'approbation. 24. II exclura son fils de sa succession. 25. Cela ne me suffisait pas. 26. Quo je l'exclue de ma compagnie. 27. Que je relusse ce poeme. 28. Conclus ton discours. 29. Nous buvons a la glace.* 30. Nous contredisions cette nouvelle. 31. Nous predimes ces desastres. 32. Nous ne medirons de personne. 9 33. Ce dia- mant ne reluirait 10 pas tant, s' u il n'etait 10 pas fin. 34. Qu'il lise attentivement. 35. Qu'elie medit de ses 12 meilleures amies. 36. Vous dites la verite. 37. Vous relisiez ma lettre. 38. Vous nuisites a vos interets. 39. Vous conclurez, si vous 13 voulez, que nous 14 avons tort. 40. Nous ririons a ses depens. 41. Que nous nous sufiisions a nous-memes. 42. Ne maudissons personne. Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § 3 Jr. 1. lis lui interdisaient l'entree de 1 leur maison. 2. lis elurent un honnete homme pour leur representant. 3. Vous me nuiriez 2 plus que vous ne 3 croyez. 4. Que vous elisiez un president. 5. Que vous dissiez une faussete. 6. Redites-moi votre aventure. 7. Je transcris mon theme. 8. Vous me prescrivez une tache que je ne 3 puis remplir. 9. Vous souscriviez a tout ce 4 qu'il disait. 10. Vous inscri- vites les noms de 6 personnes inconnues de 6 tout le monde. 11. Nous transcrivons son memoire. 7 12. II ecrivait sa let- tre. 13. Que je decrive 8 tous les charmes de ce superbo paysage. 14. Que vous ecrivissiez de nouveau 9 tous les verbes reguliers de votre grammaire. 15. Circonscrivons nos desirs dans 10 les limites de la 11 droiture. 16. II in- scrit son nom dans un registre. 17. lis circonscrivent son autorite dans 10 d' 12 etroites limites. 18. lis decrivaient 19 * 222 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 24, 25. line horrible tempete. 19. lis proscrivirent tons leurs ennerais. 20. Vous ecrivez votre theme. 21. Nous pro- scrivions les 13 gens vieieux de 14 notre societe. 22. Qu'il circonscrive notre pouvoir. 23. Que je proscrivisse toute vaine pompe de 14 cette ceremonie. 24. Qu'ils ecrivissenfc d' 15 une maniere lisible. 25. Ecrivez deux ou trois pages de ce livre. 26. Nous souscrivons a votre ouvrage. 27, J'ecrivais tous les jours a ma soeur, qui me repondait tres rare- ment. 28. J'ecrivis la semaine derniere a mon procureur, qui me repondit hier. 29. Je ne prescrirai rien 16 sans votre avis. 30. lis decriront ce qu' ir ils ont vu. 31. Vous ecri- riez 1S mieux, 19 si vous etiez ls plus attentif. 20 32. Que nous ecrivions sur ce sujet. 33. Qu'elle ecrivit nn roman interes- sant. 34. Inscris mon nom immediatement apres le tien. Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § f^5, 1. Qu'ils proscrivent toute affectation de 1 leurs ecrits. 2. Nous transerivions toutes vos lettres. 3. II sous- crira a tout ce que 2 vous desirez. 4. Je transcrivais tout cet ouvrage. 5. Que vous inscriviez tous les prin&paux habi- tants parmi vos souscripteurs. 6. Que nous souscrivissions aux conditions qu'ils prescrivent. 7. Qu'il decrive }>lus claire- ment les circonstances de cet evenement. 8. Ces arbres pro- duisent de 3 bonnes pommes tous les ans. 9. Vous conduisiez 1'entreprise. 10. Nous traduisimes leur ouvrage. 11. II con- struira un palais. 12. Je traduirais de l' 4 italien en anglais. 13. lis produiraient un bon effet. 14. Que nous introdui- ssions une nouvelle coutume. 15. Qu'il deduise au moms 5 la moitie de cette somme. 16. J'instruis la jeunesse. 7 17. Elle les instruit. 18. J'introduisais une nouvelle coutume. 19. Us produisaient leur titre. 20. Nous reduirons votre frere au 8 silence. 21. II introduisait mon fils a la cour. 22. Que je fasse cuire cette viande. 23. Que vous instruisissiez la §§ 25, 26 ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 223 jeunesse 7 clans la vraie religion. 24. Conduisons nos affaires avec plus cle circonspection. 25. Nous tracluisons de P 4 an- glais en 9 francais. 26. II detruisait le raiir. 27. Je deduisis les depenses. 28. lis induisirent les jeunes gens 10 en 9 erreur. 29. Vous instruirez leurs enfants. 30. Nous vous recondui- rions a la maison. 31. Introduisez cette histoire dans votre nouvel ouvrage. 32. Nous construisions un vaisseau. 33. II se conduisit tres bien. Ieeegular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. § S6. 1. J'admets ce principe. 2. Vous me surprenez beaucoup. 3. Cela ne me convainquait pas. 4. Je moulus tout le cafe. 5. Vous interrompites son sommeil. 6. II re- moudra le grain. 7. J'emoudrais mes rasoirs. 8. Vous les absoudriez. 9. Qu'il commette ce crime. 10. Que j'entre- prisse ce voyage. 11. Qu'ils rebattissent ces matelas. 12. Reprefiez vos eleves de leurs clefauts. 13. Tu prends trop de peine. 14. Nous nous compromettions pour le servir. 15. Tu n'appris pas ta lecon. 16. lis transmirent leur gloire a leur posterite. 17. Nous vous permettrons d' x aller a la foire. 2 18. Tu te demettrais la 3 jambe. 19. lis abattraient leur cha- teau. 20. Que nous rompions la treve. 21. Qu'elle recousit cet ourlet. 22. Remets tous les livres a leur place. 23. Qu'ils so resolvent a souffrir beaucoup. 24. Le bois qu'on 4 briile so 4 resout en cendres et en fumee. 25. Je combattais pour mon pays. 26. Vous poursuiviez un innocent. 27. II ne sur- vecut pas a ce malheur. 28. Vous desapprendrez tout ce que vous avez appris. 29. II ne comprendrait pas cette expli- cation. 5 30. Que je me meprenne sur ce point. 31. Que nous missions plus d ,6 ordre dans nos affaires. 32. Nous nous sou- mettons a votre decision. 33. Tu ne suivais pas les lecons de ton precepteur. 34. lis omettaient un devoir essentiel. 35. Nous lui promimes une recompense. 36. Tu vaincras tes 224 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 2Q, 27. ennemis. 37. Vous vovez les consequences qui s'ensuivront. 38. Nous le convaincrions. 39. Qu'elle couse sa robe. 40. Que les peres revivent dans leurs enfants. 41. Que vous vecussiez plus regulierernent. 42. Ne corrompons pas les mceurs de la jeunesse. Irregular Verbs. §§ 34-36. simple tenses. §37. 1. Je crains mon maitre. 2. lis se plaignent de 1 tout le monde. 3. Vous contraigniez mon cousin a vendre sa maison. 4. Nous joignimes les 2 mains. 5. Elle enfreindra vos ordres. 6. Je contraindrais l'ennemi a combattre. 7. lis enfreindraient la constitution. 8. Que vous plaigniez son sort. 9. Que nous feignissions d'etre contents de lui. 10. Qu'il peigne sa maison a neuf. 3 11. Elle eteint le feu. 12. Je craignais votre colere. 13. lis peignaient un naufrage. 14. Vous eteignites les chandelles. 15. Nous peindrons notre chambre. 16. II craindrait de deplaire a 4 son maitre. 17. Que je joigne mes efforts aux 5 votres. 18. Qu'ils plaignent son malheur. 19. Que vous craignissiez ces spectres. 20. Enjoignons a nos enfants de respecter les vieillards. 21. Nous plaignons les malheureux. 22. II plaignait ma soeur. 23. Je feignis d' G etre malade. 24. lis contraignirent 7 leur fils a, apprendre les mathematiques. 25. Vous plaindrez leur folie. 26. Nous feindrions de les croire. 27. Que sa tante craigne 7 les effets de sa legerete. 28. Que je joignisse 7 mon opinion acelle 8 des autres juges. 29. Contraignez-le a suivre vos avis. 30. Vous peignez tres bien. 31. Nous teignions de la soie. 32. II enfreignit les lois de son pays. 33. J'ordonnerai au domestique de 6 rester a, la maison. 9 34. lis craindront d'etre decouverts. 35. Vous peindriez tres-bien. 36. Que nous le contraignions a changer de 10 conduite. 37. Qu'il peignit votre portrait. 38. Crains Dieu pendant toute ta vie. 39. Qu'ils craignent ma colere. § 28. ETYMOLOGY. — THE VERB. 225 COMPOUND TENSES. § 28. 1. J'ai parle a la reine d'Angleterre. 2. La loi est abolie. 1 3. Nous avons tres-bien 2 dormi. 4. Nous avons de- couvert sa fraude. 5. Sa fraude est decouverte. 6. Nous sommes 3 venus 1 diner avec 4 vous. 7. Vous avez reou line lettre. 8. Les lettres 5 qu'on a revues. 9. Nous avons tu cette affaire. 5 10. Cette affaire fut tue. 6 11. Nous avons eteint les chandelles. 12. Les chandelles sont eteintes. 13. Nous avons connu leurs intentions. 14. Leurs intentions etaient connues. 15. Vous avez traduit plusieurs 7 livres anglais en francais. 16. J'ai vendu mes chevaux. 8 17. Mes chevaux sont vendus. 18. II a ecrit sa reponse. 19. Sa reponse est ecrite. 20. Elie a chante une jolie chanson. 21. La chanson 9 fut bien chantee. 22. J'avais bati une maison. 23. Ma maison etait batie. 24. Nous avions pressenti ces malheurs. 25. Vous aviez servi vos amis. 26. Yos amis etaient 10 partis. 1 27. lis ont offert une recompense. 28. Une recompense fut offerte. 29. lis avaient obtenu sa faveur. 11 30. Sa grace fut obtenue. 31. Nous avions apercu les ennemis. 32. Les ennemis furent apercus. 33. J'ai connu 12 votre soeur. 34. Vos soeurs sont bien connues. 35. Nous avons reduit vos sceurs au 13 silence. 36. Vos sceurs furent reduites au silence. 37. Vous avez cachete la lettre. 38. La lettre est cachetee. 1 39. lis ont rempli les bouteilles. 40. Les bouteilles etaient remplies. 41. lis avaient detenu mes soeurs. 42. Mes sceurs furent de- tenues. 43. Nous avons joint les deux parties ensemble. 44. Les deux parties sont jointes ensemble. 45. lis avaient re- connu nion 14 innocence. 46. Mon innocence fut reconnue. 47. Nous avons introduit cette coutume. 48. Cette coutume fut introduite. 49. lis ont repondu a mes questions. 50. Vos lettres furent recues. 51. J'ai cede mon cheval favori a mon cousin. 52. Le precepteur a-t-il donne de belles gravures a, son eleve? 53. J'eus bientot mange mon argent et epuise mes ressources. 54. II n'est pas probable que j'aie parle imprudemment. 226 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 29 ' Reflective Verbs. § 31. simple tenses. § 29. 1. Je m'abstiens de le faire. 1 2. II se baisse. 3. Nous nous baignons tous les jours. 2 4. Vous vous couchez avant 3 votre frere. 5. lis se revoltent. 6. Je m'ecoutais trop. 7. lis s'applaudissaient de 4 leur sottise. 8. Vous vous depechates. 9. Elle s'endormira, 10. Je m'enrichirais. 5 11. lis s'envoleraient. 12. Que nous nous precipitins dans ce danger. 13. Qu'il se serve des moyens que G je lui indique. 14. O homme, souviens-toi 7 que tu es 8 mortel. 15. Habitu- ons-nous an 9 travail. 16. Qu'ils se depechent. 17. II se proposait de ia voyager. 18. Je me retractai. 19. lis se por- terent tres-bien. 20. Nous nous enhardirons. 21. lis s'en- tretiendrait avec elle. 22. Les fleurs s'epanoiiiraient. 23. Que vous vous occupiez de u bagatelles. 24. Que nous nous avilissions a nos propres yeux. 25. Ne te rejouis pas de 18 voir tes ennemis malheureux. 26. Ne nous seduisons pas nous-mcmes. 12 27. Qu'ils ne se comporteiit pas si mal. 13 28. Nous nous tourmentions pour cette 14 affaire. 15 29. La riviere deborda. 30. Je m'emparerai de sa fortune. 21. II s'en- racineront. 32. Vous vous etonneriez. 10 33. Que je m'aper- coive de vos desseins. 34. Qu'ils se detournent du droit cliemin. 35. Que vous vous enorgueillissiez de ce faible avantage. 36. Qu'il se desabuse. 37. Reposez-vous a l'ombre de cet arbre. 38. Vous vous desesperiez sans 17 raison. 39. Nous nous defiames de 18 votre sosur. 40. II s'erapressera de le faire. 41. Vous vous enrhumerez. 42. Nous nous leve- rions. 19 43. Qu'il s'amuse a ses depens. 44. Que je me ren- disse a, ses raisons. 45. Qu'ils s'entr' 20 aimassent depuis leur enf;mce. 46. Qu'elle ne se couche pas de si bonne heure. 21 47. Ne vous melez pns de 22 cette affaire. 48. Je me plains de sa mauvaise conduite. 49. lis se proposent de voyager au prin- temps. 50. Je me tourmentais sans cesse pour les affaires d'autrui. §§ 30, 31. ETYMOLOGY. THE VEEB. 227 Reflective Veebs. § 28. 2. COMPOUND TENSES. § SO, 1. Je me suis endormi. 2. Ces fleurs se sont fletries. 1 3. Vous vous etiez inoque de lui. 2 4. Nous nous fumes promenes dans le pare. 5. Elle se sera farde le 3 visage. 4 6. Je me serais repenti de ma temerite. 7. lis se seraient noyes. 8. Que vous vous soyez deguises si adroite- ment. 9. Que nous nous fussions egares dans la foret. 10. Elle s'est evanouie. 11. Je m'etais marie. 5 12. lis s'etaient plaints de vous. 13. Vous vous futes conformes a leurs ordres. 14. Nous nous serons imagine qu'il avait raison. 15. II se serait vante de sa naissance. 16. Que je me sois trompe si grossierement. 6 17. Que vos sceurs se soient expo- sees si temerairement. 18. Nous nous sommes fies a votre pere, 19. Elle s'etait defie de 7 moi. 20. Je me fus rejoui de ces nouvelles. 21. lis se furent ressouvenus de 7 moi. 22. Vous vous serez enrichi. 23. Nous nous serions devoues entierement 6 au service de notre pays. 24. Qu'elle se soit decidee a rester. 25. Que je me fusse venge. 26. Vous vous etes formalise 8 sans raison. 27. Nous nous etions portes assez bien. 28. II se fut repenti de ses fautes. 29. Je me serai empare de ses armes. 30. Ces femmes se seront fa- tiguees. 31. Vous vous seriez degrades dans l'opinion pub- lique. 32. Que nous nous soyons delasses de la 9 fatigue. 33. Qu'elle se fut negligee dans cette circonstance importante. Negatives and Inteeeogatives. § 33. §31. 1. Vous connaissez 1 le roi. 2. Vous ne 2 connais- sez pas le roi. 3. Connaissez-vous le roi? 4. Vous le 3 con- naissez. 5. Vous ne le connaissez pas. 6. Le connaissez-vous? 7. II vend son cheval. 8. II ne vend pas son cheval. 9. Vend- il son cheval? 10. II ne le vend pas. 11. Le vend-il? 12. L'a-t- 4 ilvendu? 13. lis sont malades. 14. Sont-ils malades? 228 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 31, 32. 15. lis ne scmt pas malades. 16. Je donnerai line montre & votre fils. 5 17. Je ne donnerai pas une montre a votre fils. 18. Je ne l'ai pas donnee 6 a votre fils. 19. Je l'ai donnee a votre fils. 20. Je ne blame pas votre conduite. 21. Choisit- elle une belle 7 couleur? 8 22. Nous le tenons. 23. Avez-vous repondu a leurs questions ? 24 Vous avez traduit le livre ; mais vous ne Favez pas bien traduit. 25. Ne les 9 menacez pas. 26. Leur 3 a-t-il parle? 27. Nous avons pacifie le pays. 28. lis ne m'ont pas pardonne. 29. Cherchez-vous votre livre ? 30. Oui, je l'ai perdu. 31. lis ne chantent pas bien. 32. Avez- vous dejeune? 33. II n'a pas recu de 10 lettre de son pere. 34. Je lui ai envoye un livre. 35. L'a-t-il recu ? 36. Non, mon- sieur, il ne Fa pas recu. 37. Yous ne negligez pas vos amis. 38. Ne 'm'avez-vous pas neglige ? 39. Les Autriehiens n'ont pas ratifie le traite; mais les Frangais les forceront a 11 le faire. 40. Avez-vous decide la question ? THE ADVERB. §§38-42. § 355. 1. Mon pere peut faire cela aisement. 1 2. Yous parlez librement. 3. lis agissent pruclemment. 4. II mourut soudainement. 5. lis combattirent vigoureusement. 6. II repondit sagement. 7. Parlez- vous serieusement ? 8. Yous souffrez patiemment. 9. II nia le fait absolument. 10. Us sont heureusement hors de danger. 11. lis y viendront pro- bablement. 12. J'ai mange suffisamment. 13. Parlez-leur 2 separement. 14. II repondit afiirmativement. 15. Yous ne parlez pas clairement. 16. Je suis constamment 3 occupe. 17. lis parlent figurativement. 18. Les 4 enfants sont natu- rellement passionnes pour 5 le 6 plaisir. 19. Votre perte est reellement grande. 20. II vient nous voir regulierement. 21. Yous fites cela secretement. 22. Nous souffrons toujours patiemment 3 leurs insultes. 23. lis assaillirent bravement Fennemi. 24. Nous voyons distinctement. 25. lis moururent miserablement. 26. Nous nous meprenons quelquefois. 27. §§ 32. ETYMOLOGY. — THE ADVERB. 229 Vous me contredisez 7 souvent. 28. lis se retirerent secrete- ment. 29. Je consens volontiers a ce marche. 30. lis promi- rent a, contre-coeur 8 d'y 9 aller. 31. lis s'opposerent fortement a cette mesure. 32. lis vous trompent reellement. 33. lis s'enquirent minutieusement de cette affaire. 34. lis se me- prennent grossierement. 35. Vous parlez francais plus facile- ment 10 que moi. 36. Cette page-ci n est mal ecrite ; 12 et celle- la 13 est encore plus mal ecrite j 10 vous allez de mal en pis. 20 230 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 33. II. .SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. §§ 57-64. § US. 1. Un 1 ami ne peut etre bien connu dans la 2 pros- perity, ni se cacher dans 1' 2 adversite. 2. Le 3 bon exemple est une 1 langue que 4 tout le monde comprend. 3. La 2 For- tune est une 1 divinite capricieuse. 5 4. Quand un 1 homme est une fois hors de 6 la voie de Dieu, il tombe aisernent d'une 7 faute dans une autre. 5. Un homme sage estime tres-peu 8 le 2 plaisir, parce que c' 9 est un 10 poison pour l'esprit ; mais il estime beaucoup 8 la 2 vertu, parce qu'elle est un ornement dans la 2 prosperity, une consolation dans P 2 adversite, et la 11 source de tout bonheur. 6. Le 12 printemps, 1' 12 ete, P 12 au- tomne et P 12 hiver sont les quatre saisons de P 13 annee. 7. La 2 vue, 1' 2 ouie, le 2 toucher, le 2 gout et 1' 2 odorat sont les cinq sens naturels. 8. L' n est, P u ouest, le 11 nord, et le 11 sud sont les 11 quatre points cardinaux. 9., L' 11 amour de la 2 gloire, la 11 crainte de la 2 honte, et le 11 dessein de faire for- tune, 14 sont souvent la cause de cette valeur 15 sivantee parmi les 3 homines. 10. Les instructions de P 2 adversite sont salu- taires, quoique desagreables; les leeons de la 2 prosperite sont agreables, mais souvent pernicieuses ; les premieres 16 de- couvrent quelquefois des 17 vertus cachees, et les autres des 17 vices secrets. 11. L'air est tres sain en 18 France, et le climat de ce pays est tres tempere. 12. Je vends le 3 sucre 19 vingt- cinq francs les 20 dix kilogrammes, 21 le 3 cafe 19 sept francs les 20 deux kilogrammes et Je 3 tabac 19 cinquante centimes P m hectogramme. 13. Le 3 ble se vend dix francs le 20 de- calitre. 14. Ce ruban coute cinq francs le 20 metre. 15. Ce fromage coute soixante-quinze centimes le 20 demi-kilo- gramme. 16. On dit que je suis fils d'Achille. 17. Je suis francais et negociant. 18. Je suis un malheureux Francais, qui cherche un asile ou je puisse flnir mes jours en paix. 34. SYNTAX. — THE ARTICLE. 231 Articles. §§ 57-64. § 34* 1. Le 1 clemence, la 1 sagesse, et le 1 courage sont de -plus beaux 3 oraements dans un prince que 3 lesjoyaux 4 dont 5 il est couvert. 2. L' 6 usage est le legislateur des 6 langues. 3. La 1 charite est la 7 plus grande de toutes les vertus chretiennes. 4. L' 6 histoire, la 6 geographic ct les 6 mathematiques sont des 8 sciences necessaires. 5. L^orgueil et la 1 vanite sont souvent la source de bien des malheurs. 9 6. Les 6 heros out leurs moments de crainte, et les laches leurs moments de bravoure. 7. L' 1 intemperance et la 1 paresse sont les plus dangereux ennemis de la 10 vie. 8. L' c eloquence, la 6 peinture, la 6 sculpture et la 6 poesie appar- tiennent a 1' 10 imagination. 9. J'ainie a 11 voyager; j'etais Tan dernier enltalie; 12 je viens a present de 13 Prusse; je resterai cet hiver en 12 Angleterre ; mais j'irai au printemps prochain en 12 Allemagne. 10. L' 14 Europe, l' 14 Asie, P 14 A- frique et l' 14 Amerique sont les quatre parties du monde. 11. L'empire francais, les royaumes d'Angleterre et de Russie sont tres puissants. 12. La 14 Sicile est le grenier de l' 14 Italie, et Tltalie le jardin de l'Europe. 13. Je viens de 13 Russie, et j'irai au printemps prochain en Amerique. 14. Je pars pour le Portugal la semaine prochaine. 15. Mon pere vient de "Suisse. 16. Le 1 bon et le 1 mauvais semblcnt etre meles 15 ensemble dans toute la nature, et quelquefois etre confondus 16 l'un avec l'autre. 17 17. Le 1 blanc et le 1 noir sont deux couleurs opposees. 18. Le 1 vert blesse la vue moins 18 que le 1 rouge. 19. Le sage cherche la 1 sagesse, mais le fou 19 meprise la raison. 20. Newton dit qu'il y a 20 sept couleurs primitives, appelees 21 le rouge, 1'orange, le jaune, le vert, le bleu, l'indigo, et le violet, mais il n'y en a que trois, le rouge, le jaune, et le bleu. 21. L'Europe est bornee au nord par la Mer Glaciale ; au sud, par la Mediter- ranee, qui la separe de 1'Afrique ; a Test, par le continent de TAsie ; a Pouest, par l'Ocean Atlantique. 232 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 35. Articles. §§ 57-64. § 3t5. 1. Donnez-moi du x pain et du beurre ; de la 1 biere ou du vin ; de la viande ou du fromage ; de la moutarde et du vinaigre; des 1 pommes, des oranges et des citrons. 2. Un bon chretien ne considere pas le monde comnie un lieu de bannissement, oti il trouve des 1 pieges, des * difficultes et des dangers. 3. Les 2 services procurent des amis, et un bien- fait en 3 merite un autre. 4. L' 2 argent doune a une femme 4 du credit, des amis, de la naissance, et de la beaute. 5. L' 5 EsjDagne produit du vin, des citrons, des oranges et des olives. 6. Donnez-moi de Teau froide et du vin rouge. 7. L ,2 bistoire est pleine de vieux 6 generaux vaincus 7 par 3 de' J jeunes soldats. 8. De 9 grands evenements arriverent a la mort de Cesar. 9. De bon cidre vaut mieux 10 que de mau- vais vin. 10. Nous avons dans notre jardin de belles 6 peches et de beaux abricots. 11. Pour bien ecrire, il faut de bonne encre, de bonnes plumes et de bon papier. 12. Voila 11 de bon pain, mais de mauvaise n viande. 13. L'lionneur est du aux 2 rois et aux magistrate. 14. Preferons la 13 vertu a l'interet. 15. Les 2 evenements rares nous frappent d' 1 ad- miration. 16. L'ignorance est la source des erreurs, des scrupules et de la superstition. 17. La gloire et l'infamie sont vaines, si elles n'accompagnent pas des biens et des raaux reels. 18. Le 2 for et 1' 2 acier sont plus utiles que M Tor et 1'argent. 19. Les 2 rem odes sont souvent degoutants en pro- portion de ce qu' 15 ils sont salutaires. 20. L'or et 1'argent ne sauraient 16 rendre 1'homme heureux. 21. II a recu des vins de France et d'Espagne, de la soie d'ltalie, de l'huile de Provence et de la laine d'Angleterre. 22. Dieu dit, Que la lumiere soit, et la lumiere fut. 23. L'Apollon du Belvedere et la Venus de Medicis sont des restes precieux de l'antiquite. 24. J'etais parti de rAmerique quand mon frere y arriva. 25. Je ne fnisais que d'arriver de Russie quand j'eus le malheur de perdre mon pere. 36. SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. 233 Articles. §§ 57-64. § 36. 1. La 1 politesse n'est pas toujours nee avec nous; elle 2 est souvent le fruit de l' 3 usage, cle l ,s experience et cle l' 8 application. 2. Si la societe se forme 4 de la communica- tion des 5 idees et des 5 sentiments, la parole doit en 6 etre le bien essentiel, etant a la fois 7 le pinceau de l'esprit et l'interprete du cceur. 3. L'interet, la gloire et l'ambition sont les grand mobiles de nos actions. 4. Outre l'or et Far- gent, l'Europe tire du nouveau monde du poivre, du sucre, du tabac, et plusieurs 8 autres 9 choses. 5. Le vice et la x vertu out des 10 effets contraires. 6. Charles 11 deux, roi d' 12 Es- pagne, fils de Philippe u quatre, 13 laissa son royaume a Phi- lippe u cinq. 13 7. Guillaume n trois, 13 roi d' 12 Angleterre, 6pousa la princesse Marie, fille de Jacques deux, 13 et petite- fille de Charles premier. 13 8. Socrate etait 14 philosophe ; Apelles, 14 peintre ; Phidias, 14 sculpteur ; Ciceron, 14 orateur; Tite-Live, 14 historien ; et Virgile, 14 poete. 9. Je suis fran- gais, mais mon pere etait anglais. 10. Le meilleur 15 cafe vient de Moka, ville de l'Arabie Heureuse. 11. Yotre pere, etait-il 16 noble ? 12. Non, il etait soldat. 13. Le canal de Briare, dans le Gatinais, province de France, joint la Loire si la Seine. 14. Frederic le Grand, roi de Prusse, etait a la fois roi, guerrier, et philosophe. 15. Quelle 17 facheuse situation est celle 18 qui oblige un pere, dans sa propre defense, a reveler les fautes de ses enfants ! 16. Le triomphe fut de- cerne a Cesar, honneur qu'il meritait bien. 17. Raphael excellait dans 1' 19 expression, talent rare chez les 20 peintres. 18. Mai et septembre sont les deux plus beaux mois de l'an- nee dans le sud de la France. 19. La Provence et le Lan- guedoc produisent des oranges, des citrons, des figues, des olives, des amandes, des chataignes, des peches, des abricots, et des raisins d'une rare douceur. 20. Quelques personnes pensent que c'est la (a Naples) que Virgile prit le modele des Champs-Ely sees. 20* 234 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 37. Aeticles. §§ 57-64. § 37. 1. Septembre et octobre * sont deux beaux mois en 2 Angleterre. 2. Jupiter, Mars et Venus etaient des 3 di- vinites paiennes. 4 3. Londres et Paris sont les deux plus grandes capitales de l' 6 Europe. 4. Mon frere et ma 6 soeur apprennent la 7 geographic 5. Quiconque 8 epargne les 9 me- diants fait tort 10 aux bous. 6. II y a 11 deux sortes de curi- osite, 1'une d'interet, qui nous porte a desirer d'apprendre ce qui 12 pent nous etre utile ; et l'autre d'orgueil, qui vient du desir de savoir ce que 12 les 7 autres ignorent. 7. La vieillesse est une sorte de tyran, qui defend, sous peine de 13 mort, tons les plaisirs de la jeunesse. 8. La politesse est un melange de 14 discretion, de 14 complaisance, et de 14 circonspection. 9. Les louanges sont une sorte de tribut qu'on 15 paie au 7 vrai merits 10. II y a dans la 16 bonte une sorte d'aimant qui attire tous les hommes a soi. 17 11. Les hieroglyphes des Egyptiens etaient des 3 figures d' 18 hommes, d'oiseaux, d'ani- maux et de 19 reptiles. 12. Les galeries de la Chambre des Communes sont soutenues 20 par de petits piliers de 13 fer, ornes 21 de 19 chapiteaux corintbiens. 13. Les Anglais ne peuvent 22 manufacturer leur drap superfin sans laine d'Es- jpagne. 14. Je porte toujours en ete des 19 bas de 13 soie. 15. Le jour d'ouverture d'un nouveau parlement, les quatre repre- sentants do la cite de Londres paraissent en robes d' 13 ecar- late, et s'asseient aupres du 23 president. 16. La sagesse de Socrate et la valeur d^Achille sont celebrees dans les ecrits des historiens. 17. Le caractere des fables d'Esope est la 7 simple nature. 18. O bonheur! fin 24 de notre etre, 25 pour toi nous vivons, pour toi nous osons 26 mourir! 19. Chaque plante a des vertus qui lui sont propres, et dont la connais- sance ne pourrait etre qu'infiniment utile. 20. Les conse- quences des grandes passions sont Paveuglement de 1'esprit et la depravation du co?ur. 21. Que de beaute, cle douceur, de modestie, et en menie temps que de grandeur d'ame ! j§ 38, 39. SYNTAX. THE ARTICLE. 285 . Articles. §§ 57-64. § 38 e 1. Ceux qui 1 gouvernent sont comme les corps celestes qui ont beaucoup d' 2 eclat et point de 2 repos. 2. Peu de 2 gens out assez de 2 prudence pour eviter la 3 mau- vaise 4 compagnie, et pour se defier d' 5 eux-memes. 6 3. Les 3 meres ont souvent trop d' 2 indulgence pour leurs enfants. 4. Le peu de 2 vestiges qui restent des brillantes actions des Grecs et des Romains, se trouvent 7 dans Plutarque et dans plusieurs 8 autres historiens. 5. Les 3 auteurs tirent plus d'elo- quence, de force, et de grandeur, du choix et de la disposition des mots, que d'aucune 9 autre cause. 6. Peu de choses suffisent pour rendre heureux un horame sage. 7. Donnez-moi deux ceuts kilogrammes de 2 beurre, cinq metres de 2 ruban, et une grande quantite de 2 charbon. 8. La vie humaine est pleine de revers. 9. Mourir pour son pays est une mort 10 pleine de charmes. 10. Une pensee noble, mais confuse, est un diamant couvert de poussiere. 11. Si la fortune vous 11 a favorise de ses dons, si outre cela vous 6tes doue d'esprit et de jugement, ne vous 12 enflez pas d'orgueil, et ne meprisez pas les autres. 12. On n'est pas propre a l'amitie, quand on n'est pas doue de vertu. 13. Ceux qui parlent sans reflexion sont exposes a bien des erreurs. 13 14. Nous faisons souvent par amour- propre ce que nous eroyons faire par bienveillance. Articles. §§ 57-64. § 39. 1. Les 1 bibliographes divisent les 1 livres en cinq classes principales : theologie, jurisprudence, histoire, belles- lettres et arts. 2. J'ai pitie des 2 pauvres. 3. Le 3 secret est la clef de la 3 prudence et le sanctuaire de la sagesse. 4. Les soins et les malheurs sont souvent les compagnons de la grandeur. 5. Louis 4 XIV fut le protecteur des sciences. 6. La langue anglaise abonde en ecrits qui s'adressent a 1'imagi- nation et aux sentiments: l'esprit createurde Shakespeare, les 238 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 30 ' i0 - pensees sublimes cle Milton, la force et l'harmonie de Pope, la delicatesse d' Addison, et la simplicite pathetique de Sterne, les rendent cornparables aux meilleurs 5 auteurs parmi les anciens. 7. Des 6 voleurs, etant 7 entres 8 dans la maison d'un particulier, allerent au lit du domestique, et lui dirent que s' 9 il remuait, il etait mort. 8. Je suis sur, repliqua-t-il, 10 que si je remue, je suis en vie. 11 9. L'envie juge des 1 ac- tions par les personnes qui les font ; mais l'equite juge des pcrsonnes par leurs actions. 10. Quand Dieu nous prive de quelque chose 12 qui nous est cher, tel que 13 femme, enfants, amis, ou fortune, nous devons nous y 14 soumettre sans 15 mur- mure et sans 15 plainte. 11. La bienveillance mutuelle est le lien de la societe; sans eUe, la vie est a charge, 15 pleine de 16 crainte, et sans 15 consolation. 12. Peu de 16 gens nient la verite de l'evaugile, et cependant plusieurs 17 vivent comme s'il n'etait pas vrai. 13. Les Portugais envoient 18 tous 19 les ans line flotte au ^ Bresil, pour en rapporter du 21 coton, de l'ambre, du salpetre, et plusieurs autres choses. 14. La premiere at- taque de Cesar sur la 22 Grande-Bretagne eut lieu 23 cinquante- cinq ans avant la naissance de Jesus-Christ. 15. L'action du grand Scipion, quand il ajouta a la fortune d'une jeune princesse qu'il avait faite 24 prisonniere, tout l'argent que les amis de cette princesse lui apporterent pour sa ran con, ne lui a pas fait moins d'^honneur que 25 ses fameuses conquetes. 16. Christophe Colomb, qui decouvrit l'Amerique en 1492, etait 13 Genois, 13 grand marin, et le 26 meilleur geographe de son siecle. THE NOUK §§ 66-72. § 40. 1. La critique 1 examine le merite 1 des 2 produc- tions x litteraires sous les trois points 1 generaux 3 de la pensee, 1 de l'ordre, 1 et de l'expression. 1 2. Un jour passe dans la pra- tique de la 4 vertu et de la 4 religion, vaut mieux 5 qu'une vie entiere passee 6 dans l'impiete et la mechancete. 3. La justice est l'obeissance aux lois ecrites et aux constitutions. 4. Les §§ 40, 41. SYNTAX. — THE NOUN. THE ADJECTIVE. 237 soldats n'ont-ils 7 pas resiste aux ordres de leurs officiers ? 5. Les 4 honimes corrompus et de 8 rnauvaise 9 vie croient 10 aise- ment u qu'il n'y a pas plus de 12 vertu, de 12 probite, et de 12 sincerite dans les autres que dans eux-memes. 13 6. Les regies de Fhonnetete sont celles 14 de la bienseance et des 2 bonnes mceurs. 7. La connaisance que nous avons du 4 bien et du 4 mal nous montre quelle doit etre notre regie pour 15 diriger nos actions. 8. Le plaisir est souvent Fennemi de la raison et de la vertu. 9. La corruption du coeur est souvent la cause de la corruption de l'esprit. 10. Le 16 Perou a de 17 riches mines d' 8 or, 18 d' 8 argent, 18 et de 8 diamants. 18 11. Plusieurs preten- dent que les 2 batailles ne sont plus si sanglantes depuis l'in- vention des 2 armes a feu. 18 12. Ou est le pot 19 a la 20 creme 18 ? 13. II y a beaucoup de n vers a soie 18 en Italic 21 13. Allez dans la salle a manger ; 18 la compagnie y 22 est. 14. J'ai ete 23 au marche au 2 poisson ; cependant je n'en 12 ai pas achete parce qu'il etait trop cher. 15. La femme aux 20 huitres est a la porte. 16. J'ai casse le pot au 20 lait. 17. Je n'ai point de poudre a canon 18 a present; ainsi, mes armes a feu 18 sont inutiles. 18. La peuple desire la paix : mais le parlement, qui connait mieux les interets de la nation, a vote pour le continuation de la guerre. 19. Une multitude d'enfants cou- rurent 24 apres lui. 20. La foule de soldats qui vint nous obligea 25 a nous retirer. 21. Une fbule de nymphes, couron- nees de fleurs, nageaient 26 derriere le char de la d£esse. THE ADJECTIVE. §§74-78. § 41. 1. Le mariage est l'etat le T plus parfait de Pamitie ; il diminue nos soins en 2 les divisant, et double nos plaisirs f»ar la participation mutuelle. 3 2. Notre ministre a un juge- ment profond, 4 et une connaissance tres etendue 5 des cours etrangeres. 3. La victoire 6 que Cesar remporta dans les plaines de Pharsale fut funeste a 7 son pays, pernicieuse 8 aux Romains, et desastreuse pour le genre humain. 4. Sylla 238 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 41, 42. acquit a Rome un pouvoir et une autorite absolue. 9 5. Les Anglais combattent sur 10 raer avec un courage, une intrepi- dite surprenante. 9 6. Eile a la 11 bouche et les yeux fermes. 9 7. La modestie et le desinteressement meritent d'etre loues 12 et admires. 11 8. La chambre et le cabinet etaient ouverts, 3 mais la fenetre et le tiroir etaient fermes. 3 9. La musique et le dessin sont tres amusants. 10. Ma mere et ma 13 sceur sont mortes. 11. Son fils et sa fille sont heureux. 12. Votre 13 hardiesse et votre courage me 14 paraissent etonnants. 13. La misere et l'orgueil ne sont que 15 trop souvent unis. 14. La sante, lafaveur, et le pouvoir sont communs aux bons et aux mechants, et peuvent nous 16 etre otes ; mais la gloire et la vertu sont solides, sures et durables. 15. II y a des 17 personnes dont 18 la vertu et le courage n'ont pas besoin d'etre soutenus. 12 16. Des projets grands et vastes, joints a une execution sage, font le grand 19 ministre. 17. Un argument faible 20 a souvent persuade des 17 personnes qui n'avaient pas ete convaincues par des 17 preuves palpables 4 et evidentes. 18. Les horames braves et confiants sont ordinairement hu- mains et misericordieux ; tandis que 21 les hommes d'un esprit bas et rampant sont ordinairement insolents et tyranniques, quand ils ont de 1' 17 autorite. Adjectives. §§ 74-78. § 4L2« 1. Un bon 1 roi perd souvent, par la mauvaise 1 conduite de ses 2 ministres, 1'afTection de ses 2 sujets. 2. So- crate et Platon etaient deux grands 3 philosophes. 3. Les jeunes gens esperent 4 vivre longtemps ■ mais personne 5 n'est sur de vivre 6 jusqu'a 7 demain. 4. Les petits x genies sont eblouis 8 de 9 tout ce qui brille, parcc que tout 10 est nouveau jDour eux; 11 les grands genies, au contraire, n'ad- mirent que 12 peu de 13 choses, parce que pen de choses leur paraissent nouvelles. 14 5. Combien de 13 livres avez-vous ? 6. J'ai deux 2 grammaires et un 2 livre de 15 themes. 7. Votre pere est-il 16 a la maison ? 17 8. Non, Monsieur ; mais ma, |§ 42, 43. SYNTAX. — THE ADJECTIVE. 2'd)) mere y 18 est, et elle sera bien aise de 19 vous voir. 9. L'hu- milite est la base des vertus chretiennes. 20 10. Un esprit p re ven u 21 est la source d'erreurs innombrables. 11. Le bien public est preferable a 1' 22 interet particulier. 12. Les 22 esprits satiriques 23 sont comme les petits insectes, dont 24 l'existence ne se manifeste que 25 par les efforts qu'ils font pour corrompre les 22 choses. 13. La 22 geographie est la description 26 du globe terrestre. 27 14. La nature se con- tente 28 de peu. 15. Je suis fatigue de courir. 6 16. II est accuse de 29 vol. 17. Vous etes comble d'honneurs. 18. lis sont dignes de 29 louange. 19. La vie humaine n'est jamais 23 exempte de 29 troubles. 20. La plupart des 30 hommes sont mecontentes de leur condition. 21. Nous sommes en vain doues de 29 raison, si nous ne sommes pas doues de 29 vertu. 22. Xerxes etait doue de tons les avantages 31 du corps et de la fortune, et cependant n'en 32 etant pas satisfait, il pro- pt)sa une recompense a celui qui inventerait pour lui de 33 nouveaux plaisirs. Adjectives. §§ 74-78. § 43. 1. La plupart des 1 enfants sont enclins a la pa- resse. 2. Un esprit trouble n'est pas propre & 2 remplir son devoir. 3. Un chretien doit etre pret a mourir, plutot que de renier sa foi. 4. II est ridicule de 3 se mettre en colere 4 contre des 5 objets qui sont insensibles a notre colere. 5. Je suis sensible a votre bonte. 6. Cela est facile a dire. 7. Les lieux marecageux sont sujets a des 5 brouillards epais. 8. Les marchands doivent etre exacts a 2 remplir leurs engage- ments, et les chretiens patients a. souffrir les injures. 9. Votre frere est habile a. tout 6 faire. 10. Scipion l'Africain etait respectueux envers sa mere, liberal envers ses sceurs, bon envers ses domestiques, juste et affable envers tout le moncle. 7 11. Je n'aime pas les personnes qui sont cruelles 8 envers les animaux. 12. On a dit du Telemaque du vertueux Fenelon, que c'est le don le plus utile que les muses aient 9 fait a 240 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ *«, **■ I'iiomme ; car si le bonheur du genre humain pouvait 10 naitre d'un poeme, il naitrait 10 de celui-la. 13. La sallc de li Tour, oti est le train 11 royal 12 d' 13 artillerie, est un apparte- iiieat de trois cent quatre-vingts pieds 14 de longueur, de ciuquante de largeur, et de vingt de hauteur; elle a un pas- sage au milieu de seize pieds de largeur, de 15 chaque 16 cote duquel 17 l'artillerie est placee. 14. Le pont de Londres a 18 neuf cent vingt pieds de 18 longueur, cinquante-cinq de hau- teur, et cinquante-six de largeur. 15. La fameuse mine de Potosi, dans le Perou, a plus de quinze cents pieds de profon- deur. 16. Les cafiers ont ordinairement quarante pieds de hauteur. Adjectives. §§ 74-78. § 44* 1. L'amour du prochain est aussi 1 necessaire dans la 2 societe pour le bonheur de la 2 vie que 1 dans le 2 christia- nisme pour le 2 salut eternel. *2. Les 2 grands 3 talents sont de toute 4 condition ; et quoiqu'ils ne brillent 5 pas si 6 commune, ment dans le 2 bus peuple que dans les autres, c' 7 est faute de soin et de culture. 8 3. L'homme veritablement grand conserve son jugement au milieu des 2 dangers avec autant de 9 pre- sence d'esprit que 10 s'il ne courait 11 aucun 12 danger. 4. II est 7 aussi x aise de 13 faire le 14 bien que x de 13 faire le 14 mal. 5. Rien 11 ne plait 15 tant que les ouvrages de la 1 nature. 6. La Tamise n'est pas si 6 rapide que le Rhin. 7. Paris n'est pas si 6 peuple que Londres. 8. Le condor est un oiseau du 1( Perou, de 17 beaucoup plus grand que 18 l'autruche. 9. La d& esse Calypso etait de 17 toute la tete 19 plus grande que toutes ses nymphes. 10. Je suis de 17 deux ans plus age que vous; cependant vous etes de 17 deux polices plus grand que moi. 20 11. Votre fils est de 17 beaucoup plus savant que le mien. 12. Auguste ne fut pas peut-etre plus grand homme qu'Antoine, mais il fut plus heureux. 13. Rien n'est plus agreable a. Fesprit que la lumiere de la verite. 14. La simplicite de la nature est plus aimable que tous les embellissements de Part. 15. La consommation de ble a Londres est de plus de 21 §§ U, 45. SYNTAX. — THE ADJECTIVE. 241 dix millions quatre-vingt-dix mille decalitres par 22 an, celle 23 de bceufs et de vaches, de plus de 21 cent vingt mille, et celle 23 de moutons et d'agneaux de plus de 21 neuf cent mille. 16. La vertu est plus precieuse que les richesses. 17. Louis 24 XIV, en 1681, avait soixante mille matelots et plus de cent vaisseaux de 25 guerre. Adjectives. §§ 74-78. § 4«5, 1. II est plus grand de 1 vaincre ses passions que de conquerir des 2 nations entieres. 2. II y a des 2 auteurs qui ecrivent mieux 3 qu'ils ne 4 parlent, et d' 5 autres qui par- lent mieux qu'ils n' 4 ecrivent. 3. Vous faites de plus grands progres que je n' 4 aurais pense, 6 et vous vous conduisez mieux que quand vous etiez jeune. 4. Nous nous nattons plus que nous ne devrions. 5. II est plus difficile d'eviterla 7 censure que de gagner des applaudissements ; car les derniers peu- vent s'obtenir 8 par une grande action ; mais pour 9 eviter la premiere on ne doit jamais 10 faire u mal. 6. La religion nous* apprend a souffrir patiemment les injures plutot que de nous venger. 7. Plus 12 je connais les hommes, 12 plus je les aime. 8. Plus un homme est doue de 13 moderation, de 13 tempe- rance, et de 13 justice, plus il est estimable. 9. Plus un hydro- pique boit, plus il est altere. 10. Moins vous etudierez, moins vous profiterez. 11. Plus j'examine cette question, plus je la trouve difficile. 12. Plus nous avons besoin de 14 gens pour nous servir, moins nous sommes heureux. 13. Plus on est eleve en dignite, moins on doit avoir d' 15 orgueil. 14. Plus une chose est difficile, plus elle est honorable. 15. Quand un homme ne possede rien 10 de 16 grand que sa naissance, plus cette nais- sance est grande, plus elle doit paraitre insignifiante. 16. Plus le jour est court, plus la nuit est longue. 17 17. Moins il gagne d' 15 argent, moins il fait de 15 depense. 18. Le roi et le berger sont egaux apres la mort. 19. Sa vie entiere ne fut qu'un travail et une occupation constante. 20. Les honneurs et les richesses sont toujours envies. 21 242 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § *>• Adjectives. §§ 74-78. § 46. 1. La probite est une des plus grandes qualites qu'un honime puisse 1 posseder. 2. De tous les amusements et de tous les plaisirs de la vie, la conversation a toujours 2 ete con- sideree 3 comme le moyen le 4 plus raisonnable de 5 delasser l'esprit. 3. Sur la riche couronne que Sa Majeste portait 6 au parlement, il y avait une grosse emeraude de 7 sept pouces de 8 tour, la plus belle du 9 monde. 4. La meilleure qualite qu'un homme puisse 1 avoir, est d' 10 etre 5 civil et obligeant u envers les personnes les 4 plus inciviles et les plus desobli- geantes. 5. La ville .de Troie etait autrefois la plus fameuse de l'Asie Mineure. 6. Le regne de Louis XIV 12 fut un des plus longs, et tout a la fois 13 un des plus glorieux qui soient J rapportes 3 dans l'histoire. 7. Les hommes les 4 plus savants ne sont pas toujours les plus vertueux. 8. La sobri- ete rend agreable le genre de 14 vie le 4 plus commun ; elle donne la sante la 4 plus vigoureuse, 15 ce qui est le plus constant de tous les plaisirs. 9. L'orgueil ferme l'esprit a la conviction la 4 plus evidente. 10. L'empereur Antonin est considere comme un des plus grands princes qui 16 aient 1 jamais regne. 11. Le canal du ir Languedoc est un des monuments les plus memorables qui aient 1 ete 18 faits 3 dans le siecle de Louis XIV. 12. L'idolatrie la 19 plus ancienne 15 et la plus generale etait le culte rendu au soleil. 13. Le poeme epique, soit qu'il paraisse 20 dans la simplicite majestueuse d'Homere, ou dans l'elegance finie 21 de Virgile, presente une variete infinie d' 14 objets grands et beaux, qu'il est impossible de 22 contem- pler sans une succession perpetuelle d' 14 emotions agreables. 14. Les jeunes gens, dit Horace, sont souples aux impressions du vice, prodigues, presomptueux et egalement vifs et legers dans leurs passions : les vieilles gens, au contraire, sont avares, temporiseurs, timides, toujours alarmes sur l'avenir, toujours plaintifs, difficiles a contenter, panegyristes du temps passe, censeurs du present et grands donneurs d'avis. §§ 47, 48. SYNTAX. — THE ADJECTIVE. THE PRONOUN. 243 Adjectives. §§ 74-78. § 47. 1. On peut dire qu'un magistrat est une loi l par- lante, et la loi un magistrat muet. 2 2. La grande muraille au norcl de la 3 Chine, a 4 environ quinze cents 5 milles de 4 lon- gueur, et le principal canal de cet 6 empire a 4 environ dix-huit cents 5 milles de 4 longueur. 3. Les murs de Babylone avaient deux cents pieds de hauteur et cinquante de largeur. 4. Moins 7 de 8 desirs, plus de 8 paix. 9 5. Quel homme fut jamais 10 satisfait de sa fortune et mecontent de son esprit? 6. Plus u on lit les fables du bon et naif La Fontaine, plus on se u convainc que c'est le livre de tons les ages et le manuel de l'homme de gout. 7. Un des plus grands defauts de la Pharsale 13 est cette fougue d' 8 imagination que Lucain ne savait pas 14 reprimer, et qui en 15 fait plutot 16 uri enthousiaste qu'un poete. 8. Je n'ai pas ir pitie 18 de la misere de ceux 19 qui, etant jeunes et forts, aiment mieux 20 mendier que de 21 travailler; mais j'ai 17 pitie 18 des vieillards, qui ne peuvent 14 gagner leur vie. 9. L'Abbaye de Westminster, en dedans des 22 murs, a 4 trois cent 5 soixante pieds de 4 longueur ; a la nef, elle a soixante-dix pieds de largeur ; et a la croix, cent quatre-vingt-dix. 10. La facade de la maison de Somerset, vers le Strand, a environ cent pieds de longueur ; et la fagade, vers la cour principale, a deux cents pieds et plus. 11. Les hommes les plus savants font quelquefois les fautes les plus grossieres. 12. L'obeissance est le moyen le plus sur de 23 plaire a 24 nos superieurs. THE PRONOUN. §§80-96. § 48, 1. L'aigle a la 1 vuc tres percante ; il 2 regarde le soleil sans 3 baisser les 1 paupieres; il habite les pays froids ; il batit son nid sur le sommet cles arbres les plus hauts. 2. Je ne suis pas si 4 savant que votre frere, mais il est plus 244 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 48, 49. age que moi. 5 3. Vous parlez trop vite. 6 4. Yotre frere et lui 7 furent de la meme opinion. 5. Mon frere et eux 7 sont 8 venus. 9 6. Eux 10 seuls ont conibattu l'ennemi ; et consequein- ment eux 10 seuls meritent d'etre recompenses 9 pour cette brillante action qui assure notre victoire. 7. Telemaque, par- lant de son pere Ulysse a la deesse Calypso, lui 11 dit : Pene- lope, sa femme, et moi/ qui suis son fils, nous 12 avons perdu toute esperance de le u revoir. 8. Mon pere m' aim ait si tendrement, qu'il ne pensait qu' 13 a moi, ne s'occupait 14 que de moi, et ne voyait que moi 15 dans l'univers. 9. Vous, vous aimez la ville, et moi, 16 j'aime la campagne. 10. Comme on conseillait a Philippe de 1? chasser de ses etats un homme qui avait mal 18 parle de lui : Je me garderai bien de 19 lefaire, repliqua Philippe ; il irait 20 partout 21 dire du mal 22 de moi. 11. On doit instruire les jeunes gens, dans le culte religieux que Dieu demande d'eux. 12. Quel malheur est le notre ! 13. On ne nous croit ni l'un ni l'autre. 23 14. Si vous ne vous conduisez 24 mieux, je me plaindrai de vous a votre pere. 15. Le pardon des ennemis ne consiste pas seulement a ne pas 25 leur nuire dans leur reputation ou dans leur fortune ; on doit en outre 26 les aimer et leur faire du bien. 27 16. Je dis du bien de vous, Damon ; vous dites du mal de moi. 17. Un bon coeur vous sait aussi bon gre 28 du bien 29 que vous lui souhaitez, que des presents que vous lui faites. 18. Je pardonne et a vous et a lui, 30 parce que j'espere que vous vous conduirez mieux a l'avenir. 31 Pkonouns. §§ 80-96. § 4.9. 1. Quand votre frere vint a nous, 1 nous ne pen- sions pas a lui. 1 2. Vous m'avez trompe, je ne me fierai plus a vous- 2 3. Le ministre est votre ennemi; si vous vous adressez a lui, 2 vous ne reussirez jamais. 3 4. Un jeune homme qui suit les bons conseils qu'on 4 lui donne, sera un homme de merite. 5. Dieu est le pere de ceux 5 qui raiment, et le pro- tecteur de ceux 5 qui le craignent. 6. Le 6 vice nous trompe §§ 49, 50. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 245 oouvent sous le masque de la 6 vertu. 7. Si vous voulez avoir un ami, il faut 7 l'eprouver auparavaut, et ne pas 8 etre prompt a 9 vousfiera lui. 2 8. Une grande source d' 10 erreur, c'est 11 la pratique commune de juger 12 de ce que les hommes parai- tront dans une condition ou nous ne les avons pas vus, 13 d'apres ce qu'ils paraissent dans une autre ou nous les voyons. 9. Puissent ces enfants etre 14 envers vous ce qu' 15 ils ont ete en- vers moi! 10. O Dieu, faites pour eux ce que je ne puis faire moi-meme! 16 11. Rendez-leur 17 trente ans de 18 bonheur que je dois a leur tendresse et a 19 leur vertu. 12. Pisistrate dit d'un homrae ivre qui avait parle contre lui : Je ne suis pas plus fache contre 20 lui que si un aveugle s'etait 21 jete contre moi. 13. L'amour des ennemis consiste a leur desirer du bien, 22 a prier pour eux, et a parler en bien 23 d'eux, quand l'occasion le demande. 14. L'ambition est une passion noble, mais elle occasionne souvent bien des 24 maux. 15. Negligez les plaisirs de la vie ; les peines qui les suivent prouvent com- bien ils sont vains. 16. Les plaisirs d'un homme tempere sont durables, parce qu'ils sont reguliers ; et sa vie est calme, parce qu'elle est innocente. 17. L'approbation pu- blique est l'objet qui nous fait entreprendre des actions heroiques, et c'est 25 par de x telles actions que nous la meri- tons. 18. Voila un beau pornmier • il fleurit tons 27 les prin- temps : cependant il produit rarement 28 aucun 3 fruit. 19. Je l'abattrai, s'il ne donne pas de pommes cette annee. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § 45©. 1. Vous avez achete de l belle dentelle, clonnez- m'en, 2 s'il vous plait. 2. Que servent les ricliesses 3 a un avare ? 3. II n'en 2 fait aucun usage. 4. J'ai plusieurs oranges ; en 4 voulez-vous ? 5. Je vous serai oblige, si vous voulez m'en 2 donner. 6. La vie est un don de Dieu ; en disposer est un crime. 7. L'honneur est une ile inacces- sible ; aussitot qu'on en est sorti, on n'y 5 peut plus rentrer. 8. Vos chevaux 6 ont faim; donnez-leur du foin. 9. Plus 7 vous 21 246 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 50, 51. vivrez avec les hommes, plus vous vous convaincrez qu'il est 8 necessaire cle 9 les connaitre avant de vous lier 10 avec eux. 10. Quancl la veiite parait n dans tout son eclat, personne ne peut y resister. 11. Les perles ne vaudraient 12 pas tant d'argent, si le luxe ne leur donnait 13 du prix. 12. Les ciuites du Nil font tant de bruit qu'elles rendent sourds ceux qui demeurent pres de la. 13. Je croyais que Made- moiselle B. etait mariee, 14 mais elle ne 1' 15 est pas. 14. Mes tantes sont malades, et je pense qu'elles le 15 seront long- temps. 15. Etes-vous les soeurs de M. Taylor ? Oui, nous les 15 sommes. 16. Sont-ils savants? Non, ils ne le 15 sont pas. 17. Etes-vous les freres de l'amiral Nelson ? Oui, nous les sommes. 18. Etes-vous la soeur du colonel Jenkinson ? Non, monsieur, je ne la suis pas. 19. Vos freres 16 sont-ils 16 savants ? Oui, ils le sont. 20. Vos soeurs sont-elles mariees ? Non, elles ne le sont pas. 21. Votre mere est-elle malade ? Non, elle ne Test pas. 22. Votre pere, est-il riche ? Non, il ne Test pas. 23. Vos soeurs sont heureuses, et nous ne le sommes pas. 24. Elles ont ete riches, mais elles ne le sont plus a present. 25. Nous jugeons 17 souvent des actions des hommes selon notre amour ou notre haine pour les personnes qui les ont faites. 18 26. Apprenez-vous le 19 francais ? 27. L'avez-vous appris longtemps? 28. Le parlez-vous couram- ment ? Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § SI • Les choses ne nous frappent pas toujours a pro- portion de leur clarte ; au contraire, quelques-unes ne nous frappent pas du tout, 1 parce qu'elles sont claires au plus hautdegre. 2. Est-il jeune ? 3. Sont-ils riches ? 4. Est-elle belle? 5. Repondez-moi? 2 6. Aimez vos ennemis, et leur 2 faites du bien quand vous le 3 pouvez. 7. Obeissez a vos parents, aimez-les 2 et les 2 respectez tant que vous vivrez. 4 8. Considerez, 6 parents, l'importance de vos obligations envers vos enfants ; il depend de vous qu'ils soient 5 ou non des 6 membres utiles de la societe ; enseignez-leur 7 l'obeis- §§ 51, 52. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 247 sance, et ils vous beniront ; inspirez-leur 7 la modestie, et ils seront reserves ; inspirez-leur 7 la charite, et ils seront airaes ; portez-les 7 a la temperance, et ils jouiront d' 8 une bonne sante. 9. Ne lui pardonnez pas, mais punissez-le 7 sur-le- champ. 9 10. Le second Brutus aurait retabli 10 les Romains dans leur ancienne liberte, s'il les avait trouves u aussi bien disposes 12 qu'ils P 13 etaient dans le temps du premier. 11. Jupiter, irrite que Saturn e lui tendit 5 des pieges, s'arma contre lui, chassa ce dieu de son propre royaume, et l'obli- gpa de quitter 14 le ciel. 12. La prosperite nous fait des 6 amis, et Padversite les eprouve. 13. Nous nous flattons en vain que nous quittons 14 nos passions, quand ce sont 15 elles qui nous quittent. 14. Je le 13 crois. 15. Les croyez-vous ? 16. II ne me punira pas. 17. La connaissez-vous ? 16 18. Je n'ose 17 le 13 leur 8 dire. 19. Je vous en prie, mon frere, dites-le 7 a notre mere : Elle le sait, 16 je le lui 18 ai dit 19 hier. 20. Si vous avez en- core votre orange, donnez-la-moi. 20 21. Je suis fache de 21 ne 17 pouvoir vous la 18 donner ; mais votre soeur a ete 22 si sage que je la lui ai donnee. 11 22. Je vous en 18 donnerai une demain, si votre theme est bien fait. 23. Si la vie humaine est exposee a bien des peines, elle est aussi susceptible de bien des plaisirs. 24. La politesse francaise est passee en proverbe chez les nations etrangeres. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § 5Q 9 1. Ne elites pas a un ami qui vous demande 1 quelque chose: 2 Allez, et revenez demain, je vous donnerai cela, quand vous j)ouvez le lui donner sur-le-champ. 2. Le due de Bouillon fut oblige de ceder la ville de Sedan a Henri IV ; mais ce prince, content de 3 sa soumission, la lui ren- dit 4 bientot. 3. II me le 5 donne. 4. II vous l ,5 a prete. 5. II nous les 5 a envoyes. 6 6. II le leur 5 donne. 7. II le leur pretera. 8. II les lui a envoyes. 9. Vous me l'avez dit. 10. Je vous prie de ne m'en plus 7 parler. 11. Epaminondas refusa les presents de Darius, et dit a ceux 8 qui les lui 248 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 52, 53. ofFraient cle la part de 9 ce roi; S'il ne me demande 1 rien que de juste, 10 il ne faut pas de presents; 11 et s'il a d' 12 autres clesseins, qu'il sache 13 qu'il n'est pas assez riche pour 14 me corrompre. 12. Je soutiens, et je soutiendrai 15 toujours 1G que nous ne pouvons etre heureux sans pratiquer 17 la vertu. 13. L'homme s'eleve et deploie ses facuites par 18 degres; il avance lentement a la maturite, et 19 decline ensuite graduelle- ment, jusqu'a ce qu' 20 il descende dans le tombeau. 14. Evitez l'ivrognerie ; elle abrutit l'entendement, 19 tcrnit la reputation, et 19 consume le corps. 15. II le clit, mais il 21 ne le croit pas. 16. Nous avons parle, et nous 19 parlerons encore en votre faveur. 17. Les plus belles fleurs ne durent que 7 pen de temps ; a la moindre pluie les ternit, le vent les fletrit, le soleil les bride, pour ne pas parler 23 d'un nombre infini d'insectes, qui les gatent et leur font du mal. 24 18. Un caractere passionne rend un homme inepte aux 25 affaires, le prive cle sa raison, lui 26 ote tout ce qu' 27 il y a de a grand dans sa nature, et fait qu'il n'est plus propre pour la societe. 19. Les Saintes-Ecritures nous apprennent ce que 27 nous devons etre ; c'est pourquoi, 29 lisons4es, 30 meditons4es, 30 et faisons-en 30 la regie de notre conduite. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § «53. 1. Un fils bien eleve ne se revolte jamais contre son pere; il Faime, l^honore et le 1 respecte. 2. Chacun agit pour soi. 2 8. Quand on ne pense qu'a soi, 3 on ne merite pas de vivre. 4. II n'est pas d ,4 un homme courageux de 5 s'exposer au G danger sans 7 necessite. 5. On pardonne aise- ment a 8 ceux qui cherchent a se retirer de leurs erreurs. 6. Les sciences sont beaucoup plus cultivees qu'elles ne 9 l' 10 etaient. 7. Excuser en soi les fautes qu'qn ne peut souffrir dans les tt autres, c'est aimer mieux etre fou soi-meme, que de 11 voir les autres tels. 8. Votre frere se connait ; il fait souvent des 12 reflexions sur lui-meme, 13 et j'espere qu'il se corrigera bientot de ses mauvaises 14 habitudes. 9. Le remede que §§ 53, 54. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 249 vous proposez est innocent en lui-meme. 10. Les homines rejettent soavent la verite, quoique evidente en soi, paree que la 15 vue leur en 15 deplait. 11. L'amour-propre rapporte tout 10 a soi. 12. La 17 vertu est aimable en soi. 13. Tout ce qui est bon en soi n'est pas toujours approuve. 14. Le pal- mier se releve sans 17 cesse de lui-meme, 18 quelques 19 efforts qu'on fasse 19 pour 20 le courber. 15. Oublier sa naissance en faisant de mauvaises actions, ou s'en 21 ressouvenir seulement par vanite, c'est la deshonorer egalement. 16. Dieu demande votre cceur ; vous ne pouvez le lui refuser. 17. Un flatteur n'a ni 22 bonne opinion de lui-meme ni des° autres. 18. Une faute grossiere n'est pas seulement celle que tout lecteur apercoit, mais c'est encore celle que nous trouvons grossiere apres qu'un autre nous l'a fait 23 apercevoir. 19. Si vous avez promis quelque chose a un ennemi, vous ne devez pas manquer a la promesse que vous lui avez faite. 24 20. Nous n'avouons de petits defauts que 22 pour persuader aux 6 autres que nous n'en avons pas de 25 grands. 21. II n'y a point de siecle ni de condition qui ne puisse 26 recueillir de grands avantages de l'histoire ; quand elle est bien enseignee, elle devient une ecole de morale pour tous les hommes ; elle decrie les vices, demasque les vertus fausses, dissipe les erreurs vulgaires, et prouve, par mille exemples, qu'il n'y a rien de 27 grand que l'honneur et la probite. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § 54, 1. Vous trouverez impossible, dit Mentor au roi de Salente, de 1 ramener les hommes aux principes de la vertu, apres que vous leur aurez appris 2 a la mepriser. 2. Vous m'avez promis une montre ; quand me la donnerez-vous ? 3. Si nous ne nous flattions 3 pas nous-memes, la flatterie ne nous nuirait 4 pas. 4. La loi de nature 5 nous defend de nuire a personne. 5. J'ai achete de nouvelles brochures ; je vous les 6 enverrai, 7 si vous voulez me les 6 rendre la semaine prochaine. 6. Vous avez beaucoup d'oranges ; je vous prie 250 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 54, 55. de m'en 6 donner quelques unes. 7. Le merite de nos actions vient des motifs qui les produisent, et de leur conformite aux lois de Dieu. 8. La posterite rend aux hommes de 5 merite la justice que leurs contemporains leur refusent sou- vent. 9. Pretez-moi 8 votre grammaire ; je vous la rendrai dernain ; si vous me la refusez, je ne puis 9 faire mon therne, ni apprendre ma lecon, parce que j'ai perdu ma grammaire. 10. Je vous dis la verite, et vous ne voulez j)as me croire. 11. Vous disiez que vous me donneriez 4 une montre quand je saurais ecrire en francais; mon theme est sans 5 faute ; quand me la donnerez-vous ? 12. Ayez 10 patience; vous l'aurez bientot. 13. Tels sont les hommes ; leur ingratitude est souvent le prix de nos bienfaits. 14. Un bon roi ne consulte pas tant sa 11 propre dignite et son 11 elevation, que l'avantage et le bonheur de ses 11 sujets. 15. Vous ecrivez beaucoup mieux que moi. 16. Si vous n'etes pas aussi riche que lui, je pense que vous etes tout aussi heureux. 17. Eux 12 fourniront l'argent, et lui 12 conduira l'ouvrage. 18. C'est moi qui l'ai 13 engage a entreprendre ce voyage. 19. Pouvez-vous agir ainsi en vers lui, lui 14 qui fut toujours votre meillcur ami? 20. Son 15 ambition est grande. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § «5«5. 1. Enfin sa fille etant 1 venue 2 pres de la mai- son : Ma 3 mere, ma 3 mere, s'ecria-t-elle, sors, 4 ma 3 mere, sors; voici un monsieur qui nous a apporte une lettre de mon 3 pere. A cet appel, la mere sortit : Qu'as-tu, mon 3 en- fant? dit-elle, voyant sa fille avec un messager. 2. Prete- tnoi ton couteau, mon 3 frere. 3. Je ne le puis, ma scaur, j'en ai besoin. 4. Ou es-tu, ma 3 fille? 5. Me voici, mon 3 pere. 6. J'ai invite mesdemoiselles 5 vos scaurs, et mademoiselle votre cousine a diner avec nous; j'espere qu'elles viendront. 7. Monsieur 5 votre pere est-il a la mai- son ? 6 8. Comment se porte madame 5 votre epouse ? 9. Mes- demoiselles 5 vos sceurs apprennent-elles la geographic ? 10* §§ 55, 5G. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 251 Monsieur 5 votre frere est-il en 7 France? 11. Madame votre tante se porte-t-elle bien ? 12. Madame votre mere est- 8 elle revenue de la campagne? 13. Je vis 9 hier monsieur votre pere et madame votre mere; mais je ne vis 9 pas mademdf* selle votre sceur ; est-elle malade ? 14. Mon frere mourut l'an passe en 7 Allemagne ; ce fut 10 moi 11 qui lui fermai les 12 yeux. 15. Mon frere se cassa la jambe hier matin. 16. Notre voiture lui passa malheureusement sur le corps, lui cassa la jambe, et lui meurtrit l'epaule gauche. 17. Si vous n'y prenez garde, vous vous couperez les doigts. 18. Un boulet de 13 canon m'emporta le bras. 19. Lavez-vous les mains. 20. Chauffez-vous les pieds. 21. Dans la derniere bataille, notre general perdit une jambe, mon frere fut blesse al' 12 epaule, et moi 14 qui etais aupres de lui, j'eus la cuisse emportee. 22. Je le connais 15 depuis son enfance, et je l'ai toujours 16 aime a cause de son bon caractere. 23. Cesar avait la 12 tete chauve, mais il cachait ce defaut avec une couronne de 13 laurier. 24. Cette maladie est dangereuse ; j'en ]7 connais l'origine et les effets. 25. II est si ridicule que tout le monde se moque de lui. 26. Voici un bel arbre ; les fruits en 17 sont delicieux. 27. Nobles, ressouvenez-vous qu'une naissance illustre recoit son 17 plus beau lustre de la vertu. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § »5G. 1. La flatterie a une grande douceur dans la 1 voix; il est difficile de 2 n'y 3 pas preter l'oreille. 2. Cette eau n*est pas bonne pour vous ; j'en x connais toutes les qualites, et je ne la recommenderais 4 jamais en pareil cas. 5 3. Chaque science a ses 1 principes. 4. Paris est une belle Adlle, mais les rues . en sont trop etroites, et les maisons trop hautes. 5. La guerre a sa 1 theorie, comme les autres sciences. 6. Pour peindre les passions avec verite, il est necessaire d' 2 avoir etudie le cosur de l'homme, et d'en 1 connaitre tous les ressorts. 7. Votre livre vaut mieux que le mien, 6 mais mes gants valent mieux que les votres. 6 8. Son action est 252 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 56, 57. br.mable ; la votre, 6 au contraire, est digne de louange. 9. J'ai appris ma lecon, mais ma soeur n'a pas appris la sienne. 10. Totre pays est plus grand que le notre, cependant notre rci est plus puissant que le votre. 11. Est-ce la 7 votre livre? 12. Oui, e'est le mien. 13. Est-ce la 7 votre maison ? 14. Non, ce n'est pas la notre. 15. J'ai trouve un de vos Hvres parmi les miens. 16. Un de mes 8 livres, dites-vous ? montrez- le-moi. 17. Xon, ce n'est pas a nioi, 9 j'en suis sur, parce que j'ai vendu le mien. 18. Connaissez- 10 vous ce monsieur? 19. Oui, madame, e'est un de mes 8 parents. 20. Un-de nos amis vint hier nous voir, et il nous parla de vous. 21. Je crois que e'est encore quelqu'une u de ses inventions. 22. J'ai ete 12 temoin de plusieurs de vos machinations. 23. Si vous voyez quelqu'un de mes amis, n'oubliez pas de 13 parler de mon retour. 24. A qui est ce cheval-ci? 25. A mon pere. 26. A qui sont ces jardins? 27. A moi. 28. Prenez cette montre et la 14 portez a votre frcre; je crois qu'elle est a lui. 9 29. Xon, certainement, elle n'est pas a lui ; il n'a pas de 15 montre. 30. A qui est-elle done ? 31. Je ne sais pas, a moins qu'elle ne 16 soit 17 a ma tante, qui etait ici bier au soir, 32. La depravation de la nature bumaine est si grande, que nous plaisons plus souvent par nos defauts que par nos bonnes qualites. Peonotjns. §§ 80-96. § 57, 1. Si vous voulez me preter aujourd'bui votre cbeval, je vous preterai le mien, quand vous en aurez 1 besoin. 2. L'Angleterre fut d'abord appelee 2 Albion, nom qui signife ricbe et beureuse, par rapport a 3 sa fertilite, a sa 4 temperature, et a ses 4 ricbesses. 3. Monsieur, voici un de vos livres parmi les miens. 4. Chaque langue a ses 5 tournures et ses 5 beautes particulieres. 5. Hercule fit 6 present a Philoctete, son com- pagnon et son ami, de ses fleches, teintes du sang de 1'hy- dre. 6. Les bommes tirent souvent plus de fruit de leurs erreurs, que de leurs actions les plus glorieuses. 7. Si vous ne cbangez de 7 .conduite, et si vous ne reparez 8 votre premi- §§ 57, 58. SYNTAX. THE PRONOUN. 253 ere injustice, cette 9 veuve que vous avez opprimee, 10 cette pauvre femine que vous avez abandonnee, 10 ces malheureux que vous avez meprises, 10 vous accuseront au jour clu juge- ment. 8. Cette femme est capricieuse ; elle change de 7 reso- lution tous les jours. 9. Ne faites pas cela; 11 je le ferai moi-meme. 10. Si vous me refusez cela, 11 vous vous en repentirez. 11. Ceci est pour moi, et cela pour vous. 12. Pourquoi avez-vous fait cela ? 13. Vous ne devez parler de cela devant personne. 12 14. Considerez, 6 homines, ce que 13 la loi de Dieu comrnande, et ce que la societe demande de vous. 15. Ce que je demande de vous, c' 14 est une amitie reciproque, telle qu'elle existait 15 entre votre pere et le mien. 16. La tragedie excite la terreur; c'est ce qui la rend tra- gique : le poeme epique excite l'admiration ; c'est ce qui 1q rend heroique. 17. L'education est a l'esprit ce que 16 la pro- prete est au corps. 18. Ce que je crains le plus c' 14 est la trahison. 19. Je sais ce dont vous parlez. 20. Ce qui brille au dehors 17 est quelquefois tres-peu solide au dedans. 18 21. Ce qui coiite peu est trop cher quand il n'est d'aucun 12 usage. 22. Vous etesbien eurieux; vous demandez toujours pour- quoi ceci, et pourquoi cela. Peonouns. §§ 80-96. § 58. 1. L'etat de la brute est tres different de celui 1 de l'homme ; celle-la x est vetue et armee par la nature ; celui-ci 1 ne l' 2 est pas; celle-la 1 arrive bientot a sa 3 vigueur et a sa 3 perfection; celui-ci 1 reste longtemps dans l'enfance. 2. La- quelle 4 de ces maisons me conseillez-vous d'acheter? 3. Celle-ci me coutera dix mille francs, et celle-la douze mille. 4. Je n'aime ni 5 Tune ni l'autre ; si, cependant, vous en 6 prenez une, je vous conseille d'acheter celle-ci plutot que celle-la. 5. La vue de l'esprit est plus etendue que celle 1 du corps. 6. Les biens de la fortune ne sont pas comparables a ceux 1 de l'esprit. 7. Les maladies de l'esprit sont plus dangereuses 7 que celles du corps. 8. Ce a quoi 8 l'avare 22 254 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 58, 59. pense le moms, c'est a jouir de ses richesses. 9. Le bon- heur eternel est infiniment au-dessus de 9 celui 10 qu'un homme pent posseder dans ce monde. 10. Tons les hommes haissent ceux qui ne sont pas reconhaissants d'un bienfait. 11. Nous devons encourager ceux qui s'appliquent aux arts et aux sciences. 12. Celui qui ne j^eut garder un secret, est incapable de gouverner. 13. Personne 5 n'est plus prompte- ment oppriine que celui qui ne craint rien ; 5 parce que la securite est souvent le commencement des n nialheurs. 14. Ceux qui ne sont pas contents de ce qu'ils possedent a, pre- sent, ne le 2 seront probablement jamais de ce qu'ils, pourront ])osseder a l'avenir. 15. Celui qui n'a jamais eprouve" l'ad- versite, dit Seneque, 12 n'a vu le monde que d'un cote, et il ignore la nioitie des scenes de la nature. 16. Ceux qui sur- montent leurs passions, terrassent leurs plus grands ennemis. 17. Ceux qui se fient aux vaines promesses des hommes, ne connaissent pas le cceur bumain. 18. Ceux qui prennent le mieux 13 leurs mesures, ne reussissent pas toujours. 19. Celui qui ne manque de rien 5 est beureux. 20. Ceux qui se livrent aux plaisirs de ce monde, sont indignes de la gloire du ciel. 21. Ceux qui- se contentent de peu sont beureux. 22. Nous attendons naturellement des autres ce que nous leur avons fait auparavant. 23. Ceux qui pour augmenter leurs richesses, oppriment les pauvres, seront pun is de Dieu. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § 59. 1. Tin philosophe evite les richesses et les dignites ; il craint celles-ci et meprise celles-la. 2. Ceux qui croient que les rois sont les plus heureux de tous les hommes se trompent. 3. Cyrus commenca la monarchic des Perses, et Ninus celle des Assyriens. 4. Alexandre, quoique ambitieux, etait persuade que celui qui ne desirait rien etait plus heureux que celui qui aspirait a la possession du monde entier. 5. Cesar dit, apres la bataille de Pharsale : Celui qui peut s'exposer comme un simple 1 soldat, pendant la bataille, est un grand general ; mais §§59,60. SYNTAX. —THE PRONOUN. 255 cclui qui peut se rejouir comme un simple particulier apres la victoire, est encore plus grand. 6. Le sage se contente de ce qui est present, et attend patiemment ce qui est a venir. 7. Ceux qui parlent sans 2 reflexion sont exposes a dire bien 3 des sottises. 8. Ciceron fut un de ceux qui furent sacrifies a la vengeance des triumvirs. 9. Les livres que vous lisez sont bons, mais difficiles a comprendre. 10. Les termes synonymes sont des 4 mots qui out a pen pres la meme signification. 11. Marc-Aurele avait 5 coutume de dire qu'il ne voudrait 6 pas donner ce qu'il avait appris pour tout l'or du monde, et qu'il retirait plus de gloire de ce qu'il avait In ou ecrit, que de tous les royaumes qu'il avait conquis. 12. Tous les avantages dont 7 nous jouissons sur la terre viennent 8 de Dieu. 13. Le meme orgueil qui 7 nous fait blamer les fautes dont 7 nous nous croyons exempts, nous porte a condamner les bonnes qualites que 7 nous n'avons pas. 14. Plusieurs 9 affectent de mepriser les honneurs du desir desquels ils sont ennammes. 15. Le jeune homme dont je vous ai parle merite d'etre en- courage. 16. Alexandre, au courage de qui 10 on donne n tant de louanges, mourut a l'age de trente-trois ans. 17. La fille de Minos donna un fil 12 a Thesee, au moyen duquel il sortit du labyrinthe. 18. La gloire a laquelle les lieros sacrifient, est souvent une fausse gloire. 19. II est evident qu'il y a un Dieu, j>ar qui tout ]3 est gouverne. 20. La paresse est un vice auquel les jeunes gens sont tres enclins. 21. Celui qui amasse des richesses ne sait pas pour qui il les amasse, ni pour qui il s'interesse. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § 60. 1. Ulysse emporta 1 le palladium dans lequel 2 les Troyens avaient une confiance particuliere ; c'etait une statue de Minerve, de laquelle 2 dependait tout le succes de la guerre. 2. Le mensonge est un vice pour lequel on ne peut 3 avoir trop d' 4 horreur. 3. Le theme que 5 vous m'avez donne a ecrire, est trop long et trop difficile. 4. L'homme a* qui j'ai parle, vient d' 6 arriver de 7 France. 5. Les raisons sur les- 256 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 60, 61. quelles je me foncle sont solides. 6. II ne faut 8 pas tenir les promesses qui sont nuisibles a ceux a qui on 9 les a faites. 10 7. Je erois qu'on 9 fera la 11 paix cette annee. 8. Que nos appetits obeissent a la raison, a laquelle ils sont soumis par la loi cle 12 nature. 9. La chose a laquelle un avare pense le moins 13 c' 14 est a soulager les pauvres. 10. Nous clevons tou- jours nous ressouvenir des soins de ceux par qui nous avons ete eleves. 11. La mort est un mal auquel il n'y a point de remede. 12. La prudence et la moderation nous 15 gagnent l'estime de ceux avec qui nous conversons. 13. Les hommes ne reflechissent pas assez sur tous les dangers auxquels ils sont exposes. 14. Considerons les effets de la prosperity et de l'adversite, et alors nous apercevrons aisement laquelle est la plus desirable. 15. Tachons de nous renclre capables de remplir les devoirs de l'etat auquel Dieu nous destine. 16. Choisissez bien 1'ami a qui vous voulez clonner votre confi- ance. 17. Apres l'existence de Dieu il n'y a rien dont je doute moins que de l'immortalite de 1'ame. 18. Ulysse, tra- versant la mer, commanda a ses soldats de se boucher les 16 oreilles avec de la ir cire, et se fit 18 attacher an mat du vais- seau, pour se defendre des charmes des Sirenes. 19. L'igno- rance est un deshonneur pour le genre humain ; et, en quelque (maniere, elle reduit les hommes au-dessous des 19 betes, chez 20 lesquelles l'ignorance est la consequence de leur nature, et non l'effet de la negligence ou de l'indifference. Pronouns. §§ 80-96. §61. 1. Qui 1 doute qu'un jeune homme qui aime la vertu et la science, ne 2 jouisse 3 d'un bonheur plus solide que celui 3 qui passe sa vie dans la dissipation et le plaisir ? 2. Qui va la ? 3. A qui parlez-vous ? 4. A qui peut-on se fier aujourd'hui? 5. Pour qui un avare amasse-t-il 4 des ri- chesses? 6. A qui m'adresserai-je ? 7. Qui est l'homme qui puisse 5 etre certain d'un bonheur constant? 8. Qui croirai-je d^sormais? 9. De tous ces tableaux, lequel 6 aime- &§ Gl, 62. SYNTAX. — THE PRONOUN. 257 riez- 7 vous le mieux, et lequel croyez-vous valoir 8 le plus d'argent? 10. J'ai appris qu'un cle vos freres est mort; jo vous prie, dites-moi lequel? 11. Laquelle de vos sceurs ap- prend la geographic ?■ 12. Yous avez lu le Telemaque et la Jerusalem Delivree; lequel de ces deux poemes preferez- vous? 13. Quelle 9 est l'opinion de votre pere sur cette affaire? 14. Quel 9 malheur pouvons-nous craindre, apres que nous avons tout perdu? 15. Que 10 sont les homines devant Dieu? 16. Qu'est-ce que le maitre vous disait? 17. Si vous etes paresseux quand vous etes jeunes, vous ne saurez 11 a quoi 12 vous appliquer dans votre vieillesse. 18. Sur quoi voulez-vous l'interroger? 19. En quoi suis-je coupable? 20. De quoi m'accusez-vous ? 21. En quoi, je vous prie, ai-je neglige do remplir mon devoir? 22. A quoi votre frere s'applique-t-il ? 4 23. Yous a-t-il clonne de 1'argent pour moi ? 24. Y a-t-il rien 13 de 14 plus grand que d'employer ses talents a procurer le bonheur public? 25. Personne 15 fut- il jamais plus fidele a son pays que Regulus, qui aima mieux s'exposer a une mort certaine que de 16 nepas 17 remplir ses en- gagements? 26. Le maitre de 18 francais est- 19 il venu? 27. Yotre lecon est-elle apprise? 28. Qui est ce grand homme pale? 29. A quelle heure partira votre frere? 20 30. Est-ce que 21 votre pere est mort? 31. Yous avez recu une lettre de votre pere, n'est-ce pas ? 21 32. Quelles furent les conquetes de Jules-Cesar dans la Grande-Bretagne ? 33. Quand et par 22 qui fut-il tue? Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § 63. 1. Que de 1 peines vous prenez pour moi ! 2. Que de x malheurs vous avez eprouves ! 3. Si j'etais 2 riche, et que 3 j'eusse 3 des enfants, je leur donnerais 4 une bonne educa- tion. 4. Si le maitre de francais vient, et que 3 je ne sois 3 p>as a la maison, 5 dites-lui que j'ai ete oblige de sortir pour affaire. 5. Epaminondas, ayant ete blesse a, la bataille de Mantinee, ne voulut pas permettre aux medecins de 7 tirer la fleche de la 22* 258 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 62. blessure, qu'il ne 8 recut 9 la nouvelle de la victoire. 6. Quand vous aurez reconnu 10 vos fautes, et que 3 vous les aurez repa- rees, 11 je vous pardonnerai. 7. Nos compagnons nous plai'sent moins par les charmes que nous trouvons dans leur conver- sation, que par ceux 12 qu'ils trouvent dans la notre. 8. Vous ne sortirez pas qu'il ne 8 soit 9 jour. 9. Quand on s'est ecarte des sentiers de la vertu, on doit chercher a y 13 rentrer. 10. On u a souvent regrette que Porigine de presque toutes les nations soit 15 ou perdue 16 dans les fables, ou ensevelie 16 dans l'obscurite. 11. On ir attribue l'invention de la poudre a canon a Berthold Schwartz de Fribourg. 12. On 17 rapporte que Pythagore exigeait 18 un silence de cinq ans de ceux 12 qu'il instruisait dans la philosophic 13. De meme que 19 quand un tableau est fhii, on court 20 risque de le gater si l' 21 on y ajoute de 22 nouvelles touches, de meme on gate une phrase, si Ton y ajoute mal a propos 28 des mots sy- nonymes, qui ne contribuent ni a, la clarte de l'expression ni a rembellissement du discours. 14. On apprend mieux ce que l' 21 on comprend que ce qu'on ne comprend pas. 15. Plusieurs 24 poemes du premier merite paraissent obscurs, parce que le lecteur ne connait j)as assez les fables anci- ennes, les faits historiques, ou les objets naturels auxquels 25 le poete fait * allusion. 16. Plusieurs aiment mieux souflrir la perte de la vie, que celle 12 d'une bonne reputation. 17. Quand on s'applique a plusieurs sciences, on reussit rarement dans aucune. 18. La disgrace d'autrui 26 detourne souvent un cceur tendre de bien 27 des vices. 19. Souffrez les imper- fections d'autrui sans vous troubler. 20. Chacun 28 a ses de- fauts. 21. II faut 29 donner a chacun le sien. 22. A^Dres que les dames eurent danse toute la nuit, chacune 30 d'elles s'en alia 31 chez 32 elle. 23. Chaque 32 pays a ses coutumes et ses lois. 24. Dieu a dit : Vous aimerez vos ennemis, vous beni- rez ceux qui vous maudissent, vous ferez du bien a ceux qui vous persecutent, et vous prierez pour ceux qui vous caloni- nient. § 63. SYNTAX. THE PRONOUNo 259 Pronouns. §§ 80-96. § ©«J. 1. II y a dans chaque plante une certaine qualite qui la rend salutaire ou nuisible. 2. Chacun a sa maniere de 1 penser et d' 1 agir. 3. Quand nous sommes en ville, 2 nous avons presque tous les jours quelqu'un 3 a diner avec nous. 4. Quelqu'un a-t-il jamais serieusement doute de l'im- mortalite de l'ame ? 5. Parmi les magistrats, quelques-uns voterent la mort de l'amiral, et d' 4 autres son bannissement ; mais la majorite fut pour 5 le mettre en 2 liberte. 6 6. J'ai quelques livres pour vous, et quelques-uns aussi pour votre frere. 7. Cueillez quelques-unes de ces fleurs. 8. Elle a tout 7 pris pour elle. 9. La piete rapporte tout a Dieu ; l'amour- propre, au contraire, rapporte tout a soi. 10. Toute 3 la grandeur, toute 8 la richesse, et tout 8 le pouvoir de la tcrre ne peuvent pas satisfaire un esprit ambitieux. 11. Tout ce qui est eleve, vaste, ou profond, etend l'imagination, et dilate le coeur. 12. Votre sceur est toute 9 changee par sa maladie. 13. La femme, la mere, et la fille de Darius, tout 9 affligoes qu'elles etaient, quand Alexandre les fit prisonnieres, no purent 10 s'empecher d' admirer sa generosite. 14. Les philo- sophes, quelque 11 eleves que soient 12 leurs sentiment^, sont exposes a quelques fautes pratiques, aussi bien que les autres mortels. 15. Quelque 11 incredules que soient 12 les homines pendant leur vie, ils changent souvent de 13 disposition quand la mort approehe. 16. Quelque habiles et quelque savants que nous soyons, ne faisons pas un vain etalage de notre science. 17. Celui qui possede la vertu sera aimc de tous les gens de 14 bien, 15 dans quelque pays qu'il vive. 18. Quelques n talents de l'esprit qu'un homme ait 12 recus de la nature, il peut les perfectionner par l'art et 16 l'etude. 19. Quelques services que vous m'ayez rendus, j'en ai etc reconnaissant. 20. Quelles n que soient 12 votre naissance, votre elevation et votre gloire, vous ne devez mepriser personne. 21. Quel 11 que soit 12 le pouvoir d'un roi, il ne peut esperer de l'aug- 260 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 63, 64. menter, ni menie 17 de le conserver, s'il n'est pas tres attentif a gagner l'affection de ses sujets. 22. Quiconque 18 est pru- dent evitera de parler beaucoup d'une science particuliere dans laquelle il n'est pas tres verse, parce qu'il n'a rien a gagner, et qu' I9 il a beaucoup a perdre. 23. Quiconque est rnodeste manque rarement de gagner l'estime de ceux avec qui il converse. Pronouns. §§ 80-9G. § G4:. 1. La faculte de nous communiquer nos pensees les uns aux autres 1 a toujours etc consideree comme un des plus grands privileges de la raison, et conime ce qui eleve plus particulierement l'homnie au-dessus de 2 la brute. 2. Kous somrnes coupables de grand e injustice les uns envers les autres, 3 quand nous nous laissons 4 prevenir par les traits de ceux que nous ne connaissons pas. 3. J'aime mon pere et ma 5 mere; je ferais tout pour leur 6 plaire a Fun et a Fautre. 7 4. Le paresseux et le diligent sont de 8 niveau, 9 si ni Tun ni l'autre 10 ne savent 11 quoi 12 faire. 5. Yotre frere et le mien ont de 13 grands talents ; mais l'un et l'autre en font tres mauvais usage. 6. L'un et l'autre le soupconnent, 14 mais ni l'un ni l'autre ne veulent 11 dire pourquoi. 7. Vous pouvez Viva ou l'autre, me faire un grand plaisir. 8. Je ne connais personne 15 si savant que vous. 9. Je connais une personne plus savante que vous. 10. Personne ne soufire plus impa- tieniment les 16 injures que celui qui est le jDremier a en ir f ire. 11. Celui qui ne plait a joersonne est moins malheu- rcux que celui a qui personne ne plait. 12. Personne ne devient debauche ou vertueux tout a coup. 18 13. De toutes les nations de la terre, il n'y en 10 a pas une qui n' £/0 ait 21 quelque idee de Dieu. 14. La fortune exempte bien des 22 mediants de la punition, mais elle n'en 19 exempte aucun de la crainte. 15. J'avais plusieurs amis, cependant aucun ne n m'a secouru. 16. Parmi ces manuscrits il y en a plusieurs qu'on 24 estime beaucoup. 17. Rien n'est plus commun que le mot amitie et rien n'est plus rare qu'un veritable ami. 18. Rien n'est plus §§ G4, G5. ETYMOLOGY. THE PRONOUN. THE VERB. 261 dangereux pour un jeune homme que la mauvaise compagnie. 19. Quelque 25 rare que soit 26 le veritable amour, il l'^est moins que la veritable amitie. 20. Vos sceurs, toutes 28 belles et aiuiables qu'elles sont, ne se marient 29 pas. 21. Alexandre avait couturue de 30 dire : Je suis aussi redevable a Aristote qu'a mon pere ; car si je dois la vie 31 a Fun, je dois a l'autre la vertu. 22. Les honneurs, quels £5 qu'ils soient, 26 ne rendent pas les horames vraiment grands, s'ils n'ont pas de merite personnel. 28. Avec le temps et la patience, on apprivoise les betes sauvages, quelque 25 farouches qu'elles soient. 20 24. Tons les moments sont chers a celui qui connait le prix du temps. 25. Y . a-t-il un homme qui puisse dire ; Je serai en vie demain? THE VERB. §§ 98-119. § 65. 1. Je lis 1 la Bible. 2. Tu 2 paries trop vite. 3. II ecrit bien. 4. Nous sommes tous mortels. 5. Vous etes jeune. 3 6. lis sont heureux. 7. Mon frere et ma 4 sceur danseront. 8. Vous et moi 5 nous 6 jouerons. 9. Vous et eux, 5 vous 5 etiez de la meme opinion. 10. Tous ou votre frere, vous 6 avez pris mon livre. 11. Vous ou votre frere, vous pourriez 7 meprcter les deux cents livres dont j'ai besoin. 12. Louis XIV ayant dit au comte de Grammont : Je sais votre age ; l'eveque de Senlis, qui a quatre-vingt-quatre ans, m'a dit que vous aviez etudie dans la meme classe : Get eveque, sire, repliqua le comte, n'accuse pas juste, car ni lui ni moi nous n'avons jamais etudie. 13. Ce fut 8 moi 9 qui detruisis x les fortifications de cette ville. 14. Ce fut vous qui refusates ma requete. 15. C'est vous ou votre frere qui avez 6 pris mon livre. 16. Ce fut vous qui vintes hier au soir. 17. Ce sont 10 eux qui l'ont fait. 18. C'est moi qui l'ai vu. 19. Ce sont 10 mes freres qui ont decouvert le complot. 20. Ce sera vous qui irez. 1 20. Les impies se moquent de la vertu et tournent en 11 ridicule la religion. 21. Ne vous moquez pas du malheur d'autrui, au lieu d' 12 en avoir 13 pitie. 22* Vous 262 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 65, G6. abusez 14 des faveurs de la fortune, et vous n'usez pas de 14 votre victoire avec moderation. 23. La mort n'a pitie de 15 personne, ni du riche ni du pauvre. 24. ~Ne medisez jamais de 14 personne. 25. Les avares sont tourmentes du desir d'augmenter ce qu'ils ont, et de la crainte de le perdre. 26. II est facheux de 16 manquer d' 14 argent dans un pays etranger. 27. La flatterie ne peut nuire qu'a 17 celui a 17 qui elle plait. 28. Si nous ne pardonnons pas a 17 autrui, il ne faut pas 18 esperer que Dieu nous pardonne. 29. Souviens-toi, 6 mon fils, du 14 conseil que je te donne, et il te sera tres profitable : obeis a 17 la loi de Dieu. 80. Resistez a 17 vos passions, par- donnez a 17 vos ennemis, ne nuisez a 17 personne, et ne cedcz jamais aux attraits du plaisir. 31. Celui qui resiste a 17 ses mauvaises inclinations merite de plus grands eloges que celui qui conquiert des royaumes, et ne peut commander a 17 scs passions. 32. Dieu accepte les efforts que nous faisons pour arriver a la saintete, pourvu qu'ils soient 19 sinceres. 33. Preferez la vertu aux richesses. 34. S'il nous etait permis de prendre a autrui tout ce que nous jugerions a propos, les societes humaines seraient 22 bientot renversees. Verbs. §§ 98-119. § ©6. 1. Quand je vois les oiseaux 1 batir leurs nids avec tant d' 2 art et d' 2 adresse, je demande quel maitre leur 3 a enseigne les mathematiques et l'architecture. 2. Un honnete homme doit 1 tacher de 4 satisfaire ses creanciers. 3. Nous devons user de 5 diligence, et ne pas abuser du 5 temps, parce que la vie dont 5 nous jouissons est courte. 4. La fortune ote souvent les richesses aux 6 riches, mais elle ne peut oter la probite a ceux qui sont vertueux. 5. Salomon demanda la sagesse a 6 Dieu; Dieu lui dit: Parce que tu m'as demande cette chose, et que 7 tu n'as demande ni une longue vie, ni des richesses, ni la vie de tes ennemis, je t'ai donne un coeur sage et intelligent, et des richesses et des honneurs. 6. Nous ne pouvons resister aisement aux attraits du plaisir. 7. Je § G6. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 263 n'abuserai pas davantage de votre patience. 8. Pensiez-vous a 8 mon affaire? 9. Resistez aux mechants. 10. II n'obeira pas a son maitre. 11. Quand vous seriez 9 aussi riche que Cresus, si vous ne savez 10 mettre des bornes a vos desirs, vous serez toujours pauvre. 11 12. Le sage ne desire que ce qu'il peut 10 gagner avec 12 justice, consommer avec 12 sobriete* et distribuer avec 12 joie. 13. On doit eviter le vice, et pra- tiquer la vertu. 14. Ceux qui pretendent etre savants sont souvent tres ignorants. 15. J'irai le voir deraain, si j'ai 13 le temps. 16. La lecture est une maniere de 14 confercr avec les hommes qui, dans tous les siecles, se sont le plus dis- tingues 15 par leur science ; de 14 connaitre le resultat de leurs mures reflexions, et de 14 contempler a 12 loisir les meilleures productions des bons auteurs. 17. C'est folic de penser a 10 echapper a 17 la censure, et faiblesse de s'en affecter. 18. Je ne decouvre aucune raison de differer mon voyage. 19. Je vous ai une grande obligation d'avoir parle 18 en ma faveur. 20. Recevez mes remerciments d'avoir pris 19 tant de peine pour le succes de mon affaire. 21. En verite vous etes trop bon que d' 20 ecouter de pareilles sottisses. 22. Cet horarae est bien curieux de faire tant de questions. 23. Vous etes bien aimable d'etre venu nous rendre 12 visite. 24. Elle se montre trop complaisante en obligeant un homme qui le merite si peu. 25. II n'est pas capable d'aller si loin. 26. II est impossible de 21 plaire a tout le monde. 27. II importe d' 22 etre soigneux, quand on est dans une situation publique. 28. II doit vous suffire de n'avoir pas etc puni, et il est injuste de demander une recompense pour une action qui meritait une punition. 29. II serait avantageux pour une nation d'etre gouvernee 23 par des hommes entierement exempts de pas- sions; mais il parait impossible de trouver des 24 etres si par- faits sur la terre. 30. Des qu' Aristide eut 25 dit que la propo- sition de Themistocle etait injuste, tout le peuple s'ecria qu'il n'y 26 fallait plus penser. 31. Ovide a dit que l'etude adoucit les moaurs et efface tout ce qui se trouve en nous de 27 grossier et de barbare. 264 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 67. Verbs. §§ 98-119. § 67. 1. La loi de * nature defend de se faire tort 2 les uns aux autres. 3 2. J'ai tant d'ouvrage a 4 faire que je n'ai pas mi moment a 4 perdre. 3. Vous connaissez ma disposition a obliger mes amis. 4. Je crois apercevoir 5 en lui une sorte de repugnance a apprendre les mathematiques. 5. Yotre fils passe tout son temps a 6 rire et a 6 jouer. 6. Un vrai chretien met tout son bonheur a soulager les malheureux. 7. Le vrai lieros eprouve une satisfaction infinie a se sacrifier pour son pays. 8. Cette question est-elle difficile a resoudre? 9. La charite est prete a sacrifier ses propres interets a ceux d'au- trui. 10. Une chose utile a acquerir, c' 7 est de savoir vivre content de la situation oti l'on a ete place par la divine Pro- vidence. 11. La vraie sagesse consiste a connaitre exactement son devoir ; la vraie eloquence, a en 8 parler clairement, et la vraie piete, a faire ce qu'on sait etre bien. 12. Aimez a soulager les malheureux, et a consoler les affliges. 13. Je ne manquerai pas de 6 vous punir si vous manquez a 9 faire votre theme. 14. II me tarde de 10 voir votre mere; elle tarde long- temps a 11 venir. 15. Venez nous 12 voir demain. 16. Celui qui fait un mensonge, ne sait pas quelle tache il entreprend; car il peut etre force d'en 13 in venter vingt autres pour 14 sou- tenir le premier. 17. II est necessaire de 15 connaitre le cceur humain, pour bien juger des autres. 18. Celui qui a une belle, fortune, et qui en fait 16 usage pour procurer la gloire de Dieu, et pour soulager ceux qui sont dans le 17 besoin, est aime de 18 tout le monde. 19. Apres avoir 6 termine quelques affaires chez 19 moi, je commencerai par rendre 6 quelques visites; et, apres avoir 6 dine avec un de mes amis, 20 je pas- serai la soiree avec vous. 20. Personne ne 21 peut etre heu- reux sans 6 pratiquer la vertu. 21. Nous ne devrions jamais rien entreprendre avant d' 6 avoir consulte la volonte de Dieu, et implore son assistance divine. 22. Si Titus passait un jour sans faire 6 du bien a quelqu'un, il avait 16 coutume de dire: §§67,68. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 265 J'ai perdu cette journee. 23. Les jeunes gens ne peuvent s'empecher de 6 jouer. 24. II y a des horames que nous haiissons, d' 22 autres que nous aimons, sans savoir pourquoi: dans le premier cas, c'est une injustice ; dans le second, c'est une faiblesse. 25. Personne ne peut bien ecrire, s'il n'a pas appris a bien penser, a arranger ses idees avec 1 methode, et a les exprimer avec * propriete. Veebs. §§ 98-119. § @8« 1. L'aimant a des effets surprenants. 1 2. Votre soeur est une fille charmante. 1 3. Les soldats d'Alexandre, oubliant * leurs femmes et leurs 2 enfants, regardaient l'or de la 3 Perse comme leur butin. 4. Comme sur le bord d'un ruisseau, un zephir d'une haleine rafraichissante, 1 ranime les troupeaux languissants * que la chaleur brulante 1 de Pete consume, ainsi ce discours apaisait le desespoir de la deesse. 5. II est arrive de 4 France. 6. Elle est arrivee 5 d'Espagne. 7. Une pensee noble, mais confuse, est un diamant couvert s de poussiere. 8. Les aumones donnees 6 sans 7 ostentation acquierent un nouveau merite. 9. Les lettres et l'ecriture ont ete inventees 5 pour parler aux yeux. 10. Les personnes vertueuses sont estimees, 5 et les impies sont meprises. 5 11. La lettre que j'ai recue 8 est longue. 12. Les fautes qu'il a commises 8 sont pardonnables. 13. La maison que j'ai achetee 8 est neuve. 14. Les chevaux que yous m'avez vendus 8 sont tres bons. 15. Demetrius informe que les Athe- niens avaient renverse 9 ses statues: lis n'ont pas, repliqua- t-il, renverse la valeur qui me les 10 a fait 11 eriger. 16. Vos soeurs ont fait 9 de 12 grands progres dans le 13 francais. 17. Nous avons dine aujourd'hui plus tot qu'a 1'ordinaire. 14 18. J'ai ecrit une lettre a mon pere. 19. II faut que je finisse 15 la lettre que j'ai commence a ecrire. 20. Les regies que je vous avais conseille 16 d'apprendre sont utiles. 21. Que 17 d' 18 hommes commettent les memes fautes qu'ils. avaient resolu 19 d'eviter. 22. Philippe envoya des deputes aux 23 266 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 68, 69. Scythes, pour demander nne partie des frais du siege; lee Scythes, alleguant l la sterilite de leur terre, repondirent que n'etant pas assez riches pour satisfaire un si grand roi, ils croyaient moins convenable de 20 n'en payer qu'une par- tie, que d'en w refuser le tout. 23. Tout le monde respecte les magistrats qui, oubliant 1 leur propre interet, observant 1 la loi, favorisant la vertu, et reprimant le vice, cherchent le bien de leur pays. 24. La flotte destinee 6 au siege de Troie, etait composee 5 de treize cents 21 vaisseaux. 25. Le cardinal de Richelieu representa au roi les grandes peines qu'il avait prises 8 et les services qu'il avait rendus 8 a l'etat. 26. Les livres que j'ai achetes 8 sont bien relies. 27. La montre que j'ai vendue 8 est neuve. Veebs. § 120. the subjunctive mode. § 69, 1. Homere, qui inventa les fables des dieux et des demi-dieux, est le plus agreable menteur qui ait 1 jamais ete. 2. II n'y a personne qui ne 2 serait 1 tres fache, s'il savait 3 ce qu' 4 on 5 pense de 6 lui, quelque 7 merite qu'il ait. 8 3. Quelque 7 ingenieux que fussent les Grecs et les Romains, ils ne trou- verent ni l'art d'imprimer les livres, ni celui de graver des estarnpes. 4. Vous etes la premiere personne que j'ai vue 9 aujourd'hui. 5. Lucrece et Pline sont les seuls naturalistes que les Romains aient 1 eus. 9 6. Qui doute que les vraies richesses ne 2 consistent 10 dans la 11 vertu? 7. Les Egyptiens ne doutaient pas que certaines plantes et certains animaux ne 2 fussent 10 des 12 divinites. 8. En meme temps Eucharis dit a Telemaque, d'un ton moqueur : Ne craignez-vous pas que Mentor ne 13 vous gronde 10 de venir 14 a la chasse sans lui? 9. Presque tout l'Orient ordonna que des 12 honneurs divins fussent 10 rendus, 15 et que des temples fussent 10 batis 15 a Jason ; mais plusieurs annees apres, Parmenion les fit 16 abattre, 17 de peur que le nom de quelqu'un ne 13 fut 8 plus grand que celui d' Alexandre. 10. II est 19 injuste que ceux §§69,70. SYNTAX. — THE VERB. 267 qui meritent bien de leur pays ne soient 18 pas recompenses. 15 11. II n'y a pas d'etat qui ne 2 puisse 1 etre totalement detruit par les guerres civiles. 12. Si vous voulez etre estime, il faut que vous soyez 20 obligeant, poli, et affable en vers tout le monde. 13. Quoique Antiochus approuvat 8 l'avis d'Annibal, cependant il ne voulut pas agir en consequence, de peur que la victoire ne 13 flit 8 attribute 15 a Annibal, et non pas 21 a lui. 14. Vous apprendrez tres-bien, pourvu que vous preniez 8 de la peine. 15. Je crois que mon pere viendra. 22 16. Je ne pense pas qu'il vienne. 22 17. Pensez-vous qu'il vienne ? 18. Je m'apercois que vous m'avez trorape. 19. Si je m'apercois que vous frequentez 18 de mauvaises compagnies, vous perdrez mon amitie. 20. J'espere qu'on 5 fera 18 la paix cette annee. 21. Pensez-vous qu'on fasse 18 la paix? 22. Partons, si vous pensez qu'il fasse 18 beau temps. 23. II est certain que les maux imprevus sont 22 plus facheux que les autres. 24. II n'est pas certain qu'un homme puisse 22 etre heureux dans un desert. 25. II est evident qu'une nation ne peut 23 etre heu- reuse sous un gouvernement tyrannique. 26. II est certain qu'une republique est le meilleur gouvernement pour une grande nation. Vekbs. § 120. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. § 70. 1. II est probable qu'il le fera. 2. Est-il probable qu'elle le fasse? 3. II n'est pas probable qu'ils le fassent. 4. Employ ez tous les jours de votre jeunesse de maniere que vous remplissiez 1 honorablement tous les devoirs de votre etat. 5. Votre fils se conduit de maniere qu'il gagne 1 l'estime generale. 6. Je ne vous demande rien sinon que vousfassiez 2 votre tache, et que vous obeissiez a votre maitre. 7. Je n'ai rien a vous dire, sinon que j'ai 2 fait, et que je ferai 2 toujours ce que la religion commande a tous les chretiens. 8. Un homme doit se conduire si honorablement, qu'aucun motif ne puisse 2 l'induire a une action indigne de son rang. 9. Les 268 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 70, 71. apotres recurent le don des langues, afin qu'ils pussent 1 precher l'evangile a toutes les nations de la terre. 10. Si vous etes assidu, et que 3 vous preniez 3 de la peine, vous reussirez. 11. Avant que je forme aucun plan, j'attendrai que les choses aient 1 une apparence plus tranquille. 12. Pensez-vous qu'ils le fassent ? 4 13. Pensiez-vous qu'ils le fissent ? 5 14. Je ne pensais pas qu'ils vinssent 5 aujourd'hui. 15. Je doute qu'au- cun philosophe ait 6 jamais connu l'origine du vent. 16. Je suis surpris que vous ayez 6 refuse la place qui vous a ete of- ferte. 7 17. Je n'aurais 8 jamais pu penser que l'empereur se fut 9 soumis a des 10 conditions si dures. 18. Garrick fut peut- etre le meilleur acteur tragique que le monde ait u jamais pro- duit. 19. II n'est pas probable que vous eussiez obtenu 12 le consentement de votre pere, si je n'avais pas parle en votre faveur. 20. Je ne pense pas que la revolution franchise fut jamais arrivee, 12 si Louis XVI se fut 13 oppose vigoureusement aux premieres innovations. 21. Pensez-vous que vos freres apprissent 5 le francais si je le leur enseignais ? u 22. II n'y a point 15 de chagrin que le temps ne 16 diminue. 23. Erostrate mit le feu au temple de Diane, afin que son nom se repandit 1 par toute la terre. 24. Les philosophes sont composes de 17 chair et d' ir os, aussi bien que les autres hommes ; et quelque 13 elevees que soient 1 leurs theories, ils sont sujets a des fai- blesses, aussi bien que les autres mortels. 25. L'empereur Caligula desirait que tous les citoyens de Rome n'eussent 8 qu'un cou, afin qu'il put x les decapiter tous a la fois. Verbs. §§ 121, 122. use of the tenses. § 71. 1. L'histoire est le tableau des temps et des hommes, et consequemment l'image de l'inconstance et du caprice. 2. L'arc-en-ciel se forme 1 des rayons du soleil reflechis 2 par les gouttes de 3 pluie. 3. Je pars 4 pour la France demain, e'il fait 4 beau temps. 4. J'apprends 5 le francais, et ma soeur ap- §71. SYNTAX. THE VERB. 269 prend 5 1'italien. 5. Je vais 4 ce soir a l'opera. 6. Orphee, selon la fable, melait G si agreablement sa voix a son luth, qu'il arretait 6 le cours cles rivieres, calmait 6 les tempetes, attirait 6 les betes les plus sauvages, et emouvait 6 les arbres et les rochers. 7. Je vous ecrivais 6 une lettre quand je fus informee 7 de votre arrivee. 8. Que faisiez- 6 vous ce matin dans ma cbambre quand je vous ai trouve. 8 9. Je faisais mon theme. 10. Alfred etait un grand roi; il possedait toutes les vertus d'un sage, lesquelles etaient si bien reglees que l'une empechait l'autre cle sortir de ses propres bornes ; il savait unir l'esprit le 9 plus entreprenant a la plus grande modera- tion, et la justice la 9 plus severe a la plus grande douceur. 11. Les murs de Babylone avaient 10 deux cents pieds de 10 hauteur et cinquante de 10 largeur. 12. Cesar parvint 7 a l'empire par des voies tres sanguinaires. 13. Alexandre, avec quarante mille hommes, attaqua 7 Darius, qui en 11 avait 6 six cent mille; il lui livra 7 deux fois batailie, le defit, 7 et fit 7 sa mere, sa femme, et ses filles prisonnieres. 14. Caton se tua 7 de peur de tomber 12 entre 13 les mains de Cesar. 15. Marius fut maltraite de la fortune ; cependant il ne perdit pas 14 courage. 16. Aussitot que mon education- sera 15 finie, j'irai en 16 Italie, pour voir les antiquites Romaines, 17. Quand vous serez 15 pret 17 nous irons nous promener. 18. Le Seigneur dit a Cain, qui avait tue son frere Abel : " Quand tu laboureras 15 la terre, elle ne te produira 18 rien ; tu seras 19 fugitif et 19 vagabond sur la terre. 19. II y aura toujours des guerres entre les hommes, tant qu'ils seront ambitieux. 20. Je lui aurais prete 20 cinquante livres, si j'avais su 20 qu'il en n eut besoin. 21. J'espere que vous ne me refuserez 21 pas la faveur que je vous demande. 22 22. Si votre personne etait- 3 aussi gigantesque que vos desirs, le monde entier ne vous contiendrait 24 pas ; votre main droite toucherait a l'orient, et votre gauche a l'occident en meme temps; et si vous aviez conquis toute la terre, vous entreprendriez de soumettre la nature, dit Vambassadeur 25 des Scythes a Alexandre. 23. Des que j'eus x examine ce phenomene, j'en recherchai les causes. 23* 270 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 72. Vekbs. §§ 121, 122. use of the tenses. § TS. 1. Si je vendais 1 mon cheval, je pourrais 1 en 2 avoir quarante livres. 2. Si vous etudiez 1 bien, votre maitre vous aimerait, 1 et vous feriez 1 de grands progres. 3. Je de- viendrais 1 riche si je continuais 1 mon commerce. 4. Je ne sais 3 si mon frere y 4 consentira. 5 5. J'ai dejeune 6 ce matin a huit henres, et j'ai dine 6 a trois heures apres-midi. 6. Quand avez-vous appris 6 votre lecon? 7. Je l'ai apprise 7 apres le diner. 8. Pourquoi ne l'avez-vous pas apprise 7 auparavant? 9. Parce que j'ai ete malade toute la matinee. 10. Avez- vons fait votre theme ? 11. Non, 8 je ne l'ai pas encore 9 fait; mais je le ferai ce soar. 12. Ou vous etes-vous promene 10 aujourd'hui? 13. Je ne me suis pas promene, parce qu'il ne faisait pas beau temps. 11 14. Hier j'eus fini mon ouvrage avant six heures. 15. Aussitot que j'eus dine, 12 je sortis. 16. Quand elle se fut 12 apercue 13 de son erreur, elle fut toute 14 honteuse. 17. Darius, dans sa defaite, etant oblige de boire de l'eau bourbeuse, assura a ses soldats qu'il n'avait jamais bu avec plus de plaisir. 18. Aussitot que le parlement eut vote 12 contre la continuation de la guerre, la paix se fit. 19. Idomenee, un des plus braves des rois de la Grece, sur le point de faire 15 naufrage, fit 15 V03u de sacrifier a Neptune le premier objet qu'il rencontrerait a son arrivee dans son pays, s'il echappait au danger present : il fut assez malheureux que de rencontrer 16 son propre fils; il le tua, et fut pour cette action oblige de quitter son pays. 20. Cesar et Caton avaient 17 le raerae degre de gloire; mais ils l'avaient acquise 13 par des voies diffe rentes : Cesar etait 17 celebre par sa generosite, Caton par sa grande integrite; dans le premier le malheureux trou- vait 17 un refuge, dans le second, le coupable trouvait 17 une destruction certaine ; Cesar aspirait 17 au souverain commande- ment, et desirait 17 de nouvelles guerres peur deployer ses §§72,73,74. SYNTAX. — THE ADVERB. PREPOSITION. 271 talents militaires. Quant a Caton, sa seule etude etait ir la moderation, une conduite reguliere, et une severite rigou- reuse ; il rivalisait ir en bravoure avec 18 le brave, en modestie avec 18 l'homme modeste, et en integrite avec 18 le juste. 21. Aussitot que les Israelites eurent 12 passe la Mer Rouge, ils oublierent le miracle qui les avait sauves. 13 THE ADVERB. §§ 124-126. Note. The syntax of the adverb has been quite fully illustrated in the preced- ing pages. The following additional examples are given, illustrating the place of the adverb : — § 73. 1. On se repent rarement de parler peu, mais tres souvent de parler trop. 2. Homere sommeille quelquefois au milieu des dieux et des heros. 3. Votre theme n'est pas bien fait; vous l'avez fait a la hate. 1 4. ~Ne reprochez jamais a personne les services 2 que vous lui rendez. 5. Les courti- sans passent leur vie dans l'esperance d'acquerir ce qu'ils n'obtiennent jamais. 6. L'amour des biens terrestres est toujours accompagne d'une indifference pour les biens ce- lestes. 7. Ce qui 3 se 4 fait avec 5 plaisir est ordinairement bien fait. 8. Si vous aviez agi 6 conformement a la raison et a la justice, personne 7 n'aurait 8 condamne votre conduite. 9. II a souvent 9 parle en bien 10 de vous. 10. Comme j'avais besoin de sortir ce matin, j'ai fait mon theme a la hate. 11. Vous m'avez donne trop de pain. 12. J'aurai fini demain. THE PREPOSITION". §§ 128-135. Note. The syntax of the preposition has been quite fully illustrated in the pre- ceding pages. The following examples are added : — § 74. 1. A qui 1 parlez-vous? 2. De quoi 2 se plaint-il? 3. A qui m'adresserai-je ? 4. De meme que 3 les magistrats sont au-dessus du 4 peupie, ainsi les lois sont au-dessus des 4 magistrats. 5. Nous nous imaginons que les antipodes sont 272 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. §§ 74, 75. sons 5 nous; ils croient que nous sommes sous 5 eux; mais nous sommes tons sur 5 la terre, car aucune partie d'une surface ne peut 6 etre sur une autre partie de la meme sur- face. 6. On va en 7 quelques heures de Calais a Paris, et en 7 trente minutes de Paris a Versailles. 7. J'aime a 8 voyager; je suis 9 alle d'AUemagne en 10 Russie, et de Russie eu 10 Suede. 8. Combien y a-t-il 11 de Londres a Winchester, et de Win- chester a Salisbury? 9. Vous passez tout le jour a aller 13 de niaison en maison, de rue en rue, et de place en place. 10. Combien y a-t-il de milles de Chelsea a la Tour? 11. II n'y a pas loin de sa maison a la riviere. 12. Un pauvre la- boureur, qui travaille depuis le matin jusqu'au 13 scir, quand il est bien paye de^ son travail, vit aussi content qu'un roi. 13. J'ai bu le calice jusqu'a la lie. 14. Je me promene tous les jours depuis dix heures jusqu'a midi, et j'etudie depuis six heures apres-midi jusqu'a huit, quel quefois jusqu'a neuf heures du soir. 15. Les etrangers prennent 15 plaisir a admirer a Amsterdam le melange singulier forme par les toits des maisons, les cimes des arbres, et les pavilions des vaisseaux, ce qui 16 presente dans la meme place une idee de la mer, de la ville, et de la campagne. 16. Jesus-Christ est venu dans le monde pour 17 racheter les homines, et pour 17 detruire l'empire du demon. 17. La charite ne fait rien sans 18 consideration ni sans 18 ordre. 18. Nos lois ne condamnent personne sans 1' avoir 13 entendu et sans 1' avoir 12 examine. IDIOMS. Note. Many common idioms have already been given in the previous pages, with references to those parts of the Grammar where they are explained or classi- fied. Some additional examples are here subjoined. § T5. 1. Quelques 1 baleines out 2 cent pieds de 2 lon- gueur, leurs queues ont 2 plus de 3 douze pieds de 2 circon- ference, et leurs nageoires ont 2 environ sept pieds de 2 lon- gueur. 2. Quel age avait 4 monsieur votre pere quand il mourut ? 3. II avait soixante-dix ans. 4 4. Et madame 5 votre §§ 75, 76. IDIOMS. 273 mere? 5. Elle avait pros de quatre-vingts ans. 6. Je ne me ressouviens pas d'avoir 6 jamais eu si soif que je l'eus hier. 7. Chauffez-vous, si vous avez 6 froid; je n'ai pas froid aux r pieds, parce que j'ai beaucoup marche, mais j'ai 6 si froid aux 7 mains, que je ne puis 8 ecrire. 8. II y a des allees dans notrc pare qui ont 2 trois cents pieds de 2 longueur. 9. Vous avez G tort, et il a 6 raison. 10. Vous avez 6 beau demander de Par- gent a 9 un avare, il ne vous en 10 donnera jamais. 11. Quel age a 4 mademoiselle 5 votre fille? 12. Elle aura clix-huit ans 4 au mois de mars prochain. 13. Je ne croyais pas qu'elle eut ]1 plus de 3 quinze ans. 14. Quand nous apprimes que votre carrosse avait ete arrete par des voleurs, nous eumes 6 penr qu'ils ne 12 vous eussent tue. 15. Avez-vous froid aux pieds ? 16. Non; au contraire, j'y 13 ai tres chaud; mais j'ai froid aux mains. 17. Fait- 6 il froid ce matin? 18. Oui, monsieur, il fait tres froid; cependant, je ne crois pas qu'il fasse 11 tout a fait si froid qu'il faisait bier. 19. Le temps 14 est tres incon- stant: il faisait 6 chaud hier, il fait 6 froid aujourd'hui; il a plu ce matin, il fait beau temps a present, mais peut-etre 15 pleu- vra-t-il encore avant qu'il fasse 16 nuit. 17 20. S'il fait 18 beau temps demain j'irai a la comedie, mais s'il fait 6 mauvais temps je n' 19 irai pas. 21. Quand j'etais a la campagne, il faisait tres mauvais temps ; a present que je suis 20 revenu en ville, 21 il fait tres beau temps; et si je retournais 18 a la campagne, je craindrais qu'il ne 12 fit 22 encore mauvais temps. Idioms. § 7©« 1. Comment vous portez-vous 1 ce matin? 2. Je me porte 1 tres bien, je vous remercie. 3. Et comment so porte mademoiselle 2 votre sceur? 4. Elle ne se porte pas bien; elle est malade depuis deux mois, 3 et je crains qu'elle ne se porte 4 jamais 5 bien. 5. Et messieurs 2 vos freres, com- ment se portent-ils? 6. Le plus jeune se porte tres-bien ; mais je ne sais comment se porte l'aine, parce que nous n'avons pas entendu parler de G lui depuis deux mois; il se 274 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. § 76. portait tres-bien quand il nous ecrivit la derniere fois. 7. II en est des 7 maladies du co3ur comme de celles du corps; quelques-unes sont reelles, et d' 8 autres imaginaires. 8. II en est des 7 savants comme des epis de ble : ils levent la tete tant qu'ils sont vides, et quand ils sont pleins, ils commencent a la baisser. 9. II en est de 7 votre fils comme des autres en- fants. 10. Je ne crois pas qu'il en soit 9 de 7 mon fils comme il en a ete du 7 votre. 11. J'ai bien mal 10 au 11 cote. 12. Elle a mal 10 aux 11 yeux. 13. Avez-vous mal a la tete? 14. II a mal a la poitrine. 15. J'ai mal aux dents. 16. Elle avait mal aux dents hier; a present elle a mal a la tete. 17. Quand j'etais jeune, j'avais souvent mal a la tete. 18. Pourquoi ne mangez-vous pas si vous avez faim? 12 19. Je n'ai pas bien faim, je puis attendre le diner, mais j'ai tres soif, et je vous prie de me donner un verre de vin. 20. II fait tres froid au- jourd'hui. 21. Ma sceur ne se porte pas bien ; elle ne s'est pas bien portee 13 depuis trois semaines; elle a mal a la tete au- jourd'hui. 22. Vous avez beau 12 le dire; je ne vous crois pas. 23. II en est de 7 mon frere comme du votre. 24. J'espere qu'il fera beau temps demain; parce que s'il fait beau temps, nous irons a la campagne, mon frere et moi ; 14 mais s'il fait mauvais temps, nous resterons a la maison. 25. Quel age avait 15 monsieur 2 votre pere quand il mourut? 26. Quel age avez-vous a present ? 27. J'aurai cinquante ans au mois d'avril prochain. 28. Nous avons beau 12 nous enfouir dans l'obscurite, rien ne nous met a couvert des 16 poursuites de la inechancetej rien ne nous met a l'abri 12 des traits de Ten vie* NOTES. GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. TilE numbers in these notes refer to the sections in the author's Grammar ; but those numbers im- mediately followed by a small figure, above the line, refer to previous notes in this work. § 2m— iThe man, or man, §59. (a.) — 2 A = according to. — 3The article is used in these cases in French, but not in English, §59. (6.) — ^De = from. — 5_^. u = a t the. — 6 The article is used here in French, but not in English; thus, De la Greee = from Greece, § 59. (d.) — " A = at, or to. — s La place du village = the vil- lage square. — 9Au = inthe. — 10 Donnez, give; imperative, 2d pers. pi., of don- ner, to give, a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. 1. — u Garcon is rarely used in the sense of boy, unless accompanied by some modifying word, as un petit gargon, a little boy; un grand gargon, a large boy; and it may be used in con- trast with fille, as in the following sentence : Ses enfants sont gargons, et les votres sontfilles, his children are boys, and yours are girls. Gargon is also used in the sense of bachelor ; un bon g argon = a good fellow, and g argon alone usually means a waiter, or servant. — ^"Sqx\a, spoke; past indefinite, 3d pers. sing., of jiarUr, to speak, a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. 1. — i 3 Est, is; pres. indie, 3d pers. sing., of the auxiliary verb etre, to be, § 28. 5. (2.) — u Obeit, obeys, is obedient ; followed by the indirect object or dative in French. It is the pres. indie, 3d pers. sing., of obtir, to obey ; a regular verb of the 2d conjugation, § 29. 2. § 3.— * Donnez-moi, give me, § 24. 1. N. 1; § 83, Ex. 6. — 2 J'ai, I have; pres. indie, 1st pers. sing., of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have, § 28.5. (1.) — sp ro . du.it, produces ; pres. indie, 3d pers. sing., of the irregular verb produire, to pro- duce, § 36- — 4 Us boivent, they drink ; pres. indie, 3d pers. pi., of the irregular verb boire, to drink, § 36. — 5 H reeevait, he received; past prog, indie, 3d pers. sing., of recevoir, to receive; a regular verb of the 3d conjugation, § 29. 3. — 6 J'aurai, I shall have; fut. indie, 3d pers. sing., of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have, § 28. 5. 1. — 1 Tu may be used for vous, but only in speaking to inferiors, to children, or intimate friends.— 8 Tu as, thou hast; pres. indie, 2d pers. sing., of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have, § 28. 5. (1.)— QEleveras, thou shalt build; fut. (275) 276 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [10-13.] in. Tic, 2d pers. sing., of elever, to build, to raise ; a regular verb of the 1st conjuga- tion, § 29. 1. — 10 Hs apprennent, they learn; pres. indie, 3d pers. pi., of the irregular verb apprendre, to learn, § 36. — n § 63. I. — 12 I1 y a, there are, § 28. 5. p.) — is Coramettaient, committed; past prog., 3d pers. pi., of the irregular verb commettre, to commit : see Mettre, § 36. — 14 J'avais, 1 had ; past prog, indie, 1st pers. sing., of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have, § 28. 5, (1.)— i5 II a, he has ; pres. indie, 3d pers. sing., of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have, § 28. 5. (1.) — is See § 2. 1 — i: Font, make ; pres. indie, 3d pers. pi., of the irregular verb faire, to make, § 36. — isPrefere, prefers; pres. indie, 3d pers. sing., of prefcrer, to prefer; a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. 1. — § *±. — i The article is used in these cases in French, but not in English, § 5D. (6.) — 2 A = according to. — 3 This phrase and many others introduced by A = according to, may be rendered into English by an adverb in ly ; thus, A la bontct kindly, bountifully ; A la prudence, prudently; A la clemence, mercifully. § 3. — i § 77. 1. N. 1. — 2 § 77. 3. (3.) — a § 77. 1. N. IS. - * See § 2." — s § 77. 4. — 6 TThen an adjective ends in a consonant preceded by an unaccented e, this e reg- ularly becomes e after the addition of e (mute) to form the feminine ; thus, complet, complete; amer, amere. — 7 § 77. 2. — 8 Sombre, ou triste, the former being used in the sense of gloomy, despondent, the latter, sad. — 9 Un bon enfant = a good fellow, a fine fellow. — 10 Sec § 2. li § O.— 1§24.2, §77. 2. — 2 See § 2.13 — 3 § 24. 4.— 4 See § 3.1 — 5 See §3.2. § T'.— iSee §2.« — 2 §16. N. — 3 § 24. 5. — ±§24. 3. — 5 The ne is not trans- lated, §125.2. — 6 Croyais, thought, believed; past prog, indie, 1st pers. sing., of the irregular verb croire, to believe, § 36. — 7 M', me, the indirect object of the verb a donne, § 24. 2?. 1, § 83. — 8 A donne, gave, has given; pres. perf. indie, 3d pers. sing., of donner, to give, a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. 1, §121. II. 1. — 9 Demandais, asked for, demanded; past prog, indie, 1st pers. sing., of demander, to demand ; a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. 1. — i°La tienne may be used for la voire, but is usually addressed to children, inferi- ors, or intimate friends. — nVoit, sees; pres. indie, 3d pers. sing., of the irreg- ular verb voir, to see, § 36.— 12 Plus de monde, more people.— is § 91. (2.) — 14 § 24. 2.2s". — i 5 De laville = in town. — i°Des homines, of men, among men, § 59. (a.)— 17 § 24. 4.— is]NJ"ous avons, we have; pres. indie, 1st pers. pi., of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have, § 28. 1 . — " J'ai perdu, I have lost, or, I lost ; pres. perf. indie, 1st pers. sing., of perdre, to lose, a regular verb of the 4th conjugation, § 29. 4, § 121. II. 1. —20 Pire, ou plus mauvais, § 19. R. 2. § S. — 1 Pres. indie, 1st pers. sing., of parler, to speak, a regular verb of the 1st conjugation § 29. l. — 2 § 91. (2.)— 3 Pres. indie, 3d pers. sing., of the irreg- [10-17.] NOTES TO GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. 277 ular verb lire, to read, §36. — 4 Pres. indie, 3d pers. pi., of danser, to dance, a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. I. — 5 Indirect object, § 24. N. 1, § 83 — e§ 91. (3.) — ' § 24. 1. N. 3. — s Direct object, § 83.— 9 Pres. indie, 3d pers. pi., of aimer, to love, a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. 1. — 10 Pres. indie, 2d pers. pi., of the irregular verb connaitre, to know, § 36. — n § 85. — 12 Pres. indie, 1st pers. pi., of respecter, to respect, a regular verb of the 1st conjugation, § 29. L— « § 83. Ex. 3. — i* § 94, and R. — is § 24. 2. N. § O. — i Que j'aie, that I may have, let me have. — 2 Qu'il ait, that he may- have, let him have, § 28. 5. (1.) 1ST. — 3 Cabinet de toilette, dressing-room, § 59. Ex. 4.— « Une conduite reguliere, a regular conveyance. § IO. — 1 § 57- Ex.4. — sCredule is singular when vous refers to but one person, § 99. 3. N. — 3 The adjective would be singular if nous referred to but one person, § 99. 3. X. — *§ 7. 4. — 5 § 20. is. — G The adjective would be singular if vous referred to but one person, § 99. 3. N. — ' See § 3. 7 § XX. —1 § 35. 1. — 2 § 121. I. 3. X.— 3 Imprimerions ; said by the printer ; if an author were speaking he would say, ferions imprimer, § 100. — 4 The use of the 1st and 2d persons of both numbers of the imperfect subjunctive of the 1st conjugation is generally avoided for the sake of euphony. — »Ce m^chant may be used alone, homme being understood. — c See § 3. 7 — " § 119. — 8 Ce livre, this or that book; unless some contrast be intended ; then, ce livre-ci = this book ; ce livre-la = that book. — 9 Adjectives ending in e (mute) are especially euphonious when placed be- fore nouns beginning with a vowel sound, the e in such cases producing a slight hiatus in reading, while in conversation it is entirely ®mitted. — 10 § 68. § IS 1 Maison de campagne, country-seat, § 59. Ex. 4. — 2See § 3. 7 — 3De =for. — 4 § 59. (&.)— 5 § 7. 4. — 6De = with. — 7Compatir a, to compas- sionate. § X3. — 1 § 28. 4. — 2 Devoir, to owe, is a regular verb of the 3d conjugation, except that the past participle dti takes the circumflex accent to distinguish it from the article du. The past participle cru, of the verb croitre, to grow, presents the only other similar instance of a circumflexed u in the past participle ; and this is done to distinguish it from the past participle cru, of the verb croire, to believe — 3 § 7. 6. — 4 § 77. 1. N. 18. — 5 De = from. — « De, the genitive of the partitive arti- cle after a word of quantity, § 63. 1. — 7 Sous peu de jours, under a few days = in a few days. — 8 See § 3 7 — 9 De = for. — 10 Jusqu'ou, to where = how far.— 11 § 83. —12 § 35. 3. — is De si loin, from so far. — m § 125. 2. — is § 124. — 1G § 51. . — 17 § 137. 3. _ 18 a, at. — 19 Du. accusative of the partitive article, § 7 ■ 4. — 20 Ou- vrage, a literary work; a work of art ; ceuvre, any labor, — 21 See § ll, 9 — 22 § 11. 4. — 23 §68. 24 278 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [IS-:!.] § 14. — i Pretendre a, to lay claim to. — 2 § 59. (6.) — 3 Sur-le-champ, upon the field = at once ; immediately. — * § 24. N. 2. — 5 See § 13.6 — 6 § 59. Ex. 4. — 7 Vendaient, §121. I. 2 — s Tout le monde, all the world = everybody.— s§ 57. Ex. 2. »§ 77. 1. N. 14. — u Au = at the. — 12 L'une avec Pautre, with one another, § 24. 9. B. (7.)— m Parents, relatives, or parents. In the singular never use parent for parent, but monpere, ma mere; in the plural, mespere et mere is sometimes used; but mon pere et ma mere, or parents, should be preferred.— m See § 3 J — is A = in, or on. — » Bendre justice a, to treat justly, § 59. Ex. 5. _it See § 12.i _ is p e u de mots, few words, § 63. 1. — 19 § 59. (6.) § 1£>. —1 From aller. — 2 Tous les jours, every day, § 75. — 3 § 131.— 4 § 83. -5-Aller chercher = to go for, § 139. - c § 133. X. 2.-* From renvoyer . see enroijer.-si U5.-» From renvoyer, § 34. 1. N. 1. — 10 §12. 4. — " From envoyer, § 35. 2.-12 See § 13>— « See § 14.is-h See § U.*— « § 133. N. 1.— » § 24. 1. N. 3. —17 Femme de cliambre = chambermaid, § 59. Ex.4. — is A la promenade = to walk; for a walk. — i° From acquerir. — 20 From cueillir. — 21 § 33. 1, §125- — 22 From vetfr. — 23 From conquerir. — 21 From /w. — 25 § 59. ( a .) — 26 From ac- cueillir -. see cueillir. — 2 7_A. V ee bonte, kindly; with kindness, §59. Ex. 4. — 28 From encourir : see courir, § 34. 1. N. 1. — 29 See § I4.1 3 — so From requdrir. — si From recueillir -. see cueillir. — 32 From cueillir. — 33 From accourir .• see courir. — 34 From secourir : see courir. — 35 From vetir. — 36 From discourir : see courir. — 37 From parcourir .• see courir. — 38 From tressaillir : see saillir. — 39 § 7. 4. — 40 From louillir. — ^ § 5. (ft.) R. 2. — & § 77- 1. N. 6. § 16. — 1 § 59. Ex. 4. —2 From assaillir .• see saitlir. — s § 133. N. 4. — *De joie, for joy. — 5 From mourir. — 6 A la mode = fashionably. — 7 § 59. (&.) — 8 §11. 3. Ex. — 9 From concourir .- see courir.— 10 § 33. 3.— u § 7- 4. — 12 §59. (a.) — 13 From consentir: see sentir. — i 4 §ll. 3. — is From endormir .- see dormir. — 16 From sortir. — *' From consentir .• see sentir. — 1 8 From dementir .• see mentir. — i 9 §ll. Ex. 2. — 20 From pressen tir .• see sentir. — 21 From ressentir .- see sentir. — 22 §11. Ex.1. — 23See §14. 3 — 24Marche = bargain. — 25§7.6. — 26§ 83.— 27§ 7.6, §63. I. — 23§59. (d.j— 29Aussitot que, as soon as. — so § 28. 4. — 3 i § 99. 3.— S2 § 86. — s 3 !N"e is not translated here, § 125. 2. § XT'. — 1 From dementir: see mentir. — 2 Pi us tot, sooner. — 3 See§16. 33 — * § 59. («.) — 5 Avant que, before. — « §51.-7 From /aire. — s S'il fait beau temps, if it is fine weather, § 139. — 9 From croire. — 1° See § 3. 7. — n From vouloir, § 34. 1. N. 1, § 121. II. 4. X. — 12 From offrir. — is From enW ouvrir -. see ouvrir. — " D'argent, with silver, § 7- 5. — w § 121. III. 1. — w § 99 . 2. — w § 83- — " De confusion, Avith confusion, § 7. 5. — 1 9 § 59. Ex. 4. — 20 § 63. 1. — 21 From rouvrir s see ouvrir. — 22 Se plaindre, complaining, §§ 102, 103. — 23 Trop peu, too little, -2i § 68.-25 § 11, 4,_26 De = for. — 27 Les = their, § 57. Ex. « [22-29.] NOTES TO GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. 279 § IS. — i From tanir. — z From appartenir .• see tenir. — sFrom revenir .• see venir. — 4 § 7 . 4. — 5 Jusqu'au, until the. — 6 Venir (inf.), § 139.— 7 Tous les quinze jours, every fortnight (lit., every fifteen days), § 75. — 8 § 7. 6. — s II avait tort, he was (lit., had) wrong, § 139. — 10 Disconvenir de, to deny, to disown.— n Ce que, what, § 24. 8. N. 5. — 12 § 34. 1. N. 2. — is § 59. (a.) — M § 59. Ex. 4. — » See § 3. 7 — 16 Parti = cause. — " § 57- Ex. 4. — is A la maison, home, §133. N. 2. — "See § 13.7 _ 20 § 19. k. 1. _ 21 § 24. 3. — 22 § 15. § 19. — iFrom entrevoir t see voir. — 2 §63. R. — 3 Dans = upon. — 4 From preooir: see voir. — 5 From surseoir. — G § 40. — T § 120. 2. — s From s'asseoir .- see asseoir. — » § 31. R. 1. — 10 § 128. 2. — u § 125. 4. — 12 A = in. — iiDe = for.— H From equivaloir .• see valoir. — is See § 3. 7 — 1° From savoir, § 34. 2. N. 2. — i"Le druer, dinner. —is From mouvoir. — w §§ 31. 28. 2. — 20 § 99. 2.— 21 H me le re- vaudra, he will repay me for it (lit., he will repay it to me), § 84. — 2 - De = with. —23 § 115. — 24 § 24. 9. A. (3.) N. — 25 From se rasseoin see asseoir. — 2s § 121. II, 4 N.— 27 § 121. III. 1. — 28 § 24. 3. N. — 29§ 125. 2. — so § 120. 1. § SO. — 1 § 63. I. — 3 From extraire. .• see traire. — 3 From redefaire .- see /aire. — 4 Pour rien, for anything, § 125. 1.— 5 §33. 4. — <* Autant que, as much as ._7§u. 3. Ex. — 8Le voyage de Paris = the journey to Paris. — Sou- straire a, to save from, to screen from. — io§59. (a.) — u § 63.1. — K§H. 4.-^ 1 3 § 99. 4. — 14 En tout = in all (respects). § SI.— 1§119.— 2§118. — 3 102. — 4§24. S. N. 5. — 5§31. R. 1. — e§24.4. — 7 § 59. Ex. 4. — s En tout temps = at all times. § SS. — 1 § 35. 6. — 2 § 125. l.- 3 De = upon. — 4 § 129. — 5 § 59. (b.) — •§120. 1. — 7§24. 1. N.3. — 8§24. 9. B. (6.) — o§63. I. — io§120. 2, §122. 2. — 11 § 24. 2. N. — 12 § 12. 3. — 13 § 139. — 14 § 90, and IT. 1. — « § 59. Ex. 4. — 10 § 121. III. 1. — 17 §75. — is §7. 6. § S3.— iDe bon cceur = heartily . — 2 § 63. I.— 8 §11. Ex. 2.— *§24. 9. B. 1, §125. 1. — 5 § 7. 4. — 6A = in. — 7§ 59. (a.) — 8 A la glace = iced (drinks). — » § 125. l. — 1° § 121. III. 1. — 11 § 51. — 12 § 20. N. — is § 137. 3. — u Avoir tort, to be wrong, § 139. § S4. — 1 L'entre*e de = admission to. — 2 § 121. III. 1. — s § 125. 2. — 4 Tout ce qu', all that which = every thing which, §24. 8. N. 5. — 5 §7. 4. — 6 De = to.— 7§ 11. 4.-8 § 34. 2. — 9 De nouveau = anew. — 10 Dans = within. — li §59. (&.) — 12 §7. 7. — is §59. (a.) — i 4 De = from. — i5De = in. — is§125. 1.— 17 § 24. 8. N. 5. — 18 § 121. III. 1. — is § 40. — 20 § 99. 3. N. § S5. —1 See § 24.i 4 — 2 See § 24. 4 — 3 § 7. 6. — * § 59. (c.) — 5 Au moins = at least. — 6§n. 4. — 7L a jeunesse, youth, the young. — 8 §59. (a.)— "En = into. — 10 § 37. Voc, Ex. XVI. 280 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [29-37.] § SO.— 1§ 116. — 2 §11. 3. Ex. — s§ 57. Ex. 2.— 4§ 103. — 5 § 11. 1. Ex. 1. — e §63. 1. § ST.-iSe plaindre de = to complain of.— 2§See 26. 3 — 3 A neuf= anew. — 4 § 119. — 5 § 24. 3. jST. — ° Feindre d'etre = to pretend to be. Whether de, a, or no preposition is used in such cases, must be learned by practice and obser- vation. — 7 § 35. 5. — 3 § 24. 5. — o § 133. N. 2. — io Changer de, § 139. N. § S8. — i § 99. 3. — 2 § 124. - s § 28. 4. — * § 131.-5 § 11. 3. Ex. -6 § 16. N. — 7§24. 9. B. (5.) — s §12. 4. — 9§11. l.Ex. 2. — io§28. 3. — "App. §1. Ex. 2.— 12 § 139. connaitre.— is § 59. (&.) — M § 24. 2. JJ. § SO. - 1 § 102. - 2 § 75. - s § 139. - 4 S'applaudir de, to glory in. - 6§ 121. III. 1. the protasis being implied. — o§ 24. 7. (2.) — *§ 31. R. 1.— 8 120. 2. — 9 § 59. (&.) — io § 116. — n § 7. 4. — 12 JsTous-memes is added here for emphasis, as the reflexive se is used in Latin when the intensive ipse has already been used as the subject, § 24. 1. N. 2. — is § 40. — " § 24. 4. — u § 11. 3. Ex. — m § 103.— " § 59. Ex. 4. — is § 117. — I 9 § 35. 3. — 20 « Instead of using- Pun Vautre, les uns les autres, the French often prefix the word entre (between) to the reciprocal verb, with a hyphen, and sometimes without; or with an apostrophe when the word begins with a vowel." Pujol,. — 21 p e s j bonne heure = at so early an hour ; so early. — 22 g Q meler de, to intermeddle with. § 30.— 1§ 99. 4.— 2 §85.— 3 §57. Ex. 2. — 4 §11. 3. _ 5§ m. _ 6§ 124. Ex. 2. — 7 § 117. — s § 99. 3. N. —o § 59. (5.) § 31.— 1§139. — 2§125. — 3§83. — 4§35. 8. — 5 § 68. — " § 99. 4. — 7 § 15. Ex. 2. — 8 § 11. Ex. 2. — o§ S3. Ex. G; the imperative being negative, follow § 83. — 10 §63. 1. — 11 See §27. G § 3S. —1 § 38. — 2 § 83. Ex. 6. — s § 124. — * § 59. (a.) — sPassiones pour, passionately fond of. — o§59« (&.) — 7 § 36. N.— 8 A eontre-cceur, reluctantly ; unwillingly. — s> § 86. — i0 § 40. — n § 24. 4. — 12 § 99. 3. — is § 24. 5. § 33.— 1§57.- 2 §59. (&.) — s§50. (a.) — 4 §24. 7. (2.)-5§15. Ex. 1.- 6 § 128. 2. — 7 § 22. R. 2. — 8 § 124. — 9 § 98. 7. N. 1 ; ce is used for il, to give more energy to the sentence, and to avoid ambiguity. — i° § 57. Ex. 4. — n § 58. — 12 §59. (i.) — 13 §7. 3.— I* §59. Ex. 5. — i&App. §1. Ex. 2. — 10 §22. 2. — "§7. i. — is §59. Ex. 1. — 19 §130. R. 2. — 20 §57. Ex. 1. — 21 A system of weights and measures founded upon the decimal system of notation, called the Metric System (Systeme Metrique), was adopted in France in 1795, and has since been adopted in many other countries. This system having been introduced into the United States [36, 37.] NOTES TO GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. 281 by a vote of Congress during- the session of 1866, the following tables are added here for convenient reference : — TABLE OF WEIGHT. The gramme is the weight of a cubic centimetre of distilled water at the tem- perature of melting ice. The gramme equals 15.44 Troy grains. 10 Milligrammes = 1 Centigramme. 10 Centigrammes = 1 Decigramme. 10 Decigrammes = 1 Gramme. 10 Grammes = 1 Decagramme. 10 Decagrammes = 1 Hectogramme. 10 Hectogrammes = 1 Kilogramme. 10 Kilogrammes = 1 Myriagramme. Note. Merchandise is generally bought and sold by the kilogramme. The kilogramme equals about 2 1-5 pounds, Avoirdupois. TABLE OF LENGTH. The metre is the ten-millionth part of the quadrant extending through Paris from the equator to the pole. It equals 39.3708 inches, or 3.2809 feet. 10 Millimetres 10 Centimetres 10 Decimetres 10 Metres 10 Decametres 10 Hectometres 10 Kilometres 1 Centimetre. 1" Decimetre. 1 Metre. 1 Decametre. 1 Hectometre. 1 Kilometre. 1 Myriametre. TABLE OF SURFACE. The are is a square decametre. The are equals 119.6033 square yards, or 0.0247 acre. 10 Milliares 10 Centiares 10 Declares 10 Ares 10 Decares 10 Hectares 10 Kilares 1 Centiare. 1 Declare. 1 Are. 1 Decare. 1 Hectare, 1 Kilare. 1 Myriare. TABLE OF VOLUME. The stere is a cubic metre. The stere equals 35.3166 cubic feet. 10 Millisteres 10 Centisteres 10 Decisteres 10 Steres 10 Decasteres 10 Hectosteres 10 Kilosteres 1 Centistere. 1 Deei stere. 1 Stere. 1 Decastere. 1 Hectostere. 1 Kilostere. 1 Myriastere. . TABLE OF CAPACITY. The litre equals 2.1135 pints wine measure, or 1.81626 pints dry measure. It is a cubic decimetre = 61.027 cubic inches. It is used for dry and liquid measures. 10 Millilitres 10 Centilitres 10 Decilitres 10 Litres 10 Decalitres 10 Hectolitres 10 Kilolitres 1 Centilitre. 1 Decilitre. 1 Litre. 1 Decalitre. 1 Hectolitre. 1 Kilolitre. 1 Myrialitre. Our Table of Money, being already upon the decimal system, requires no change. The following is the new French Table: — TABLE OF MONEY. The French gold coin is the twenty- franc piece, or louis. The silver coins are the franc and demi-franc. 10 Centimes = 1 Decime. 10 Decime s = 1 Franc = $0,186. Note. Circular Measure and Meas- ures of Time are the same aa those of the United States. § 34.- ^§59. (6.) — 2§7- 6. — 3 §18. 2.— 4§12. 3.— 5Dont = with which, § 24. 7. (2.)— «§59. (a.)— T § 20. 1. — 8 § 63. — °§ 63.1. Ex. and N. JDes, in this construction, is usually considered the genitive of the definite article. It is, how- ever, more correct to regard it as the nominative or accusative of the partitive arti- 24* 282 FRENCH GRAMMAR. £37-43.] cle ; and Men as used adverbially. In the case under consideration, the phrase. Men des malhezirs, is to be considered as a compound noun, preceded by the parti- tive article de. — 10 § 7. 2. — u § 118. — 12 § 59. Ex. 1. — is § 59. Ex. 2. — " § 59. (d.) —is § 99. 3. — is § 16. N. — " § 24. 9. B. (7) ; § 24. 1. N. 3.— is § 40. — » § 15. Ex. 2— 20 §28. (3.) — 21 §99. 2. § 35.-i§ 7- 4.-2 § 59. (a.)- 3 § 86, and N. — 4 § 68.-5 § 59. (d.)_6 § 15. Ex. 2. — 7§ 99.2.-s§ 134. — 9§7.0. — ioValoirmieux,§139.— nVoici.voila, § 139. — 12 § 15. Ex. 3. — 13 § 59. (6.)— 14 § 18. 2.— i5En proportion de ce qu' = in proportion as. — is § 125. 4. § 30. — 1§59. (&.) — 2 §98. 7. N. 1. (4.) — 3§ 64. — 4 §103. — s §59. (a.) — 6 § 86, and N. — 7 A la fois, at once. — § § 24. 9. B. (5.) — 9 § 24. 9. A. (6.) R. — io§63. — 11 §60. N. 2. — 12§59. Ex. 4. — w § 76. — 1* § 57. Ex. 4. — is § 19. R. 1 ; § 20. 1. — 16 § 67. — 17 § 57. Ex. 3. — is § 24. 8. (2.) N. 5. (a.) — m § 59. (5.) — 20 §59. (a.) § 3^. - 1 § 21.-2 § 59. Ex. 1. -3 § 63.-1 § 15. Ex. 1.-5 § 59. (d.)—e § 94. — 7 § 59. ( tt .) _ s § 24. 9. A. (6.) — 9 § 58. — 10 Faire tort a, § 139. — » § 28. (3.) — 12 § 24. 8. (2.) N. 5. — is § 59. Ex. i. — u § 63. I. — w § 103. — m § 59. (6.) — " § 24. 1. (4.) — is § 7. 5. — 19 § 7. 4. — 20 § 99. 3. — 21 § 99. 2. — 22 § 125. 4. — 23 § 128. 2. — 2i § 57. Ex. 4. — 25 Etre, being. — so § 115. § 38. — 1 § 24. 8. (2.) N. 5. (a.) — 2 § 63. 1. — 3 § 59. (a.) — 4 § 15. Ex. 3. — p §117. — c §24. 1. N. 2. — 7 §103. — 8 §9. B. (5.) — 9 § 24. 9. B. (1.)— 10 § 11. Ex. 2. — 11 § 83. — 1- § 103. — 13 A des erreurs, to some errors; a bien des erreurs, to many errors. In the latter case des should not be considered the genitive of the definite article : see § 34. 9 § 30. — 1 § 59. (a.) 2 Des, § 7- 2. — 3 § 59. (6.) —4 § 60. N. 2. — s § 19. R. i; §20. 1. — 6§7.4.— 7§28.4. — 8§99.3. — 9§5i._io§82. N. 1. — nEtreenvie, § 139. — 12 § 24. 9. A. 5. N. 1. — 13 § 57. Ex. 4. — u § 87- N. 1. — K § 59. Ex. 4. — 16 § 63. I. — 17 § 24. 9. B. 5. — is § 35. 2. — w § 75. — 20 § 59. Ex. 2. R. — 21 § 63. — 22 § 59. (d.)— 23 Avoir lieu, § 139. — 24 § 99. 4. — 25 § 19. 3, and N. 1. — 26 § 20. 1. § 40.-i§66.-2§59. (a.)-s§16. Ex.-4§59.(&.)-5Valoir mieux, § 139. — 6 § 99. 2. — 7 § 67. — 8 § 59. Ex. 4. — 9 § 15. Ex. 3. — 10 § 36. 2. — n § 38. N. — I 2 § 63. I. — 13 § 24. 1. N. 2. — 14 § 24. 5. — w § 135. — m § 59. (d.~) — n § 7. 6. — ^eg. — I 9 § 67. Ex. — 20 a la ereme. The dative of the definite article is used (§ 59. Ex. 4. R.) before a noun representing something sold, or something contained. — 21 § 59. Ex. 1. — 22 § 86. — 23 § 105. — 24 § 93. 6. (2.) — 25 § 35. i. _ 26 § 35. 1. [43-49.] NOTES TO GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. 2^ J § 41.-i§64. N.— 2§102.N. — 3§74._4 §77< 4. - &§77.%, (1.) -°§ 11, 3. Ex. — 7 § 78. 1. — 8 § 15. Ex. 1. — 9 § 15. — 10 § 59. Ex. 4. — " § 67- Ex. 2. — »§ 99. 3. — is § 94. — " § 83. — is § 125. 1. — ^Nous, from us. — " § 63. — ls § 24. 7. (i.)_ 19 § 77. i. (11.) — 20 § 77. 3. (15.) — 2 iTandis que, whilst. § 4^.— 1§77- 1.— 2 §77.2. — 3§77.i. (ii.)_4§ii5. — s§24. 9. A. (4.)- 6 Sur de vivre, sure of living, § 102. — 7 Jusqu'a, until, § 128. 3. — » § 99. 3. — » § 134. — 1° § 24. 9. B. (6.) N. — n § 24. 1. N. 3. — 12 See § 41.15 — 13 § 63 . L _ u § 15 . Ex. 2. — is §59. Ex. 4. — 10 §67. — "§ 133. N. 2. — is § 86. — « § 78. 3. (1.) — 20 § 15. Ex. 1; § 16. — 21 See §41.5 — 22 § 59. («.) — 23§ 77. 3. (13.) — 24 § 24- 7 (2.) — 25§125. 1.— 26§ll.l.Ex.l.— 27See§41.20— 28§99.4. — 29§63. — 30 §63. I. Ex. andN. — 3i§75.— 32 En, with them, § 86. — ^ § 63 ; § 7- 6. § 43.-i§63. I. Ex. and N.-2§78. 3. (2.); §102.-3§78. 2. - * Se mettre en colere, to get in a passion. — 5 § 7. 4.— e§ 24. 9. B. (6.) N.— 7 Tout le monde, § 139, monde. — 8 Personne (fem.), a person; (mas.) no on6j nobody. — 9 § 120. 4. — 10 § 121. III. 1. — 11 § 67- Ex. — 12 § 77. 3. (10.) — 13 § 59. Ex. 4. — H § 22. R. 3. — is De chaque cote, on each side.— 1«§ 24. 9. A. R. — "§24. *. (3.) —is §112. § 44.— 1§18.1. — 2§59.(o.) — 3§77. 1.- 4 §24.9.B.(6.)— 5 §120.5.— 6§18. 1. N. ; § 40.— 7 § 98. 7. N. l.— 8 C'est faute de soin et de culture, it is for want of care and culture.— 9 § 19. 1.— ">§ 19. N. 1. — " § 137- 3.— 12 § 125. 1. — w§ 78. 2. — 1*§59. (6.) — is§35. C — ie§59. Ex. 2. R. — "§112. N. 2. — w§ 18. 2. — "De toute la tete, a whole head. — 20 §91. (2.) — 21 §19. N. 2. — 22 §57. Ex. 5.— 23§ 24. 5.— 24§ 60. N. 2.— 25§ 59. Ex. 4. § 43.— 1§78. 2. — 2§63. — 3§40. — 1§125.2. — 5§7.6.N. — 6§121.III.2; the protasis, as in Latin, and very often in French and English, being omitted. — 7§59. (a.) — 8§103. — »§135. — io§125. 1. — "§59. Ex. 5. — 12 § 62. N.— i»§ 63; genitive of the partitive article. — i* Avoir besoin de, §139. — 15§63. I. — 16 §63. R. — "§15. Ex.3. § 40. — 1 § 120. 4. —2 § 124. — 3 § 99. 3. — 4 § 64. N. — s § 102. — « Porter, § 139. — 7 § 112. N. 1. — 8 De tour, in circumference. — 9 Du monde, in the world. —10 This use ofde after the copula before an infinitive may be explained by supplying the subject as predicate nominative ; thus in this case est d'etre civil — est la qualiti d'etre civil. — "§35.1. — i2 § 76.— 13 Tout a la fois = altogether.— 1* § 63. 1 ; genre, sorte, variete, &c, being construed as words of quantity. — 1 5 § 15. Ex. 1. — is § 24. 7. (1.)— 17 § 59. (e.)— is § 121. II. 1.— 19 § 64. N.— 20Soit qu'il paraisse, whether it appear, § 120. 5.— 21 § 99. 2. — 22 § 78. 2. § 4 ! 7 / . — 1 § 11. Ex. 2. — 2 § 77. 4. — 3 § 59. (d.) — 4 § 112. - s § 22. R. 3. - « § 24. 4. — " § 62. N. — 8 § 63. 1. — 9 § 11. Ex. 2. — 10 § 124. — " § 96. —12 § 103. — 284 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [49-54.] is La Pharsale, The Pharsalia; a poem of Lucan. — i4§ 125. 4. — i3§ 87. N. 1.— i 6 Plus tot = sooner; plutot = rather. — 17 § 59. Ex. 5. — is Avoir pitie de, to pity. _i9 §24. 5.— 20 §115.—2i §115. N.I. — 22 En dedans de, within, §128. 2.— 23 §102. — 24 §119. § 4iS.— 1§57. Ex. 2. — 2§24. 1. (3.) — 3 §102. — * §18. N. — s§ 91. (2.) — e§ 39.-" § 91. (3.) — s§ 28. 4. — 9§ 99. 3. — 10 § 91. (2.) and (4.) — n§ 83. — 12 § 91. N- — *»§ 83. Ex. 5. — 14 § 125. 1. — 15 § 24. 1. N. 1. — 10 § 91. (4.)—" § 116. —"§ 124. — 10 Se garder de,to take heed notto. — 2o§ 121. l,the condition being- implied.— 21 § 115.— 22Dumal,evil.— 23§ 24. 9. B. (4.) — 24 § 137. 3.— 25 §125.- 2c En outre, besides. — 27 Du bien, good; du, the accusative of the partitive article. — 28 § 139, note on savoir grc. — 29 d u bien, for the good; du, the genitive of the definite article.— so § 83. Ex. 3. — si A l'avenir, in future. § 49.- 1§83. Ex. 5. — 2 §83. Ex. 2.-3 §125. 1.— *§ 103. — &§ 24. 5.— 6 §59. (&.) — 7 §§106, 115. — 8 See §48.25 — 9 §78. i._io§63. I. Source being constructed as a word of quantity. — u C'est, for est, is a mere emphatic form; une grande source being equivalent to ce qui est une grande source, § 90. N. 3. — 12 § 102. — 1 3 § 99. 4. — i4Puissent ces enfants etre, may those children be. — 15 Ce qui, nominative, becomes ce que, ce qu? when used as predicate nomina- tive, —is § 91. 2. § 24. 1. N. 2. — 17 § 83. Ex. 6. — is § 63. I. Trente ans being con- strued as a " word of quantity." — i & § 129. — 20 Etre facne contre, to be angry with; etrefdcM de, to be sorry for. — 21 § 28. 2.-22 See § 48.27 _23 En bien, in a favorable point of view; favorably, § 59. Ex. 4. — 24 § (33. I. Ex. and N. — 25 § 98. 7. N. l.~20§7. 6; §24. l.N. 3. — 27 §75.— 28 §124. § £50.— 1§63; §7.6.— 2 §83. Ex. 0; § 84. — s§ 67. Ex.— *§ 86. N — 5 §86. —e § 12. 4. — 7 § 62. N. — 8 § 98. 7. N. 1. — » § 78. 2. — 10 § 102. — n § 35. 6. -^ § 121. III. 1. — is § 137. 3. — " § 111. — 15 § 95, and N. — w § 67. — 17 § 35. 1. -* w § 99. 4. -13 §59. (c.) § ^>1. — 1 Du tout, at all. — 2 § 83. Ex. 6. — 3 Vous le pouvez, you can (do) so, § 95.-4 § 121. II. 4. N. — 5 § 120. 3.— g § 63. - 7 § 83. Ex. 6.-8 § 117.— 9 Sur- le-champ, upon the spot, immediately . — 10 § 121. III. 2.— u § 99. 4._ 12 § 99. 2 . — 13 § 95. — 1 4 § 139, quitter and laisser. — i5 § 98. 7. — w § 139, connaitre and savoir.— 17§125.4. — 1 8 §84.— 1 9 §121.1.3.— 20§84.Ex.— 2i§78.3.(l.)-22§99.5. § £>S. - 1 § 110. - 2 § 24. 9. A. (5.) N. 1. - 3 § 78. 3. (1.) - 4 § 121. I. 3. N— e§84.— G §99. 4.— 1 §125. 1. — 8 §24. 5.— 9 De la part de, on the part of.— w Pien de juste, nothing just, § 63. R. ; rien que de juste, nothing but what is just. — "II ne fautpas de presents, no presents are necessary, § 106. — i2 § 63; § 7. 7. _ 13 § 34. 2 ; §28.5.(1.) Note on the imperative. — 1« § 135. — 1 5 § 34. 1. N. 2. — i" § 124. - 17 § 102. — is § 59. Ex. 4, par degres = gradually. — 1 9 § 90. N. 1 (3.) [55-61.J NOTES TO GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. 285 — 20 Jusqu'a ce qu', until. — 21 Jl may be omitted, § 90. N. 1. (4.) — 22 Fen de temps, a short time, § 63. 1. — 23 Pour ne pas parler, not to speak. — 2 * Du mal, harm ; du being the accusative of the partitive article. — 25 § 59. ( d. ) — 26 Lui, from him. — 27 See §49. 15 — 28§63. R.— 29 C' est pourquoi, therefore. — 3o§ 83. Ex. 6. § S3. — 1§90.— 2 §24. 1(4.) — 3§83. Ex. 5. — 4H n'est pas d', it is not characteristic of. — 5 § 78. 2, the previous expression being equivalent to il est, im- personal, with a predicate adjective. — § 59. (a.) — 7 §59. Ex. 4.-8 §119. — § 125. 2. —10 § 95. — u § 115. N. 1. — 12 § 63 ; des, the accusative of the partitive arti- cle.— is § 24. l.N. 2.— 14 § 77. 1. — 15 §§ 84, 93. — w § 24. 9. B. (6.) N.— n§ 59. (6.) —i 8 De lui-meme, of itself. — 10 § 120. 5, and N. —^ § 135. —21 § 86.-22 § 125. 1 ; § 63.-23 § 100. — 24 § 99. 4.-25 § 7. g. N.— 23 § 120. 4 ; § 125. 3.— ar § 63. R. § 54. — 1 See § 53.5—2 § x21. II. 4. N. — 3 § 137. 3. — 4 § 121. III. 1. — 5 § 59. Ex. 4.— 6 §84.— ^ § 34. 1. N. 1. — 8§ 24. 1. N. 1. — § 125. 4. — 10 §59. Ex. 5.— H § 24. 2. — 12 § 91. 4. — 13 § 98. 1. — 14 Lui, repeated for emphasis, in apposition with lui. — is § 24.2. N. § 55. — 1§ 28. 4.-2 § 99.3. — 3 § 94. R. — 4 The singular is generally used in addressing a member of the family. — 5 § 60. — 6 § 133. N. 2. — 7 § 59. Ex. 1. — » § 28. 4. —9 § 121. I. 3. — 10 § 98. 7. N. 1. — «• § 91. (1.) — i2 § 57. Ex. 2. — w § 69. — 14 § 91. 2. — is § 139, connaitre and savoir. — is § 124. — " § 93. § 50.— 1 La = it's. — 2 §78, 2. — 3 §86.— 4 §121. III. 1. The condition, as very frequently, being not expressed, but implied. — 5 En pareil cas, in such a case. —e § 24. 3. — 1 Est-ce la ? is that ?— s § m. n.— 9 § 83. Ex. 1. — 10 § 139, connai- tre and savoir. — « § 24. 9. A. 5. N. 3. — 12 § 57- Ex. 4. — is § 116. — " § 83. Ex. 6. — 1 5 § 63. I. — 10 § 125. G. — 17 § 120. 5. § 57. — 1 § 121. II. 4. N. — 2 § 99. 3. — s Par rapport a, in reference to. — * § 94. — 5 § 93. — 6 § 59. Ex. 5. — 1 § 139, note on changer de.s § 125. 6.-9 § 24. 4. - m § 99. 4. — 11 § 24. 0. — 12 § 125. 1. — » § 24. 8. N. 5. — " § 90. N. 3. — * Telle qu'elle existait, such as existed. — is Ce que, the que being predicate nominative; hence ce que for ce qui. — 17 Au dehors, without ; on the outside. — is Au dedans, within; on the inside. § 5S.— 1 §24. 5.-2 §95. — 3 §92. — 4 §28.8. N. 3. — 5 §125. 1. — 6 §86. N. -'§15. Ex. 1. — 8§119. — 9 §128.2. — io§24.8.N.5. («.)— n§59.(a.) — 12§82. N. l. — 13 §§40, 20. (1.) § 50 . — 1 § 77. 1. (24.) — 2 § 59. Ex. 4. — 3 § 63. Ex. and N. — 4 § 63, des, the nom.pl. of the partitive article. — 5 § 59. Ex. 5. — 6 § 121. III. 1. — 7 § 24. 7. (2.) — » § 36. N. Table I. — ° § 24. 9. B. (5.) — 10 § 24. 7. (1.) — U § 103. — 12 § 68. — i 3 § 24. 8.B.(6.)N. 286 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [49-54.] § OOo-i§109.-2§24.7.(3.) 3 -§125.4.-4§63.I.-5§24.7.(2.)- 6 §107. — 7 § 59. Ex. 2. — 8 § 106. — 9 § 103. — i° § 99. 4.-n§ 59. (a.) — 12 § 59. Ex. 4. — 13 §§ 40. 20. 1. — u § 90. N. 3; the previous expression being equivalent to a sen- tence introduced by ce qui, ce being nominative, and qui dative. — 1 5 § 83. — 16 § 57. Ex. 2. — w Avec de la, like a de la, the dative of the partitive article, but usually called accusative, § 128. N. — 18 § 100. — 19 § 128. 2. § 6I.-1 §24. 8 . (l.) — 3 §125. 3.-3§24. 8. N. 5. (a.) — *§ 67.- 5 § 120. 4. — 6 § 24. 8. N. 3. — " § 121. III. 1. — 8 139. Valoir and etre riche. — 9 § 24. 8. N. 4. — 10 Que, this is the regular form for the predicate nominative, § 24. 8. (2.) — u § 125. 4. — 12 § 24. 8. (2.) — is Rien, from the Latin rem, is not primarily a neg- ative word, and is here used in its primitive or affirmative sense, the ne being omitted; such a question implies a negative answer. — 1*§ 63. E. — i 5 Personne. This word is here affirmative, the ne being omitted ; and is thus used in a question implying a negative answer. — is § 115. N. 1. — » § 125. — i8 § 71. — i9 § 28. 4.~ 20 § 67. Ex. — 21 § 80. Ex. — 22 § 134. § O^. — 1 § 63. E. — 2 § 137. 3. — 3 § 137. 3. N. 2. — 4 § 121. in. 1. — 5 § 133. N. 2. — s Pour affaire, on business. — 7 § 116. — 8 § 125. 3. — 9 § 120. 5. — 10 § 121. II. 4. N. — 11 § 99. 4. — 12 § 24. 5. — is § 86. — ** § 96. N. 1. — 1 5 § 120. 1. — is § 99. 3. — 17 § 96. — i 8 §35. 1. — X9 De meme que — de meme, in the same manner as — so ; as — so. — 20 § 59. Ex. 5. — 21 § 51. _ 22 § 53 ; § 7. q. _ 23 Mai a pro- pos = inappropriately. — 24 § 24. 9. B. (5.) — 25 § 24. 7. (2.) — 20 § 24. 9. A. (1.) and N. — -" De bien des vices, from many vices ; § 63. Ex. and N. — 28 § 24. 9. A. (2.) — 29 § 106. — 30 § 24. 9. A. (2.) N. — si § 139, s'en aller. — 32 § 131. — ss § 24. 9. A. E. § 03. — 1 § 102. - 2 En ville, in the city; § 59. Ex. 6. — s § 24. 9. A. 5. N. 1. — 4 § 7. 7. — 5 Pour, in favor of. — 6 Le mettre en liberte, setting him at liberty. — 7 § 24. 9. B. (6.) N. - 8 § 75. — 9 § 42. — 10 § 125. 4. — 11 § 120. 5. N. — 12 § 120. 5. — 1 3 § 139, changer de, N. — " § 59. Ex. 4. — * Gens de bien, good people. — 16 §129. E.— 17 Meme = even. — is § 24. 9. A. (0.) — 1 9 § 137. 3. N. 2. § 04. 1 § 24. 9. B. (7.) and N. — 2 § 128. 2. — 3 See 1 and § 24. 1. N. 3. — * § 115. N. 2. — 5 § 94. — e § 119. N. — 7 § 24. 9. B. (2.) — 8 § 59. Ex. 4. — 9 De niveau, even, on a level. — 10 § 24. 9. B. (4.) — " § 98. 5. — 12 § 24. 8. (2.) N. 1. — w § 63 ; § 7. 6. — I* § 98. 3. — 15 § 24. 9. A. (4.) — i 6 § 59. (a.) — 17 § 86. — is Tout a coup, all at once, suddenly. — 1 9 § 86. N. — 20 § 125. 3. — 21 § 120. 4. — 22 § 63. Ex and N. -23 § 125. 1. — 24 § 103 — 25 see § 63." — ™ See § 63.12—27 § 95.-28 § 42.-29 § m. — so § 102. - si La vie, life, § 59. (a.) § O^. — 1 § 98. 1. — 2i pu, the second person singular is used in addressing children, inferiors, and intimate friends or members of one's family. — 3 § 99, 3. j$. [67-74.] NOTES TO GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. 287 — * § 94. — s § 91. (3.) and N. — c § 98. 4. and N. — 7 § 121. III. 1., the protasis, as frequently, being implied. — 8 § 98. 7. N. 1. — » § 91. (1.) — i° § 98. 7.-"§ 59. Ex. 6. — 12 § 128. 2. — 13 § 59. Ex. 5. — w § 117. — 15 Avoir piti<£ de, to pity. — i« § 78. 2. — I? § 119. — is § 115. — 1 9 § 120. 5. § OO. - 1 § 115. — 2 § 63. 1. - 3 § 119, and N. - 4 § 116. - 5 § 117. _ 6 § 110 . _ 7 § 137. 3. N. 2. — s §§117, 119. — o §121. III. 1. — 10 §115. — n§99.3.N.— 12 § 59. Ex. 4. — 13 § 137. 3. — 11 § 102. — i5 § 99. 4. — w § 118. — » § 119. — is D'avoir parle\ for having spoken, § 102. — 1° App. § 2. (3.) N. — 20 Q ue de is thus used before infinitives, which may be rendered into English by the simple infinitive, or by that and the finite verb, accompanied by the auxiliary should ; for example, que d'ccouter, to hear ; that you should hear. — 21 § 73. 2. — 22 See 21 ; U importe being equivalent to il est, impersonal, followed by a predicate adjective. — 2a § 99. 3. — 24 § 63. — 25 § 121. II. 3. — 26 § 86, and 119. — 27 Tout de grossier, everything coarse, § 63. R. § 6-7.-i§ 59. Ex. 4. — 2 § 139, faire tort a, § 119. N. — 3 § 24. 9. B. 7. and N. — * § 118. — 5 Je crois apereevoir, I believe I perceive, or I believe that I perceive. — s§ 102. — 7 § 90. N. 3, the previous clause being equivalent to a clause introduced by ce qui. — 8 En, of it, § 88. — 9 Manquer de, to omit to; manquer a, to fall short in. — 10 § 106. N. — " § 118. — 12 § 113. _ is § 86. N. — I* § 135. — 15 § 78. 2. — 10 § 59. Ex. 5. — 17 § 59. (a.) — i 8 § 134. — i« § 131. — 20 § 111. N. — 21 § 125. 1. — 22 § 7. 6. and 7. N. § O®. — 1 § 99. 1. — 2 § 94.-3 § 59. (d.)_ 4 § 59. Ex. 2.-5 § 99. 3. — e § 99. 2. — 7 §59. Ex. 4. — 8 §99. 4. — 9 §99. 5.- 10 §115. N. 2. — n § 100. - 12 § 7. 6. — 13 § 59. (c.) — 1* A Pordinaire, ordinarily.— « § 106. — 16 § 99. 3. N. — « Que, how many. — 18 § 63. I. — i 9 Re'solu does not change, the preceding qu> being the object of eviter. — 20 § 78. 2.; the previous construction being equivalent to etre, impersonal, and a predicate adjective. — 21 § 22. R. 3. § OO. —1 § 120.4.-2 § 125. 3.— 3§ 137- 3.-4 § 24. 8. N. 5. — 5 § 103.— «§§ 117, 119. — 7 § 120. 5. N.— 8 § 120. 5.-9 § 99.4. — 10 § 120. 1. — « § 59. (6.)— 12 § 63, des, uom. of the partitive article. — 13 § 125. 2. — i* De venir, for coming. — is § 99. 3. — 10 § 100. — 17 § 103. — is § 120. 3. — 13 § 98. 7. N. 1. — 20 § 106. — 21 § 125. C. N. 1. — 22 §120. 2. — 23 §125. 4. § VO. — 1 § 120. 5. — 2 § 120. 2. — 3 § 137. 3. N. 2. — 4 § 122. 1. — 5 § 122. 2. — 6 § 120. 1. — 7 § 99. 3. — s § 121. III. 2. —9 § 120. 2 ; § 122. 2. — 10 § 7. 6. — a § 120. 4. — 12§122.N. 1. — is §137. 3. Ex. — 14 §131. 3.— 15 §125. N.- is §125. 3.-17 De ; genitive of the partitive article, § 7. 4. — is § 120. 5. N. 288 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [74-80.] § 71. — i § 103. — 2 § 99. 2. — 3 § 59. Ex. 4. — 4 The present is here used for the future, as in English. — & § 121. I. 1. — 6 § 121. 1. 2. — '> § 121. 1. 3. — 8 § 121. 1. 3. N. — 9 § 64. N. — io § 112.— H § 86, and N. — 12 § 102.— is Entre, into. — " § 59. Ex. 5. — is § 121. II. 4. N. — is § 59. Ex. 1. — " § 99. 3. N. — « § 121, 1. 4. — *> § 57. Ex. 4. — 20 § 121. III. 2. — 21 § 120. 3. — 22 § HO. — 23 § 137. 3. _ 24 § 121. III. 1. — 25 § 82. N. 1. § 7^.— 1§121. 111. 1. — 2 En = for him. — 3 §125. 4.-4 §86. — «•§ 137. 3. N. 1. — 6 § 121. II. 1. — 7 § 99. 4. — 8 § 125. 6. N. 1. — 9 § 125. 6. N. 2. — 10 § 99. 3. N. — "EL fait beau temps, § 139.— 1 2 121. II. 3.— " § 99. 4.— " § 42.— 1 5 § 59. Ex. 5. — i Q Assez malheureux que de rencontrer, unhappy enough to meet; so un- happy as to meet. — " § 121. 1. 2. — is LRivaler avec, to rival. § 73. — 1 A la hate, hastily.— 2 B,eprocherquelquechoseaquelqu'un, to reproach any one with anything. — 3 § 24. 8. N. 5. — * § 103. — 5 § 59. Ex. 4. — e § 137. 3. — 7 § 125. l. — s § 121. III. 2. — 9 § 124. — 10 En bien, favorably. § 74. — 1 § 24. 8. ( 1.) — 2 § 24. 8. (2.) — s De meme que, in the same man- ner as ; just as. — 4 § 128. 2. — & § 128. 1. — 6 § 125. 1. — » § 133. N. 4. R. — 8 § 118. — 9 § 28. 4. — 10 § 59. Ex. 1. — n § 139. — 12 § 102. — i 3 Jusqu'a, until, § 128. 3.— m De, for. — 15 § 59. Ex. 5. — w § 90. N. 4. — " § 135. — « § 59. Ex. 4. § 75. - 1 § 29. 9. A. 6. R. - 2 § 112. - 3 § 19. N. 2. - * § 104. - * § 60. — 6 § 139. — 7 § 57. Ex. 2. — s § 125. 4.-9 § 110. — 10 § 84. — n § 120. 2.— 12 § 125. 2.— 13 § 86. — 1 4 § 101. — is § 82, and R. — is § 120. 5. — " Faire nuit, to grow dark, § 59. Ex. 5. — is § 137. 3. — 19 § 87. N. 2. — 20 § 28. 4. — 21 En ville, into the city. — 22 § 120. § 70. — 1 Se porter, § 139. — 2 § 60. — 3 Elle est malade depuis deux mois, she has been sick these two months, § 121. 1. 1. N. 2.—* § 120. 1. — 5 § 125. 1. — 6 Entendre parler de, §139. — 7 II en est de, it is with. — s § 7. 6. N. — s § 120. 2. — 10 Avoir mal a, § 139. — n § 57. Ex. 2. — 12 Avoir faim, § 139. — 13 § 99. 4. — 14 § 91. 2. — 15 § 104. — is Mettre a couvert de, to shelter from; to protect from. VOCABULARY. FRENCH-ENGLISH. Note 1. — This Vocabulary contains the translation of the words which occur in the French Exercises, pp. 201-274; but articles, numerals, and pronouns, which are given in §§ 7, 22, 24, and proper nouns spelled alike in French and English, are omitted. Note 2. — Idioms and constructions explained in the notes, or in § 139, are not given in this Vocabulary. Note 3. — The ordinary grammatical abbreviations are used. AFFECTER A, prep, to, at, with, for, in, on, upon, by. Aba ndo mi er, 1. v. a. to abandon. Abattre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like BAT- tre), to throw down; to cut down. Abbaye, n. f. abbey : l'Abbaye de West- minster, Westminster Abbey. Abolir, 2. v. a. to abolish. Abonder, 1. v. n. to abound. Abri, n. m. shelter ; cover. Abricot, n. m. apricot. Abrutir, 2. v. a. to brutalize. Absence, n. f. absence. Absolu, e, adj. absolute; positive. Absolnment, adv. absolutely. Absoudre, 4. v. a. irr. to absolve. Abstenir (S')> V". ret. (conj. like TENIR), to abstain ; to forbear. Abuser, 1. v. n. to abuse. Accepter, 1. v. a. to accept. Accompagner, 1. v. a. to accompany. Accourir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like COU- rir), to hasten ; to run. Accroissement, n. m. increase. Accroitre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like CROl- tre), to increase ; to extend. Accroitre, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like croi- tre), to increase ; to grow. Accueillir, 2. V; a. irr. to receive. 25 Accuser, 1. v. a. to accuse ; to argue. Acheter, 1. v. a. (§35, 3), to buy. Achever, 1. v. a. (§35, 3), to finish. AchiHe, p. n. Achilles. Acier, n. m. steel. Acquerir, 2. v. a. irr. to acquire. Acte, n. m. act ; deed. Ac-teur, n. m., trice, n. f. actor; ac- tress. Action, n. f. action ; deed. Activite, n. f. activity. Admettre, 4. v. a. (conj. like mettri to admit ; to admit of. Admirable, adj. admirable. Admiration, n. f. admiration. Admirer, 1. v. a. & n. to adrnire. Adorer, 1. v. a. to worship; to adore. Adoncir, 2. v. a. to soften. Adresse, n. f. dexterity ; skill. Adresser, 1. v. a. to address. S'adres- ser, v. ref. to address ; to be addressed. Adroitement, adv. adroitly. Adversite, n. f. adversity. Affable, adj. affable. Affaiblir, 2. v. a. to loealcen. Affaire, n. f. business; (pi.), business. Affectation, n. f. affectation. Affecter, 1. v. a. to affect ; to aspire; to (289) AFFECTION 290 APPRENDRB endeavor to appear. S'affecter, v. ref. to be affected. Affection, n. f. affection. Ainrnaatlvemeni, adv. affirmatively . Affliction, u. f. affliction. Amiger, 1. v. a. to afflict ; to distress. Affirancnir, 2. v. a. to free ; to liberate. Ann, conj. (de), in order {to); (que, subj.), in order {that). Africain, e, adj. African. Afrique, n. f. Africa. Age, n. m. age, time oflife. Age 5 e, adj. old ; aged. Agir, 2. v. n. to act ; to do. S'agir, v. ref. imp. (de), to be in question. Agitation, n. f. agitation. Agneau, n. m. lamb. Agreable, adj. agreeable, pleasing. Agreablement, adv. agreeably. Aigle, n. m. (§ 11, 4), eagle. Aimable, adj. lovely ; amiable. Aimant, n. m. loadstone ; magnet. Aimer, 1. v. a. to love. Aine, e, adj. & sub. elder ; eldest. Ainsi, adv. so, thus. Ainsi, conj. so; thus; therefore. Air, n. m. air ; appearance. Aise, adj. glad. Aisement, adv. easily. Ajouter, 1. v. a. to add. Alarme, n. f. alarm ; uneasiness. Alarmer, 1. v. a. to alarm. Alexandre, p. n. Alexander. Allee, n. f. passage ; alley. Alleguer, 1. v. a. to allege ; to plead. Allemagne, n. f. Germany. Aller, v. n. irr. to go ; to proceed ; toft ; to suit ; to be becoming. Allie, n. ra., e, n. f. ally ; relation (by marriage). Allusion, n. f. allusion. Alors, adv. then ; at that time. Alterer, 1. v. a. to injure ; to hurt. Amande, n. f. almond. Amasser, 1. v. a. to heap up ; to amass. Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador. Ambition, n. f. ambition. Ambitieu-x, se, adj. ambitious. Am ore, n. m. amber. ime, n. f. soul. Am-er, ere, adj. bitter. Americain, e, adj. & sub. American. Amcrique, n. f. America. Ami, n. in., e, n. f. friend. Amir.il, n. m. admiral. Amitie,n. f. friendship. Amour, n. m. love ; amour-propre, self- love. Amusant, e, adj. amusing. Amusement, n. m. amusement. Amuser, 1. v. a. to amuse. S'amuser, v. ref. to amuse onePs self. An, n. m. year. Ancien, ne, adj. ancient. Ancien, n. m. ancient; senior. Ange, n. m. angel. Anglais, e, adj. & sub. English. Angleterre, n. f. England. Animal, n. m. animal. Annee, n. f. year. Annibal, p. n. Hannibal. Annoncer, 1. v. a. to announce. Antipode, n. m. antipode. Antiquite, n. f. antiquity. Antoine, p. n. Antony. Antonin, p. n. Antoninus. Apaiser, 1. v. a. to appease. Apercevoir, 3. v. a. to perceive. S'aper- cevoir, v. ref. to perceive. Aplanir, 2. v. a. to smooth. Apollon, p. n. Apollo -. Apollon du Belvedere, n. m. Apollo Belvedere. Apotre, n. m. apostle. Apparence, n. f. appearance. Appartement, n. m. room ; apart- ments. Appartenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like tenie), to belong. Appel, n. m. call ; appeal. Appeler, 1. v. a. irr. to name; to call. S'appeler, v. ref. to be called. Appetit, n. m. appetite. Applaudir, 2. v. a. to applaud. S'ap- plaudir, v. ref. to congratulate one's self. Applaudissement, n. m. applause. Application, n. f. application. Appliquer, 1. v. a. to apply. S'appli- quer, v. ref. to apply one^s self. Apporter, 1. v. a. to bring. Apprendre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like prendre), to learn; to teach. APPRIVOISER 291 AVRIL Apprivoiser, 1. v. a. to tame. Approbation, n. f. approbation. Approcher, 1. v. a. to bring near. S'approcher, v. ref. to draw near. Approcher, 1. v. n. to approach. Approf ondir, 2. v. a. to examine thor- oughly. Approurer, 1. v. a. to approve. Apres, prep, after. Apres, adv. after ; next ; afterwards. Apres-midi, n. f. afternoon. Apres-que, conj. after. Arable, n. f. Arabia .- Arabie Heureuse, Arabia Felix. Arbre, n. m. tree. Arc, n. m. bow, arc. Arc-en-ciel, n. m. rainboio. Architecture, n. f. architecture. Argent, n. m. silver; money. Argument, n. m. argument. Aristide, p. n. Aristides. Aristote, p. n. Aristotle. Arme, n. f. weapon. Armee, n. f. army. Arraer, 1. v. a. to arm. S'armer, v. ref. to arm one's self. Arranger, 1. v. a. to arrange. Arret, n. m. decree; sentence. Arrgter, 1. y. a. to stop ; to arrest. Arrivee, n. f. arrival. Arriver, 1. v. n. to happen ; to come ; to arrive. Arrogance, n. f. arrogance. Arroser, 1. v. a. to water ; to sprinkle. Art, a.m. art. Artillerie, n. f. artillery. Asie, n. f. Asia .• Asie Mineure, Asia Mi- nor. Asile, Asyle, n. m. asylum; refuge. Aspirer, l.v. a. & n. to inhale ; to aspire. Assaillir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like sail- lir), to assail ; to attack. Asseoir, 3. v. a. irr. to set; to seat. S'asseoir, v. ref. to sit down. Assez, adv. enough ; rather ; quite. Assidu, e, adj. assiduous. Assidument, adv. assiduously. Assiette, n. f. plate. Assistance, n. f. assistance; aid. Assurer, 1. v. a. to secure ; to assure. Assyrien, ne, adj. & sub. Assyrian. Atnenien, ne, adj. & sub. Athenian. Atrocite, n. f. atrocity. Attaeher, 1. v. a. to attach ; to fasten. S'attacher, v. ref. to cling ; to adhere. Attaqne, n. f. attack. Attaqner, 1. v. a. to attack. Attendre, 4. v. a. to wait for ; to expect. Attendrir, 2. v. a. to make tender. Attenti-f, ve, adj. attentive, mindful. Attention, n. f. attention. Attentiveinent, adv. attentively. Attirer, 1. v. a. to attract. Attrait, n. ra. attraction. Attribuer, 1. v. a. to attribute. Anditeur, n. m. auditor. Augmeuter, 1. v. a. to increase. Auguste, p. n. Augustus. Aujourd'hui, adv. to-day. Aumdne, n. f. alms. An par avail t, adv. before (of time). Aupres, prep, (de), near, close (to). Aussi, adv. as (§ 18) ; also ; so. Anssitot, adv. immediately. Autant, adv. as much ; as many. Anteur, n. m. author. Antomne, n. m. autumn. Autorite, n. f. sway. Autre, adj. other. Autrefois, adv . formerly : Autricnien, ne, adj. & sub. Austrian. Autrucne, n. f. ostrich. Avance, e, adj. advanced ; forward. Avancer, 1. v. a. & n. to advance. Avant, prep, (of time), before. Avantage, n. m. advantage. Avare, adj. avaricious. Avare, n. m. miser. Avec, prep. with. Avenir, n. m. future. Aventure, n. f. adventure. Avertir, 2. v. a. to inform. Aveugle, adj. blind. Aveuglement, n. m. blindness. Avilir, 2. v. a. to debase. S'avilir, v, ref. to disgrace one's self. Avis, n. in. opinion ; advice. Avoir, 3. v. a. irr. aux. to have. Avouer, 1. v. a. to avow ; to confess. Avril, n. m. April. BABIL 292 BYZANCE B. Babil, n. m. prattle. Babylone, n. f. Babylon. Bagatelle, n. f. trifle. Bague, n. f. ring (for ornament). Baigner, 1. v. a. to bathe. Se baigner, v. ref. to bathe. Baisser, 2. v. a. to lower. Se baisser, v. ref. to stoop. Balayer, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 2), to sweep. Baleine, n. f. whale. Bannir, 2. v. a. to banish. Bannissement, n. m. banishment. Bar bare, adj. barbarous. Bas, n. m. stocking. Bas, se, adj. low; mean. Base, n. f. base ; foundation. Bassiner, 1. v. a. to warm (a bed). Bataille, n. f. battle. Bateau, n. m. boat. Batiment, n. m. building ; vessel. Batir, 2. v. a. to build. Beau, Bel, Belle, adj. beautiful. Beau, adv. avoir beau (inf.) to be in vain (to), Beaucoup, adv. much; many ; great deal ; great many. Beaute, n. f. beauty. Beiiii*, 2. v. a. to bless. Berger, n. m. shepherd. Besoin, n.m.need; want. Bete, n. f. animal ; beast. Beurre, n. m. butter. Bible, n. f. Bible. Bibliographe, n. m. bibliographer. Bieu, adv. (comp. mieux, §40), well; many (§63, Ex.): very; much. Bieu, n. m. good ; pi. goods. Bieufaisaut, e, adj. beneficent. Bienfait, n. m. benefit. Bieiiseance, n. f. propriety. Bieutot, adv. soon ; very soon. Bieuveillauce, n. f. kindness. Biere, n. f. beer. Bijou, n. va.jeioel. Blamable, adj. blamable. Blamer, 1. v. a. to blame. Blan-c, che, adj. white; clean; blank. Blaiic, n. m. white. Ble, n. m. corn ; wheat, Blesser, 1. v. a. to wound; to hurt. Blessure, n. f. hurt ; injury. Bleu, e, adj. blue. Bleu, n. m. blue. Boeuf , n. m. ox ; beef. Boire, 4. v. a. irr. to drink. Bois, n. m. wood ; forest. Bon, ue, adj. good; Icind. Bouhenr, n. m. happiness Boute, n. f .goodness. Bord, n. m. border ; bank. Borne, n. f. limit. Bonier, 1. v. a. to set bounds to. Se borner, v. ref. to be limited. Bouclie, n. f. mouth. Boucher, 1. v. a. to stop. Bouillaut, e, adj. boiling ; fiery. Bouillir, 2. v. n. irr. to boil. Boulet, n. m. cannon-ball ; shot. Bouquet, n. m. bouquet. Bourbeu-x, se, adj. miry; muddy. Bouteille, n. f. bottle. Boutique, n. f. shop. Bras, n. m. arm. Brave, adj. brave. Bravemeut, adv. bravely. Bravoure, n. f. bravery ; valor, Brebis, n. f. sheep. Bresil, n. m. Brazil. Brievete, n. f. brevity. Brillaut, e, adj. brilliant. Briller, 1. v. n. to be bright ; to shine. Broclie, e, adj. (books), stitched. Brochure, n. f. pamphlet. Broder, 1. v. a. to embroider. Brouillard, n. m.fog ; mist. Bruit, n. m. noise ; report ; din. Brulaut, e, adj. burning; ardent. Bruler, 1. v. a. to burn ; to consume. Brute, n. f. brute. But, n. m. end : aim. Butin, n. m. booty ; spoil. Byzauce, n. Byzantium (Constantino- ple). CABINET 293 CHOSE O. Cabinet, n. m. closet ; room ; study. Cacher, 1. v. a. to conceal. Se cacher, v. ref. to conceal one's self. Cacheter, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 4), to seal. Cafe, n. m. coffee. Caner, n. ra. coffee-tree. Cage, n. f. cage. Calamite, n. f. calamity. Calice, n. m. chalice. Calme, adj. calm ; quiet. Calmer, 1. v. a. to calm ; to quiet. Calomnier, 1. v. a. to calumniate. Camarade, n. m. companion ,■ comrade. Campagne, n. f. country. Canal, ft. ra. channel ; canal. Canif, n. m. penknife. Canon, n. m. cannon ; gun. Capable, adj. capable. Capitaine, n. m. captain. Capitale, n. f. capital ; chief city. Caporal, n. m. corporal. Caprice, n. m. caprice. Capricien-x, se, adj. capricious. Caractere, n. m. character. Cardinal, n. m. cardinal. Cardinal, e, adj. cardinal. Carnage, n. m. carnage; slaughter. Carriere, n. f. career. Carrosse, n. m. coach ; carriage. Cas, n. m. case ; value. Casser, 1. v. a. to break. Catechisme, n. m. catechism. Caton, p. n. Cato. Cause, n. f. cause. Ceder, 1. v. a. to yield ; to assign. Ceder, 1. v. n. to yield; to submit. C61ebre, adj. celebrated. Celebrer, 1. v. a. to celebrate. Celebrity, n. f. celebrity. Celeste, adj. celestial. Cendre, n. f. ashes ; dust. Censeur, n. m. censor ; critic. Censure, n. f. censure. Centime, n. m. centime. See § 33, 21. Cependant, adv. in the meantime; yet. Ceremonie, n. f. ceremony. Certain, e, adj. certain. 25* Certainement, adv. certainly. Cesse, n. f. ceasing. Chagrin, n. m. grief; sorrow. Chair, n. f. flesh ; (p].) flesh. Chaleur, n. f. heat ; fervor. Chambre, n. f. room ; chamber ; Cham- bre des Communes, House of Commons. Champ, n. m. field. Champs-Elysees, n. m. (pi.) Elysian Fields. Chandelle, n. f. tallow candle. Changer, 1. v. a. & n. to change. Chanson, n. f. song. Chanter, 1. v. a. & n. to sing. Chapeau, n. m. hat ; bonnet. Chapiteau, n. m. top ; head; capital. Char, n. m. car ; chariot. Charbon, n. m. coal ; charcoal. Charge, n. f. burden ; office ; post. Charite, n. f. charity. Charmant, e, adj. charming. Charme, n. f. spell ; charm. Charrne, u. f. plough. Charte, n. f. charter. Chasse, n. f. chase ; hunting. Chasser, 1. v. a. to drive ; to expel. Chataigne, n. f. chestnut. Chateau, n. m. castle ; palace. Chaud, e, adj. warm ; hot. Chaud, n. m. heat, warmth. Chauffer, 1. v. a. to heat ; to warm. Se chauffer, v. ref. to warm one's self. Chauve, adj. bald. Chemin, n. m. way ; road .■ chemin de fer, railroad. Cheminee,n. f. fireplace ; mantel-piece. Cher, ere, adj. dear. Chercher, 1. v. a. to search for. Cherir, 2. v. a. to cherish. Cheval, n. m. horse. Chez, pr. at the house of; among. Chien, n. m. dog. Chimere, n. f. chimera. Chine, n. f. China. Choisir, 2. v. a. to choose. Choix, n. m. choice. Chose, n. f. thing. CHRETIEN 294 CONFIANT Chretien, ne, adj. & sub. Christian. Cliristianisme, n. m. Christianity. Ciiristophe, p. n. Christopher: Chris- tophe Colomb, Christopher Columbus. Chute, n.f. fall. Ci, adv. here (as an affix, this). Ciceron, p. n. Cicero. Cidre, n. m. cider. Ciel, n. m. (pi. Cieux), heaven ; heavens. €iine, n. f. summit; top. Ciwietiere, n. m. cemetery. Circonf erence, n. f. circumference. Cireonscrire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like ecrire), to circumscribe ; to limit. Circonspection, n. f. circumspection. Circonstance, n. f. circumstance. Circonrenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like VENIR), to circumvent. Cire, n. f. ivax. Cite, n. f. city. Ciioyen, n. m., ne, n. f. citizen. Citron, n. m. citron ; lemon. Civil, e, adj. civil ; polite. Clair, e, adj. clear. Clairement, adv. clearly. Clarte, n. f. clearness. Classe, n. f. class ; order ; hind. Clef, Cle, n. f. key. Clemence, n. f. clemency. Climat, n. m. climate. Cosur, n. m. heart. Colere, n. f. anger. Collier, n. m. collar. Colonel, n. m. colonel. Colonic, n. f. colony. Comfaattre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like BAT- tre), to fight. Combien, adv. hoio much ; hoiv many ; how far ; how. Combler, 1. v. a. to fill ; to fill up. Corraedie, n. f. comedy. Commandant, n. m. commander. Commandement, n. m. command. Ooinme, adv. as ; like ; as if. Commencement, n.m. commencement. Commencer, 1. v. a. & n. (§ 35, 1), to commence. Comment, adv. how. Commerce, n.m. trade ; commerce. Commettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like mettre), to commit ; to intrust. Commnn, e, adj. common. Commnnement, adv. commonly. Communication, n.f. communication. Communiqner, 1. v. a. to communi- cate. Se communiquer, v. ref. to com- municate to each other ; to be communi- cated. § 103. Compagnie, n. f. company. Compagnon, n. m. companion. Comparable, adj. comparable. Comparaison, n. f. comparison. Comparaitre, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like paraitre), to appear. Compatir, 2. v. n. to compassionate. Compatissant, e,adj. compassionate. Complaire, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like plaire), to humor ; to please. Se complaire, v. ref. to take pleasure. Complaisance, n f. complaisance. Complaisant, e, adj. complaisant. Compliment, n. m. compliment. Complot, n. m.plot. Comporter, 1. v. a. to admit of. Se comporter, v. ref. to behave one's self. Composer, 1. v. a. to compose. Se com- poser, v. ref. to be composed. Comprendre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like prendre), to comprehend. Compromettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like mettre), to compromise. Se compro- mettre, v. ref. to compromise ; to impli- cate one's self. Comte, n. m. count. Concert, n. m. concert. Concevoir, 3. v. a. to conceive. Conclnre, 4. v. a. irr. to conclude. Concombre, n. m. cucumber. Conconrir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like cou- rir), to concur. Condamner, 1. v. a. to condemn. Condescendance, n. f. condescension. Condescendre, 4. v. n. to condescend. Condition, n. f. condition. Condor, n. m. condor. Condnire, 4. v. a. irr. to conduct. Se conduire, v. ref. to behave. Conduite, n. f. conveyance ; behavior. Conferer, 1. v. a. to comphre. Conferer, 1. v. n. to confer. Confiance, n. f. confidence. Coniiant, e, adj. confident. CONPIRE 295 COURONNE Confire, 4. v. a. irr. to preserve; to pickle. Colli ondre, 4. v. a. to confound ; to mix. Conformement, adv. conformably. Conformer, 1. v. a. to conform. Se conformer, v. ref. to conform. Conformity, n. f. conformity. Confus, e, adj. confused. Confusion, n. f. confusion. Connaissance, n. f. acquaintance. Connaftre, 4. v. a. irr. to know. Se connaitre, v. ref. to know one's self. Conquerir, 2. v. a. irr. to conquer. Conquete, n. f. conquest. Conseil, n. m. advice ; counsel. Conseiller, 1. v. a. to counsel. Consentement, n. m. consent. Consentir, 2. v. u. irr. (conj. like sen- ttr), to consent. Consequemment, adv. consequently. Consequence, n. f. consequence. Conserve!-, 1. v. a. to preserve. Considerer, 1. v. a. to consider. Consideration, n. f. consideration. Consister, 1. v. n. to consist. Consolation, n. f. consolation. Consoler, 1. v. a. to console. Consommation, n. f. consummation ; consumption ; expenditure. Consommer, 1. v. a. to consume. Constamment, adv. constantly. Constance, n. f. constancy. Constant, e, adj. constant. Constitution, n. f. constitution. Constitutionnel, le, adj. constitu- tional. Construire, 4. v. a. to construct. . Consulier, 1. v. a. to consult. Consumer, 1. v. a. to consume. Contempler, 1. v. a. to contemplate. Contemporain, e, adj. & sub. contem- poraneous ; contemporary. Contenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like tp:nir), to contain ; to restrain. Content, e, adj. satisfied , pleased. Contenter, 1. v. a. to content ; to Se contenter, v. ref. to be contented Continent, n. m. continent. Continuation, nf. f. continuation. Continuel, le, adj. continual. Continuer, 1. v. a. to continue. Contradiction, n. f. contradiction. Contraindre, 4. v. a. irr. to constrain. Contraire, adj. contrary ; opposite. Contraire, n. m. contrary. Contre, prep, against. Contre-co3ur (a), adv. reluctantly. Contredire, 4. v. a. (conj. like dire), (§ 36, Tab. I.), to contradict. Contrefaire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like faire), to imitate ; to counterfeit. Contritouer, 1. v. n. to contribute. Convaincre, 4. v. a. (conj. like VAIN- cre), to convince; to persuade. Se convaincre, v. ref. to be convinced. Convenatole, adj. suitable ; proper . Convenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like te- nir), to agree; to acknowledge. Conversation, n. f. conversation. Converser, 1. v. n. to converse. Convertir, 2. v. a. to convert. Conviction, n. f. conviction. Corintnien, ne, adj. & sub. Corin- thian. Corps, n. m. body. Correspondre, 4. v. n. to correspond. Corriger, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 1), to correct. Se corriger, v. ref. to correct one's self. Corrompre, 4. v. a. (conj. like ROM- pre), to corrupt. Se corrompre, v. ref. to become corrupt. Corruption, n. f. corruption. C6te, n. m. side. Coton, n. m. cotton. Cou, n. m. neck. Coucher, 1. v. a. to lay. Se coucher, v. ref. to lie down. Coucher, 1. v. n. to lie down Coudre, 4. v. a. irr. to sew. Couleur, n. f. color. Coup, n. m. blow ; stroke. Coupable, adj. culpable; guilty. Coupalble, n. m. f. guilty person. Couper, 1. v. a. to cut. Cour, n. f. court. Cour, n. f. yard ; court-yard. Courage, n. m. courage. Courageu-x, se, adj. courageous. Couramment, adv. fluently. Courber, 1. v. a. to bend. Courir, 2. v. n. irr. to run. Couronnc, n, f. crown. COURONNER 296 DEHORS Couronner, 1. v. a. to crown. Cours, n. m. course ; flow. Court, e, adj. short. Courtisan, n. m., e, n. f. courtier. Cousin, n. m., e, n. f. cousin. Couteau, n. m. knife. Coater, 1. v. n. to cost. Cou.tu.iiie, n. f. custom; habit. Couture, n. f. seam; sewing. Convert, n. m. cloth ; cover. Couvrir, 2. v. a. irr. to cover. Se cou- vrir, v. ref. to cover one's self. Craindre, 4. v. a. irr. to fear. Crainte, n. f. fear ; dread. Creancier, n. ra., iere, n. f. creditor. Crea-teur, trice, adj. creative. Createur, n. m. creator. Credit, n. m. credit ; influence. Credule, adj. credulous. Creme, n. f. cream. Crime, n. m. crime. Critique, n. f. criticism. Croire, 4. v. a. & n. irr. to believe. Croitre, 4. v. n. irr. to grow. Croix, n. f. cross. Cruel, le, adj. cruel. Cueillir, 2. v. a. irr. to gather. Cuiller, Cuillere, n. f. spoon. Cuire, 4. v. n. irr. to cook. Cuisse, n. f. thigh ; leg. Culte, n. m. worship. Cultiver, 1. v. a. to cultivate. Culture, n. f. culture. Curieu-x, se, adj. curious; eager. Curiosite, n. f. curiosity. r>. Dame, n. f. married lady ; lady. Danger, n. m. danger. Dangereu-x, se, adj. dangerous. Dans, prep, in ; into ; within ; with. Danser, 1. v. n. to dance. Davautage, adv. more. De, prep, of ; from; in (§112); on; by for ; with. Debaxicher, 1. v. a. to debauch. Deborder, 1. v. n. to overflow; to pass by; to project. Deforouiller, 1. v. a. to unravel. Decacheter, 1. v. a. (conj. like cache- ter, § 35, 4), to unseal. Decalitre, n. m. decalitre. See § 33, 21. Decapiter, 1. v. a. to decapitate. Decerner, 1. v. a. to decree. Decevoir, 3. v. a. to deceive. Decider, 1. v. a. to decide. Se decider, v. ref. to decide. Decision, n. f. decision. Declinei', 1. v. n. to decline. Decouvrir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like couvrir), to uncover ; to expose ; to discover. Decrier, 1. v. a. to prohibit ; to decry. Decrire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like feCRlRE), to describe. Dedans, adv. inside; within. Dedans, n. m. interior ; inside. Dedire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like dire, § 36, Tab. I.), to contradict. D6duire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like CON- duire), to deduct; to subtract ; to in- fer. Deesse, n. f. goddess. Defaire, 4. v. u. irr. (conj. like faire), to undo ; to defeat ; to deliver. Se de- faire, v. ref. to get rid. Defaite, n. f. defeat ; overthrow. Defaut, n. m. fault ; defect. Defendre, 4. v. a. to defend; to forbid. Se defendre, v. ref. to protect one's self from; (de) to forbear. Defense, n. f. protection ; defence. Defier, 1. v. a. to defy ; to dare. Se de- fier, v. ref. to distrust. Degarnir, 2. v. a. to strip. Degoutant, e, adj. disgusting. Degrader, 1. v. a. to degrade ; to dam age. Se degrader, v. ref. to disgrace one's self ; to become defaced. Degre, n. m. degree ; grade ; extent. Deguiser, 1. v. a. to disguise- Deliors, adv. outside. Dehors, n. m. exterior ; outside. DEJEUNER 297 DIAMANT Dejeuner, 1. v. n. to breakfast. Dejeuner, n. m. breakfast. Delasser, 1. v. a. to refresh. Se delas- ser, to refresh one's self. D£licatesse, n. f. delicacy. Delicieu-x, se, adj. delicious. Demain, adv. to-morrow. Demander, 1. v. a. to demand. Demander, 1. v. n. to ask ; to beg; to wish ; to want. Demarche, n. f. step ; gait ; march. Demasquer, 1. v. a. to unmask. Dementir, 2. v. a. irr. to contradict. Demettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like met- tre), to dislocate ; to remove. Se de- mettre, v. ref. (th.) to be put out of joint; (pers.) to dislocate. Demeurer, 1. v. n. to reside. Demi, n. m. half. Demi-dien, n. m. demi-god. Demi-kilogramme, demi-kilogram- me. See § 33, 21. Demoiselle, n. f. young lady; girl. Demolir, 2. v. a. to demolish. Demon, n. m. demon. Dent, n. f. tooth. Dentelle, n. f. lace. Depart, n. m. departure. Depeclier, 1. v. a. to despatch. Se de- pgcher, v. ref. to hasten. Dependre, 4. v. n. to depend. Depens, n. m. (pi.) expense ; cost. D£pense, n. f. expense (money spent) ; (pi.) outlay ; expenditure. Deplaire, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like plaire), to be disagreeable ; to dis- please. Deployer, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 2), to display. Depravation, n. f. depravity. Depnis, prep, from; since; after.- for. Depuis, adv. since. Depnis que, conj. since ; ever since. Depute, n. m. deputy. Deraisonnable, adj. unreasonable. Dern-ier, iere, adj. & sub. last. Derriere, prep, behind. Des, prep, from {beginning at). Des que, conj. as soon as ; when. Desabuser, v. a. to undeceive. Se de- sabuser, v. ref. to undeceive one's self; to be disabused. DGsajrreable, adj. disagreeable. Desapprendre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like prendre), to unlearn. Desarmer, 1. v. a. to disarm. Desastre, n. m. disaster. Desastreu-x, se, adj. disastrous. Descendre, 4. v. n. to descend. Description, n. f. description. Desert, n. m. desert. Desesperer, 1. v. a. to drive to despair. Se desesperer, v. ref. to be in despair ; to give one's self up to despair. Desespoir, n. m. despair. Desnonneur, n. m. dishonor. Deshonorer, 1. v. a. to dishonor. Desinteressement, n. m. disinterest- edness. D6sir, Desir, n. m. desire. Desirable, adj. desirable. D6sirer, 1. v. a. to desire. D6sob6ir, 2. v. n. to disobey. Desobligeant, e, disobliging. Desormais, adv. hereafter. Dessein, n. m. design ; plan. Desservir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like ser- VIR), to remove ; to clear the table ; to be of disadvantage to. Dessin, n. m. drawing ; design. Dessous, adv. below; underneath. Dessous, n. m. under part ; bottom. Dessus, adv. above ; over ; on ; upon. Dessus, prep, on; upon; over; above. Dessus, n. m. top ; upper part. Destiner, 1. v. a. to destine. Destruction, n. f. destruction. Detacher, 1. v. a. to detach ; to loose. Detenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like tenir), to detain ; to hold ; to withhold. Detourner, 1. v. a. to lead astray ; to avert. Se detourner, v. ref. to deviate. Detromper, 1. v. a. to undeceive. Detruire, 4. v. a. to destroy. Devenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like venir), to become ; to get ; to turn out. Devoir, 3. v. a. to owe. Devoir, 3. v. n. (inf.) shoidd ; ought; must ; to be about to, §§ 107, 115. Devoir, n. m. duty. DeVouer, 1. v. a. to devote. Se devou- er, v. ref. to devote one's self. Diamant, n. m. diamond. DIANE 298 ECONOMIE Diane, p. n. Diana. Dictionnaire, n. m. dictionary. Dieu, n. m. God. Differer, 1. v. a. to defer. Difficile, adj. difficult. Diificulte, n. f. difficulty. Digne, adj. worthy. Dignite, a. f. dignity. Dilater, 1. v. a. to dilate ? to expand. Diligence, n. f. expedition ; diligence. Diligent, e, adj. expeditious ; diligent. Diminuer, 1. v. a. & n. to diminish ; to decrease. Dindon, n. m. turkey. Diner, 1. v. n. to dine. Diner, n. m. dinner. Dire, 4. v. a. irr. to speak; to say ; to tell. Directoire, n. m. directory. Diriger, 1. v. a. to direct ; to conduct. Discipline, n. f. discipline. Disconvenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like VENIR), to disoivn; to deny. Discourir, 2. v. n. (conj. like COURIR), to discourse. Discours, n. m. discourse. Diser-et, ete, adj. discreet. Discretion, a. f. discretion. Disgrace, n. f. disgrace. Disparaitre, 4. v. n. (conj. like PARAt- trk), to disappear. Disposer, 1. v. a. to dispose, arrange. Disposition, n. f. disposition. Dissipation, n. f. dissipation. Dissiper, 1. v. a. to dissipate ; to scatter. Distinctement, adv. distinctly. Distinguer, 1. v. a. to distinguish. Se distinguer, v. ref. to be distinguished ; to be eminent. Distraire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like tra- ire), to separate ; to disturb. Distribuer, 1. v. a. to distribute. Divin, e, adj. divine. Divinite, n. f. divinity. Diviser, 1. v. a. to divide. Doigt, n. va.. finger; toe. Domestique, adj. domestic. Domestique, n. m. f. man-servant; maid-servant. Don, n. m, gift ; present. Done, conj. then; therefore. Donner, 1. v. a. to give ; to announce. Donneu-r, n. m., se, n. f. giver. Dormir, 2. v. n. irr. to sleep. Dot, n. f. dowry. Doubler, 1. v. a. to double. Douceur, n. f. sweetness ; fragrance ; softness ; smoothness ; mildness. Doner, 1. v. a. to endow. Douter, 1. v. n. to doubt. Dou-x, ce, adj. sioeet ; gentle ; mild. Drap, n. m. cloth. Droit, e, adj. straight; right. Droit, adv. straight ; directly. Droit, n. m. right; title; law. Droite, n. f. right hand ; right side. Droitnre, n. f. right ; rectitude. Due, n. m. duke. Durable, adj. durable. Durer, 1. v. n. to last ; to endure. Durete, n. f . harshness ; hardness* E. Eau, n. f. water : eau-de-vie, brandy. Eblauir, 2. v. a. to dazzle. Ecarlate, adj. scarlet. Es.ivter, 1. v. a. to turn aside. ilDkapper, I. v. a. to escape. Sechap- per, v. ref. to escape. Eebarpe, n. f. scarf. Eclair, n. ra. lightning. Eclairer, 1. v. a. to illuminate ; to en- lighten. Eclat, n. m. fragment ; piece ; explosion ; splendor ; brightness. Eclatant, e, adj. piercing ; shrill ; loud ; bright ; shining ; brilliant. Eclipse, n. f. eclipse. Ecole, n. f. school. Ecol-ier, n. m., iere, n. f. scholar ; pu- pil. Econome, adj. economical. Economic, n. f. economy. lScOSSE 299 ENSUIVRE Ecosse, n. f. Scotland. Ecouter, 1. v. a. to listen to ; to hear. S'ecouter, v. ref. to like to hear one's self; to indulge one's self. Eerier (S'), 1. v. ref. to cry; to exclaim. Ecrit, n. m. writing. Ecritnre, n. f. toriting ; scripture. lSd.it, n. m. edict ; decree. Education, n. f. education. Effacer, l.v. a. to efface. Effet, n. m. effect ; intent ; purpose. Effort, n. m. effort ; exertion. Egal, e, adj. equal; level; indifferent. Egalement, adv. equally. Egarer, 1. v. a. to lead astray. S'^ga- rer, v. ref. to go astray. Eglise, n. f. church. Ego'isme, n. m. selfishness. Egyptien, ne, adj. & sub. Egyptian. Elegance, n. f. elegance. Elegant, e, adj. elegant. Elevation, n. f. elevation. Eleve, n. m. f. pupil; scholar. Elever, 1. v. a. to raise; to build; to elevate ; to educate ; to bring up. S 'ele- ver, v. ref. to rise. Elire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like like), to elect ; to choose. Eloge, n.m. praise; eulogy. Eloquence, n. f. eloquence. Embellir, 2. v. a. to embellish. Embellissement, n.m. embellishment. Emeraude, n. f. emerald. Emotion, n. f. emotion. Emoudre, 4. v. a. (conj. like moudre), to grind (sharp instruments). Emousser, 1. v. a. to blunt ; to deaden. Emouvoir, 3. v. a. irr. (conj. like mou- voir), to move ; to rouse. Emparer (S'), 1. v. ref. (de) to possess one's self (of ) ; to take possession (of). EmpScher, 1. v. a. to prevent. S'em- pecher, v. ref. to forbear. Erapereur, n. m. emperor. Empire, n. m. empire ; sway. Emplir, 2. v. a. to fill. Employer, 1. v. a. irr. (§ 35, 2), to em- ploy ; to use ; to devote. Emporter, 1. v. a. to carry away ; to take off by violence. S'emporter, v. ref. to get in a passion. Empresse, e, adj. ardent; eager. Empresser (S'), 1. v. ref. to be ardent ; to be eager. En, prep, in ; at ; to ; on ; as ; like ; (be- fore a present participle), while; in; by ; or frequently not translated. Enclin, e, adj. inclined. Encourager, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 1), to in- spirit ; to encourage. Enconi'ir, 2. v. a. ivv. (conj. like COU- rir), to incur. Encre, n. f. ink. Encrier, n. m. inkstand. Endormir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like dor- mir), to lull ; to lay asleep. S'endor- mir, v. ref. to fall asleep. Enfance, n. f. childhood ; infancy. Enfant, n. m. f. child ; infant. Ennn, adv. in short ; finally. Enflammer, 1. v. a. to kindle ; to ex- cite. S'enflammer, v. ref. to take fire. Enfler, 1. v. a. to swell ; to inflate. S'en- fler, v. ref. to swell ; to be inflated. Enf ouir, 2. v. a. to bury. S'enfouir, v. ref. to bury one's self. Enfreindre, 4. v. a. irr. to infringe. Engagement, n. m. engagement. Enhardir, 2. v. a. to embolden. S'en- hardir, v. ref. to assume boldness. Enjoindre, 4. v. a. (conj. like JOIN- dre). to enjoin ; to charge. Ennemi, n. m., e, n. f. enemy. Ennemi, e, adj. enemy's; hostile. Enorgneillir, 2. v. a. to make proud ; to elate. S'enorgueillir, v. ref. to be- come proud ; to become elated. Enqnerir (S'), 2. v. ref. to inquire. Enraciner, 1. v. a. to root. S'enraci- ner, v. ref. to take root. Enrhnmer, 1. v. a. to give a cold to. S'enrhumer, v. ref. to take cold. Enrichir, 2. v. a. to enrich ; to adorn. S'enrichir, v. ref. to enrich one's self. Enseigner, 1. v. a. to teach. Ensemble, adv. together. Ensemble, n. m. whole ,- ensemble. Ensevelir, 2. v. a. to put in a shroud; to inter ; to bury ; to swallow up. Ensuite, adv. after ; afterwards. Ensuivre (!§'), v. ref. (conj. like sui- VRE), to follow; to ensue. ENTENDEMENT 300 EXCLURE Entendement, n. m. understanding. Entendre, 4. v. a. to hear ; to under- stand ; to overhear. Entete, e, adj. obstinate. Enthousiaste, n. m. f. enthusiast. Ent-ier, iere, adj. whole; entire. Entierement, adv. entirely. Entr'aimer (S'), v. recip. to love one another. Entree, n. f. admission; entrance. Entreprenant, e, adj. enterprising. Entreprendre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like prendre), to undertake. Entreprise, n. f. undertaking. Entrer, 1. v. n. to enter : to go in. Entretenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like te- nir), to hold ; to keep together ; to main- tain; to converse with. S'entretenir, v. ref. to be maintained or kept up ; to converse. Entrevoir, 3. v. a. irr. (conj. like voir), to see imperfectly. Entr'ouvrir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like j ouvrir), to half open. Eiwaliir, 2. v. a. to invade. Envers, prep, towards ; to. Envie, n. f. envy ; desire ; inclination. Enrier, 1. v. a. to envy ; to desire. Environ, adv. about. Envoler (S'), v. ref. to fly away. Envoy er, 1. v. a. (§ 45, 2), to send. Epais, se, adj. thick: dark. Epanouir, 2. v. a. & n. to expand; to bloom. S 'epanouir, v. ref. to expand ; to bloom. Epargner, 1. v. a. to spare ; to save. Epaule, n. f. shoulder. Epee, n. f. sword. Epi, n. m. ear ; spike (of corn, &c). Epique, adj. epic. Epoque, n. f. epoch ; period. Epouse, n. f. wife ; spouse. Epouser, 1. v. a. to marry; to espouse. Eprouver, 1. v. a. to try ; to put to the test ; to experience. Epuiser, 1. v.'a. to exhaust ; to spend. Equite, n. f. equity. Eqnivaloir, 3. v. n. irr. (conj. like valoir), to be equivalent. Equivoque, adj. equivocal ; ambiguous. Eriger, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 1), to erect. Erostrate, p. n. Erostr&tus. Erreui', n. f. error ; mistake. Eruption, n. f. eruption. Esclave, n. m. slave. Esope, p. n. JEsop. Espagne, n. f. Spain. Esperance, n. f. hope ; confidence. Esperer, 1. v. a. to hope for ; to expect. Esperer, 1. v. n. to hope. Espoir, n. m. hope. ; expectancy. Esprit, n. m. spirit ; soul ; intelligence ; mind ; intellect ; wit ; sense ; parts. Essentiel, le, adj. essential. Est, n. m. east. Estampe, u. f. print ; engraving. Estimable, adj. estimable. Estime, n. f. esteem. Estimer, 1. v. a. to appraise ; to esteem. Et, conj. and ; et — et, both — and. Etablir, 2. v. a. to set ; to place. Etalage, n. m. exposure for sale. Etat, n. m. state ; condition ; calling. Ete, n. m. summer. Eteindre, 4. v. a. irr. to extinguish, Etendre, 4. v. a. to extend. Et endue, n. f. extent. Eternel, le, adj. eternal. Etoile, n. f. star. Etonnant, e, adj. astonishing. Etonner, 1. v. a. to astonish. S'eton- ner, v. ref. to be astonished. Etrang-er, ere, adj. foreign ; strange. Etrang-er, n. m., ere, n. f. stranger. Etre, v. n. irr. aux. to be. Etre, n. m. being; existence; creature. Etroit, e, adj. narrow ; straight. Etude, n. f. study. Etudier, 1. v. a. & n. to study, Evangile, n. m. gospel. Evanouir (S'), 2. v. ref. to swoon away ; to faint ; to fade away. Evenement, n. m. event. Evlque, n. m. bishop. Evident, e, adj. evident. Eviter, 1. v. a. to shun i to avoid. Exact, e, adj. exact ; accurate. Exactement, adj. exactly. Examiner, 1. v. a. to examine. Exceller, 1. v. n. to excel. Exciter, 1. v. a. to excite; to rouse. Exclure, 4. v. a. irr. to exclude. EXCUSE 301 FLEURIR Excuse, n. f. excuse. Excuser, 1. v. a. to excuse. Execution, n. f. execution. Exemple, n. m. (§ 11, 4), example. Exempt, e, adj. exempt ; free. Exempter, 1. v. a. to exempt ; to free. Exiger, 1. v. a. (§35, 1), to demand. Existence, n. f. existence. Existei', 1. v. n. to exist. Experience, n. f. experience. Explication, n. f. explanation. Exposer, 1. v. a. to expose; to exhibit. S'exposer, v. ref. to expose one's self. Expression, n. f. expression. Exprimer, 1. v. a. to express. Extraire, 4. v. a. irr. (couj. like tra- ire), to extract ; to draw out. Extreineinent, adv. extremely. F. Fable, n. f. fable; story. Facade, n. f. front ; face. Fache, adj. angry ; displeased ; sorry. Facheu-x, se, adj. grievous ; sad. Facile, adj. easy ; ready. Facilement, adv. easily. Faculte, n. f. faculty. Faible, adj. feeble; weak. Faiblesse, n. f. weakness. Faim, u. f. hunger. Faire, 4. v. a. irr. to make; to cause ; to prepare ; to do ; to take (a step) ; (inf.) to have done ; to cause to do (§ 100). Se faire, v. ref. to be done ; to become ; to be made ; to take place ; to happen. Fait, n. va.fact ; deed. Falloir, 3. v. n. imp. irr. to be necessa- ry; must ; should (§ 106). Fameu-x, se, adj. famous. Famille, n. f. family. Farder, 1. v. a. to paint (the face). Se farder, v. ref. to paint (one's face). Farouche, adj. wild ; fierce. Fatigue, n. f. fatigue ; tceariness. Fatiguei-, 1. v. a. to weary. Se fatiguer, v. ref. to become weary. Fausset6, n. f. falsehood. Faute, n. f. fault; error; mistake. Fau-x,sse, adj. false; artificial. Faveur, n. f. favor. Favori, te, nd). favorite. Favoriser, 1. v. a. to favor. Feindre, 4. v. n. irr. to feign. Felicite, n. f. happiness ; felicity. Femme, u. f. woman; wife: femme de chambre, waiting maid. 26 FenStre, n. f. window; opening. Fer-, n. m. iron; sword; steel; (pi.) chains ; irons ; fetters. Ferine, adj. firm; steady. Fenne, n. f. farm-house. Fermer, 1. v. a. to shut. Fei-rniei*, n. m. farmer. Fertilite, n. f. fertility. Feu, n. m.fire; ardor; spirit: armes a feu, firearms. Feuille, n. f. leaf; sheet. Fidele, adj. faithful. Fier, 1. v. a. to trust ; to intrust. Se fier, v. ref. to trust ; to confide. Figue, n. f.fig. Figui*ati-f, ve, adj. figurative. Figurativeinent, adv. figuratively. Figure, n. f. figure ; form ; face. Fil, n. m. thread. Fille, n. f. girl; maid; daughter: pe- tite-fille, granddaughter. Fils, n. m. son .• petit tils, grandson. Fin, e, adj.^e; slender. Fin, n. f. end; close. Finii*, 2. v. a. to finish. Flatter, 1. v. a. to flatter. Se flatter, v. ref. to flatter one's self. Flatterie, n. f. flattery. Flatteu-r, se, adj. flattering. Flatteu-r, n. m. se, n. f. flatterer. Fleclie, n. f. arrow. Flecliir, 2. v. n. to bend. Fletrir, 2. v. a. to cause to fade. Se fle- trir, v. ref. to fade. Fleur, u. f. flower. Fleurir, 2. v. n. to bloom ; to flourish. FLOTTE 302 GRACE Flotte, n. f. fleet. Foi, n. f. faith. Foin, n. m. hay ; grass. Foire, n. i'.fair. Fois, n. f. time (with regard to repeti- tion). Folie, n. f. madness ; folly. Fonder, 1. v. a. to found. Se fonder, v. ref. to rely. Foudre, 4. v. a. to melt ; to dissolve. Force, n. f. strength ; might ; force ; (pi.) forces ; troops ; strength. Forcer, 1. v. a. to force; to compel. Foret, n. f. forest. Formaliser (Se), 1. v. ref. to be of- fended. Former, 1. v. a. to form ; to shape. Se former, v. ref. to form ; to take a form ; to be made up. Fort, e, adj. strong ; courageous. Fort, adv. very ; much. Fortement, adv. strongly. Fortification, n. f. fortification. Fortune, n. f. fortune ; chance. Foil, Fol, Folle, adj. mad; insane. Foudre, n. f. thunder ; lightning. Fougue, n. f.fury; passion. Fonle, n. f. croiod. Fourchette, n. I. fork (for the table). Fournir, 2. v. a. to furnish; to supply. Foxirnir, 2. v. n. to supply ; to contrib- ute. Frais, n. m. (pi.) expense. Franc, n. m. franc. See § 33, 21. Francais, e, adj. & sub. French. Francais, 11. m. French (language). Frapper, 1. v. a. to strike ; to impress. Frande, n. f. fraud. Frederic-le-Grand, p. n. Frederic the Great. Fremir, 2. v. n. to quiver ; to tremble. Frequenter, 1. v. a. to frequent. Frere, n. m. brother. Friandise, n. f. dainty. Frissonner, 1. v. n. to shiver. Froid, e, adj. cold. Froid, n. m. cold. Fromage, n. m. cheese. Frugal, e, adj. frugal. Fruit, n. m. fruit. Fugiti-f , n. m., ve, n. f. fugitive. Fuir, 2. v. n. irr. (§ 35, 2), to flee; to take flight. Fuir, 2. v. a. irr. to flee from; to shun. Fumee, n. f. smoke. Funeste, adj. fatal. Fusil, n. m. gun. G. Gagner, 1. v. a. to earn ; to gain. Galerie, n. f. gallery. Gant, n. m. glove. Gai-con, n. m. boy ; bachelor ; loaiter. Garde, n. f. guard ; care ; custody. Garder, 1. v. a. to guard; to protect. Se garder, v. ref. (de) to beware (of) ; to refrain (from). G-arnir, 2. v. a. to furnish; to adorn. Gater, 1. v. a. to spoil ; to injure. Gauche, adj. left; awkward. Gauche, n. f. left hand; left side. General, e, adj. general. General, n. m. general. Genereu-x, se, adj. generous. Generosite, n. f. generosity. Genie, n. m. genius ; bent. Genois, e, adj. Genoese. Genre, n. m. kind ; sort; species. Gens, n. m. f. (§ 74, Ex. 3 and N.), (pi.) people ; persons ; party ; company. Geographe, n. m. geographer. Geographie, n. f. geography. Gigantesque, adj. gigantic. Glace, n. f. ice ; mirror. Glotoe, n. m. globe. Gloire, n. f. glory. Glorieu-x, se, adj. glorious. Gout, n. m. taste ; palate ; style. Goutte, n. f. drop. Gouvernement, n. m. government. Gouverner, 1. v. a. & n. to govern. Gouverneur, n. m. governor. Grace, n. f. grace ; favor ; thanks. GRADUELLEMENT 303 HYDRE Graduellement, adv. gradually. Grain, n. m. grain ; corn ; particle. Grammaire, n. f. grammar. Grand, e, adj. great; tall: large. Grande-35retagne,n.f. Great Britain. Grandeur, n. f. greatness ; magnitude. Grandir, 2. v. n. to grow large. Grand '-mere, n. f. grandmother. Grand-pere, n. m. grandfather. Gras, se, adj. fat. Graver, 1. v. a. to engrave. Gravure, n. f. engraving. Gre, n. m. will ; taste ; inclination. Grec, que, adj. Grecian : Greek. Grec, n. m. Greek. Grece, n. f. Greece. Grenier, n. m. granary. Gronder, 1. v. a. & n. to scold. Gros, se, adj. large; bulky. Gross-ier, iere, adj. coarse; rude. Grossiereinent, adv. coarsely. Guerre, n. f. tvar. Gnerrier, n. m. warrior. Guerr-ier, iere, adj. xvarlike. Guillaume, p. n. William. BL Habile, adj. able; capable. Habit, n. m. garment ; coat ; (pi.) clothes. Habitant, n. m., e, n. f. inhabitant. Habiter, 1. v. a. to inhabit. Habitude, n. f. habit. Habituer, 1. v. a. to habituate. S'ha- bituer, v. ref. to accustom one's self. Haine, n. f. hatred. Hair, v. a. irr. to detest ; to dislike. Kaleine, n. f. breath. Hardiesse, n. f. boldness. Harmonie, n. f. harmony. Harmon! eu-x, se, adj. harmonious. Hate, n. f. haste ; hurry. Haut, e, adj. high; tall. Hauteur, n. f. height ; elevation. Hectogramme, n. m. hectogramme, (see §33,2i). Henri, p. n. Henry. Her be, n. f. herb ; grass. Hercule, p. n. Nereides. Heroique, adj. heroic. Heros, n. m. hero. Heure, n. f. hour ; o'cloclc. Heureusement, adv. happily. Heui-eu-x, se, adj. happy ; fortunate. Hier, adv. yesterday. Hieroglyphe, n. m. hieroglyphic. Hirondelle, n. f. swallow. Histoire, n. f. history ; story. Historien, n. m. historian. Hiver, n. m. winter. Homere, p. n. Homer. Homme, n. m. man. Honnete, adj. honest. HonStete, n. f. honesty. Honneur, n. m. honor. Honorable, adj. honorable. Honorablement, adv. honorably. Honte, n. f. shame ; disgrace. Honteu-x, se, adj. ashamed ; disgrace- ful. Horreur, n. f. horror. Horrible, adj. horrible. Hors, prep, except ; out ; besides. Huile, n. f. oil. Huitre, n. f. oyster. Humain, e, adj. humane; human. Humanite, n. f. humanity. Humeur, n. f. humor ; moisture, Humilier, 1. v. a. to humble. Humilite, n. f. humility. Hydre, n. f. hydra. IDEE 304 INTERET I. Idee, n. f. idea; notion. Idolatrie, n. f. idolatry. Idomenee, p. n. Idomeneus. Ignorance, n. f. ignorance. Ignorer, 1. v. a. to be ignorant of. lie, u. f. island. Illustre, adj. illustrious. Image, n. f. image ; picture. Imaginaire, adj. imaginary. Imagination, n. f. imagination. Imaginer, 1. v. a. to imagine. S'ima- giner, v. ref. to imagine one's self ; to represent to one's self; to imagine. Immediatement, adv. immediately. Iinmortalite, n. f. immortality. Impatiemment, adv. impatiently. laipatience, u. f. impatience. Impatient, e, adj. impatient. Imperfection, n. f. imperfection. Impetueu-x, se, adj. impetuous. Impie, adj. impious; ungodly. Impie, n. m. f. impious person. Impiete, n. f. impiety. Implorer, 1. v. a. to implore. Importance, n. f. importance. Important, e, adj. important. Impossible, adj. impossible. Impdt, n. m. tax ; impost. Impression, n. f. impression. Imprevu, e, adj. unforeseen. Imprimer, 1. v. a. to imprint; to print. Imprudemment, adv. imprudently. Imprudence, n. f. imprudence. Impudemment, adv. impudently. Inaccessible, adj. inaccessible. Inattention, n. f. inattention. Incapable, adj. incapable. Incivil, e, adj. uncivil. Inclination, n. f. inclination. Incommode, adj. inconvenient. Inconnu, e, adj. unknown. Inconstance, n. f. inconstancy. Inconstant, e, adj. inconstant. Incredule. adj. incredulous. Indifference, n. f. indifference. Indigne, adj. unworthy ; infamous. Indigo, n. m. indigo. Indiquer, 1. v. a. to indicate. Indiscr-et, fete, adj. indiscreet. Induire, 4. v. a. to influence; to induce. Indulgence, n. f. indulgence. Inepte, adj. foolish ; silly. Infamie, n. f. infamy ; baseness. Innni, e, adj. infinite; unlimited. Infiniment, adv. infinitely. Infirmite, n. f. infirmity. Informer, 1. v. a. to inform. S'infor- mer, v. ref. to inquire. Ingenieu-x, se, adj. ingenious. Ingrat, e, adj. ungrateful. Ingratitude, n. f. ingratitude. Injure, n. f. injury. Injuste, adj. unjust. Injustice, n. f. injustice. Innocence, n. f. innocence. Innocent, e, adj. innocent. Innombrable, adj. innumerable. Innovation, n. f. innovation. Inqu-ict, iete, adj. uneasy. Inscrire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like £crire), to inscribe ; to record. Insecte, n. m. insect. Ins ens e, adj. insane; mad. Insensible, adj. unfeeling ; insensible ; imperceptible. Insignifiant, e, adj. insignificant. Insolent, e, adj. insolent. Inspirer, 1. v. a. to instil; to suggest. Instructi-f , ve, adj. instructive. Instruction, n. f. instruction. Instruire, 4. v. a. irr. to instruct. Instruit, e,(pa. p. of instruire, as adj.) well informed ; instructed. Insulte, n. f. insult. Integrity, n. f. integrity. Intelligent, e, adj. intelligent. Intemperance, n. f. intemperance. Intention, n. f. intention. Interdire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like DIRE, §46, Tab. I.), to forbid. Interessant, e, adj. interesting. Interesser, 1. v. a. to interest. S'in- teresser, to interest one's self. Interfet, n. m. interest. INTERPRETE 305 LAISSER Interprete, n. m. interpreter. Interroger, 1. v. a. to interrogate. Inter rompre, 4. v. a. (conj. like ROM- pre), to interrupt. Intervenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like VE- nir), to interfere. Intime, adj. intimate. Intrepidite, n. f. intrepidity. Introduire, 4. v. a. irr. to introduce. Inutile, adj. useless. In venter, 1. v. a. to invent. Invention, n. f. invention. Inviter, 1. v. a. to invite. Irlande, n. f. Ireland. Irriter, 1. v. a. to irritate. Israelite, n. m. f. Israelite. Italie, n. f. Italy. Italien, ne, adj. & sub. Italian. Ivre, adj. drunk ; intoxicated. Ivrognerie, n. f. drunkenness ; intoxi- cation. Jacqnes, p. n. James. Jalou-x, se, adj. jealous. Jamais, adv. ever; never. Jambe, n. f. leg. Jardin, n. m. garden. Jardi-nier,n. m., niere, n.f. gardener. Jaime, adj. yellow. Jaune, n. m. yellow. Jeter, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 4), to throw ; to cast ; to send forth ; to utter. Se jeter, v. ref. to cast or throw one's self; to rush ; to fall upon. Jen, n. m. play ; sport. Jeune, adj. young. Jeunesse, n. f. youth. Joie, n. f.joy. Joindre, 4. v. a. to join. Joli, e, adj. pretty ; nice. Jouer, 1. v. n. & a. to play. Se jouer, v. ref. to play; to sport. Jong, n. m. yoke. Jouir, 2. v. n. to enjoy ; to possess. Jonjon, n. m. plaything. Jour, n. m. day; light: quinze jours, fortnight : tous les jours, every day. Journee, n. f. day (referring to dura- tion). Joyau, n. m. jewel. Joyeu-x, se, adj. joyful. Juge, n. m. judge. Jugement, n. m. judgment. Jules-Cesar, p. n. Julius Caesar. Jument, n. f. mare. Jurisprudence, n. f. jurisprudence. Jus que, prep, to ; as far as ; until. Juste, adj.. just. Justice, n. f. justice. Justification, n. f. justification. K. Kilogramme, n. m. kilogramme. See § 33, 21. L. I^a, adv. there ; (as an affix) that liaborieu-x, se, adj. laborious. Labourer, 1. v. a. to till; to Kiaboureur, n. ra. husbandman. 26* Iiafoyrinthe, n. m. labyrinth. Xtache, adj. slack; lax; indolent. liaine, n. f. wool ; worsted. liaisser, 1. v. a. to leave. LAIT 306 MALHEUEEUX Lait, n. m. milk. Langue, n. m. tongue ; language. JL.angu.ir, 2. v.n. to languish. Languissant, e,adj. languishing. Large, adj. broad; wide; large. Largeur, n. f. breadth ; width. Laurier, n. m. laurel; bay. leaver, 1. v. a. to wash. Lecon, n. f. lesson. Leeteur, n. m., trice, n. f. reader ; lec- turer. Lecture, n. f. reading. Leg-er, ere, adj. light; slender. Legerete, n. f. lightness. Legislateur, n. m. legislator. Legume, n. m. vegetable. Lentement, adv. slowly. Lettre, n. f. letter; (pi.) letters; litera- ture : belles-lettres, polite literature ; belles-lettres. Lever, 1. v. a. to raise; to elevate. Se lever, v. ref. to rise. Liberal, e, adj. liberal ; generous. Liberie, n. f. liberty. Libraire, n. m. bookseller. Libre ment, adv. freely ; boldly. Lie, n. f. lees ; dregs. Lier, 1. v. a. to bind. Se lier, v. ref. to be connected. Lieu, n. m. place; spot; stead. Lieutenant, u. ra. lieutenant. Limite, n. f. limit ; boundary. Liqueur, n. f. liquor. Lire, 4. v. a. irr. to read. Lisible, adj. legible; readable. Lit, n. m. bed. Litteraire, adj. literary. Livre, n. m. book. Livre, n. f. pound. Livrer, 1. v. a. to deliver ; to confide. Se livrer, v. ref. to deliver one's self. Loi, n. f. law. Loin, "adv. far. Loisir, n. m. leisure. Londres, n. London. Long, ue, adj. long. Longtemps, adv. a long time. Longueur, n. f. length. Louange, n. f. praise. Louer, 1. v. a. to praise. Louis, p. n. Lewis. Lucain, p. n. Lucan. Lucrece, p. n. Lucretius. Lumiere, n. f. light ; intelligence. Lune, u. f. moon. Lustre, n. m. lustre ; splendor. Lutli, n. m. lute. Luxe, n. m. luxury. T\T. M. (contraction for Monsieur), Mr. Macbination, n. f. machination. Machine, n. f. machine. Madame, n. f., pi. Mesdaraes, lady; madam ; (when the name follows) Mrs. Mademoiselle, n. f., pi. Mesdemoi- selles, Miss, Misses. Magistrat, n. m. magistrate. Mai, n. m. May. Main, n. f. hand. Maintenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like TE- nir), to maintain; to support. Mais, conj. but ; why. Maison, n. f. house ; family ; race. Maitre, n. m. master. Maitresse, n. f. mistress. Majeste, n. f. Majestueu-x, se, adj. majestic. Majority, n. f. majority. Mai, adv. (comp. pis; plus mal, §40), badly ; ill ; amiss. Mal. n. m. pi. (Maux) evil; injury ; mis- fortune; trouble. Malade, adj. sick ; ill. Maladie, n. f. illness ; disease. Malgr6, prep, in spite of. Malheur, n. m. misfortune; unhappi- ness. Mallieureusement, adv .unfortunate- ly ; unhappily. Malheureu-x, se, adj. unfortunate ; unhappy. MALHEUREUX 307 MINE Malneureu-x, n. m., se, n. f. loretched person. MalhonnSte, adj. dishonest. Malice, n. f. malice ; malignity. Malle, n. f. trunk ; mail (coach). Maltraiter, 1. v. a. to maltreat. Mancliette, n. f. ruffle ; cuff. Manger, 1. v. a. to eat ; to squander. Manger, 1. v. n. to eat. Maniere, n. f. manner ; way ; (pi.) manners ; deportment. Manifester, 1. v. a. to manifest. Se manifester, v. ref. to manifest one's self. Manquer, 1. v. n. to err ; to fail ; to be wanting. Mantinee, n. Manlinea. Mantoue, n. f. Mantua. Manuel, n. m. manual. Manufacture, n. f. factory; mill ; (pi.) mills ; manufactures. Manufacturer, l.v. a. to manufacture. Manuscrit, n. m. manuscript. Mare-Aurele, p. n. Marcus Aurelius. Marchand, n. m. dealer; shopkeeper. See Negociant. Marchandise, n. f. merchandise. Marehe, n. m. market ; bargain. Marcher, 1. v. n. to walk ; to travel. Marecageu-x, se, adj. marshy. Marechal, n. m. marshal. Mariage, n. m. marriage. Marie, p. n. Mary. Marier, 1. v. a. to marry. Se marier, v. ref. to get married. Marin, n. m. sailor ; mariner. Mars, n. m. Mars ; March. Masque, n. m. mask. Mat, n. m. mast. Matelas, n. m. mattress. Matelot, n. m. sailor ; seaman. Matheniatiques, n. f. (pi.) mathe- matics. Matin, n. m. morning. Matinee, n. f. morning. Maturity, n. f. maturity. Maudire, 4. v. a. irr. to curse. Mauvais, e, adj. bad: evil; ill. Mechancete, n. f. ivickedness. Mechant, e, adj. bad ; toicked. Meconnaitre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like connaitre), not to recognize. Mecontent, e, adj. discontented. Medecin, n. ra. physician. Medire, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like dire, § 36, Tab. I;) (de) to speak ill (of). Mediter, 1. v. a. to meditate upon. Mediterranee (Xja), n. f. the Mediter- ranean. Meilleur, e, adj. (comp. of bon, § 19, R. 1), better. Melange, n. m. mixture. MSler, 1. v. a. to mingle. Se meler, v. ref. to mingle ; to mix. Meinbre, n. m. limb ; member. MSme, adj. same; even; steady : him- self ; herself; itself; themselves. Meme, adv. even; likeioise. Memoire, n. f. memory. Memoire, n. m. bill ; memorandum. Memorable, adj. memorable. Menacer, l.v. a. to threaten. Mendier, 1. v. n. to beg. Mener, 1. v. a. (§35, 3), to lead. Mensonge, n. m. untruth ; lying. Menteu-r, n. m., se, n. f. liar. Meprendre (Se), 4. v. ref. to be mis- taken. Mepris, n. m. contempt. Meprise, n. f. error ; mistake. Mepriser, 1. v. a. to despise. Mer, n. f. sea. Mer Glaciale, n. f. Frozen Ocean .-Mer Rouge, Red Sea. Mere, n. f. mother. Merite, n. m. merit. Meriter, 1. v. a. & n. to deserve. Messag-er, n. m., ere, n. f. messen- ger. Mesure, n. f. measure. Methode, n. f. method. Metre, n. m. metre. See §33, 21. Mettre, 4. v. a. irr. to put; to place ; to set ; to put on. Se mettre, v. ref. to place one , s self; to become. Meuoler, 1. v. a. to furnish. Meurtrir, 2. v. a. to bruise ; to kill. Midi, n. ra. noon ; midday ; south. Mieux, adv. (comp. of Men), better (§ 40). Milieu, n. m. middle ; midst ; mean. Militaire, adj. military. Mille, n. m. (pi. Milles), mile. Mine, n. f. mine. MINERVB 308 NIER Minerve, p. n. Minerva. Ministre, n. m. minister ; clergyman. Minute, n. f. minute. Minutieusement, adv. minutely. Miracle, n. m. miracle. Miroir, n. m. mirror. Miseraolement, adv. miserably. Misere, u. f. misery. Misericord.ieu.-x, se, adj. merciful. Mobile, adj. movable. Mobile, n. m. moving power ; motive. Mode, n. f. mode ; fashion. Modele, n. m. model ; pattern. Moderation, n. f. moderation. Modeste, adj. modest. Modestie, n. f. modesty. Moeurs, n. f. (pi.) manners ; morals. Moindre, adj. (comp. of petit), less. Moins, adv. (comp. of pen), less. Moins, n. m. least ; less ; fewest. Mois, n. m. month. Moitie,n. f. half. Moka, u. Mocha. Moment, n. m. moment. Monarchic, n. f. monarchy. Monde, n. m. world ; people. Monsieur, n. m. gentleman ; sir : mas- ter ; (when the name follows) Mr. Monstrueu-x, se, monstrous. Montre, n. f. watch. Montrer, 1. v. a. to shoto. Se montrer, V. ref. to appear. Monument, n. m. monument. Moquer (Se), 1. v. ref. to mock. Moqueu-r, se, adj. mocking. Morale, n. f. morals, ethics. Mordre, 4. v. a. to bite. Mort, e, adj. dead. Mort, n. f. death. Mortel, le, adj. mortal. Mot, n. m. word ; expression Motif, n. m. motive. Mouchoir, n. m. handkerchief. Moudre, 4. v. a. irr. to grind. Mourir, 2. v. n. irr. to die. Mousseline n. f. muslin. Moutarde, n. f. mustard. Mouton, n. m. sheep ; mutton. Mouvoir, 3. v. a. to move. Moyen, n. m. means ; circumstances ; pecuniary circumstances. Muet, te, adj. dumb; speechless; mute. Multitude, n. f. multitude. Mur, n. m. wall. Mux*, e, adj. ripe; mature. Muraille, n. f. ivall ; rampart. Murmure, n. m. murmur. Muse, n. f. muse. Musique, n. f. music. Mutuel, le, adj. mutual. IN". Nager, 1. v. n. (§35, 1), to swim. Nageoire, n. f.fin. 3Yai-f. ve, adj. artless ; ingenuous. Naissance, n. f. birth; extraction. Naitre, 4. v. n. irr. to be born. Nation, n. f. nation. Naturaliste, n. m. naturalist. Nature, n. f. nature. Naturel, le, adj. natural. Naturellement, adv. naturally. Naufrage, n. m. shipwreck. Ne (Avith pas or point, § 125, 1-6), not .• ne . . . que, only ; ne . . . guere, but lit- tle ; ne . . . guere que, but little except ; ne . . . plus, no longer ; ne . . . plus que, no longer anything except ; no more un- til ; ne . . .jamais, never; ne . . . jamais que, never anything except ; never until. ]\ecessaire, adj. necessary. IVecessite, n. f. necessity. Wef , n. m. nave. Negligence, n. f. negligence. Negliger, 1. v. a. to neglect. Se negli- ger, v. ref. to neglect one's self. Negociant, n. m. merchant (large deal- er). See Marchand. Neige, n. f. snow. Neu-f, ve, adj. new" 1 , (recently made). Ni, conj. neither .- ni . . . ni, neither . . nor. Nid, n. m. nest. Nier, 1- v. a. to deny. NIL 309 OVIDE Nil, n. m. Nile. Niveau, n. m. level. Noble, adj. noble ; great. Noble, n. m. nobility ; noble} nobleman. Noir, e, adj. black ; dark. Noir, n. m. black. Noirceur, n. f. blackness. Bfom, n. m. name. Kfombre, n. m. number. Nord, n. m. north. Notifier, 1. v. a. to notify. Notion, n. f. notion. Nourrice, n. f. nurse ; wet-nurse. Nou-veau, vel, velle, adj. new. Nouvelle, n. f. news. Noyer, 1. v. a. to drown. Se noyer, v. ref. to be drowned. Nuire, 4. v.n. irr. to injure. Nuisible, adj. injurious. Nu.it, n. f. night ; darkness. Nymphe, n. f. nymph. o. Obeir, 2. v. n. to obey. Obeissance, n. f. obedience. Objet, n. m. object ; end. Obligation, n. f. obligation. Obligeant, e, adj. obliging. Obliger, 1. v. a. to oblige. Obscur, e, dark ; obscure. Obscurite, n. f. obscurity. Observer, 1. v. a. to observe. Obstacle, n. m. obstacle. Obtenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like TENIR), to obtains to procure. S'obtenir, v. ref. to be obtained. Occasion, n. f. occasion ; opportunity. Occident, n. m. west. Occupation, n. f. occupation. Occuper, 1. v. a. to occupy. S'occuper, v. ref. to be engaged. Ocean, n. m. ocean. Ocean Atlantique, Atlantic Ocean. Octobre, n. m. October. Odorat, n. m. smell. Q2il, n. m. (pi. Yeux), eye. OSui, n. m. egg. Officier, n. m. officer. Offrir, 2. v. a. irr. to offer. Oiseau, n. m. bird ; fowl. Olive, n. f. olive. Ombre, n. f. shadow. Omettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like MET- tre), to omit; to pass over. Oncle, n. m. uncle. Opera, n. m. opera. Opinion, n. f. opinion. Opposer, 1. v. a. to oppose. S'opposer, v. ref. to be opposed. Oppose, adj. opposite ; facing. Opprimer, 1. v. a. to oppress. Or, n. m. gold. Orange, n. f. orange. Orange, n. m. orange (color). Orateur, n. m. orator ; speaker. Ordinaire, adj. ordinary. Ordinaire, n. m. ordinary practice. Ordinairement, adv. ordinarily. Ordonner, 1. v. a. to ordain. Ordre, n. m. order ; mandate. Oreille, n. f. ear ; hearing. Orgueil, n. m. pride. Orient, n. m. East. Origine, n. f. origin; source. Ornement. n. m. ornament. Orner, 1. v. a. to adorn ; to ornament. Orphee, p. n. Orpheus. Orphelin, n. m., e, n. f. orphan. Os, n. m. bone. Oser, 1. v. n. (inf.) to dare to. Ostentation, n. f. ostentation. Oter, 1. v. a. to take away. Ou, adv. where ; whither ; when, Oublier, 1. v. a. to forget. Ouest, n. m. west. Ouite, n. f. hearing. Ourlet, n. m. hem. Outrager, 1. v. a. to outrage. Outre, prep, beyond; above; besides. Outre, adv. beyond ; farther. Ouverture, n. f. opening. Ouvrage, n. m. work. Ouvrir, 2. v. a. irr. to open. Ovide, p. n. Ovid. PACIFIER 310 PERMISSION I*. Pacifier, 1. v. a. to pacify. Page, u. f.page. Paien, ne, adj. & sub. pagan. Pain, n. m. bread. PaStre, 4. v. a. irr. to graze upon. Paitre, 4. v. n. irr. (sur), to graze (tipon). Paix, n. f. peace. Palais, n. m. palace; mansion. Pale, adj. pale. Palladium, n. m. palladium. Palmier, n. m. palm tree. Palpalile, adj. palpable. Panegyriste, n. ra. panegyrist. Papier, n. m. paper. Par, prep, by ; through ; by reason of. in ; for ; per : a ; during. Paraitre, 4. v. n. irr. to appear. Pare, n. in. park. Paree que, conj. because. Parcourir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like COU- rir), to go over ; to traverse. Pardon, n. m. pardon. Pardonnafole, adj. pardonable. Pardoiuier, 1. v. a. to forgive. Pareil, le, adj. alike ; such. Parent, n. m., e, n. f. relation. Paresse, n. f. idleness. Paresseu-x, se, adj. slothful. Parfait, e, adj . perfect. Parlant, e, adj. speaking ; expressive. Parlement, n. ra. parliament. Parler, 1. v. a. & n. to speak. Parmi, prep, among. Paroisse, n. f. parish. Parole, n. f. word; speech. Part, n. f. share ; part ; interest. Parti, n. m. party ; cause ; course. Participation, n. f. participation. Particul-ier, iere, ^.particular. Particnlier, n. m. particular (single instance) ; private individual. Particulierement, adv. particularly. Partie, n. f. part ; portion. Partir, 2. v. n. irr. to depart. Partout, adv. everywhere. Parvenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like te- nir), to attain ; to reach ; to succeed. Pas, adv. not; no ; not any. See Ne. Passage, n. m. passage ; voyage. Passer, 1. v. n. to pass ; to pass away ; to happen. Passer, 1. v. a. to pass ; to spend. Se passer, v. ref. to pass ; to pass away ; to take place. Passion, n. f. passion. Passionne, e, adj. ardent. Pathetique, adj. pathetic. Patiemment, adv. patiently. Patience, n. f. patience. Patient, e, adj.^>«^e/^. Patrie, n. f. native country. Patriotisme, n. m. patriotism. Panpiere, n. f. eyelid ; eyelash. Pauvre, adj. poor ; needy. Pavilion, n. f. pavilion ; flag. Payer, 1. v. a. to pay ; to pay for. Pays, n. m. country. Paysage, n. m. landscape. PSche, n. f. peach. Peindre, 4. v. a. irr. to paint. Peine, n. f.j^enalty; punishment. Peintre, n. m. painter. Peinture, n. f. painting. Pendant, prep, during. Pendant que, conj. while; whilst. Pcnsee, n. f. thought ; opinion. Penser, 1. v. n. («), to think (of= upon); (de) to think = judge (of). Pension, n. f. boarding school. Per cant, e, adj . piercing. Percevoir, 3. v. a. to collect. Perdre, 4. v. a. to lose. Se perdre, v. ref. to be lost. Pere, n. ra. father. Perfection, n. f. perfection. Perfectionner, 1. v. a. to perfect. Peril, n. m. peril. Perle, n. f. pearl. Perniettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like MET- tre), to permit. Permission, n. f. permission. PERNICIEUX 311 POUDRE pernicious. Pernicieu-x, se, ; Perou, n. m. Peru. Perpetuel, le, ad], perpetual. Perse, n. f. Persia. Perse, adj. & sub. Persian. Persecuter, 1. v. a. to persecute. Perseveramment, adv. perseveringly . Perseverance, n. f. perseverance. Personne, n. f. person; body. Personnel, le, adj . personal. Persuader, 1. v. a. to persuade. Perte, n. f. loss ; waste. Perversite, n. f. perversity. Petit, e, adj. little; small. Pen, adv. & n. m. little ; few. Peuple, n. m. people ; multitude. Penpler, 1. v. a. to people. Se peupler, v. ref. to be peopled. Peur, n. f.fear ; fright. Peut-etre, adv. perhaps. Pharsale, n. f. Pharsalia .• la Pharsale, the Pharsalia, the only poem of Lu- can's still extant. Phenomene, n. m. phenomenon. Philippe, p. n. Philip. Philoctete, p. n. Philoctetes. Philosophe, n. m. philosopher. Philosophic, n. f. philosophy : Phrase, n. f. phrase. Piece, n. f. piece ; performance. Pied, n. to., foot. Piege, n. m. snare ; trap. Pierre, n. f. stone. Pigeon, n. m. pigeon. Pilier, n. m. pillar. Pincean, n. m. brush. Pire, adj. (comp. of mauvais), worse. Pis, adv. (comp. of mal, § 40), worse. Pisistrate, p. n. Pisistratus. Pistolet, n. m. pistol. Pitie, n. f. pity ; compassion. Place, n. f. place ;' spot. Placer, 1. v. a. to place; to put. Plaie, n. f. wound. Plaindre, 4. v. a. irr. to pity ; to grudge. Se plaindre, v. ref. to complain ; to re- pine. Plaine, n. f. plain. Plainte, n. f. complaint. Plainti-f, ve, adj. plaintive. Plaire, 4. v. n. irr. to please. Plaisir, n. m. pleasure. Plan, n. m.plan. Plante, n. f. plant. Plat, e, adj. flat; level. Plat, n. m. dish. Plate-bande, n. f. (pi. Plates-bandes) (§ 13, 1), (hort.) border ; flower-bed. Platon, p. n. Plato. Plein, e, &d'}.full. Pleuvoir, 2. v. n. irr. (imp.), to rain. Pline, p. n. Pliny. Plomto, n. m. lead. Pluie, n. f. rain. Plume, n. f. feather ; pen. Plnpart, n. f. most part. Plus, adv. (comp. of beaucoup), more. Plusieurs, adj. pi. several. Plutarque, p. n. Plutarch. Plutdt, adv. rather ; sooner. Poeme, n. m. poem. Poesie, n. f. poetry. Poete, n. m. poet ; poetess. Poids, n. m. weight. Point, n. m. point. Point, adv. not ; not at all ; not any. Poire, n. f.pear. Poison, n. m. poison. Poisson, n. m.flsh. Poitrine, n. f. breast. Poivre, n. m. pepper. Poli, e, ad}, polished. Polir, 2. v. a. to polish. Politesse, n. f. politeness. Politique, adj. political. Pomme, n. f. apple. Pommier, n. m. apple tree. Pompe, n. f.pomp. Pont, n. m. bridge. Population, n. f. population. Porte, n. f. door ; gate. Porter, 1. v. a. to carry; to bear. Se porter, v. ref. to repair ; to proceed ; to demean one's self; to do. Portrait, n. m.portrait. Portugais, e, adj. & sub. Portuguese. Posseder, 1, v. a. (§ 35, 3), to possess. Possession, n. f. possession. Posterity, n. f. posterity. Pot, n. m. pot ; jug. Ponce, n. m. thumb ; inch. Poudre, n. f. dust ; powder* POUR 312 PROSCRIBE Pour, prep, for ; on account of; for the sake of; (inf.) in order to. Pourquoi, adv. why ; wherefore. Ponrsuivre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like suivre), to pursue. Pour suite, n. f. pursuit. Pourvoir, 3. v. n. irr. to provide. Pourvu que, conj. (subj.) provided. Ponssiere, n. f. dust ; powder. Pouvoir, 3. v. n. irr. to be able ; can. Pouvoir, n. m. power. Prairie, n. f. meadow (extensive) ; (in America), prairie. Pratique, n. f. practice. Pratique, adj. practical. Pratiquer, 1. v. a. to practise. Precepteur, n. f. tutor. Precber, 1. v. a. to preach. Precieu-x, se, adj. precious. Precipiter, 1. v. a. to precipitate. Se precipiter, v. ref. to precipitate one's self; to rush. Precis, e, adj. precise. Predire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like DIRE), to foretell ; to predict. Preferable, adj. preferable. Preferer, 1. v. a. to prefer. Prejuge, n. m. prejudice. Prendre, 4. v. a. irr. to take ; to seize ; to catch ; to put on. Pres, prep, near; close by ; in compari- son. Pres, adv. : a peu pres, nearly. Prescrire, 4. v. a. irr. to prescribe. Presence, n. f. presence. Present, e, adj. present. Present, n. m. present ; gift. Presenter, 1. v. a. to present. President, n. m. president. Presoniptueu-x, se, adj. presumptu- ous. Presque, adv. almost; nearly. Pressentir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like sen- tir), to have a presentiment of Pr£t, e, adj. ready. Pretendre, 4. v. n. to pretend. PrSter, 1. v. a. to lend. Preuve, n. f. proof. Prevaloir, 3. v. n. irr. to prevail. Prevenant, e, adj. prqjossessing . Prevenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like VE- nir), to precede; to prevent; to preju- dice. , Prevoir, 3. v. a. irr. (conj. like voir), to foresee. Prier, 1. v. a. to pray. Primiti-f, ve, adj. primitive. Prince, n. m. prince. Princesse, n. f. princess. Principal, e, adj. principal. Principe, n. ra. beginning. Printemps, n. m. spring. Prisonn-ier, n. m., iere, n. f. prisoner- Priver, 1. v. a. to deprive. Privilege, n. m. privilege. Prix, n. m. price ; cost. Probable, adj. probable. Probablement, adv. probably. Probite, n. f. probity. Procbain, e, adj. near ; next. Prochain, n. m. neighbor. Procurer, 1. v. a. to procure. Procureur, n. m. agent. Prodigue, adj. prodigal. Production, n. f. production. Produire, 4. v. a. irr. to produce* Profitable, adj. profitable. Profiter, 1. v. n. to profit. Profond, e, adj. deep ; profound. Profondeur, n. f. depth. Progres, n. in. progress. Projet, n. m. project. Promenade, n. f. tvalking ; walk. Promener, 1. v. a. to take out to walk or ride. Se promener, v. ref. to walk ; to take a walk ; to go for a walk. Promesse, n. f. promise. Promettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like MET- tre), to promise. Prompt, e, adj. prompt. Promptement, adv. promptly. Proportion, n. f. proportion. Propos, n. m. thing said in conversa- tion ; purpose ; design. Proposer, 1. v. a. to propose. Se pro< poser, v. ref. to propose. Proposition, n. f. proposition. Propre, adj. appropriate. Proprete, n. f. cleanliness. Propriete, n. f. property. Proscrire, 4. v. n. irr. (conjugated like 1 fecRiRE), to proscribe; to outlaw; (0 banish. PROSPERITB 313 RECONNAISSANT Prosperity, n. f. prosperity. Protec-teur, n.m., trice, n. f., protec- tor ; protectress. Proteger, 1. v. a. irr. to protect. Prouver, 1. v. a. to prove. Provenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like VE- nir), to proceed. Proverbe, n. m. proverb. Providence, n. £. Providence. Province, n. f. province. Prudemment, adv. prudently. Prudence, n. f. prudence. Prudent, e, ad), prudent. Prusse, n. f. Prussia. Publi-c, que, adj. & sub. public. Puis que, conj. since. Puissant, e, adj . powerful. Punir, 2. v. a. tojmnish. Punition, n. f. punishment. Pythagore, p. n. Pythagoras. <*. Qualite, u. f. quality. Quand, adv. when. Quant a, adv. as to ; as for. Quantite, n. f. quantity. Quart, n. m. quarter. Que, conj. that, as, when; (in exclama- tions) how, how much, how many; (in comparisons) as, than; (subj.) that, let, until ; whether, if, unless. Quelque, adj. some, any ; (pi.) a few. Quelquefois, adv. sometimes. Querir, 2. v. a. def. to fetch. Question, n. f. question. Queue, n. f. tail. Quitter, 1. v. a. to leave ; to quit. Quoi ! int. what ! how ! Quoique, conj. (subj.) though; al- though. R. Racheter, 1. v. a. to repurchase; to ransom ; to redeem. Rafrafchissant, e, adj. refreshing. Raisin, n. m. grapes ; raisin. Raison, n. f. reason ; cause. Raiso unable, adj. reasonable. Ramener, 1. v. a. to bring back. Rampant, e, adj. creeping. Rancon, n. f. ransom. Rang, n. m. rank. Ranimer, 1. v. a. to reanimate. Rapide, adj. rapid. Rapidement, adv. rapidly. Rapport, n. m. report; rumor; accord- ance ; harmony. Rapporter, 1. v. a. to bring bade; to yield ; to report ; to set forth. Rare, adj. scarce; rare. Rarement, adv. seldom ; rarely. Rasoir, n. mi ratfehr. 27 Rasseoir, 3. v. a. irr. (conj. like as- seotr), to re-seat. Se rasseoir, v. ref. to sit down again. Ratiner, 1. v. a. to ratify. Rayon, n. m. ray ; beam. Rebatir, 2. v. a. (conj. like batir), to rebuild. Rebattre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like bat- tre), to beat again. Reboire, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like boire), to drink again. Recevoir, 3. v. a. to receive. Recnercher, 1. v. a. to seek again. Reciproque, adj. reciprocal. Recommander, 1. v. a. to recommend. Recompense, n. f. reward. Recompenser, 1. v. a. to reward. Reconduire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like CONDUIRe), to reconduct. Reconnaissant, e, adj. grateful. RECONNAITRE 314 REPRENDRE Reconnaitre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like connaItre), to recognize ; to acknowl- edge. Becoudre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like COU- dre), to sew again. Kecomir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like COU- bir), to run again. Recouvrir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like COU- vrir), to cover again ; (of books) to have rebound. Recrire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like ecrire), to reiorite. Recueillir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like CUE- illir), to reap; to collect. Redefaire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like faire), to undo again. Redevaole, adj. indebted. Redevoir, 3. v. a. to owe still. Redire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like dire, §36, Tab. I.), to repeat ; to tell again. Reduire, 4. v. a. irr. to reduce. Keel, le, adj. real. Reellement, adj. really. Refaire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like faire), to remake ; to begin again ; to renew. Reflechir, 2. v. a. & n. to reflect. Reflexion, n. f. reflection. Ref ondre, 4. v. a. to recast. Reformer, 1. v. a. to reform. Refuge, n. m. refuge. Refus, n. m. refusal. Refuser, 1. v. a. & n. to refuse. Regarder, l.v. a. to look at; to con- sider. Regiment, n. m. regiment. Registre, n. m. register. Regie, n. f. rule. Reglement, n. m. regulation. Regler, 1. v. a. to rule. Regne, n. m. reign ; prevalence. Regner, 1. v. n. to reign. Regretter, 1. v. a. to regret. Regul-ier, it;re, adj. regular. Regulierement, adv. regularly. Heine, n. f. queen. Rejeter, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 4), to throw again ; to throw back. Rejowir, 2. v. a. (conj. like JOUIR), to rejoice ; to delight. Relever, 1. v. a. to raise again. Se re- lever, v. ref. to rise again. Relier, 1. v. a. to bind (books). Religieu-x, se, adj. religious. Religion, n. f. religion. Relire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like lire), to read again. Reluire, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like luire), to shine ; to glitter. Remede, n. m. remedy. Bemercier, 1. v. a. to thank. Remerciment, Remerciement, n. m. thanks ; (pi.) thanks. Remettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like met- tre), to put back; to give up; to put off. Remoudre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like mou- dre), to grind again. Remplir, 2. v. a. to fill again ; to fill ; to perform ; to execute. Reniporter, 1. v. a. to take back. Bemner, 1. v. a. & n. to move. "> Renaitre, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like nai- tre), to be born again. Rencontrer, 1. v. a. to meet. Rendi-e, 4. v. a. to return. Se rendre, v. ref. to render or make one's self; to repair ; to resort ; to yield. Renforcex*, 1. v. a. to strengthen. Renoncer, 1. v. n. to renounce. Rentrer, 1. v. n. to reenter. Renverser, 1. v. a. to reverse; to over- throw. Renvoyer, 1. v. a. (§ 35, 2), to send again ; to return. Repattre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like paI- tre), to feed; to nourish. Se repaitre, v. ref. to feed. Repandre, 4. v. a. to pour ; to shed. Se repandre, v. ref. to be spread. Reparaitre, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like pa- raitre), to reappear. Reparer, 1. v. a. to repair. Repartir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like par- tir), to set out again. Repentir (Se), 2. v. ref. to repent. Repliquer, 1. v. n. to reply. Repondre, 4. v. n. to answer. Reponse, n. f. answer; reply. Repos, n. m. rest ; repose. Reposer, 1. v. a. to put ; to lay again. Se reposer, v. ref. to rest ; to lie down. Reprendre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like REPRESENTANT 315 RUSSIE prendre), to take again ; to take hack ; to rebuke. Represeiitant, n. m. representative. Representati-f, ve, adj. representa- tive. Representer, 1. v. a. to represent. Reprimer, 1. v. a. to repress. Reprocher, 1. v. a. to reproach. Reptile, n. m. reptile. Republique, n. f. republic. Repugnance, n. f. repugnance. Reputation, n. f. reputation. Requerir, 2. v. a. irr. to request. Requete, n. f. petition. Reserve, e, adj. reserved. Resignation, n. f. resignation. Register, 1. v. n. to resist. Resolution, n. f. resolution. Resoudre, 4. v. a. irr. to resolve ; to melt. Se resoudre, v. ref. to be resolved. Respect, n. m. respect. Respecter, 1. v. a. to respect. Respectueu-x, se, adj. respectful. Ressentir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like sen- tir), to experience. Ressort, n. m. spring ; elasticity. Ressortir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like SOR- tir), to go out again. Ressource, n. f. resource. Res souvenir (Se), v. ref. (conj. like venir), to remember. Reste, n. m. remainder. Rester, 1. v. n. to remain. Resultat, n. m. result. Retablir, 2. v. a. to reestablish. Retenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like TENIR), to have again ; to retain. Retirer, 1. v. a. to withdraw. Se reti- rer, v. ref. to withdraw. Retour, n. m. return. Retourner, 1. v. n. to return, Retractex*, 1. v. a. to retract ; to recall. Se retracter, v. ref. to retract ; to re- cant. Retranchement, n. m. retrenchment ; intrenchment. Reussir, 2. v. n. to succeed. Revaloir, 3. v. a. irr. (conj. like VA- loir), to repay; to return. Reveler, 1. v. a. to disclose : to reveal. Revenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like venir), to return ; to come again. Revenu, n. m. revenue. Re vers, n. m. reverse. Revivre, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like vivre), to rise from the dead. Revoir, 3. v. a. irr. (conj. like voir), to see again ; to meet again. Revolte, n. f. revolt. Revolter, 1. v. a. to excite. Se revol- ter, v. ref. to rebel ; to revolt. Revolution, n. f. revolution. Revue, n. f. survey ; review. Rhin, n. m. Rhine. Riche, adj. rich. Riche, n. m. rich man. Richesse, n. f. riches; wealth. Rideau, n. m. curtain. Ridicule, adj. ridiculous. Ridicule, n. m. ridicule. Rien, n. m. nothing ; anything. Rigoureu-x, se, adj. rigorous. Rigueur, n. f. rigor. Rire, 4. v. n. irr. to laugh. Rire, n. m. laughter. j Risque, n. m. risk. Rivaliser, 1. v. n. to rival. Riviere, n. f. river. Robe, n. f. dress ; gown. Rocher, n. m. rock. Roi, n. m. king. Romain, e, adj. & sub. Roman. Roman, n. m. novel ; romance. Rompre, 4. v. a. & n. to break. Rouge, adj. red. Rouge, n. m. red ; rouge ; color. Rouvrir, 2. v. a. (conj. like OUVRIR), to open again. Royaume, n. m. kingdom ; realm. Ruban, n. m. ribbon. Rue, n. f. street. Ruine, n. f. ruin. Ruisseau, n. m. stream ; brook. Russie, n. f. Russia. SACRIFIER 316 SINCERE S. Sacrifier, 1. v. a. to sacrifice. Se sacri- fier, v. ref. to sacrifice one's self. Sage, adj. wise ; (of children) good. Sage, n. m. wise man ; sage. Sagement, adv. wisely. Sagesse, n. f. wisdom. Sain, e, adj. sound; healthful. Saint, e, adj. holy; sacred. Saintet6, n. f. holiness. Saison, n. f. season. Salade, n. f. salad. Salaire, n. m.pay; wages. Salente, n. Salentum. Salle, n. f. hall .- salle a manger, dining- room. Salomon, p. n. Solomon. Salon, n. m. drawing-room. Salpetre, n. m. saltpetre. Saint, n. m. safety. Salutaire, adj. salutary. Sanctuaire, n. m. sanctuary. Sang, n. m. blood ; kindred. Sanglant, e, adj. bloody. Sanguinaire, adj. sanguinary. Sans, prep, without. Sante, n. f. health. Satirique, adj. satirical. Satisfaction, n. f. satisfaction. Satisfaire, 4. v. a. irreg. (conj. like faire), to satisfy. Satnrne, n. m. Saturn. Sauvage, adj. loild ; uncivilized. Sauver, 1. v. a. to save. Savant, e, adj. learned. Savant, n. m., e, n. f., scholar ; learned man or woman ; (pi.) scholars ; literati. Savoir, 3. v. a. irr. to know. Scene, n. f. scene. Science, n. f. science. Scipion, p. n. Scipio : Scipion l'Afri- cain, Scipio Africanus. Scrnpnle, n. m. scruple ; qualm. Sculpteur, n. m. sculptor. Sculpture, n. f. sculpture. Scythe, adj. & sub. Scythian. Secourir, 2. v. a. irr. to succor. Secours, n. m. assistance. Secr-et, ete, adj. secret. Secret, n. m. secret ; secrecy. Secretement, adv. secretly. Security, n. f. security. Sedan, n. Sedan, (a town in the north of France). Seduire, 4. v. a. irr. to seduce. Se se- duire, v. ref. to deceive one's self. Seigneur, n. m. lord. Selon, prep, according to. Semaine, n. f. week, Sembler, 1. v. n. to seem. Seneque, p. n. Sensed. Sens, n. m. sense. Sensible, adj. sensitive; alive. Sentier, n. m. path ; track. Sentiment, n. m. feeling ; sensation. Sentir, 2. v. a. irr. to feel ; to perceive. Sentii", 2. v. n. to feel. Separer, 1. v. a. to separate. Separement, adv. separately. Septembre, n. m. September. Sergent, n. m. sergeant. Serieusement, adv. seriously. Service, n. m. service. Servir, 2. v. a. irr. to serve. Seul, e, adj. alone; by one's self. Seulement, adv. only ; solely. Severe, adj. severe; harsh. Severement, adv. severely. Severity, n. f. severity. Si, conj. if; whether. Si, adv. so ; yes. Sicile, n. f. Sicily. Siecle, n. m. century ; age. Siege, n. m. seat; siege. Signe, n. m. sign. Signifier, 1. v. a. to signify. Signification, n. f. signification- Silence, n. m. silence. Simple, adj. simple. Simplicity, n. f. simplicity. Sincere, adj. sincere. SINCERITE 317 SYNONYME Sincerite, n. f. sincerity. Singul-ier, iere, adj. singular. Sinon, conj. otherwise; except. Sire, n. m. sire (title used in addressing kings and emperors). Sireiie, n. f. siren. Situation, n. f. situation. Sobre, adj. abstemious ; sober. Sobriete, n. f. sobriety. Societe, n. f. society. Socrate, p. n. Socrates. Sceux, n. f. sister. Soie, n. f. silk ; hair ; bristle. Soif , n. f. thirst . Soigneu-x, se, adj. careful. Soin, n. m. care. Soir, n. m. evening. Soit que, conj. (subj.), whether. Soldat, n. m. soldier. Soleil, n. m. sun. Solide, adj. solid. Sombre, adj. dark; gloomy. Somme, n. f. sum. Sommeil, n. m. sleep. Sommeiller, 1. v. n. to sleep. Sommet, n. m. summit. Sort, n. m. fate; lot. Sorte, n. f. sort ; species. Sortir, 2. v. n. irr. to go out. Sottise, n. f. folly. Soudainement, adv. suddenly. Souffrawce, n. f. suffering. Souffrir, 2. v. a. & n. irr. to suffer. Souhaiter, 1. v. a. to wish. Soulager, 1. v. a. to relieve. Soumettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like MET- tre), to subdue. Se soumettre, v. ref. to submit. Soumission, n. f. submission. Soupconner, 1. v. a. to suspect. Souper, n. m. supper. Souple, adj. supple. Source, n. f. spring. Sourd, e, adj. deaf. Sourire, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like RIRE), to smile. Sous, prep, under ; beneath. Souscripteur, n. m. subscriber. Souscrire, 4. v. a. & n. irr. (conj. like feCRiRE), to subscribe. Soustraire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like traire), to remove; to take away. 27* Soutenir, 2. v. a. irr. (conj. like tenir), to sustain ; to affirm. Souvenir (Se), v. ref. (conj. like ve- nir), to remember. Souvent, adv. often. Souverain, e, adj. & subs, sovereign. Specieu-x, se, adj. specious. Spectacle, n. m. spectacle. Spectre, n. m. spectre. Statue, n. f. statue. Sterile, adj. barren. Sterilite, n. f. barrenness. Studieu-x, se, adj. studious. Stupidite, n. f. stupidity. Style, n. m. style. Subir, 2. v. a. to suffer ; to undergo. Sublime, adj. sublime. Subvenir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like te- nir), to relieve. jSucces, n. m. success. Succession, n. f. succession. Sucre, n. m. sugar. Sud, n. m. south. Suede, n. f. Sweden. Suffire, 4. v. n. irr. to suffice. Suffisamment, adv. sufficiently. Suisse, adj. & sub. m. Swiss. Suivre, 4. v. a. irr. to follow. Sujet, te, adj. & sub. subject. Superbe, adj. proud; splendid. Superfia, e, adj. superfine. Superieur, e, adj. & sub. superior. Superstition, n. f. superstition. Sur, prep, on, upon ; over ; above ; about ; concerning ; with regard to. Sur, e, adj. sure ; certain. Surete, n. f. safety. Surface, n. f. surface. Surfaire, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like faire), to overcharge. Surmonter, 1. v. a. to rise above. Surprenant, e, adj. surprising. Surprendre, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like prendre), to surprise ; to overtake ; to take by surprise. Surseoir, 3. v. n. irr. to suspend. Survivre, 4. v. n. irr. (conj. like VI- vre), to survive. Susceptible, adj. susceptible. Suspendre, 4. v. a. to suspend. Synonyme, adj. synonymous. TABAC 318 TRANQUILLE T. Tabac, n. m. tobacco. Table, n. f. table. Tableau, n. m. picture. Tache, n. f. task. Tacher, 1. v.n.to endeavor. Taire, 4. v. a. irr. to conceal. Se taire, v. ref. to remain silent. Talent, n. m. talent. Tambour, n. m. drum. Tamise (La), n. f. the Thames. Tandis, adv. (que), while; whilst. Taut, adv. so much ; as much ; so many ; as many ; so ; to such a degree •• tant que, as long as ; so long as. Tante, u. f. aunt. Tard, adv. late. Tarder, 1. v. n. to delay. Teindi-e, 4. v. a. to dye. Tel, le, adj. such ; so. Telemaque, p. n. Telemachus. Tenement, adv. so much ; so. Teineraireinent, adv. rashly. Temerite, u. f. temerity. Temoin, n. m. ivitness. Temperance, n. f. temperance. Temperature, n. f. temperature. Temperer, 1. v. a. to temper ; to mod- ify- Tempere, e, (pa. p. of temperer), tem- perate. TempSte, n. f. storm ; tempest. Teinple, n. m. temple. Temporiseur, n. m. temporizer. Temps, n. m. time ; xoeather. Tendre, adj. tender; soft. Tendre, 4. v. a. to extend. Teisdrement, adv. tenderly. Tendresse, n. f. tenderness. Tenir, 2. v. a. irr. to hold. Terme, n. m. limit; term; expression. Terminer, 1. v. a. to end. Ternir, 2. v. a. to tarnish. Terrasser, 1. v. a. to throw down. Terre, n. f. earth ; ground. Terrestre, adj. terrestrial. Terreur, n. f. terror. Tete, n. f. head. Theatre, n. m. theatre. Theme, n. m. theme. Themistocle, p. n. Themistocles. Theologie, n. f. theology. Theorie, n. f. theory. Thesee, p. n. Theseus. Timide, adj. timid. Tirer, 1. v. a. to draw ; to fire. Tiroir, n. m. drawer. Tite-Iiive, p. n. Livy. Titre, n. m. title. Toilette, n. f. toilet. Toit, n. m. roof. Tombeau, n. m. tomb. Tomoer, 1. v. n. to fall. Ton, n. m. tone. Tondre, 4. v. a. to shear. Tort, n. m. wrong. Tot, adv. soon ; early. Totalement, adv. wholly. Touche, n. f. trial ; touch. Toucher, 1. v. a. & n. to touch ; to han- dle. Toucher, n. m. touch ; feeling. Toujours, adv. always. Tour, n. m. turn ; revolution. Tour, ii. f. tower. Tourmenter, 1. v. a. to torment. Se tourmenter, v. ref. to be uneasy. Tourner, 1. v. a. to turn. Tournure, n. f. figure. Tout, e, adj. (pi. m. Tous, pi. f. Toutes), all ; every. Tout, adv. wholly ; entirely. Tout a fait, adv. wholly. Traduire,«i. v. a. irr. to translate. Tr age die, n. f. tragedy. Tragique, adj. tragic. Trahir, 2. v. a. to betray. Trahison, n. f. treachery. Train, n. m. train. Traire, 4. v. a. irr. to milk. Trait, n. m. arrow. Traitement, n. m. treatment. Tranquille, adj. quiet. TRANSCRIRE 819 VEUVE Transerire, 4. y. a. irr. (conj. like fccRiRE), to transcribe. Transmettre, 4. v. a. irr. (conj. like mettre), to transmit. Travail, n. m. (pi. Travaux), labor. Travailler, 1. v. n. to.labor. Traverser, 1. v. a. to cross. Tres, adv. very. Tressaillir, 2. v. n. irr. (conj. like saillir), to start ; to leap. Treve, n. f. truce. Tribunal, n. m. bench. Trilrat, n. m. tribute. Triomphe, n. m. triumph. Triste, adj. sad. Triumvir, n. m. triumvir. Troie, n. f. Troy. Trop, adv. too much ; too many. Trouble, n. m. disturbance. Troubler, 1. v. a. to disturb. Se trou- bler, v. ref. to be distttrbed. Troupeau, n. m. flock ; herd ; drove. Trouver, 1. v. a. to find. Se trouver, v. ref. to be found (§ 103); to find one's self. Troyen, ne, adj. & sub. Trojan. Tuer, 1. v. a. to Mil. Se tuer, v. ref. to kill one's self. Tyran, n. m. tyrant. Tyrannique, adj. tyrannical. TJ. Ulysse, p. n. Ulysses. Unir, 2. v. a. to unite. Univers, n. m. universe.' I Usage, n. m. use ; usage. User, 1. v. n. to use. User, 1. v. a. to use up ; to wear out. Se user, v. ref. to be consumed, used up. Utile, adj. useful. VacUe, n. f. cow. Vagabond, e, adj. & sub. vagrant. Vain, e, adj. vain. Vaincre, 4. v. a. irr. to conquer. Vaisseau, n. m. ship ; vessel. Valeur, n. f. value. Valeur, n. f. valor. Valoir, 3. v. a. & n. irr. to be worth. Vanite, n. f. vanity. Vanter, 1. v. a. to extol. Se vanter, v, ref. to praise one's self. Variation, n. f. variation. Variete, n. f. variety. Vaste, adj. vast. Vegetal, e, adj. & sub. vegetable. Vendre, 4. v. a. to sell. Se vendre, v. ref. to sell ; to be sold. Vengeance, n. f. vengeance. Venger, 1. v. a. to revenge, Se venger, v. ref. to be revenged. Venir, 2. v. n. irr. to come. Vent, n. m. wind. Ver, n. m. worm i ver k soie, silk-worm. Verbe, n. m. verb. Verger, n. m. orchard. Veritable, adj. genuine. Veritablement, adv. truly. Verite, n. f. truth. Verre, n. m. glass. Verrou, n. m. bolt. Vers, prep, towards ; about. Verse, e, adj. versed; conversant. Vert, e, adj. green. Vert, n. m. green; grass. Vertu, n. f. virtue. Vertueu-x, se, adj. virtuous. Veste, n. f. vest. Vestige, n. m. footstep. Vetir, 2. v. a. irr. to clothe. Veuve, n. f. widow. VIANDE 320 ZEPHYR Viande, n. f. meat. Vice, n. m. vice. Vicieu-x, se, adj. vicious. Victoire, n. f. victory. Vide, n. m. void. Vie, n. f. life ; subsistence. Vieillard, n. m. old man. Vieillesse, n. f. old age. Vieux, Vieil, Vieille, adj. old. Vi-f , ve, adj. alive ; lively. Vigoxireu-x, se, adj. vigorous. Vigoureiisement, adv. vi Vigneur, n. f. vigor. Village, n. m. village. Ville, n. f. town ; city. Vin, n. m. wine. Vinaigre, n. m. vinegar. Vindicati-f , ve, adj. vindictive. Violet, te, adj. violet. Violet, n. m. violet-color. Virgile,p. n. Virgil. Visage, n. ra.face ; countenance. Visite, n. f. visit. Vite, adv. quickly. Vivre, 4. v. n. irr. to live. Vceu, n. m. vow ; prayer. Voici, prep, see here ; here is ; here are ; this is ; these are. Voie, n. f. way ; road. Voila, prep, see there ; behold ; there is ; there are ; here is ; here are : that is ; those are; such. is ; such are. Voile, n. m. veil. Voir, 2. v. a. irr. to see. Voisin, e, adj. neighboring. Voisinage, n. m. vicinity. Voiture, n. f. coach. Voix, n. f. voice. Vol, n. m. stealing ; theft. Volet, n. m. shutter. Voleu-r, n. m., se, n. f., thief. Volonte, n. f. will. Volontiers, adv. willingly. Voter, 1. v. a. & n. to vote. Vonloir, 3. v. a. irr. to wish for ; to wish ; to be willing. Voyage, n. m. travelling. Voyager, 1. v. n. (§ 35, 1), to travel. Vrai, e, adj. true ; real. Vraiment, adv. really ; truly. Vue, n. f. view ; sight. Vulgaire, adj. vulgar ; popular. Xerces Xerxes, J p. n. Xerxes. T, adv. there ; thither. Y- Zele, n. m. zeal. I Zephyr, n. m. zephyr. APPENDIX. FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND LATIN VOCABULARY. § 1. French nouns formed from Latin ones usually follow their gender, the masculine in French corre- sponding to the masculine and neuter in Latin, and the feminine in French corresponding to the feminine in Latin. LAT. MAS. FR. MAS. Ex. Arcus, arc, bow. Crinis, crin, hair. Mons, mont, mountain. LAT. FEM FE. FEM> Acicula, aiguille, needle. Civitas, cite, city. Dos, dot, dowry. LAT. NEUT. FR. HA& Argentum, argent, silver. Cadaver, cadavre, corpse, dead body, Filum, fil, thread. Exc. 1. Names of trees, in French, are masculine, follow- ing the gender of arbre, while in Latin they are feminine, following the gender of arbor. LAT. FEM. FR. MAS. Ex. Alnus, aune, alder. Fagus, fau, beech. Pinus, pin, pine. (321) 322 FRENCH, ENGLISH, ANIX Exc. 2. Words ending in eur in French, derived from the Latin masculine termination or, are feminine. LAT. MAS. FR. FEM. • x. Calor, chaleur, heat. Pudor, pudeur, shame. Terror, terreur, terror. § ^. Latin words may undergo various changes in becoming French. The following are some of the most important of these : — (1.) One or more letters may be inserted, omitted, or changed, or the letters may be transposed. x. Virgo, vierge, virgin. Rwmpere, rompre, to break. Hora, * hetire, hour. Sta^mrm, etang, pond, pool. (2.) The termination a, of the first declension, is changed into e mute. . Herba, herbe, herb. Rosa, rose, rose. Matura, mure, ripe. (3.) The terminations us and um, of the second declension, are generally dropped. Ex. Sonws, son, sound. Vhxvcibum, plomb, lead. Note. Hence, past participles in Latin ending in sum usually end in * in French, while those ending in turn usually end in t. Ex. Prehensum, from prehendere, gives pris. Factum, " facere, " fait. (4.) The termination osus usually becomes eux. Ex. Cavernous, cavemen, cavernous. Lanosws, lainewa;, woolly. (5.) The genitive termination is, of the third declension, is generally dropped. LATIN VOCABULARY. 323 Ex. Dux, duces, due, leader. Mons, months, mont, mountain. (6.) Tas final, in nouns of the third declension, becomes te. Ex. Dignifos, dignitfe, dignity. Celerifos, celeriid, swiftness, celerity. (7.) The termination us, of the fourth declension, is dropped. Ex. Arcus, arc, bow. Fructws, fruit, fruit. Manws, main, hand. (8.) The termination ies, of the fifth declension, is changed into e mute. Ex. Faeces, face, face. Glacies, glace, ice, mirror. (9.) Latin words beginning with s, followed by a conso- nant, frequently prefix e, and reject the initial s. . Schola, e'cole, school. Spongia, Stella, eponge, e'foile, sponge star. (10.) The circumflex accent very frequently indicates an omission of one or more letters, usually of s. Ex. Amma, ame, soul. Asmus, ane, ass. Rem. For further examples under the preceding rules, see the follow- ing vocabulary. 324 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND VOCABULARY. The gender of the French words in this vocabulary is not marked when determined by the rules and exceptions. (See §§ 10, 11.) The Latin words marked with a star (*) are derived, either directly or indirectly, from the Greek, and the English words, printed in Italics, are derived from either the French or Latin root. The meanings of the Latin words are given in the third column, when they differ essentially from the meaning of the French derivative. ABBREVIATIONS. B. L basse latinite. cad c'est a dire. dim diminutive. /. feminine. Fr French. freq frequentative. gen genitive. inc inceptive. m masculine. part participle. pi plural. qu quasi. sc scilicet. sing singular. sync syncope. A, to, ad. Abeille, bee, apiciila, dim. of apis. Abime, m. abyss, abyssus.* Abondance, abundance, abundare, to abound. Abord, approach, arrival, ad, to, ora, shore, coast. Abri, shelter, harborage, qu. aprlcus (locus), a sunny place. Absinthe, wormwood, absinthium.* Acanthe, acanthus, bear's foot, acanthus.* Accent, accent, accentus. Accident, accident, accidens. Accomplir, to accomplish, ad-complere, to Jill up. Accorder (se), to agree, ad, to, cor, the heart. Accourir, to run to, accurrere. Accuser, to accuse, accusare. Acheter, to buy, ad, to, captare, to take.f t Hence, to take to one's self. LATIN VOCABULARY. 325 Acide, sharp, acid, acidus. Acier, steel, acies (ferri), the edge, point. Aconit, aconite, wolf s-bane, aconltum.* Acquerir, to acquire j acquirere. Acquitter, to acquit, ad, to, quietus, quiet, f Acre, aigre, sharp, tart, sour, shrill, se- vere, eager. acer. Acte, m. act, agere.* Adage, adage, proverb, adagium. Adieu, farewell, adieu, ad, to, Deus, God. Admettre, to admit, admittere. Administrer, to administer, administrare. Administration , administration^ administratio. Adorer, to adore, adorare. Adoucir, to soften, edulcare, to sweeten. Adresser, to direct, to address^ ad, to, directus, straight, di- rect. Affable, courteous, affable, affabilis. Affaire, affair, ad, to, facere, to make, to do.. Affection, affection, affectio, onis. Affliger, to afflict, affligere. Afin, in order that, ad, to, finis, the end. Agapes, f. pi., love-feasts, agapae,* pi. Age, age, sevum.* Agir, to do, to act, agere. Agneau, lamb, agnus. Agraire, agrarian, agrarius. Agrandir, to enlarge, to aggrandize, ad, to, grandis, large, great. Aider, to aid, adjutare, freq. of adjuvare. Aleul, grandfather, avus. Aigle, eagle, aquila. Aigu, sharp-pointed, clever, acute, acutus. Aiguille, needle, aciciila, dim. of acus. Ail, garlic, allium. Aile, wing, aisle, ala. Ailleurs, elsewhere, besides, aliorsum. Aimable, amiable, amabilis. Aimer, to love, to like, amare. Aine, elder, ante, before, natus, bom. Ainsi, thus, seque, equally, sic, thus, so. % t Hence, literally, to free from anything-, to put to rest. 28 326 Air, air, aer.* Airain, brass, aes. Aire, f. area, aerie, eyry. area. Ais, board, plank, assis. Ajourner, adjourn, ad, to, dies, a day. Aj outer, to adjoin. adjungere. Alcyon, king-fisher, a halcyon, alcyon, halcyon.* Alegre, brisk, lively, alacer. Algue, sea- weed, alga. Aliment, aliment, alere, to nourish. Allaiter, to nurse, ad, to, lac, milk. Aller, to go, • aditare, freq. of adire. Alliance, alliance, ad, to, ligare, to bind. Allumer, to light, to illume, ) Allumette, match, > ad-luminare, to light up. Allumiere, f. match-box, ) Alors, then, at that hour, ad illam horam. Alose, shad. alosa. Alouette, lark, alauda. Alun, alum, alumen. Alveole, tooth- socket, alveolus, dim. of alveus. Amasser, to gather, to amass, ad, to, massa, a mass. Ambition, ambition, ambitio, onis. Ame, soul, ammation, anima. Amende, penalty, amends, e, without, menda, a fault. Amer, bitter, sad, amarus. Amethyste, amethyst, amethystus.* Ami, friend, amicus. Amour, love, amour, amor. Ampoule, bubble, blister, vial, ampulla. An, annee, year, annus.* Ancetres, ancestors, antecessores. Ancien, ancient, ante, before. Ancre, f. anchor, ancora.* Ane, m. ass, idiot, asinus. Aneth, dill, anetf anethum.* Ange, angel, angelus.* Angle, m. corner, angle, angulus.* Angleterre, England, Angli, the Angles, terra, la\ Anguille, eel, anguilla. Animal, animal, animal. Animer, to animate, animare. Anis, anise, anlsum.* LATIN VOCABULARY. 327 Anneau, ring, curl, } annulus, dim. of annus, a Annelet, annulet, 5 circuit. Annoncer, to tell, to announce, annuntiare. Anse, handle, ansa. Antenne, sail-yard, antenna. Anthropophage , cannibal, anthropophagus.* Antre, f. cave, den, antrum.* Aout, August. Augustus. Apaiser, to appease, ad, to, pax, peace. Apercevoir, to perceive, ad-percipere. Api, smallage, apium. Aplanir, to level, to smooth, ad, to, planus, level. Apotre, messenger, apostle, apostolus.* Appartenir, to belong, to appertain, ad-pertinere. Appeler, to call, to appeal, appellare. Application, application, applicare, to apply. Appliquer, to apply, applicare. Apprendre, to learn, to apprehend, apprehendere. Approcher, to approach, ad, to, proximus, the nearest. Approuver, to approve, approbare. Appuyer, to rest, to support, ad, to, podium, parapet, baU cony.f Apre, rough, hard, asper. Apres, after, ad, to, pressus, part, of pre-* mere, to press. Apte, fit, proper, apt, aptus. Aquatique, aquatic, watery, marshy, aquatilis et aquaticus. Aquedue, water-pipe, aqueduct, aquseductus. Aquilon, north wind, aquilo, onis. Arabe, m. Arab, Arabs. Araignee, spider, cobweb, aranea.* Arbre, tree, arbor. Arbuste, m. shrub, bush, arbustum. Arc, bow, arch, arc, arcus. Arche, ark, area. Architecture, f. architecture, architectura.* Ardeur, ardor, ardor. Arene, sand, gravel, arena. Arete, fish-bone, edge, ridge, arista, the beard, or the ear of grain. Argent, silver, money, argentum. t " Appuyer est done primitivement soutenir quelque chose d'eleve." — Scheler. au moyen d'un put, cad., de 328 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Argile, Aride, Arithmetique, Armes, f. pi. Armoiries, f. pi. Arracher, Arranger, Arrangement, Arreter, Arrhes, f. pi. Arriere, Arriver, Arsenic, Artere, f. Artimon, Asperges, f. pi. Asseoir (se), Assez, Assieger, Assiette, Assoupir, Assurer, Astre, Astronomie, Asyle, ou asile, m. Athlete, m. Atteindre, Attendre, Attendrir, Aubepine, Aucun, Augmenter, Aune, m. Aune, f. Aupres, white clay, potter's earth, argil, dry, arid, barren, arithmetic, arms, ~i armorial bearings, ) to tear away, to arrange (rank), } arrangement, $ to stop, to arrest, an earnest penny, pledge, behind, to arrive, arsenic, artery, mizzen mast, asparagus, to sit down, sufficiently, enough, to besiege, plate, to make sleepy, to assure, star, astronomy, place of refuge, wrestler, champion, to attain, to wait, to attend, to soften, whitethorn, hawthorn, some, one, any, to augynent, alder-tree, ell, near to, argilla.* aridus. arithmeticus.* arma. eradicare. ad, to, regula, a rule. ad, to, re, again, stare, to stand. arrha.* ad, to, retro, backward. ad, to, ripa, a bank. arsenicum.* arterla.* artemon.* asparagus.* ad-sedere. ad, to, satis, sufficient. ad, to, near, sedere, to sit. assectare, freq. of assecare, to cut.f qu. assopire. assecurare. astrum.* astronomia.* asylum.* athleta.* attingere. attendere. ad, to, tener, tender. alba spina, aliquis unus. augmentum, increase. alnus. ulna.* ad, to, pressus, part, of pre- mere, to press. f " Assiette sigpuifie arrangement, puis situation, enfin, par une extension assez remarquable, le plateau, qui indiquait la place des convives au festin." — Scheler. LATIN VOCABULARY. 329 Aurone, southern wood, abrotonum. Aurore, goddess of morning, rora, Au- Aurora. Aussi, also, alius, another, sic, so, thus. Aussitot, immediately, aussitot ; aussi = aliud sic t6t, tostum, part, of tor- rere, to bum, to be impetu- ous. Autant, as much, as many, ad, to, tantus, so much. Autel, altar. altare, is. Automne , m. &f. harvest, autumn. autumnus. Autre, other, another, alter. Autrui, others, another, alterius, gen. of alter. Avenir, to occur, to happen, } adventxire, ) Aventure, f. Avertir, to warn, to inform, to ad- vertise, Aveugle, blind, Avide, greedy, eager, Avis, advice, Avocat, lawyer, advocate, Avoine, oats, Avoir, to have, Avoue, lawyer, advocate, Avouer, to avow, Avril, . April, Axe, m., axis, axle-tree, abante, from before. avarus. avaritia. apud, with, hoc, this, per sync, ap-oc. advenire, to come to, arrive at, advertere. ab, from, oculus, the eye. avldus. ad, to, visus, light, vision, f advocatus. avena. habere. advocatus. ad, to, according to, votum, a vote. Aprllis (sc. mensis), aperire, to open. axis.* Baie, berry, bacca. Bain, bath, balneum.* Baiser, to kiss, to salute, basiare. t "Avis est proprement la maniere de voir dans une certaine circonstance." — Scheler, 28* 330 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Baisser, to stoop, B. L. bassus, low. Balance, balance, -\ to balance, 5 Balancer, bilanx, having two scales. Balbutier, to stammer, balbutire. Baleine, whale, balsena.* Baliste, an ancient warlike engine ballista.* for throwing stones, &c., Banqueroute, bankruptcy, Fr. banc, and ruptus, from rumpere, to break. Baptiser, to baptize, baptizare.* Barbare, rude, barbarous, barbarus. Barbe, beard, barba. Bas, low, B. L. bassus. Base, foundation, base, basis.* Basilic, a species of serpent a basilisk, called basilicus.* Basilique, a court of justice, church, a fine basilica.* Bataille, battle, batuere, to strike, to beat. Baton, stick, staff, baton, baculus.* Battre, to beat, batuere. Baume, m. balsam, balm, balsamum.* Bean, bel, fine, beautihxl, bellus. Beaucoup, much, many, bellus, fine, colaphus,* blow, stroke.-f Beler, ,to bleat, balare. Belette, weasel, bella, fem. of bellus, fine, pretty. Benir, to bless (hence benison), benedicere. Bete, beast, blockhead, bestia. Bette, beet, beta. Beurre, butter, butyrum.* Bien, well, much, very, bene. Bienfaisance, beneficence, beneficentia. Bientot, very soon, bene and tostum, from tor- rere, to burn, to be impet- uous. Bievre,J beaver, fiber. Bige, f., a chariot drawn by horses, two bigae, pi. t " Faire un beau coup = prendre un grand nombre a la fois.' % Castor is the modern word. Scheler. LATIN VOCABULARY. 331 Bile, gall, bile, bilis. Bireme, a galley with two banks of oars, biremis (navis). Bitume, m. pitch, bitumen, bitumen. Boeuf, ox, beef, bos, bovis.* Boire, to drink, bibere. Bonne, nurse, bona, f. of bonus, good. Bon, good, (hence boon, as, a boon companion), bonus. Bonheur, happiness, good fortune, bonus, good, augurium, au- gury. Bonte, goodness, bonitas. Boree, the north wind, Boreas. Bouche, mouth, face, . bucca, the cheek. Bourse, purse, money, the exchange, byrsa* (Virg. M. 1. 367). f Bout, end, B. L. butum. Boutique, shop, apotheca,* a store house. Bouton button, bud, B. L. butum, end, point. Bras, arm, claw, handle, brachium.* -Brebis, f. sheep, B. L. berbix, for berbex, ver- vex, a wether. Bref, short, brief, brevis.* Briller, to shine (brilliant), beryllus, beryl. Brouette, wheelbarrow, bis, twice, rota, a wheel. % Bruire, to rustle, to roar, rugire. Bruit, noise, report, rugire, to roar. Bruler, to burn, to broil, perustare, freq. of perurere. Brut, rough, brutish, brutus. Buffle, m. wild ox, buffalo, bubalus.* Buis, box-tree, box-wood, buxus.* Bulbe, m. bulb, a round or bulbous root, bulbus.* Bulle, bubble, a letter of the ' pope, a bull, > bulla, a bubble, boss, stud. Bulletin, ticket, bulletin, t"Gr. (3vpca, cuir ; parce que, dans l'origine, les bourses £taient de cuir." — Bescherelle. % " Autrefois petit vehicule a deux roues." — Bescherelle. 332 C. Cacher, to conceal, coactare, freq. of cogere, to bring together. Cadavre, dead body, corpse, cadaver. Cadeau, gift, present, catellus, dim. of catena, a chain. Cadenat, ou Ca- padlock, qu. catenatum (sc. claus- denas, trum), a chain fastening. -\ Cadrer, to quadrate, to suit, quadrare. Caduc, declining, caducus, falling. Caducee, m. Mercury's wand. caduceus * and urn.* Cage, f. cage, prison, cavea, a cavity, an enclosure. Caille, m. curdled milk, curd, coagulatum (sc. lac). Cailler, ou Coa- to curdle, to coagulate. coagulare. guler, Caisse, box, trunk, case, cash, capsa.* Cal, ou Calus, callosity, callus. Calamite, calamity, calamitas. Calcul, calculation, calculus, a pebble. % Calice, m. cup, chalice, calix.* Camarade, comrade, camera, a chamber. Campagne, open country, g^campana (sc. terra). Canaille, the rabble, canis, a dog. Canal, conduit pipe, canal, canalis. Canicule, dog-star, dog-days, canicula. Oanne, cane, stick, canna,* a reed. Cantique, m. song, canticle, cantlcum. Cap, promontory, cape, caput, a head. Capitaine, captain, caput, a head. Capitole, m. capitol, capitolium. Caporal, corporal, caput, a head. Caque, m. barrel, cask, keg, cadus.* Car, for, because, quare. Careme, m. the quadragesimal fast, Lent, quadragesimus (sc. dies). t " Anciennement le cadenas avait une petite chaine au lieu de ce que nous nom- mons aujourd'hui l'anse or l'anneau du cadenas." — Scheler. X " Parce que, dans l'origine, les hommes, a defaut de caracteres graphiques, qui n'existaient pas, out du employer des cailloux pour exprimer le resultat de leurs operations sur les quantites." — Bescherelle. LATIN VOCABULARY. 333 Carene, the lower parts of a ship, keel, carina. Caresser, to caress, carus, dear. Carie, rottenness, caries, caries. Carrelet, a flounder, quadratiilus, dim. of quad- ratus, square. Carrer, to square, quadrare. Carrosse, m. coach, carriage, carruca. Carte, card (of paper), map, chart, pasteboard, charta,* papyrus, paper. Cartilage, m gristle, cartilage, cartilago. Carton, box (pasteboard), charta,* papyrus, paper. Cas, case, casus. Case, cottage, casa. Caseux, cheesy, caseous, qu. caseosus, from caseus. Casque, m. helmet, cassis. Cassation, reversal, appeal, cassus, vain, empty. Casser, to annul, to cashier, cassare, to annul. Casser, to break, quassare, freq. of quatere, to shake. Castor, beaver, castor, castor.* Cause, cause, causa. Causer, to discuss, to converse, causa, a cause. Cavalier, a horseman, caballus, a nag. Cave, Concave, hollow, concave, cavus, conc&vus. Caverne, den, cavern, caverna. Cedre, cedar, cedrus.* Ceindre, to gird, to enclose, cingere. Ceinture, f. girdle, cincture, the waist, cinctura. Celebrer, to celebrate, celebrare. Celer, to hide, to conceal, celare. Cellier, cellar, storehouse, cellarium. Cellule, a hole in a honeycomb, cell, cellula, dim. of cella. Celui, this, that, hicce and ille. Cendre, f. ashes, cinders, cinis.* Cene, The Lord's Supper, ccena. Cenotaphe, m. empty tomb, cenotaph, cenotaphium.* Cens, quitrent, census, census. Cent, hundred, centum. Centre, centre, centrum.* Cependant, however, hicce, this ; pendere, to hang, to depend. 334 FRENCH, ENGLISH , AND Cerceau, hoop, net, cir cuius, dim. of circus, a circle. Cercle, m. ring, hoop, circle, cir cuius, dim. of circus. Cereale, cereal, cerealis, pertaining to Ceres. Ceremonie, ceremony, eserimonia. Cerf, stag, hart, cervus. Cerise, cherry, cerasus.* Certificat, certificate, certus, certain, facere, to make. Cerveau, the brain, cerebellum, dim. of cere- brum. Cesser, to cease, cessare. Ceste, m. gauntlet, cestus, cestus. Cette, this, that, hicce. Chabot, chub, pollard, capito, having a large head. Chacun, each, quisque and unus. Chaine, chain, warp, catena. Chair, flesh, skin, caro.* Chaire, pulpit, chair, cathedra.* Chaleur, heat, zeal, calor. Chaloupe, shallop, scaphtila, dim. of scapha.* Chambre, room, chamber, camera.* Chameau, camel, camelus. Champ, field (hence camp), campus. Chandelle, candle, candela. Changer, to change, camblre, to exchange, barter. Chant, song, chant, cantus. Chanter, to sing (hence to chant), cantare. Chanvre, hemp, canvas, cannabis.* Chapeau, hat, cap, capitulum, dim. of caput, a head. Chapon, capon, capo, onis. Char, car, chariot, carrus. Charbon, coal, charcoal, carbon, carbo, onis. Chardon, thistle, carduus. Charger, to load, to burden, to charge, carrus, a wagon. Charpentier, carpenter, carpentarius,f a carriage ma- ker. Charpie, bint, carpere, to pluck. t ■* Le mot latin signifiait charron, carrossier (de carpentum, voiture) ; le sens B'est peu a peu elargi en celui de faber lignarius en general." — Scheler. LATIN VOCABULARY. 335 Charrue, plough, .carruca, carrus, a wagon. Charte, chart, map, charta, papyrus, paper.* Chasser, to drive, to chase, captiare, for captare, freq. of capere, to take. Chaste, pure, chaste, modest, castus. Chat, cat, catus, cattus. Chataigne, chestnut, castanea.* Chateau, castle, castellum, dim. of castrum. Chatier, to castigate, to chastise, castigare. Chaud, hot, warm, fierce, calidus, per sync, caldus. Chauffer, to warm, calefacere. Chaume, m. stubbie, } thatched cottage, ) Chaumiere, f. calamus, a reed.* Chausse, stocking, calceus, a shoe, half-boot. Chausser, to put on or make shoes, calceare. Chauve, bald, calvus. Chaux, f. lime, calx. Chef, head, leader, chief, caput. Chemin, way, road, passage, } chimney, } Cheminee, caminus, a furnace. f Chenil, kennel, caninum (sc. stabulum). Cher, dear, costly, beloved, cams. Chercher, to seek, circare, to go around. Chersonese, peninsula, Chersonese, chersonesus.* Cheval, horse, caballus, a nag.* Cheveu, a hair of the head, capillus. Chevre, she-goat, capra. Chevrefeuille, m. woodbine or honeysuckle, caprifolium. Chevrette, roe, caprea. Chez, at the house of, casa, a cottage. Chicoree, wild endive, succory, chic- ory, cichorium.* Chien, dog, canis. Choeur, choir, chorus, chorus.* . Choir, to fall, cadere. Chose, thing, causa, a cause. Chou, cabbage, colewoxt, caulis.* Chretien, Christian, Christianus. Chute, fall, cadere. Cicatrice, scar, cicatrice, cicatrix. Cidre, cider, sicera.* t Caminus in later Latin =via. 336 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Cigale, grasshopper, balm-cricket, cicada. Cigogne, stork, ciconia. Cigue, hemlock, cicuta. Ciel, sky, heaven, coelum.* Cil, eyelash, cilium.* Cimetiere, cemetery. ccemeterium.* Cinq, five, quinque. Cinquante^ fifty, quinquaginta. Cippe, m. small column, post, cippus. Cire, wax, seal, cera.* Cirque, m. the circus, circus. Cite, city, civitas. Citerj to cite, to quote, citare. Citerne, reservoir, cistern, cisterna. Citron, lemon, citron, citreum (sc. malum). Civil, polite, civil, civllis. Claie, hurdle, craticula, dim. of crates. Clair, bright, clear, plain, clarus. Classe, class, classis, a fleet, a class (later). Cle, ou Clef, key ; clef (music), clavis.* Clepsydre, i. water-clock, hour-glass, clepsydra.* Cloaque, m. sink, sewer, cloaca. Clocher, to limp, to hobble, claudicare. Clopin-clopant, hobblingly, claudus, lame, pes, afoot. Clore, to shut, to close, claudere. Clou, nail, stud, clavus. Cochenille, cochineal, coccum, the berry of the scar- let oak. Code, m. code, codex. Cceur, heart, core, courage, cor.* Coffre, trunk, chest, coffer, cophmus,* a basket. Coin, corner, wedge, cuneus. Going, quince, cydonia.f Col, ou Cou, neck, strait, defile, collum. Colere, f. anger, choler, cholera, the gall, the bile. Collier, necklace, collar, collar e. Colline, hill, hillock, colllna (sc. terra). Colombe, dove, pigeon, columba. Colonel, colonel, cOlumna, a column. Colonne, pillar, column, columna. Colosse, m. colossus, colossus.* f So called from Cydon, a city of Crete. LATIN VOCABULARY. 337 Combien, Comble, m. Combler, Comete, Commander, Comme, Commencer, Comment, Commis, Coramun, Communiquer, Compagnie, Corapatir, Compter, Comte, Comte, Conclure, Concombre, Condition, Conduire, Conduite, Cone, m. Conner, Connaitre, how much or many, top, height, to heap, to fill (hence to accumulate) . comet, to command, as, like, as if, to commence, how, clerk, common, public, to communicate, company, to compassionate, to reckon, to compute, earl, count, earldom, county, to conclude, to infer, cucumber, condition, to conduct, conduct, cone, to trust, to confide, to know, to recognize, Connetable, constable, Conque, Conquerir, Conscience, Consentir, Conservation, Conserver, Consoler, Constitutionnel, Conte, m. shell, conch, to conque)-, to obtain, conscience, to consent, preservation, to preserve, to console, constitutional, story, account. quomodo, how, and bene = multum, much. cumulus, a heap. cumulare. cometa.* cum-mandare. quomodo. cum-initiare, to begin with. quomodo. committere, to intrust. communis. communicare. cum, together, panis, bread, f com-patiri, to suffer with. computare. comes, a companion. J comitatus, part, of comitor, to accompany. J concludere. cucumis, eris. conditio, conducere. conducere. conus.* confidere. cognoscere. comes, for comte, § stabuli, of the stable. concha.* conquirere, to search for, conscientia. consentir e. conservare, to preserve. conservare. consolari. constituere, to establish, computare, to reckon. t Those who eat bread together. \ Also an attendant of a distinguished private individual ; and after the time of the Emperors, it was applied to one of the imperial train, or the court. § See note on comte. The title connetable was originally applied to the keeper of the royal stables. 20 338 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Contenance, countenance, continere, to keep together. Content, contented, satisfied, contentus. Continuer, to continue, continuare, to connect. Contraire, contrary, contrarius. Contre, against, contra. Cor (de chasse) , hunter's horn, cornu. Corbeau, crow, raven, corvus. Corbeille, basket, wedding presents, corbula, dim. of corbis. Corde, cord, chorda.* Cordonnier, shoemaker, cordwainer, Corduba, Cordova. Corneille, crow, cornicula, dim. *f comix. Cornouille, cornel, cornelian, cherry, cornum. Corps, body, corps, corpus. Cortine, the tripod at Delphi, cortlna. Corymbe, m. bunch of ivy-berries, corymbus.* Cote, rib, coast, declivity, costa, a rib. Cothurne, m. buskin, cothurnus.* Cotir, to bruise, quatere, to shake. Cou, neck, collum. Coucher, to place, to lay, c olio care. Coucou, cuckoo, cuculus. Coude, m. elbow, any angle, cubitus.* Coudre, to sew, to stitch, consuere. Coudrier, ou hazel-tree, corylus. Coudre, Couler, to flow, to filter, colare. Coulpe, fault, sin, culpa. Coup, blow, stroke, colaphus.* Coupe, cup, cupa, a tub, cask. Couple, couple, brace, pair, copula, that which binds to- gether. Cour, court, court- yard, cohors, a court, an enclosure. Courage, courage, cor, the heart. Courant, current, currere, to run. Courbe, crooked, curved, curvus.* Courge, f. gourd, cucurbita. Courir, to run, to frequentj currere. Couronne, crown, coronet, corona. Court, short, concise, curt, curtus. Courtisan, courtier, See Cour. Cousin, cousin, consobrmus. Couteau, knife, culter. Qotiter, to stand in, to cost, constare. LATIN VOCABULARY. 339 Coutre, colter, culter. Coutume, habit, custom, toll, consuettido. Couver, to sit on, to incubate, cubare.* Couvercle, m. cover, lid, co-operculum. Couvrir, to cover, to conceal, co-operire. Craie, chalk, creta. Craindre," to fear, tremere. Crasse, gross, thick, coarse, crassus. Creancier, creditor, credere, to believe. Creer, to form, to create, creare. Crepuscule, m. twilight, crepusculum. Crete, comb of the cock, tuft, crest, crista. Creux, hollow, scrobs, a ditch (Menage), Crible, m. sieve, cribrum. Crier, to cry out, quiritare. Crime, m. crime, crimen. Crin, hair, crinis. Crocodile, in. crocodile, crocodllus.* Croire, to believe, credere. Croisade, crusade, crux, ticis, a cross. Croitre, to grow, to increase, crescere. Croix, cross, crux. Croute, crust, scurf, crusta. Cru, raw, rude, crude, crudus. Cruel, cruel, painful, crudelis. Crypte, m. burying-vault, crypt, crypta.* Cueillir, to collect, to cull, to coil, colligere. Cuir, leather (hence currier), corium. Cuire, to cook, to concoct, to digest, coquere. Cuisine, kitchen, cookery, coqulna. Cuisse, thigh, leg, coxa, the hip. Cuivre, copper, cuprum. Culte, m. wqrship, adoration, cultus. Curieux, curious, curiosus. Cuticle, scarf-skin, cuticle, cuticula, dim. of cutis. Cuve, large cask, tub, cup a. Cyathe, m. large tumbler, cyathus.* Cycle, m. circle, cycle, cyclus.* Cygne, m. swan, cycnus.* Cylindre, roller, cylinder, cylihdrus.* Cyme, sprout, stalk, stem, cyma.* Cypres, cypress-tree, cupressus.* 340 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND D. Daigner, to deign, dignari, to deem worthy. Daim, deer, dama. Daine, doe, dama. Dam, loss, damage, cost, damnum. Dame, lady, mistress, dame, domina. Damner, to condemn, damnare. Danger, danger, damnum, loss, injury. Dans, in, into, de,from, intus, within. Date, date, datum, part, of dare, to give. -\ Datte, date (fruit), dactylus.* Dauphin, dolphin, delphin, and Inus. Debile, feeble, weak, debilis. Debout, upright, standing, de,from, butum, the end. Decembre, December, December (sc. mensis). Dechirer, to tear, to lacerate, dilacerare. Decider, to decide, decldere, to cut of. Decorer, to decorate, decus, oris, an ornament. Decouvrir, to discover, de,from,% cooperire, to cover. Decret, decree, decretum, part, of decernere, to decide. Defendre, to defend, defender e. Denier, to unthread, de, from, filum, a thread. Degout, distaste, disgust, d.e,f-om, gustus, taste. Degrader, to degrade, de, down from, gradus, step. Dehors, without, outside, de, from, foris, out of doors. Deja, already, de and ex, from, jam, now. Dejeuner, to breakfast, de, from, jejunus, fasting. Delice, m. pleasure, delight, delicium, and as. Delivrance, deliverance, de,from, liberare, to free. Deluge, ni. flood, deluge, diluvium. Demain, to-morrow, de,from, mane, the morning. Demeurer, to dwell, demorari. Demi, half, demi, dimidius. Demon, demon, daemon.* Dent, tooth, notch, dens, tis.* Depenser, to dispense, dispensare, freq. from dis- pendere. f " La formule datum Romae, donne a Rome, etc., a donne naissance au terme date.'''' — Scheler. X Hence, to take away that which covers. LATIN VOCABULARY. 341 Deployer, to unfold, to deploy, to dis- play, dis-plicare. Depouiller, to strip, to despoil, despoliare. Depuis, then, after, de,from, post, after. Dernier, last, dernier, die, from, retro, backward. Derriere, behind, in the rear, de-retro. Des, from, de and ex. Desespoir, despair, de, from, sperare, to hope. Desirer, to desire, desiderare. Dessert, dessert, de, from, servire,f to serve. Dessous, below, under, de,from, subtus, below. Dessus, above, over, de, from, sursum, on high. Destiner, to destine, destinare, to establish. Detruire, to destroy, destruere. Deuil, sorrow (hence doleful), dolor. Deux, two, duo.* Devant, before, de,/rom, ante, before. Devoir, to owe, to be in debt. debere. Diable, Satan, devil, diabolus.* Diademe, m. crown, diadem, diadema.** Diamant, adamant, diamond, adamas, ntis.* Diete, food, diet, diaeta.* Diete, diet (assembly), dies, a day. Dieu, God, Deus.* Difference, difference, differre, to separate, to differ. Digerer, to digest, digerere, to separate, to di- gest (later). Digne, worthy, condign, dignus. Dimanche, the Lord's day, Sabbath, dies dominica. Dime, tithe (hence dime), decima, the tenth part. Diner, to dine, de-ccenare. Dire, to say, to tell, dicere. Disparaitre, to disappear, dis, apart, parescere, inc. ef parere, to appear. Disque, m. quoit, disk, discus.* Dissiper, to dissipate, dissipare. Distinguer, to distinguish, distinguere. Pit, saying, apothegm, dictum. Divers, various, diverse, di versus. Dix, ten, decern.* Dix-huit, eighteen, octodecim. Dix-neuf, nineteen, novendecim, * Hence, that which is served after the principal dishes are removed. 29* 342 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Dix-sept, seventeen, septendecim. Docile, tractable, docile, docllis. Docte, learned, skilful, doctus. Doigt, finger, inch, digit, digitus. Dol, fraud, trick, deceit, dolus.* Domraage, damage, injury, damnum. Dompter, Dom - to tame, to subdue, to domitare, freq. of domare.* ter, daunt, Don, gift, donation, donum. Done, then, therefore, tunc. Donner, . to give (hence donation), donare. Dont, of whom, of which, de,//'om, unde, whence. Dormir, to sleep (hence dormant'), dormire. Dos, back (hence dorsal), dorsum. Dot, portion, dowry, dos, dotis. Douter, to hesitate, to doubt, dubitare. Doux, douce, sweet, mild, smooth, dulcis.* Douze, twelve, ~i Douzaine, dozen, 5 duodecim. Drachme, drachm, dram, drachma.* Dragon, drag 07i, draco, onis.* Droit, straight, direct, directus. Due, duke, dux, ducis, a leader. Duehe, dukedom, duchy, B. L. ducatus, military lead- ership. Duel, duel, •* duellum, whence bellum, war. Dur, hard, firm, rough, durus. E. Eau, water, rain, aqua. Ebene, ebony, ebenus.* Echalas, prop, scala, a ladder. Echapper, to escape, ex, from, captus, taken. Echauffer, to warm, to chafe, ex-calefacere. Echelle, ladder, scale, scala. Eclair er, to illumine, clarus, bright. Eclore, to hatch, excludere, to shut out, sepa- rate. Ecole, school, schola.* E co Her, scholar, scholaris. Ecorce, bark, cortex, icis. LATIN VOCABULARY. 343 Ecouter, to listen (hence scout), auscultare. Eerier, to cry out, ex-quiritare. Ecrin, jewel-box, casket, scrinium. Eerire, to write (hence sen Ibble), scribere. Ecrit, writing, scrip turn. Ecritoire, inkstand, ink- case toire, , escri- scriptoria (sc. mensa). Ecu, buckler (hence escv itcheo?i), scutum.* Ecueil, rock, shoal, scopulus.* Ecuelle, porringer (hence scuttle), scutella, dim. of scutra, a tray. Ecume, foam, spume, scum, spurn a. Ecureuil, squirrel, qu. sciurulus, dim. of sciu- rus.* Edit, edict, edictum. Education, education, ediico, are. Effrayer, to frighten, frigus, cold. Egalement, equally, sequaliter. Egarer, to lead astray, to wander, evagari. Eglise, church, ecclesia.* EgoYste, egotist, ego, 7.* Elancer, to dart, to shoot, ex, forth, lancea, a lance. Electre, electrum, electrum.* Elegant, elegant, elegans, antis. Elephant, elephant, elephas, antis. Elire, to elect, eligere. Elle, she, it, ilia. Eloigner, to withdraw from, ex, away, longe, afar. Embleme, emblem, emblema.* Embrasser, to embrace, in, in, brachium, the arm. Emeraude, emerald, smaragdus.* Eminence, eminence, ex., forth, minere, to project. Emmener, tc lead away, inde, thence, minarf., to drive (later). Emouvoir, to move, e-movere, to move out. Empecher, to prevent, impactare, freq. of impin- gere, to strike against. Empire, command, empire, imperium. Emplir, to fill, to fill up, implere. Employer, to employ, implicare, to involve. Empoisonner, to poison, in, in, potio, a drink, draught. En (pronoun), of it, of them, inde, thence. En, in, in.* 344 Enchanter, to enchant, incantare. Enclume, anvil, incus, udis. Encontre, counter, against, B. L. in- contra = contra. Encore, still, yet, again, (in) hanc horam, to this hour. Endroit, place, right side (of cloth), in, toward, directum, straight.^ Enfant, child, infant^ infans, tis. Enfer, ou En- the infernal regions, hell, inferi, orum. fers, m. pi. Enfin, fatally, at last, in, in, finis, the end. Enfler, to blow, to inflate, inflare. Enfoncer, to sink, to drive in, in, toward, fundus, the foun- dation. Enfouir, to bury, infodere. Ennemi, enemy, inimlcus. Ennuyeux, wearisome, in, in, odium, hatred, disgust. Enorme, huge, enormous, enormis, out of rule, irregular. Enrouer, to render hoarse, raucus, hoarse, rough. Enseigner, to teach, insignare, to engrave. Ensemble, together, whole, in-simul, for simul. Ensevelir, to shroud, to inter, in, in, sepelire, to bury. Ensuite, after, then, in, toward, sequi, to follow. Enterrer, to inter, to bury, in, in, terra, the earth. Entier, whole, entire, integer. Entorse, sprain, intorsus, for intortus, part, of intorquere, to twist. Entrainer, to carry or lead away, inde, thence, trahere, to draw. Entre, between, among, inter. Entrer, to enter, to begin, intrare. Entretenir, to entertain, inter, between,% tenere, to hold. Envahir, to usurp, to invade, invadere. Envers, toward, in, toward, vertere, to turn. Envie, envy, invidia. Envier, to envy, to long for, invidere. Envoyer, to send, in, upon, via, the way, road. Epars, scattered, sparse, sparsus, part, of spargere, to scatter. Epais, thick, dull, spissus. Epargne, economy, parsimony, parsimonia. f " Endroit, anciennement une preposition, = dans la direction de, vers."— -Bcheler. X Hence entretenir literally signifies " tenir entre ses mains." LATIN VOCABULARY. 345 Epaule, shoulder, scapula. Epi, ear of corn, spike, spicum et spica.* Epice, spice, species, a species, spice (later). Epitre, epistle, epistola.* Epieu, spear, javelin, spiculum. Epine, thorn, | spine, ) E chine, spina. Epitaphe, epitaph, epitaphium.* Eponge, sponge, spongia.* Epouse, wife, spouse, sponsa. Epouser, to espouse, to marry, spondere, to promise, betroth. Epoux, husband, sponsus. Eprouver, to prove, to try, ex, completely, probare, to prove. Equateur, equator, sequator. Ere, f. epoch, era, sera. Errer, to wander, to err, errare. Ers, vetch, tare, ervum. Escalier, staircase, stairs. scala. Espace, m. distance, space, spatium.* Espece, kind, species, species. Esperer, to hope for, to expect, sperare. Esprit, spirit, genius, wit, spiritus. Esquif, skiff, scapha.* Essai, trial, essay, exagium, a weighing. Essaim, swarm of bees, multitude, examen. Essieu, axle-tree, axis, axis (qu. axictilus). Essouffler, to put out of breath, ex, out, forth, sufflare, toblow. Essuyer, to wipe, to dry up, ex, without, sucus, juice, sap. Estimer, to estimate, to esteem, sestimare. Estomac, stomach, storaachus.* Et, and, both, et. Etable, stable, stall, stabulum. Etablir, to establish, ) establishment, £ Etablissement, stabilire, to establish* Etain, pewter, tin, stannum. Etang, pond, pool, stagnum. Etat, state, condition, status. Ete, summer, sestas. Eteindre, to put out, to extinguish, extinguere. Etendre, to extend, extendere. Eternelle, eternal, aeternus. Eternuer, to sneeze, sternuere. 346 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Eteule, ou stubble, stipula. Esteuble, Etinceile, spark, scintilla. Etoile, star, stella. Etole, robe, stole, stola.* Etonner, to astonish, ex, forth, tonare, to thunder. Etoupe, hemp, tow, stupa.* Etrange, Etr anger, foreign, strange, •% stranger, $ extraneus, external. Etrangler, to choke, to strangle, strangulare. Etre, to be, esse. Etrein, straw, litter, stramen. Etreindre, to bind, to strain, stringere. Etrenne, New-year's gift, strena, a sign, an omen, a New-year's gift. Etrille, currycomb, strigilis. Etroit, close, strait, strict, strictus, part, of stringere, to bind. Etude, learning, study, studium. Evanouir, to vanish, evanescere. Evaporer, to evaporate, evaporare. Eveiller, to wake, to awake, evigilare. Evenement, event, evenire, to happen. Eveque, bishop, episcopus.* Eviter, to shun, to avoid, evitare. Examen, examination, examinare, to weigh, ponder. Excepter, to except, exceptare, freq. of excipere. Excluer, to exclude, excludere. Excuser, to excuse, excusare. Exemple, example, exemplum Exhalaison, exhalation, exhalatio. Exiger, to demand, exigere. ■ Existence, existence, •% to be, to exist, y Exister, existere, to exist. Expirer, to expire, exspirare. Expliquer, to explain, explicare, to unfold, set forth. Exploit, exploit, explicitum, part, of expli- care, to set forth. Exprimer, to express, exprimere. Exterieur, - exterior, exterior. Extreme, extreme, extremus. LATIN VOCABULARY. 347 Fable, story, fable, fabula. Fabrique, building, fabric. fabrica, an artisan's workshop. Face, surface, face, facies. Facetie, witty saying, pleasantry, facetiae. Facile, easy, facile, fluent, facilis. Facher, to be sorry, fastidium, a loathing, aver- Faciliter, to facilitate, facilitas, facility. Fac,on, f. fashion, facere, to do. Fagot, fagot, bundle, fax, facis, a torch, f Faible, feeble, weak, flebilis, to be wept over. Faillir, to fail, fallere. Faim, hunger, famine. fames.* Faine, beech-mast, faglna (sc. glans). Faineant, idle, sluggish, facere, to do, ne-ens = nihil, nothing. Faire, to do, to make, facere. Faisan, pheasant, phasianus (sc. ales), the Col- chian bird. Faite, m. top, ridge, pinnacle, fastigium. Falloir, to be necessary, fallere, to deceive, to fail. Fameux, famous, famosus. Famille, family, familia. Faon, fawn, faunus. Farine, meal, farina, farina. Farouche, wild, fierce, stern, ferox, ocis. Faste, m. pomp, pride, fastus. Fastes, m. pi. records, annals, the Roman calendar, fasti. Fatal, fatal, fatalis. Fatiguer, to fatigue, to weary, fatigare. Fau,+ beech-tree, fagus.* Faucon, hawk, falcon, falco, onis. Faute, fault, fallere, to deceive. Faux, false, counterfeit, falsus, part, of fallere, to de- ceive. Faux, f. scythe, falx. Faveur, favor, favor. Fecond, fruitful, fecundus. f *' Le sens primitif est faisceau de petit bois." — Scheler. X " Fau,, ancien mot romain, encore en usage dans les patois = hltre, L. ■fagus." — Scheler. 348 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Feindre, to dissemble, to feign, fingere. Femme, woman, wife, femina. Fendre, to split,, to cut, findere. Fenetre, window, fenestra. Fenil, hay-loft, fenlle. Fenouil, fennel. feniculum. Fer, iron, sword, ferrum.* Ferir, to strike, ferire. Ferme, firm, firmus. Fermier, farmer, firmus, firm. Feroce, savage, fierce, ferocious, ferox, ocis. Fertile, fruitful, fertile, fertilis. Fete, feast, festa. Feu, heat, flash (hence fuel), focus, fireplace. Feu, late, fuit, it has been. Feuille, leaf, sheet of paper, folio, foliage, folium.* Feve, bean, faba. Fevrier, February, Februarius (sc. mensis). Fibre, f. fibre, filament, fibra. Fidele, faithful, upright, fidelis. Fiel, gall, bile, grudge, fel, lis. Fier, proud, fierce, ferus. Fier, to trust, to confide, fidere. Fievre, f. fever, ague, febris. Figue, fig, ficus. Figure, f. figure, figura. Fil, thread, wire, filum. Fille, daughter, girl, maid, filia. Fils, son, boy, films. Fin, end, finis. Finir, to finish, finire. Firmament, firmament, firmamentum. Fisc, treasury, exchequer, fiscus. Flairer, act to scent, to smell out, fragrare, to emit fragrance. Flamme, flame, flamma. Fleau, flail, scourge, flagellum, dim. of flagrum Flechir, to bend, flectere. Fleur, flower, blossom, flos, ris. Fleuve, river, fluvius. Flot, wave, billow7 fluctus. Foi, faith, credit, fides. Foin, hay, fenum. LATIN VOCABULARY. 349 Foik*., fair, ferise, holidays, festivals. Fois, time, vicis, gen., alternation, change. Foncer* to sink (mining), fundus, the bottom, founda- tion. Fond, bottom, foundation, fundus. Fonder, to found, fundare. Fondre, to melt, to fuse, fundere, to pour. Fonds, soil, capital, funds, fundus, the foundation. Fongus, fungus, fungus. Fontaine, fountain, fontana (sc. aqua), a foun- tain (later). Forcer, to force, fortis, brave, strong. Forces, f. pi. shears, forpices, pi. of forpex, fire tongs. Forer, to bore, to •perforate. forare. Forge, f. forge, fabrica, an artisan's workshop. Forme, shape, form, forma.* Former, to form, formare. Fort, strong, stout, brave, fortis. Fort, very, resolutely, forte, for fortiter, powerfully. Fortune, fortune, for tuna. Fosse, pit, hole, grave, ^ ditch, fosse, 5 Fosse, fossa, a ditch, a fosse. Fossoyer, to ditch, fossa, from fodere, to dig. Fou, fol, foolish, follis, a pair of bellows. ,f Foudre, m. thunderbolt, } thunder, lightning, 5 Foudre, f. fulgur, lightning. Fouine, martin, B. L. fagina = varius, varie- gated. Fouir, to dig, fodere. Fouler, to tread down, to press, fullo, onis, a fuller. Foulon, fuller, fullo, onis. Four, oven, furnus. Fourche, pitchfork, furca, a two-pronged fork. Fourchette, fork, furcula, dim. of furca. Fourmi, f. ant, pismire, formica. Fournaise, furnace, fornax, acis. Foyer, hearth, focus. Fragile, Frele, fragile, frail, fragilis. Fraise, strawberry, fragum. Fremir, to shudder, fremere. t " L'origine du mot est le L.follSre, se remuer §a et la, du subst. L. follis, souf- flet." — Scheler. 30 350 Frein, bit, bridle, frenum. Frene, m. ash-tree, fraxinus. Frere, brother, ffater. Friandise, dainty, nice thing, frlgere, to roast, to fry. Frire, to fry, frlgere. Frissonner, to shiver, to shudder, frlgere,* to be cold. Frivole, trifling, frivolous. frivolus. Froid, cold, frigid, frigidus. Froment, wheat, frumentum, corn, grain. Fronde, sling, funda. Front, forehead, front, frons, tis. Frotter, to rub, fricare. Fruit, fruit, fructus. Fruitier, fruiterer, green grocer, fructuarius, pertaining fruit. Fuir, to fly, to avoid, fugere. Fumee, smoke, steam, fume, fumus. Furieux, furious, furiosus. Furtif, clandestine, furtive, furtlvus. Fuseau, spindle, bobbin, fusus. Fusil, gun, focus, a fireplace. Futile, futile, vain, futilis. to a. Gage, Gages, pi. Gaiement, Galle, Gangrene, Gar 9 on, Gater, Gauche, Geant, Gehenne, Gene, Gener, Gelee, Gemir, Gendre, General, Genevrier, Genievre, pledge, security, > y ^ ^ a # waaes. J gayly, gall, gall-nut, gangrene, canker, boy, servant, to spoil, left, awkward, giant, Gehenna, torture, rack, to make uneasy, frost, jelly, to groan, son-in-law, general, juniper-tree, } juniper-berry, gin, $ gaudere, to rejoice. galla, gall-nut, oak apple. gangreena.* carduus, a thistle. (Diez.} va stare, to lay waste. scsevus.* gigas, ntis.* Gehenna.* gelu, frost, icy coldness. gemere. gener. generalia. juniperus. LATIN VOCABULARY. 351 Genie, m. genius, spirit, ingenium. Genou, knee, genu.* Genre, kind, genus, gender, genus, eris,* birth, a race. Gens, people, persons, servants, gens, gentis, a clan, a race. Germain, first (of cousins), full, own (of brothers and sisters'), germanus. Germe, m. bud, sprout, germ, germen. Geste, m. action, gesture, gestus. Gingembre, ginger, zingiber, is. Glace, ice, looking-^ass, glacies, ice. Glaive, m. sword, gladius. Gland, acorn, mast, glans, dis.* Glande, gland, kernel, glans, dis,* an acorn. Glebe, land, glebe, gleba. Globe, m. globe, globus. Glose, comment, gloss, glossa,* an obsolete or foreign word. Gomme, gum, gummi.* Gonfler, to swell, conflare, to blow up. Gorge, throat, pass, gorge, gurges, a whirlpool. Gout, taste, gust, relish. gustus, us. Gouter, to taste, to relish, gustare. Goutte, drop, jot, gout, > Gouttiere, f. spout, gutter, £ gutta, a drop. Gouvernail, helm, rudder, gubernaculum. Gouverner, to govern, to steer, gubernare.* Grabat, pallet (small bed), grabatus. Grace, grace, favor, pardon, gratia. Grade, m. degree, grade, gradus, us. Grain, grain, kernel, granum. Grand,- tall, noble, grand, grandis. Grange, f. barn, granum, a grain. Gras, fat, plump, greasy, crassus. Grave, heavy, grave, grievous, gravis. Gre, will, inclination, gratum, agreeable. Grece, Greece, Grsecia. Grele, thin, slender, gracilis. Gril, Grille, gridiron, | grate, j -. craticula, dim. of crates. Grogner, . to grunt, to growl, grunnire. Gronder, to roar, to growl, to scold, grundire, earlier, for grunnire. Gros, big, gross, coarse, crassus. Grue, crane, grus. 352 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Guepe, Guerir, to heal, to cure, Gueule, mouth of an animal, Gui, mistletoe, Gymnastique, gymnastic, vespa. curare. gula, the gullet, throat. viscum.* gymnasticus.* H. Habile. clever, fit, able, habilis. Habit, dress, coat, habitus, us. Habiter, to inhabit, to dwell in, habitare, freq. of habere, to * have. Haleine, breath, wind, anhelare, to pant. HameQon, fish-hook, hamus. Harmonie, harmony, harmonla,* Haut, Hautain, high, tall, } proud, haughty,, ) altus, high. Hennir, to neigh, hinnire. Herbe, grass, herb, herba. Heritage, inheritance. hereditas. Heriter, to inherit, hereditas, inheritance. Heritier, heir, hereditarius, relating to an inheritance. Hermetique- hermetically, Hermes.* f ment, Heros, hero, heros, Hesiter, to waver, to hesitate, hsesitare, freq. of hserere, to stick fast. Heure, hour, hora.* Heureux, happy, augurium, augury, omen. Hier, yesterday, heri. Hirondelle, swallow, hirundo, mis. Histoire, history, historia.* Hiver, winter, hibernum (sc. tempus), win- ter time. Homme, man, husband, homo. Honnete, honest, honestus. Honneur, m. honor, honor, oris. Hopital, hospital, hospitalis, hospitable. Horizon, horizon, horizon, tis.* Horloge, f. clock, hour-glass, horologium,* sun-dial, or water-clock. t " D'Hermes qui trouva le secret de boucher ainsi un vase." — Bescherelle. LATIN VOCABULARY. 353 Horrible, horrible, horribilis. Hors, andFors,f out, except, save, foris, out of doors. Hostie, victim, the host, or conse- crated wafer, hostia, a victim, sacrifice Hote, in. guest, host, hospes, itis. Hotel, inn, hotel, hospitalis, hospitable. Huette, ou small owl, owlet, ulula, a screech-owl. Hulotte, Hui, dans au- to-day, hodie. jourd'hui, Huile, oil, oleum. Huit, eight, octo.* Huitre, oyster, ostrea.* Humain, human, humane, humanus. Humble, modest, humble, humilis. Humide, moist, humid, humidus. Huppe, hoopoe, uptipa.* Hurler, to howl, ululare. Hydre, f. hydra, hydra.* Hydromel, metheglin, mead, hydromeli.* Ici, here, ecce and hie. Idee, idea, idea.* Ides, f., pi. the Ides of the Roman month, ancient Idus, uum. Idiot, idiot, idiota,* an ignorant person. Idole, statue, idol, idolum,* aii image. Ignorance, ignorance, ignorantia. Ignorant, ignorant, ignarus. 11, he, it, iUe. He, island, isle, insula. Image, picture, image, imago.* Imagination, imagination, imaginatio, from imago, an image. Imbecile, imbecile, imbecillus, weak. Immobile, immovable, still, immobilis. Impatience, impatience, impatiens. Impie, impious, wicked, impius. Impot, tax, impost, imponere, to lay or impose on. t " Tout est perdu, fors l'honneur." 30* 354 FRENCH, 'ENGLISH, AND Impression, impression, impressum, part, of impri- mere, to impress. Incommode, incommodious, incommodus. Inconsolable, inconsolable, in, not, consolari, to console. Independant, independent, . in, .not, dependere, to hang from. Indigo, indigo, Indicus, pertaining to India. Indiquer, to show, to indicate, indicare. Indispensable, indispensable, in, not, dis, apart, pendere, to hang. Infirme, infirm, infirmus. Infortune, unfortunate, infortunatus. Ingrat, ungrateful, } ingratitude, y Ingratitude, ingratus, unthankful. In quiet, unquiet, restless, inquietus. Insouciant, careless, heedless, in, not, sollicitus, disturbed. Instruire, to instruct, instruere. Integre, upright, just (hence integ- rity), integer. Intelligence, intelligence, intelligentia. Intention, intention, intentio. Interet, interest, interest, it concerns. Interrompre, to interrupt, interrumpere. Introduire, to introduce, introducere. Inutile, useless, inutilis. Inventer, to invent, inventare, freq. of invenire, to discover. Irai, I shall go, ire, to go. Ire, f. anger, ire, ira. Iris, rainbow, or iris, iris.* Issu (issir), descended, born, ex, from, ire, to proceed. Ivoire, ivory, ebur, oris. Ivre, drunk, intoxicated, ebrius. J. J a, obs., now deja, now, presently, Jadis, of old, old, Jamais, ever, never, Jambe, leg, jam. jam, now, diu, a long time. jam, now, magis, more.f gamba, a hoof. f Jamais, when used without a negative, means from this time (jam) evermore (magis) ; thus, a jamais = a toujour 'S. LATIN VOCABULARY. 35^ Janvier, January, Januarius (sc. mensis). Jaune, yellow, galbanus. Je, I, ego.* Jet, jet, stream, jactus, part, of jacere, to throw. Jeter, to throw, to jet, jactare, freq. of jacere. Jeu, game (hence joke), jocus, a jest, joke. Jeudi, Thursday, Jovis, of Jupiter, dies, the day. Jeune, young, juvenile, t juvenis. Jeune, fasting, a fast, jejunium. Jeunesse, youth, juventus, fitis. Joie, Joy, gaudia, pi. of gaudium. Joindre, "to join, jungere.* Joli, pretty, gaudialis, glad, joyfid. Jonc, rush, juncus. Jouer, to play, to jest, jocari. Joug, yoke, jugum.* Jouissance, enjoyment, gaudere, to rejoice. Jour, day, daylight, diurnum (sc. tempus), day- time. Jubile, jubilee, jubllum, a wild cry, a shout. Juge, judge, judex. Juif, Jew, Judseus. Juillet, July, Julius (sc. mensis). Juin, June, Junius (sc. mensis). Jules, Julius, Julius. Jumeau, double, twin, gemellus, dim. of geminus. Jurer, to swear, jurare. Jus, gravy, juice, jus, broth, soup. Jusqu'a, to, till, until, de, from, usque ad, to, as far as. Juste, exact, just, Justus. Justesse, accuracy, justness, ^ Justice, uprightness, justice, ) justitia. L. Lac, lake, lacus.* Lache, loose, lax, laxus. Lacs, gin, snare, laqueus. Lacune, a gap in a book, defect, marsh, lacuna, a hollow, chasm. 356 1 Laine, wool, lana. Laisser, to leave, laxare, to loosen. Lait, milk, lac, tis.* Laitue, lettuce, lactuca. Lambruche, wild vine, labrusca. Lame, plate of metal, blade, lamina, per sync, lamna. Lampe, torch, lamp, lampas.* Lance, spear, lance, lancea. Langue, tongue, language, lingua. Larcin, theft, larceny, latrocinium. Lard, bacon, lard, larldum, per sync, lardum. Large, big, large, wide. largus. Larix, the larch-tree, larix. Larme, tear, lacrima.* Larron, robber, latro, onis. Larves, m. pi. hobgoblins, larvae. Las, weary, tired, lassus. Laurier, bay or laurel-tree, laurus. Laver, to wash, to lave, lavare.* Le, la, the, ille, ilia. Leqon, lesson, lectio, a reading. Lecteur, reader, lector. Lecture, reading, lectura. Leger, light, " levis. Legume, m. pulse, vegetable, legumen, pulse Lent, slow, lentus. Lepre, f. leprosy, leprae,* pi. Lequel, which one, ille and qualis. Lettre, letter, littera. Leur, of them, illorum. Levre, f. lip, labrum. Lezard, lizard, lacertus. Libre, free, liber. Lier, to tie, to bind, ligare. Lieu, place, room, stead, locus. Lieue, league, leuca = lapis, a mile-stone. Lieutenant, lieutenant, locus, a place, tenere, to hold. Lievre, hare, lepus, oris. Ligne, line, linea. Limacon, snail, limax, acis.* Lime, file, lima. Limon, mud, slime, limus. Limpide, clear, limpid, limpidus. LATIN VOCABULARY. 35T Lin, flax, } lawn, 5 Linon, linum.* Linceul, shroud, linteum, a linen cloth. Lineaire, linear, linea, a line. Linge, linen cloth, linteum. Lion, lion, leo, onis.* Lire, to read, legere. Lis, lily, lilium.* Lit, bed, lectus.* Livide, livid, lividus. Livre, m. book, liber. Livre, f. pound, libra.* Livrer, to deliver, liberare, to free. Loi, law, lex. Loin, far, far off, longe. Loire, Loire, Liger. Long, long, longus. Lors, then, ilia, hora, at that hour. Louer, to praise, to laud, laudare. Loup, wolf, lupus.* Lourd, heavy, dull, luridus, pale yellow, wan. Loutre, f. otter, ' lutra. Louve, she- wolf, lupa. Lucre, gain, lucre, lucrum. Lui, to him or her illujus, for illlus, gen. of ille. Luire, to shine, to glitter. lucere. Lumiere, light, j luminous, $ Lumineux, lumen, mis, light. Lundi, Monday, lunse, of the moon, dies, the day. Lunette, f telescope, eye-glass, luna, the moon. Lupin, lupine, luplnus, and urn, Lutte, wrestling, struggle, lucta. Luxe, m. luxury, luxus. Lyre, harp, lyre, M. lyra.* Machine, machine, machina.* Machoire, f. jaw, jaw-bone, masticare, later for mandere, to chew. Macron, mason, mansio, a dwelling. (Besche- relle.') t So called from the shape of the glasses. 358 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Macule, spot, stain, macula. Maculer, to stain (hence immaculate), maculare. Madame, madam, meus, my, domina, mistress of a family. Mage, one of the magi, a magi- ^ art, \ magus,* a magian, a ma- Magicien, magician, s gician. Magistrat, magistrate, magistratus. Magnifique, magnificent, magnificus. Magnifiquement, magnificently ', magniflce. Mai, May, Maius (sc. mensis). Maigre, thin, meagre, macer.* Maigreur, leanness, meagreness, macror, for macritudo. Maigrir, and to become emaciated, to macescere. Amaigrir, grow lean, Maillet, mallet, beetle, malleus. Maille, stitch, mesh, eye of a hook, macula, a spot. Main, hand, manus, us. Maintenant, now, instantly, manu, in the "hand, tenens, holding. Maire, mayor, major, greater. Mais, but, magis, more.f Maison, house, mansion, mansio, onis, a dwelling. Maitre, master, magister. Maitresse, mistress, magistra. Mai, evil, damage, malum. Mai, ill, badly, male. Malade, sick, male, not, aptus,^. Maladroit, awkward, male, not, directus, straight. Male, male, manly, masculus. Maigre, in spite of, malus, bad, gre, will. Malheureux, unfortunate, malus, bad, augurium, au- gury, omen. Malpropre, dirty, slovenly, male, not, proprius, proper. Malsain, unhealthy, male, not, sanus, sound, heal- thy. Maman, mamma, mamma.* Manche, sleeve, manicse, pi. Manchot, one-handed, deprived one hand, of mancus, maimed. Mandragore, f. mandrake, mandragorus.* t " La valeur de mais, comme conjoaction adversative, lui vient du B. L. sed magis, pour sedjyotius ; au lieu de sed magis, on a fini par dire magis tout court." — Scheler, LATIN VOCABULARY. 359 Manes, m. pi. shade, manes, Manger, to eat (hence manger}, Maniere, f. way, manner, Manquer, to err, to fail, Manteau, cloak, mantle, Manufacture, f. manufacture, Marbre, marble, Marchand, merchant, ~\ Marchandise, merchandise, V Marche, market, J Mardi, Tuesday, Mare, pond, pool, Marge, f. margin, Marguerite, Margaret, Mari, husband, ) marriage, J Mariage, Marier, to join in marriage, marry, Marmite, pot, saucepan, Mars, March, Marteau, hammer, Matin, Mechant, Mecontent, Mefier, Meilleur, Meier, Membre, Meme, Memoire, morning (hence matins), Maudire, to curse, Mauvais, bad, Maxime, maxim, wicked, discontented, to distrust, better, to mix, limb, member \ same, memory, manes. manducare = mandere, to chew. manus, a hand.f mancus, maimed. mantelum. manu, 'by hand, facere, to make. marmor. mercari, to trade, traffic. Martis, of Mars, dies, the day. mare, the sea. margo, Inis. margarl ta, a pearl. * marltus, a husband. to maritare. marmor.* % Martius (sc. mensis). martellus, for martulus, a small hammer. matutinum (sc. tempus), the morning hour. maledicere, to speak ill of. malus. maxima (sc. sententia), the major proposition (hence a general proposition'). B. L. mescadere, from ma- lum, evil, and cadere, to fall = to come to. minus, less, contentus, content. minus, less, fidere, to trust. melior. miscere. membrum. metipse. t " C'est done litteralement la fa?on de mettre la main a quelque chose." — Scheler, t " La marmite etait peut-etre en premier lieu un pot de pierre." — Scheler. 360 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Menacer, to threaten, to menace, minax, acis, threatening. Menage, housekeeping, mansio, a remaining. Mendiant, beggar, mendicant, mendlcus. Mens on ge, falsehood, mentitio. Mentir, to lie, mentiri. Menton, chin, mentum. Menu, thin (hence minute), } minutus, part, of minuere, Menuisier,f joiner, to make small. Mepris, contempt, ) contemptible, 5 minus, less, pretium, value. Meprisable, • (Bescherelle.~) Mer, sea, mare. Mercenaire, mercenary, mercenarius. Mercerie, haberdashery, merx, cis, merchandise. Merci, mercy, merces, a reward.^ Mercredi, Wednesday, Mercurii, of Mercury, dies, the day. Mere, mother, mater.* Meriter, to deserve, to merit, meritum, part, of merere, to deserve. Merle, m. blackbird, merula. Merveille, marvel, wonder, mirabilia, neut.pl. of mirabi- lis, wonderful. Mesure, f. measure, mensura. Metail, Metal, metal (composition), metal (pure), ] metalium.* Metier, trade, business, ministerium, service, employ- ment. Mets, viand, missus, part, of mittere, to send.\ Mettre, to put, to place, mittere, to send. Meuble, piece of furniture, mobilis, movable. Meule, Meunier, mill- stone, grindstone, ^ miller, $ mola, a mill. Midi, midday, noon, meridies. Mie, crumb (soft part of bread), mica, a crumb, morsel. Miel, honey, mel.* Mieux, better, melius. Mil, millet, milium. Milan, kite, milvius. t Hence menuisier is, primitively, one who cuts into small pieces. X Merci originally meant un don remunerateur. § " Ce qu'on porte sur la table a chaque service ; tout ce qu'on sert sur la table ?our manger." — Bescherelle. LATIN VOCABULARY. 361 Milieu, midst, middle, medius, middle, locus, place. Ministere, ministry, ministerium. Ministre, minister, minister. Miroir, mirror, mirari, to admire. Miserable, miserable, miserabilis. Mitre, f. mitre, mitra.* Mode, fashion, mode, modus, manner. Modele, m. model, modellus, for modulus, dim. of modus, manner. Modeste, modest, modestus. Moelle, marrow, medulla.* Moeurs, f. pi. manners, morals, mores. Moi, me, me. Moins, less, minus. Mois, month, mensis.* Moitie, half, moiety, medietas. Mollesse, softness, effeminacy, mollitia. Mollir, to soften, mollire. Mon, my, meus. Monde, m. world, people, mundus, n. Monde, clean, neat, trim, mundus, adj. Monnaie, money, mint, moneta. Mont, mountain, mount, mons, tis. Montagne, mountain, montana (sc. terra). Monter, to ascend, to mount, mons, tis, a mountain. Montrer, to show (hence demon" strate), monstrare. Monsieur, for Mr. meus, my, senior, elder. Monseigneur, Morale, ethics, morals, moralis, moral. Morceau, piece, morsel, morsus, part, of mordere, to bite. Mordre, to bite, mordere. Mort, death, mors, tis.* Mot, word (hence mutter), B. L. muttum, a mutter. Mou, molle, soft, mellow, mollis. Mouche, fly, musca.* Moudre, to grind, molere. Mouiller, to wet, to steep, mollis, soft. Moule, muscle (fish), musculus,* dim. of mus, a mouse. Moulin, mill, molinus, pertaining to a mill. Mourir, to die, 81 moriri, for mori. 362 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Mousse, moss, muscus.* Mout, new wine, micst, mustum (sc. vinum). Mouvoir, to move, movere. Moyen, means, medianus, that is in the mid die. Muer, to moult, mutare, to change. Muet, Mugir, Mule, dumb, mute, to low, to bellow, she- mule, mutus. mugire. mula. Mulet, he-mule, mulus. Mulet, mullet, mullus. Mur, Mur, ripe, mature, wall, > wall, rampart, 5 mulberry, to ripen, to mature, maturus. Muraille, Mure, Murir, murus. morum.* maturare. Muscade, Musique, Mutuel, Mutuellement, nutmeg, music, mutual, ~\ mutually, ) muscus.* musica.* mutualis. Mystere, mystery, mysterium.* N. Nager, to swim, to row, Nageur, swimmer, rower, Naif, natural, unaffected, Nain, dwarf, Naitre, to be born, Nard, nard, Narine, nostril, Narrer, to narrate, Naseau, nostril (of a beast), Natif, native, Nation, nation, Natte, mat, Nature, f. nature, Naufrage, shipwreck, Nausee, sea-sickness, nausea, Navet, turnip, Ne, not, Neanmoins, nevertheless, navigare. natator. natlvus, inborn, innate. nanus.* nasci, nardus, and um.* naris. narrare. nasus, the nose. natlvus. natio, onis. matta. natura. naufragium. nausea.* napus. ne. ne-ens-minus = nihilomi- nus. LATIN VOCABULARY. 363 Neant, Neantir, nothing, naught, ") to annihilate, 5 ne-ens, entis = nihilum, noth- ing. Negotiant, merchant, negotiari, to carry on a busi- ness. Negre, Neige, f. Neiger, Nerf, Net, Neuf, Neuf, negro, snow, to snow, sinew, nerve, clean, neat, new, nine, niger, black. nix, nivis.* ningere. nervus.* nitidus, bright, shining. novus.* novem. Neutre, neuter, neuter. Neuvieme, Neveu, Nez, Nid, ninth, nephew, nose, nest, nonus. nepos, a grandson, nephew (later), nasus. nidus. Nier, Nitre, Noble, to deny, nitre, noble, illustrious, negare. nitrum.* nobilis. Noce, ouNoces, f.pl. Nceud, , marriage, nuptials, knot, nuptise. nodus. Noir, Noircir, Noisette, Noix, f. black, to blacken, filbert, nut, niger. nigrare. qu. nucula, dim. of mix, anut nux, nucis. Nom, name, noun, nomen. Nombre, number, numerus. Nommer, to nominate, nominare. Non, no, not, non. Nones, f. pi. the Nones of the Roman calendar, nonse. Notaire, Notre, Notre, notary, our, ^ ours, 5 notarius, a short-hand writer. noster. Nouer, to tie, to knot, nodare. Noueux, Nourrir, Nous, knotty, to nourish, we, nodosus. nutrire. nos. Nouveau, Nouvelle, novel, novellus. Nouveaute, novelty, novellitas, for novitas. 364 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Novembre, November, November (sc. mensis) Noyau, stone of fruits, nucleus, nucleus. Noyer, walnut-tree, mix, nucis, a nut. Noyer, to drown, necare, to kill. Nu, naked, nudus. Nuage, Nue, cloud, mist, } cloud, ) nubes.* Nuire, to hurt, } injurious, ) Nuisible, nocere, to hurt. Nuit, night, nox, noctis.* Nul, none, void, null \ Nullement, not at all, nullus, not any. o. Obeir, to obey, obedire. Objet, object, objicere. Obliger, to oblige, to impose obliga- tions, obligare. - Obscur, dark, obscure, obscurus. Obscurcir, to darken, to obscure, obscurare. Obscurite, darkness, obscurity, obscuritas. Observer, to observe, observare. Obtus, blunt, obtuse, obtusus. Occident, west, Occident, occidens, tis ("sc. sol). Occuper, to occupy, occipere, to enter upon. Ocean, ocean, oceanus.* Octobre, October, October (sc. mensis). Odeur, odor, odor. Odieux, odious, hateful, odiosus. (Eil, eye, oculus. (Euf, egg, ovum.* CEuvre, m. CEuvre, f. book, composition, ^ work, deed, ) opera, pi. of opus, a work. OfFenser, to offend, ofFensare, freq. of offendere Officier, officer, officium, duty. Offre, offer, -% to offer, 5 Offrir, offerrere, for offerre, to offer. Oindre, to besmear, to anoint, ungere. Oiseux, idle, indolent, otiosus. Olive, olive, ollva.* Ombrager, to shade, umbrare, umbra. I LATIN VOCABULARY. 365 Ombre, f. shadow, umbra. On, they, people, one, homo, a man. Once, ounce, uncia. Oncle, uncle, avunculus. Onction, unction, unctum, part, of ungere, to anoint. Onde, wave, billow, unda. Ondoyer, to undulate, undulare. Ongle, m. nail, claw, ungtila.* Onze, eleven, undecim. Opacite, opacity, opacitas, shade. Opaque, opaque, opacus, shady, dark. Opprimer, to oppress, opprimere, to press down. Opter, to choose, optare.* Option, option, optio, onis.* Or, gold, aurum. Orbe, m. orb, orbis, a circle. Ordinairement, ordinarily, ordinarius, customary, regu- lar. Ordonner, to ordain, ordinare, to order, arrange. Ordre, order, ordo, mis. Oreille, ear, auricula, dim. of auris. OrfOre, goldsmith, auri, of gold, faber, a work- man. Organe, m. organ, organum.* Orge, f. barley, hordeum. Orient, east, orient, oriens, tis (sc. sol). Origine, origin, orlgo, Inis. Orme, elm-tree, ulmus. Orne, wild ash-tree, ornus. Orniere, f. rut, beaten track, orbxta, the track of a wheel (orbis). Orphelin, orphan, orbus,* bereft. Ortie, nettle, urtlca. Os, bone, os.* Oseille, sorrel (an herb), oxalis.* Oser, to dare, ausare, freq. of audere. Oter, to take away, haustare, freq. of haurire, to draw out. Ou, or, either, aut. Ou, where, whither, ubi.* Oublier, to forget, oblitare, freq. of oblivisci. Oui, yes, 31* hoc and illud. (Scheler.') 366 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Oui'e, hearing, ) to hear, ) OuTr, Ours, bear, On vert, open, overt Quvrage, work, Puvrier, workman, Ouvrir, to open, audire, to hear. ursus. apertus, part, of aperire, t» open. opus, eris. operari, to work, aperire. Page, page, pagina. Pai'en, pagan, heathen, paganus, a rustic, pagan (later). Faille, straw, chaff, palea, chaff. Pain, bread, panis. Paire, pair, par. Paitre, to feed, to graze, pascere.* Paix, peace,' pax. Palais, palace, palatium. Palais, palate, palatum. Pale, wan, pale, pallid, pallidus. Paleur, paleness, pallor. Palir, to turn pale, pallere. Palme, m. hand's breadth, palm, \ Palme, f. branch of a palm-tree, > palma.* Palmier, palm-tree. j Pampre, vine branch, pampinus. Panier, bread-basket, pannier, panariurn. Panique, panic, Pan,* the god of the woods and shepherds. f Paon, peacock, pavo, onis.* Papa, Pape, papa, •£ the Pope, 5 papa, father.* Papier, paper, writing, papyrus.* Papillon, butterfly, papilio, onis. Pa que, the passover, Easter, pascha,* Paquet, packet, parcel, pactum, part, of pangere, to fasten, to fix. Par, by, through, per, through. t ' ; Cette expression se rattache, dit-on, a l'epouvante qui se repandit parmi les Gaulois attaques, pres du temple de Delphes, par les Grecs, dont le dieu Pan avait Dris la defense." — Scheler. LATIN VOCABULARY. 367 Paradis, paradise, Paiaitre, to appear, Pare, park, Pardonner, to pardon, Paresse, idleness, Parfumer, to 'perfume, Parler, to speak, Parmi, among, Partager, to share, Parti, party, Particulier, particular, Partie, part, Partir, to depart, Partout, everywhere, Parvenir, to succeed, Pas, step, pace, Passer, to pass, Passereau, sparrow, Pasteur, minister, pastor, Patrie, native country, Patron, patron, Paume, palm (of the hand), Paupiere, f. eyelid, eyelash, Pauvre, needy, poor, Pauvrete, indigence, poverty, Pave, pavement, Paver, Paveur, m. to pave, -I paver, pavier, $ Payer, to pay, Pays, country, district, Peau, skin, peel, Peche, sin, offence, Pecher, to fish, to angle, PScher, to sin, to trespass, Pecheur, fisherman, Peigne, m. comb, wool-card, paradlsus.* parere.* parcus, spare, scanty, from parc£re, to spare. B. L. per-donare, for condo- nare. pigritia. . * per, through, and fumare, to fume. parabola,* a comparison, a parable (later). per, through, and medium, the middle. partiri. pars, partis, apart. particula, a particle, dim. of pars, apart. pars, partis. partiri, to divide, to separate. per totum, through all. pervenire. passus, us. passare, freq. of pandere, to open = to open a way. passerculus, dim. of passer, pastor. patria (sc. terra), patronus. palma.* palpebra, se. pauper, paupertas. pavimentum. pavire,* to strike, to beat down. pacare, to quiet, to soothe, pagus. pellis. peccatum. piscari. peccare. piscator. peeten. 368 Peigner, to comb, pectinare. Peindre, to paint, pingere. Peine, penalty, pain, poena.* Pelle, shovel, pala, from pangere, to fix. Pendant, during, pendere, to hang, to be pending ; Penetrer, to penetrate, penetrare. Penible, painful, poena, penalty. Peninsule, peninsula, peninsula, from pene, almost, insula, an island. Penser, to think, pensare, freq. of pendere, to weigh. Pension, pension, pensio, from pendere, to pay , Pente, slope, inclination, pendere, to hang. Percer, to pierce, "per, through." (Scheler.) Perche, perch (a fish), perca.* Perche, rod, pole, perch, pertica. Perclus, impotent, prseclusus, from prsecludere, to forbid access to. Perdre, to lose, to ruin, perdere. Perdrix, f. partridge, perdix.* Pere, father, pater.* PerH, danger, peril, periculum. Permettre, to permit, permittere. Personne, Personnel, person, } personal, $ persona, a mask, a person. Perte, loss, waste, perditio, from perdere, to de- stroy. Pesanteur, heaviness, weight, pensare, freq. of pendere, to weigh. Peste, plague, pest, pestis. Peu, little, paucum. Peuple, m. nation, people, populus, i. Peuplier, poplar-tree, populus, i. Peur, fear, dread, pavor. Peut-etre, perhaps, potest esse, it may be. Phiole,f small bottle, phial, phiala.* Pic, -woodpecker, picus. Pie, magpie, pie. pica. Pied, foot, pes, pedis.* Piege, snare, trap, pedica. Pierre, f. stone, petra.* t Now spelled flole. LATIN VOCABULARY. 369 Piete, godliness, piety, pietas. Pieux, pious, pius. Pinceau, painter's brush, pencil, pennicillum, penna, a feather. Pin, pine-tree, pinus.* Pire (comp.), worse, pejor. Pis (comp.), worse, pejus. Pitie, pity, pietas, piety, duty, pity. Place, room, space, place, plate a,* a broad way, an open Place, place, public square, $ space. Plage, sea-coast, country, region, plaga, a region. Plaie, wound, sore. plaga,* a biota. Plaindre, to pity, plangere. Plaire, to please, ") pleasure, j Plaisir, placere, to please. Plan, Plain, ad . flat, level, plain, } Plan, n. plane surface, plan, planus. Planche, board, plank, planca.* Planete, planet, planeta.* Plant, slip, plant, Plante, plant, sole of the foot, > planta. Plaque, plate (of metal), planca,* a board, a plank. Plantane, ou plane-tree, platanus. Plane, Platre, plaster, emplastrum.* Plein, full, plenus.* Plenitude, plenitude, plenitudo. Pleurer, to weep, to bewail, plore, to de- plorare. Pleuvoir, to rain, plue're. Pli, fold, plica. Plier, to bend, plicare. Plomb, lead, plummet, plumbum. Plonger, to plunge, (plumbicare) plumbum, lead. Pluie, rain, pluvia. Plume, plume, pen, feather, pluma, a soft feather. Plus, more, plus. Pluvier, plover, pluvialis (sc. ales), a watet bird. Pluvieux, rainy, pluviosus. Poids, load, weight, pondus. Poele, f. a frying-pan, patella, dim. of patina, apan. Poele, m.f pall, pallium, a cloak, a cover. t " Poele, m., ituve, mot d'origine obscure."— Scheler. 370 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Foil, hair, pilus. Poilu, hairy, pilosus. Poinc^on, awl, bodkin, puncheon, punctio, from pungere, to puncture. Poing, fist, pugnus. Point, point, dot, punctum. Poire, f. pear, pirum. Poirier, pear-tree, pirus. Pois, pea, pisum. Poison, poison, potio, a drink, a potion. Poisson, fish, piscis. Poissonneux, abounding in fish, piscosus. Poissonnier, fish-monger, piscarius. Poitrine, breast, chest, pectus, oris. Poivre, pepper, piper.* Poix, f. pitch, pix, cis. Pole, m. extremity of an axis, pole, polus.* Police, police, policy (of insur- politia,* for politia,* the ance), state. Poliment, politely, polire, to polish. Polisson, blackguard, mischievous polire, to clean.f child, Politique, political, politicus.* Poltron, coward, poltroon, homo pollice truncus.J Polype, m. polypus, polypus.* Pommade, pomatum, pomum, fruit. Pomme, apple, pomum. Pommier, apple-tree, pomus. Pondre, to lay (eggs), ponere, to place. Pont, bridge, } pontoon, 5 Ponton, pons, tis. Pore, hog, pork, porcus.* Port, port, wharf, portus, us. Porte, gate, door, portal, porta. Porter, to carry, J Portier, door-keeper, porter, portare, to carry. Portique, m. portico, porticus, us, a gallery. Portrait, portrait, protrahere, to draw forth. Pose, steady, sedate, positum, part, of ponere, to place. t Originally applied to a street-cleaner. X A man deprived of his thumb. " It was once the practice of cowards to cut off their thumbs, that they might not be compelled to serve in war."— Gibson. LATIN VOCABULARY. 371 Poser, to place, to put, pausare, to pause. Posseder, to possess, possidere. Poste, m. post (station), > Poste, f. post (establishment for I posita, part, of ponere, to post horses), post \ place. office. J Poteau, post (of timber), potellus, dim. of postis. Pouce, m. thumb, inch, pollex, icis. Poudre, f. dust, powder, pulvis, eris. Poulain, colt, foal, \ Poule, hen, fowl, f pullus,* a young animat. Poulette, pullet, J Poumon, lungs,^ pulmo, onis.* Poupe, stern of a ship, poop, puppis. Pour, for, in order to, pro, before. Pourquoi, why, for what, pro quo. Pourrir, to rot, to putrefy, putrere. Pourtant, however, pro tanto, for so much. Pousser, to push, pulsare, freq. of pellere, to drive. Poussiere, f. dust, pulvis, eris. Pouvoir, to be able, potere, for posse. Practicable, practicable, practicus.* Prairie, prairie, large meadow, } meadow, 5 Pre, pratum. Preceder, to precede, prsecedere. Precepteur, m. preceptor, teacher, prseceptor. Precieux, costly, precious, pretiosus. Precipiter, to precipitate, prsecipitare. Precisement, precisely, prseclsus, part, of prsecidere, to cut short. Preferer, to prefer, prseferere, for prseferre. Premices, f. pi. first fruits, primitise. Premier, first, prime, primus. Prendre, to take, to seize, prendere. Preparer, to prepare, prseparare. Pres, near, close, pressus, part, of premere, to press. Present, present, prsesens. Presenter, to present, prsesentare. Pret, ready, at hand, praesto. Pretexts, m. pretext, prsetextum. Pretre, priest, presbyter,* an elder. Preuve, proof, probare, to prove. 372 Prier, to pray, to beg, precari. Priere, f. prayer. precarius, obtained by en* treaty. Prince, prince, princeps, a chief, leader. Printemps, spring, primum tempus = the first season. Prison, f. prison, -% prisoner, 5 prensio, from prendere; to Prisonnier, seize. Priver, to deprive, privare. Prix, price, prize, pretium. Pro chain, neighboring, near, qu. propianus, from prope. Proche, near, next, proximus, nearest, next. Procurer, to procure, procurare, to take care of. Prodige, prodigy, prodigium, from prodicere, to foretell. Produire, to produce, producere. Professer, to profess, professari, freq. of profiteri. Proie, booty, prey, prseda. Promener, to lead, to conduct, pro, forward, and minare, to drive. Promettre, to promise, promittere. Prompt, ready, prompt, promptus, part, of promere, to bring to light. Promptement, promptly, prompte. Prononcer, to pronounce, pronuntiare. Proportionne, proportioned, proportionate. Propos, thing said in conversation, propositum, part, of propo- talk, nere, to propose. Proposer, to propose, proponere. Propre, own, suitable, proper, proprius. Prose, prose, prorsa = proversa (sc. ora- tio), straightforward dis- course. Prosperite, prosperity, prosperitas. Proteger, to protect, protegere. Protestant, protestant, protestari, to bear witness, to protest. Proue, prow, prora. Prouver, to prove, probare. Prune, plum, } prune, $ Pruneau, prunum,* a plum. Prunier, plum-tree, prunus.* Public, public, publicus. LATIN VOCABULARY. 373 Puce, flea, pulex, tcis. Pucelle, maid, puella. Puine, younger (hence puny) , post-natus, later born. Puis, then, afterwards, post. Puisque, seeing that, since, postquam, after. Puits, well, puteus. Pulpe, pulp. pulpa. Punaise, bug, putere, to be putrid. Punir, to punish, punire. Pupitre, desk (hence pulpit), pulpitum. Pur, unmingled, pure, purus. Purement, genuinely, purely, pure. Purete, purity, puritas. Putrefaction, putrefaction, putrefacere, to make putrid. Q. Qualite, quality, qualitas. Quand, when, quando. Quantieme, what number, day (of the quantus, how great. month), Quantite, quantity, quantitas. Quarante, forty, Quarantaine, the number forty, tine,^ quaran- C quadraginta, forty. Quatorze, fourteen, quatuordecim. Quatre, four, quatuor. Que, what, quem, ace. of qui. Quel, what, . qualis. Quelconque, whatever, qualecunque. Quelque, some, any, (qualis quam) for quisquam. Querelle, quarrel, debate, querela, a complaint. Querir, to fetch (hence quest), quserere, to seek. Queue, tail, cue, cauda. Qui, who, qui. Quiconque, whoever, quicunque. Quintal, quintal, centum, a hundred. Quinze, fifteen, quindecim. Quitter, to leave, to quit, quietus, quiet. f The quarantine originally lasted forty days. 32 374 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND R. Raconter, to tell, to recount, re-computare. Rage, f. madness, rage, rabies. Raine, frog, rana. Raisin, Raisin sec, grape, y a dried grape, a raisin, ) racemus, a bunch, a cluster. Raison, reason, ratio. Ramage, warbling (of birds), ramus,f a bough. Rame, oar, ramus, a bough. Rameau, branch, bough, raniulus, dim. of ramus. Rancon, ransom, redemptio, onis. Ranger, to range, to arrange, regula, a rule. Rapace, greedy, rapacious, rap ax, acis. Rapacite, rapacity, rapacitas. Rappeler, to call back, to call, re-appellare. Rare, thin, scarce, rare, rarus. Rarete, scarcity, rarity, raritas. Ras, shaved close, flat, rasus, from radere, to scrape. Raser, to shave, to raze, radere, to scrape. Rateau, rake, rastellum, dim. of rastrum. Rauque, hoarse, harsh, raucus. Rave, radish, turnip, rapa, and rapum.* Ravir, to ravish, to transport, rapere, to seize. Rayon, ray, radius, radius.* Receler, to embezzle, to conceal, re-celare, to conceal again. Recevoir, to receive, recipere. Reciproque, reciprocal, mutual, reciprocus, turning back the same way. Reciter, to recite, recitare. Recolte, harvest, crop, recollectus, part, of recol- ligere, to gather up. Recompenses to recompense, re-compensare. Reconnaissance recognition, acknowledgment, recognitio, onis. Reconnaitre, to recognize, recognoscere. Reflechir, to reflect, reflectere, to bend or turn bach. Refuser, to refuse, recusare. Regime, m. regimen, guidance, regimen, inis. Regiment, regiment, regere, to rule. t Ramage, " ellipse pour chant ramage, cantus silvestris." — Scheler. LATIN VOCABULARY. 375 Regie, Reglement, Regne, m. Regretter, Rein, Reine, Rejoindre, Relache, m. Relever, Religion, Remede, m. Remercier, Remordre, Remords, Remplir, Remuer, Renaitre, Rencontrer, Rendre, Renfermer, Renoncer, Renoncule, Rente, Rentrer, Renvoyer, Repandre, Repentir (se), Repeter, Repondre, Repos, Reposer, Representer, Repudier, Reputation, rule, model, regulation, kingdom, reign, to regret, kidney, pi. the reins, the loins, queen, to rejoin, respite, relaxation, to raise up, religion, remedy, to thank, to attack, to bite again, remorse, to fill again, to fill, to move, to be born again, to meet, to encounter, to give back, to render up, to confine, to contain, to renounce, crowfoot,, ranunculus, rent, income, to return, to re-enter, to send back, to pour out, to spread, meal, repast, to repent, to repeat, to reply, to respond^ rest, to repose, to represent, to repudiate, reputation, regtila, a rule. regnum. re, again, quiritari, freq. of queri, to complain. ren,* pi. renes. reglna. re-jungere. re, again, laxus, loose. relevare. religio. remedium. re, again, merces, a reward. remordere, to bite again. re-implere. re, again, mutare, to move. renasci. re, again, B. L. in-contra, for contra, against. reddere. re, again, in, in, firmare, to secure, to make firm. renuntiare. ranunculus. reddere, to give back. re-intrare. re, again, in, upon, via, the way. re, again, expandere, to spread out. repascere, to feed again. re, again, poenitere, to repent. repetere. respondere. repositum, part, of repond- re, to replace. reponere, to replace. re-praesentare. repudiare. reputatio, a reckoning, a com- putation. 376 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Resoudre, to resolve, to settle, resolvSre. Respecter, to respecty respectare, freq. of respicere, to look upon. Respirer, to breathe, to respire. respirare. Ressembler, to resemble. re, again, simulare, to feign^ to pretend. Rester, to remain, restare = remanere. Restituer, to restore, restituere. Retenir, to retain, retinere. Retourner, to return, re, again, tornare, to turn in a lathe. Rets, net, snare, rete. Reunir, to re-unite, to unite, re-unire. Revenir, to return, revenire. Revolte, Revolter (se), revolt, ~\ to revolt, > revoluta, part, of revolvere, to roll back. Revolution, revolution, j Rhumatisme, rheumatism, rheuma,* a flowing. f Ridicule, m., ridicule, ridiculus. Ridicule, m., reticule, reticulum, dim. of rete, a corruption net. of reticule, Rien, nothing, anything, rem, ace. of res, a thing. Rire, to laugh, to joke, ridere. Rit, rite, m. rite, ceremony, ritus. Rivage, shore, bank, rip a. Rival, rival, rivalis, from rivus, a brook. % Rive, bank, margin, rip a. Riviere, f. river, ripa, a bank. Rixe, combat, scuffle, rixa. Roche, rock, rapes. Roi, king, rex. Roide, Raide, stiff, rigid, rigidus. Romain, Roman, Romanus. Rompre, to break, rumpere. Rond, circular, round, rotundus. Rondeur, roundness, -\ rotundity, § Rotondite, rotunditas. Rose, rose, rosa.* Rosee, dew, ros.* t " Denomination qui jusqu'au xvii e siecle servait a designer toute fluxion san- guine ne se terminant point par une hemorragie." — Bescherelle. X Rivales, neighbors who have the same brook in common. LATIN VOCABULARY. 377 Rossignol, nightingale, lusciniola, dim. of luscinia. Roturier, plebeian, ruptura, from rumpere, to break, f Roue, wheel, rota. Rouge, red, fiery, ruber.* Rougir, to redden, to blush, rubere. Rouille, rust, mildew, rublgo, roblgo. Rouler, to roll, ) rotulus, dim. of rota, a Roulette, caster, roller, ) wheel. Route, road, route, (via) rupta, a broken way. Roux, Rousse, red, red-haired, russet. russus, red. Rude, rough, harsh, rude, rudis. Rudesse, asperity, rudeness, rudltas. Rue, rue (an herb), rata.* Rue, street, ruga, a wrinkle, in B. L. « a furrow. Ruisseau, brook, rivulet, rivus. s. Sabbat, Sabbath, Sabbatum.* Sable, m. sand, hour-glass, sabulum. Sac, bag, sack, saccus.* Saigner, to bleed, sanguinare. Saillir, to leap, to sally, salire. Sain, healthy, sane, sanus.* Saint, holy, a saint, sanctus. Saison, season, statio, standing, station. Salade, salad, sal, salt. % Sale, dirty, squalid, squalidus. Saline, salt provisions, sa#-pit, sallnse, salt works. Salive, saliva, saliva.* Saluer, to salute, salutare. Samedi, Saturday, Saturni, of Saturn, dies, the day. Sang, blood, race, sanguis. Sanglant, bloody, sanguinolentus. Sanglier, wild boar, singularis, single, solitary. Sangsue, blood-sucker, leech, sanguisuga. Sans, without, sine. f A breaker = a tiller of the soil. X Salade, " propreme«t mets assaisonne avec du sel.' 32* Scheler. 378 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Sante, health, sanity, Sarcler, to weed, to rake, Sarcloir, hoe, rake, Sarment, vine branch, Sauf, safe, Sauge, f. sage (an herb), Saule, willow- tree, Saumon, salmon, Saut, leap, jump, Sauter, to skip, to jump, Sauvage, » wild, savage, Sauver, to save, Sauvete, security, safety, Savoir, to know, Savon, soap, Scabreux, rough, scabrous, Scalpel, lancet, scalpel, Scelle, (law) seal, Sceptre, sceptre, Science, science, Scier, to saw, to cut down, Scorpion, scorpion, Scrupule, m. doubt, scruple, Se, one's self, Seance, a sitting, Seau, bucket, pail, Sec, dry, withered, Secher, to dry up, Secheresse, dryness, Second, second, Secouer, to shake off, to jog, Secours, relief, succor, Seigle, m. rye, Seigneur, lord, seignior, Sein, breast, bosom, Seine, drag-net, seine, Seize, sixteen, Sel, salt, Selle, saddle, Semaine, week, samtas. sarculare. sarculum. sarmentum, a twig, salvus. salvia, salix.* salmo, onis. saltus, us. saltare. silvaticus. salvare. salvitas, for salus. sapere. sapo, onis. scabrosus. scalpellum. sigillum. sceptrum.* scientia. secare. scorpio, onis.* scruptilus, dim. of scrupus, a sharp stone. sedens, present part, of se- dere, to sit. sitiila. siccus. siccare. siccitas. secundus. excutere. succurrere, to assist, secale. senior, elder. sinus, us. sagena. sedecim. sal.* sella, a seat. septimana (sc. lux), pertain- ing to the number seven. LATIN VOCABULARY. 379 Sembler, to appear, to resemble, to seem, simulari. Seneve, black mustard, sinapi.* Sens, sense, > Sensation, sensation, $ sensus. Sensible, sensible, sensibilis, from sentire, to perceive. Sentier, path, track, semita. Sentine, the well-room of a ship, sentlna, bilge water, the rab- ble. Sentinelle, sentinel, sentinator, one who bales a ship. Sentir, to feel, to scent, to taste, sentire, to discern by the senses. Separer, to separate, separare. Sept, seven, septem. Septembre, September, September (sc. mensis). Septentrion, the north, septentrio, onis. Sepulcre, sepulchre, burial-place, sepulchrum. Sepulture, f. burial, sepulture, sepultura. Serf, serf, servus, a slave. Sergent, sergeant, serviens, part, of servire, to serve. Serieux, serious, serius." Serpent, serpent, serpens. Serrure, f. lock, bar, bolt, sera. Servir, to serve, servire. Seul, alone, sole, solus.* Severite, severity, severitas. Si, if, yet, unless, si, if. Si, yes, to that degree, so, sic, in this mannvt. Siecle, m. century, an age, seculum. Siege, chair, seat, siege, sedes, a seat. Sien, his, hers, suum. Siffler, to whistle, to hiss, sibilare. Signe, m. mark, omen, sign, signum. Silence, m. silence, silentium. Sillon, furrow, sulcus.* Sillonner, to furrow, sulcare. Singe, monkey, ape, simia. Sinistre, inauspicious, sinister, sinister. Situer, to place, situs, situation. Six, six, sex.* Sobre, temperate, sober, sobrius. 380 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Societe, society. societas. Soeur, sister, soror. Soie, bristle, silk, seta, a bristle.f Soif, thirst, sitis. Soir, evening, serum (sc. tempus), late. Soixante> sixty, sexaginta. Soldat, soldier, solidus (sc. numus*), hard eoin.\ SoleiV sun, soh solis. Solidite, solidity, soliditas. Sombre, dark, gloomy, sub, under, umbra, a shadow. Somme, m. sleep, nap, somnus.* Somme, f. sum, amount, summa (sc. res), the chief point. Sommeil, sleep, somnium. Son, his, her, its, suum. Son, noise, sound, sonus. Songe, dream, somnium. Songer, to dream, somniare. Sonner, to ring, to sound, sonare. Sorcier, sorcerer, wizard, sors, tis, a lot, a prophecy. Sort, lot, chance, sors, sortis. Sortir, to go out, surrectum, part of surgere, to rise. Sou (formerly halfpenny, sou, solidus (sc. numus) = solid Sol), coin. Soufflet, Souffler, pair of bellows, } to blow, to breathe, ) sufflare, to blow, to breathe. Souffrir, to suffer, sufferere, for sufferre. Soufre, brimstone, sulphur^ sulfur, or sulphur. Soulager, to comfort, to console, solari. Soulier, shoe, solum, the ground. Soupir, sigh, suspirium. Soupirer, to sigh, suspirare. Source, source, surgere, to rise. Sourd, deaf, dull, surd, surdus. Sourire, Souris, m. to smile, > smile, y surridere, to smile. Souris, f. mouse, sorex, icis,* a shrew-mouse. t " On disait d'abord seta serica — echeveau de soie, puis on s'est contente de dire tout court sefopour exprimer la meme chose; le terme generique a absorbe, comme souvent, le terme specifique." — Scheler. | A" soldat" is, therefore, in the primitive sense of the word, a mercenary. LATIN VOCABULAKY. 381 Sous, under, sub.* Soustraire, to subtract, subtrahere. Soutenir, to sustain, sustinere. Souvenir (se), to remember, subvenire, to come to one's aid. Souvent, often, subinde, immediately after. Spectacle, m. spectacle, spectaculum. Spectre, phantom, spectre, spectrum. Stable, solid, stable, stabilis. Stade, stadium, stade, stadium.* Suave, sweet, fragrant, suavis. Suavite, suavity, suavitas. Sue, juice, essence, succus. Succeder, to succeed, -\ ;, successively, $ Successivemenl succedere, to succeed. Sucer, to suck, sugere. Sucre, sugar, saccharum.* Suer, to sweat, sudare. SufFoquer, to suffocate, suffocare. Suif, tallow, suet, sebum, sevum. Suite, suite, sequel, secuta, part, of sequi, to fol- low. Suivre, to follow, sequere, for sequi* Sujet, subject, subjectus, part, of subjicere, to propose. Superbe, proud, costly, superb, superbus.* Superbement, arrogantly, superbly, superbe. Superficie, Surface, superficies, *\ surface, y superficies. Sur, upon, over, super.* Sur, sure, secure, securus. Surdite, deafness, surditas. Surnommer, to surname, super, in addition to, nomi- nare, to name. Surprendre, to surprise, } surprise, ) sub, under, prehendere, to Surprise, catch, to take. Surtout, especially, super, above, totus, the whole. Surveiller, to watch over, to superin- super, over, vigilare, to tend, watch. 382 T. Table, table, tabula. Tablette, shelf, tablet, lozenge, tabella, dim. of tabula, a table. Tacher, to strive, to endeavor, taxare, to touch with force. Tain, fin-foil, stannum, an alloy of silver and lead. Taire, to be silent, tacere. Talent, talent, talentum.* Talon, the heel, talus. Tandis, whilst, until, tamdiu, so long. Tant, so much, so many, tantum. Tante, aunt, amita, a father's sister. Tantot, presently, soon, tantus, so much, tostum, part, of torrere, to bum, to be impetuous. Tapis, Tapissier, carpet, tapestry, -\ upholsterer, $ tapes,* a carpet. Tard, late, tardus. Tariere, f. auger, terebra, an instrument for boring. Taupe, mole, talpa. Taureau, bull, taurus.* Taverne, public house, tavern, taberna, a hut, booth, tavern. Tavernier, tavern-keeper, tabernarius, a shop-keeper. Teindre, to dye, to tinge, tingere. Teinture, f. dye, tincture, tinctum, part, of tingere, to dip. Tel, such, talis. Tellement, so much, so, in such a manner, taliter. Temoigner, Temoin, to testify, •% testimony, witness, ) testimonium, testimony. Tempe, the temple (of the head), tempus, time.f Tempete, storm, tempest, tempestas, a period of time, iceather, storm. Temple, m. temple, templum. Temps, time, weather, tempus, time. Tendre, soft, tender, tener. t " Parce que c'est a cet endroit que les cheveux commencent a bianctur, et & indiquer uue des periodes de la vie." — Bescherelle. LATIN VOCABULARY. 383 Tendresse, fondness, tenderness teneritas. Tenir, to hold, tenere. Tenter, to tempt, to attempt to try, tentare, freq. of tendere, to stretch, to aim. Terme, m. bound, limit, term, terminus. Terrain, ground, soil, terrenum (sc. solum). Terie, earth, land, terra. Tete, head, testa, shell. Thym, thyme, thy mum.* Tiare, f. tiara, tiara.* Tiede, tepid, lukewarm, tepidus. Tiedeur, lukewarmness, tepidity, tepor, oris. Tigre, tiger, tigris.* Timon, pole of a carriage team), (hence temo, onis. Tirer, to draw, trahere. Titre, title, title--page, titulus. Toge, f. toga (a Roman gown), toga. Toile, cloth, canvas, } toils (nets), ) Toiles, pi. . tela, web, icarp. Toison, f. fleece, (tonsio) from tondere, to shear. Toit, roof, tectum. Tombeau, grave, tomb, tumulus. Tomber, to fall, to tumble, tumulare, to entomb.f Tome, m. volume, tomus,* a cut, a piece. Ton, thy, tuum. Ton, tone, tune, tonus.* Tondre, to shear, to shave, tondere. Tonner, to thunder, tonare. Tordre, to twist, to wring, torquere. Tort, wrong, tortus, part, of torquere, to twist. Toucher, to touch, tangere. Toujours, always, totus, the whole, dies, day. Tour, m. turn, tour, turner's lathe, tornus,* a turner's lathe. Tour, f. tower, turris.* Tourbillon, whirlwind, turbo, mis. Tourelle, turret, he\\-Uirret, turrictila, dim. of turris, a tower. Tourmenter, to torment, tormentum, torture, torment* Tourner, to turn, tornus, a turner's lathe. t "Du lat. tumulare, mettrc au tombeau." — Besclierelle. 384 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Tourte, fruit-pie, tart, torta, part, of torquere, to twist, f Tourterelle, turtle-dove, turturilla, dim. of turtur. Tout, all, every (hence total), totus. Toux, cough, tussis. Toxique, m. poison (hence intoxicate), toxlcum.* Tracer, to draw out, to trace, ~\ Trainer, to drag, to draw, ) trahere, to draw, to drag. Traire, to rnilk, trahere, to draw. Traiter, to treat, to use, tractare, freq. of trahere, to draw. Tranquil, tranquil, tranquillus. Travers, breadth, transversus, transverse. Traverser, to cross, to traverse, transvertere, to turn across. Trefle, m. clover, trefoil, trifolium. Treize, thirteen, tredecim. Trembler, to tremble, tremere. Tremper, to steep, to temper, temperare, to moderate. Trente, thirty, triginta. Trepied, tripod, tripes, edis, three-footed. Tres, very, trans, beyond. Tresor, treasure, treasury, thesaurus.* Tressaillir, to start, to spring, trans, across, salire, to leap. Tribu, f. tribe, tribus, us. Triste, sad, dull, tristis. Tristesse, sadness, grief, tristitia. Trois, three, tres.* Tromper, to deceive, stropa, a ruse. Tronc, trunk, shaft, truncus. Trone, m. throne y thronus.* Trop, too much, turba, a o'owd, a disturbance. Trouble, disturbance, trouble, turbulentus, turbulent. Troupe, troop, flock, turba, a crowd. Trouver, to find, turbare, to disturb. Truelle, trowel, trulla. Truite, trout, tructa.* Tu, thou, tu.* Tuer, to kill, tutari, to defend. Tuile, tile, tegula. Tunique, tunic, coat (of the stomach), tunica, a tunic. Tympan, ear-drum, tympanum, tympanum.* f " Tarte, du lat. torta (torquere). chose faite en spirale. Le meme lat. torta a Sonne egralement le mot tourte." — Scheler* LATIN VOCABULARY. 385 XL Ulcere, ulcer, XJn, one, Uniforme, m. uniform. Unir, to unite, Usage, usage, use, habit, User, to use, to use up, Utile, useful, profitable, Utilite, utility, ;l ulcus, eris.* unus. uniforniis. uuire. usari, freq. of uti, to use. utilis. utilitas. V. Vacance, Vacances, pi. Vacciner, Vache, Vague, Vain, Vaincre, Vais, Vaisseau, Vaisselle, Valeur, Valoir, Vallee, Van, Vanite, Varice, Vase, m. Vaste, Vautour, Veau, Vegetal, Vegeter, Veille, Veilles, pi. Veiller, Veine, Venaison, Vendange, f. vacancy, } vacation, $ to vaccinate, cow, loose, vague, vain, to conquer, to vanquish, I go, vessel, ship, ^ plates and dishes, plate, $ value, worth, ^ to be worth, ) valley, fan (for winnowing), pride, vanity, swollen vein, varix, vessel, vase, spacious, vast, vulture, calf, veal (hence vellum), vegetable (plant, tree), -% to vegetate, $ eve, vigil, } watching, wakefulness, $ to watch, to wake, vein, venison, vintage, S3 vacatio, onis, freedom, exemp- tion. vacca, a cow. vagus, wandering, unsettled. vanus. vincere. vadere, to go. vascellum, dim. of vas, vasis, a vessel, a dish. valere, to be worth. vallis. vannus. vamtas. varix, icis. vas, vasis. vastus, vultur, uris. vitulus.* vegetare, to arouse, to quicken. vigilia, se, watching, wakeful- ness. vigilare. vena. venatio, hunting. vindemia. 386 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND Vendanger, to gather (grapes), vindemiare. Vendre, to sell, to vend, vendere. Vendredi, Friday, Veneris, of Venus, dies, the Venerable, venerable, day. venerabilis. Venger, to revenge, to avenge, vindicare. Venin, poison, venom, venenum. Venir, to come, venire. Vent, Venteux, Ventre. Ventricule, m. loind, gale, windy, belly, stomach, ventricle, ventus. ventosus. venter.* ventriculus. Vepres, evening prayers, vespers, vespera,* the evening. Ver, Verdeur, Verdir, ou worm (hence vertnin), greenness, verdure, to grow green, vermis. viridltas. viridare. Verdoyer, Verge, f. Verite, rod, truth, virga. Veritas. Vermisseau, vermicide, grub, vermiculus, dim. of vermis, a worm. Verre, Verrier, glass, a glass-dealer, vitrum. vitrarius, a glass-blower. Verrue, wart, verruca. Vers, verse, versus, n., from vertere, to Vers, towards, turn. versus, prep., from vertere, to turn. Verser, to pour, to pour out, versare, freq. of vertere, to turn. Verveine, Vert, ou Verd, Vertu, vervain, green, verdant, virtue, verbena. viridis. virtus. Veste, Vestibule, m. vest, jacket, vestibule, lobby, vestis, a garment. vestibulum, entrance court. Vetement, clothing, vestment, vestimentum. Vetir, to clothe, vestire. Veuf, Veuve, widower, -\ widoio, 5 viduus, bereft, widowed. Vice, m. vice, vitium. Victime, victim, victima. Victoire, Vide, victory, empty, void, destitute, victoria, viduus, bereft. LATIN VOCABULARY. 387 Vider, to empty, to settle, to drain, Vie, life, livelihood, Vieillard, old man, "^ Vieillesse, old age, Vieillir, to grow old, y Vieillot, oldish, Vieux, old, ancient, J Vierge, virgin, Vif, alive, lively, Vigne, vine, vwieyard, Village, village, Vin, wine, Vinaigre, vinegar, Violent, violent, Vipere, f. viper, Visite, visit, Vite, quick, fleet, Vitre, pane of glass, Vitrier, glazier, Vivier, fish-pond, Vivre, to live, Vceu, vow, wish, Voici, behold, here is, Voie, way, road, Voila, behold, there is, Voile, m. veil, } sail, 5 Voile, f. Voiler, to veil, to cover, Voir, to see, to behold Voisin, neighboring, Voiture, f. coach, vehicle, Voix, voice, Vol, flight, soaring, ) to fly, > Voler, Volontaire, volunteer, Volonte, will, volition, Volontiers, willingly, Volume, m. book, volume, Vomir, to vomit, Votre, your, viduare, to bereave, to deprive of- vita. vetiilus, dim. of vetus, old. virgo. vivus. vinea.* villa, country-seat, villa. vinum.* vinum, wine, acre, sour. violentus. vipera. visitare, freq. of visere, freq. of videre, to see. vividus, lively, vigorous. vitrea (sc. fenestra), glass window. vitrarius, a glass-blower. vivarium, vivere. votum. videre, to see, hicce, this. via. videre, to see, ille, that. velum. velar e. videre. viclnus. vectura, transportation. vox. volar e, to fly. voluntarius. voluntas. voluntarius, voluntary. volumen. vomere. vester. 388 FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND LATIN VOCABULARY. Vouloir, Vous, to be willing, to will, you, velle. vos. Voyage, Voyelle, Vrai, Vue, voyage, journey, vowel, true, real, sight, view, via, way, road. vocalis. verax. videre, to see. Y. Y, Yeuse, f. there, holm oak, ibi. ilex, ilicis. Zele, m. zeal, Zephyr, zephyr, Zodiaque, m. zodiac, Zone, zotie, zelus.* zephyrus, * a gentle west wind. zodiacus.* zona.* SUPPLEMENT. I. PRONUNCIATION. The general rules of pronunciation have been given (§§ 3-5), and the learner is especially referred to § 5 (5) ; but the following additional and more specific rules may be given for convenient reference : — § 1. VOWELS. For the approximate sounds of the vowels, see § 3 in the body of the work. _A. A is silent in aoriste (o-ris-t), aorist ; aout (ou), Au- gust; aouteron (ou-te-ron), harvester; taon (ton), gadfly ; and in the proper nouns Curasao (ku-ra-so), and Saone (so-n).' E. The sounds of e, e, e, and e have been given ; but there are many cases where e without a written accent is = e or e. The following general directions may be given to determine these cases : — \. M-=. e.* E followed by a mute consonant at the end of a word has the close sound (e), as rocher (ro-she), rock, venez (ve-ne), come ; except before t, as projet (pro-je), project, where it is open, and before final s 9 as Londres (lon-dr), where it remains mute, unless there is a written accent, as, amities, siccces. E2X the beginning or in the middle of words, before a double consonant, or two consonants sounded as one, has the close * For these rules for the pronunciation of e = e or e, frequently at variance with the indicated pronunciation of Spiers and Surenne, the author is chiefly indebted to Professor Sommer, author of " MetJwde uniforme pour V Enseignement des Langues," and " Grammaire de V Enseignement secondaire special." Edit. 1805, 33 * < 389 ) 390 SUPPLEMENT. § 1. sound, as dessin (de-sin), design; terrain (te-fin), piece of ground ; descendre (de-san-dr), to descend. JE before x has always the close sound, as exil (e-gzil), exile ; Alexandre (a-le-gzan-dr) ; except at the end of foreign words, as Essex (es-eks) ; Sussex (sus-eks). 2. M-=.e. M has, in general, the open sound, (e) in the final syllable of words when it is followed by one or more final consonants which are pronounced, as enfer (en-fer), hell ; avec (a-vek), with ; suspect (sus-pekt), suspected. E has the open sound (e) at the beginning or in the middle of words when followed by two different consonants, one of which is in the same syllable with it, as reste (res-t), remain- der; peste (pes-t), plague. JE in the penult before a final mute syllable (i. e., a syllable containing e mute) has the open sound, as princesse (prin- se-s), princess ; guerre (ghe-r), Avar. Exc. Femme (fa-m), woman, in which it has the sound of a, as also in the words solennel (so-la-nel), solemn, indemniser (in-da-m-ni-ze), to in- demnify, and its derivatives, and in adverbial endings in eminent (a-man). Note. The e following g before a and o has no sound of itself, being merely used to soften the sound of g, as irigeons (e-ri-jon), let us erect; trigeant (e-ri-jan), erecting. I. I is silent in moignon (mo-gnon), # stump ; oignon .(o-gnon), onion; poignard (po-gnar),* poniard; poignee (po- gne), handful ; and in the proper name Montaigne (mon-ta-gn), Montaigne. O. is silent in faon (fan), doe, fawn ; paon (pan), pea- cock, and JLaon (Ian), Laon, a city of France. joined with e forms the double letter ce, pronounced like e or e. (See Compound Vowels, (E.) TJ. ^between g and a is generally silent, as il legua (le- gha), he bequeathed. In a few words it is sounded ou, as Ungual (lln-gou-al), lingual ; and in some foreign names, as Gnat imala (gou a-ti-m a-la.) * Moa-gnon ; poa-gnar. — Spiers and Surenne. §§ 1, 2. PRONUNCIATION. 391 ^between g and e or % is generally silent, as guerre (ghe-r), war; guide (ghi-d), guide. It is sounded like the French u in arguer (ar-gu-e), to infer; aiguille (e-gui-i), needle, and its derivatives ; when the vowel following it takes the diseresis, as aigue (e-gu), fern, of aigu (e-gu), acute ; and in the proper name Guizot (gui-zo).* £7 between g and o is regularly silent, as leguons (le-gon), let us bequeath. Wis generally silent after q, as quart (kar), quarter. IT after q is sometimes sounded ou, especially in words directly derived from the Latin, as equation (e-koua-sion), equation ; quadrature (koua-dra-tu-r), quadrature. IT after q is sometimes sounded u, as equilatere (e-kui-la- te-r), equilateral; questeur (kues-teur), questor. ~Y. For the sound of this vowel, which has generally the power of two i?s, see § 4, 5, in the body of the work. § £. NASAL VOWELS. 1. Simple or compound vowels joined to a following m or n in the same syllable form the nasal vowels. The nasal sound does not take place when a vowel or silent h immediately fol- lows the ni or n, as famine (fa-mi-n), famine ; ananas (a-na- na), pine-apple ; when the m or n is doubled, as homme (o-m), man; innocence (i-no-sanf-s), innocence; and when m is im- mediately followed by n, as amnistie (amf-nis-ti), amnesty; omnibus (omf-ni-bus), omnibus. Exn. Enivrer (an-ni-vre), to intoxicate ; enorgueillir (an- jwr-gheu-yir), to make proud; emmener (an-m-ne), to take nway, and all words beginning with emm: ennoblir (an-no- folir), to dignify; ennui (an-nui), tedium, and its derivatives. * This pronunciation is the prevailing one in Paris, and M. Guizot himself pre- fers it to Ghi-zo, as the family is called in his native city of Nimes. f In the indicated pronunciation the nasal vowels will be denoted by a long mark (-) over the vowel preceding the m or n, thus : an, en, Tn, on, un; when this mark is not used, it indicates the absence of the nasal sound, as inne (in-n6), innate; om- nibus (om-ni-bus), omnibus. 392 SUPPLEMENT. § 2. .A.X1, Am, ean, em, and en have generally the same sound as an. Am is not nasal at the end of some biblical and historical names, as, Jeroboham (je-ro-bo-ha-m) ; Abraham (a-bra-ha-m) ; but in Adam (a-dan) it has the nasal sound. Em and en, in many words derived from Latin, or taken from other languages, have the sound of em and en in them and men / as amen (a-men), amen ; decemvir (de-sem-vir), decemvir; hymen (i-men), marriage ; Jerusalem (je-ru-za-lem), Jerusalem ; Sem (sem), Shem. En is pronounced like in in examen (e-gza-min), examina- tion ; in forms of verbs in enir, as je tiens (tiln), I hold, je reviendrai (re-vhn-dre), I shall return ; and in ten final, as bien (biin), well, rien (rim), nothing; also in compound words, when the primitive has the sound of in, as bientot (biin-to), very soon, So en and em, in a few foreign names, as Benjamin (bm-ja-min), Memphis (mln-fis). En is not nasal in ent final in the third person plural of verbs, this syllable being equivalent to e mute, except in the past progressive and present conditional, where it is absolutely silent, even in poetry ; as Us chantent (shan-t), they sing ; Us chantaient (shan-te), they were singing ; Us chanteraient (shan-t-re), they would sing. In Caen (kan), Caen, a city of France, the e is silent. In. Im, aim, eim, ain, ein, have generally the same sound as in. In is not nasal in some proper names taken from other languages, as, Ibrahim (i-bra-hi-m) ; Ephraim (e-fra-i-m) ; Selim (se-li-m). On. Om and eon have the same sound as on. In Laon (Ian), Laon, a city of France ; faon (fan), fawn ; and paon (pan), peacock, the o is silent ; but in taon (ton), an ox-fly, the a is silent. Un. TTm, and eun have the same sound as un. Tim has no nasal sound, but is pronounced o-m in some words adopted from the Latin, as album (al-bo-m), album; duumvir (du-o-m-vir), duumvir; laudanum (16-da-no-m), lauflanum; maximum (mak-si-mo-m), maximum. § 3. PRONUNCIATION. 393 § 3. DIPHTHONGS AND COMPOUND VOWELS. Ai, au, ei, eu, ce, ou, are, by some grammarians, considered as compound vowels, because their union produces but a single sound. For the regular sounds of these combinations, see § 3, 11-13, and §4, 1-3, in the body of the work. ^Vi. Ai when final generally = e', as.Je chantai (shan-te), I sang; but mai is pronounced me. When not final, ai is generally = e, as chataigne (sha-te-gn), chestnut ; je cliante- rais (shan-t-re), I would sing ; but ai in faisant, the present participle of faire, and in the forms derived from it, is some- times pronounced like e mute ; as je faisais (fe-ze), I was making. This pronunciation, derived from the ancient forms of this verb (fesant, je fesais, etc.), is now becoming obsolete. .A-U. An and eau have the sound of o ; as auteur (o-teur), author ; couteau (kou-to), knife. Ei. Mi is generally = e / as seigle (se-gl), rye ; seigneur (se-gneur), lord ; peine (pe-n), penalty ; reine (re-n), queen. En. Mu is pronounced like the simple u in gageure (ga-ju-r), # wager, bet; and in the verb avoir; as fai eu, j^eus, etc. CE. (M, when a compound vowelfi is = e, acute or grave, according to the accent which e would require in the same situation (see M) ; as cesophage (e-zo-fa-j), oesophagus ; cestre (es-tr), gadfly. (M before liquid I = eu, as ceil (eu-i), eye. On. For the sound of ou, see §3, 13, in the body of the work. 1. The simple diphthongs are ia, ie, io, oa, ce, oi, ua, ue, ui, as diamant (d-ya-man), diamond, premier (pre-m-ye), first, pocle (poe-1), stove. The sounds of the simple diphthongs, except that of oi (see § 4, 4), are produced by the rapid utterance of the vowel sounds of which they are composed. 2. The compound diphthongs are formed by the union of a simple and a compound vowel, or of two compound vowels, * Ga-je&r. — Spters and Surenne. t <2? is also a simple diphthong. See below. 394 SUPPLEMENT. §§ 3, 4. as iau in bestiaux (bes-t-yo), cattle; ieu in vieux (v-yeu), old ; ouai in ouais (ou-e), indeed. The sounds of these diphthongs are generally produced _hy the rapid utterance of their com- ponent parts ; but oeu =z eu, as o&uvre (eu-vr), work ; coeur (keur), heart; and ueu =. eu, as moqueur (mo-keur), deriding? Sometimes one of the elements is absolutely silent, as in aout and aouteron (see A) ; but the a is pronounced in the adjective aoute (a-ou-te), ripened by August heat. 3. The nasal diphthongs are formed by the union of two or more vowel sounds, one of which is a nasal vowel; as ian in viande (v-yan-d), meat; ten in bien (biin), well; ion in oc- casion (o-ka-zyon), occasion. The sounds. of these diphthongs also are generally produced by the rapid utterance of their component parts. CONSONANTS. §4. GENERAL RULES. • 1. Consonants at the beginning or in the middle of words are generally pronounced in French, even when silent in English ; as calme (kal-m), calm ; flegme (fleg-m), phlegm ; mnemonique (mne-mo-ni-k), mnemonics ; phthisie (fti-zi), phthisis. But pronounce asthme (as-m), asthma ; asthma- tique (as-ma-ti-k), asthmatic, without the th. 2. One or more consonants at the end of a word are gen- erally silent; as chand (sho), heat; dent (dan),* tooth ; des faits (de fe), facts ; but c, f, I, and r are usually exceptions to this rule, as sec (sek), dry ; canif (ka-nif), penknife ; Us (il), they; char (shar), car. 3. Final consonants are generally sounded in foreign proper names, and in words taken directly from the Latin, as Achab (:i-kab), Ahab; Cassius (ka-si-us), Cassius ; omnibus (om-ni- bus), omnibus. 4. The final consonant is very generally carried to the next word in connected discourse, when that word begins with a * The n should not be reckoned a consonant, en being- one of the nasal vowels. §§ 4, 5. PRONUNCIATION. 395 vowel sound; as grand ami (gran-ta * -mi), great friend; mes en/ants (me-zan-fan), my children ; but this linking is gener- ally avoided when jt would unite similar sounds ; as bon anana (bon-a-na-na), good pine-apple ; gargon inattentif (gar- son-i-na-tau-tif), inattentive boy. This exception applies chiefly to n,-s, and t. This linking does not take place with oui, onze, and onzieme. 5. A double consonant is usually pronounced as one; as assassin (a-sa-sm), assassin ; innocent (i-no-san), innocent. §0. SPECIAL RULES. The following rules include such cases as are not provided for by § 5, in the body of this work, and by the above general rules : — B. B final is pronounced in radoub (ra-doub), the refit- ting of a vessel, and rumb (romb), point of the compass. 0. C has the sound of sh in certain words derived from the Italian, as vermicelle (ver-mi-she-1), vermicelli; violoncelle (vio-lon-she-1), violoncello. 1. C final is silent in accroc (a-kro), rent ; arc-boutant (ar- bou-tan), flying-buttress ; broc (bro), jug ; clerc (kler), clerk ; eric (kri), screw-jack; croc (kro), hook; echecs (e-she),f chess; estomac (es-to-ma), stomach ; jonc (jon), rush ; lacs (la), snare, toils ; marc (mar), mark (eight ounces) ; tabac (ta-ba), tobacco ; and when immediately preceded by n ; as banc (ban), bench ; done (don), then ; but done is pronounced donk at the begin- ning of a clause, and of course before a vowel sound. 2. C and t occurring in this order at the end of a word are generally both sounded; as direct (di-rekt),$ direct; intact (In-takt), untouched ; suspect (sus-pekt), suspected ; but neither is sounded in amict (a-mi), amice ; distinct (dis-tln), distinct; instinct (in-stin), instinct; and c only is sounded in aspect (as-pek), aspect; correct (ko-rek), correct; respect (res^- pek), respect. * See § 5 (2) d. t I n echec (d-shek), check, the c is sounded. t Di-rek. — Spiers and Surenne. 396 SUPPLEMENT. § 5. Oil. Ch is pronounced like 7c before /, n, or r, in the same word ; as chlore (klo-r), chlorine ; technique (tek-ni-k), tech- nical ; chronique (kro-ni-k), chronic. 1. Ch is usually pronounced like 7c in words derived from Greek or Hebrew, as Achab (a-kab), Ahab ; CJianaan (ka- na-an), Canaan ; ec7io (e-ko), echo; so Micliel-Ange (mi-kel- an-j), Michael Angelo; but it has the sound of sh in Acheron (a-she-ron), Acheron; Achille (a-shi-1), Achilles; arcJievcque (ar-she-ve-k), archbishop ; Joachim (jo-a-shim), Joachim ; Mardochee (mar-do-she), Mordecai; patriarche (pa-tri-ar-sh), patriarch; Zachee (za-she), Zaccheus. 2. Ch is silent in almanach (al-ma-na), almanac. X>. D final is sounded in some foreign words, as David (da-vid), David; Alfred (al-fred), Alfred; also in sud (sud), south. 1. When d is doubled, both cVs are pronounced in a few words derived from the Latin ; as, addition (ad-di-sion), addition; reddition (red-di-sion), surrender. 2. D final in nouns is rarely carried; and the d final of the third person singular of verbs in re is carried only before il. elle, on / as rend-il (ran-til), does he render? 3. D final, when carried, is not changed to t in sud, as sud- est (su-dest), south-east. F. F final is silent in cerf (ser), deer; clef (kle), key; and in bceufs (beti), ceufs (eu), nerfs (ner), the plurals of bceuf (beuf), ox; ozuf (euf), egg; nerf (nerf), nerve. 1. F is silent in chef-d'oeuvre (she-deu-vr), masterpiece ; and in bceuf ceuf nerf before a consonant ; as bceuf gras (beu-gra), fat ox; ceuf frais (eu-fre), fresh egg; nerf vitcd (ner-vi-tal), life-string. {jr. Gf final has the hard sound in joug (joug), yoke ; it has the sound of 7c in bourg (bourk), market town, but is hard in the compound bourgmestre (bourg-mes-tr), burgo- master. 1. Double g before a consonant sound in the same word has the sound of single g hard, as aggravant (a-gra-van), § 5. PRONUNCIATION. 397 aggravating ; but before a vowel sound the first g is hard, the second soft; as suggerer (sug-je-re), to suggest. G-n. Gn is sounded hard in several words directly de- rived from the Latin or Greek; as gnomon (gno-mon), the hand of a dial; Gnossien (gno-si-in), Cretan; igne (ig-ne), igneous ; inexpugnable (i-neks-pug-na-bl), impregnable ; stag- nant (stag-nan), stagnant; stagnation (stag-na-sion), stagna- tion. Popular usage tends more and more to bring such words under the general rule, and pronounce the gn \ike ni in union; as cognation (co-gna-sion), cognation; magnesie (ma-gne-zi), magnesia. H. The most important cases of the aspirated h are given in § 5, A, Rem. 2. Other cases may be learned from the dictionary, and by practice with the teacher. With regard to the effect of the aspiration, authorities differ ; some assert- ing that it merely gives something of a guttural sound to the vowel which follows, while some of the best elocutionists in Paris now give it almost as much force as the English aspi- rated h. J. This letter, occurring always before a vowel, is never final, and never silent. L. Jl final is not liquid in civil (si-vil), civil ; exil (e-gzil), exile ; fil (fil), thread ; mil (mil), thousand ; JVil (nil), Nile ; profil (pro-fil), profile ; subtil (sub-til), subtile. 1. Ill or yll is not liquid in Achille (a-shi-1), Achilles ; distil- ler (dis-ti-le), to distil; idylle (i-cli-1), idyl; imbecillite (in-be- sil-li-te), imbecility; mille (mi-1), thousand ; osciller (o-sil-le), to oscillate ; pupille (pu-pi-1), ward ; sibylle (si-bi-1), sibyl; Sylla (sil-la), Sylla ; syllabe (sil-la-b), syllable ; tranquille (trfin-ki-1), quiet; vaciller (va-si-le), to stagger; ville (vi-1), city. 2. Double I in the middle of a word is never liquid after a, e, o, u, except in Sidly, which has the liquid sound. 3. L final is silent in baril (ba-ri), barrel; chenil (she-ni), dog-kennel; coutil (kou-ti), ticking ; fournil (four-ni), bake- house ; fusil (fu-zi), gun ; gril (gri), gridiron ; gentil (jan-ti), pretty ; outil (ou-ti), tool ; persil (per-si), parsley ; soul (sou), fill; sourcil (sour-si), eyebrow. 34 398 SUPPLEMENT. § 5. 4. L is silent in fits (fis), son ; and both I and s in pouls (pou), pulse. ]\X, IN". -3f and n at the beginning of syllables are pro- nounced as in English; as amiral (a-mi-ral), admiral; ananas (a-na-na), pine-apple. 1. M before n in the middle of words is usually sounded ; as omnipresent (om-ni-pre-zan), omnipresent; but it is silent in automne (6-to-n), autumn ; and in damner (da-ne), to damn, and its derivatives; as also in the compound condamner (kon- da-ne), to condemn, and its derivatives. 2. iVfinal before a vowel sound is carried to the next word in closely connected discourse ; as un bon enfant (un-bo-nan- fan), a good child ; but n final of nouns should not be carried. JP. P is silent in baptise?" (ba-ti-ze), to baptize ; compter (kon-te), to count ; dompter (don-te), to subdue ; scidpter (skul-te), to sculpture; and their derivatives; in exempter (eg-zan-te), to exempt, and its derivatives, except exemption (eg-zanp-sion), exemption ; in cheptel (she-tel), lease of cattle ; sept (set), seven ; septieme (se-tie-m), seventh ; and where it is practically final, being followed only by a mute consonant; as exempt (eg-zan), exempt; prompt (pron), speedy; temps (tan) time; and so when e mute is added ; as exempte (eg-zan-t), prompts (pron-t). <^. Q final has the sound of k ; but it is silent in cinq (sink), five, before nouns and adjectives beginning with a con- sonant sound ; as cinq ^arpo?2s(sln-gar-son), five boys ; cinq jolis enfants (sin-joli-zan-fan), five pretty children. Cinq is pronounced sm&when taken substantively; as le cinq Janvier (le-sink-jan-vie), the fifth of January. Q final is silent in coq delude (ko-din-d), turkey. 3F&. Double r is pronounced like r ; but the double sound is distinctly heard in the three following cases : — 1st. Abhorrer (a-bor-re), to abhor ; errer (er-re), to wander ; terreur (ter-reur), terror; and their derivatives; so terrestre (ter-res-tr), terrestrial. 2d. Words beginning with irr ; as irregulier (ir-re-gu-lie), irregular. § 5. PRONUNCIATION. 399 3d. The future and present conditional of acquerir, to acquire ; courir, to run ; mourir, to die ; and their derivatives, Sisfacquerrai (ja-ker-re), I shall acquire ; je courrais (je-kour- re), I should run ; je mourrai (je-mour-re), I shall die. 1. JZ final is pronounced in monosyllables ; as fer (fer), iron ; fier (fyer), proud ; tour (tour), tower ; vert (ver), green. 2. R final is pronounced in words of two or more syllables, except monsieur (mo-sieu), sir; and in er final, which is pro- nounced like e ; as chanter (shan-te), to sing. 3. R final is pronounced in the following words ending in er: amer (a-mer), bitter; belveder (bel-ve-der), belvedere; cancer (kan-ser), cancer ; cuiller (kui-yer), spoon ; enfer (an- fer), hell; ether (e-ter), ether; hier (i-er), yesterday; hivre (i-ver), winter; -Jupiter (ju-pi-ter), Jupiter; Lucifer (lu-si- fer), Lucifer; Luther (lu-ter), Luther; magister (ma-jis-ter), pedant; Niger (ni-ger), Niger; outremer (ou-tre-mer), ultra- marine. ^. Double s between two vowels has the sound of s, or occasionally both s's are sounded ; but they do not take the sound of z; as assez (a-se), enough; assomer (as-so-me), to fell, to kill. 1. /S before final me does not take the sound of z ; as ego- isme (e-go-is-m), selfishness ; heroisme (e-ro-is-m), heroism ; prisme (pris-m), prism ; schisme (shis-m), schism. 2. S between .two vowels does not take the sound of z when it is the initial letter of a part of a compound word ; as monosyllabe (mo-no-si-la-b), monosyllable. 3. S is pronounced in Christ (krist), but is silent in Jesus- Christ (je-zu-kri). 4. /Sc is pronounced as in English, but sch is usually pro- nounced like sh ; as schismatique (shis-ma-ti-k), schismatic. Sch is pronounced like sk in scheme (ske-m) (obs.), delinea- tion, and a few other words, chiefly scientific terms derived from the Greek. 5. S final is pronounced in hlocus (blo-kus), blockade ; cens (sans), census; en sus (an-sus), besides; fils (fis), son; Gil 400 SUPPLEMENT. § 5. Bias (jil-blas), Gil Bias; Jack's (j a-d is), formerly ; laps (laps), lapse ; lis (lis), lily — though silent in fleur de lis (fleur-de-li) ; mats (ma-is), maize ; mars (mars), March ; moeurs (meurs), manners ; ours (ours), bear ; pathos (pa-tos), bombast ; Bheims (rins), Rheims ; Rubens (ru-bans), Rubens ; sens (sans), sense ; tous (sub.) (tous), all ; vis (vis), screw. 6. S final is pronounced in many proper names and other words taken directly from Latin or Greek, without change of orthography ; as Adonis (a-do-nis), Adonis; Caius (ka-yus), Caius ; aloes (a-lo-es), aloes ; as (as), ace ; atlas (at-las), atlas; chorus (ko-rus), chorus; gratis (gra-tis), gratis; iris (i-ris), iris; lapis-lazidi (la-pis-la-zu-li),lapis-lazuli; omnibus (om-ni-bus), omnibus ; prospectus (pros-pek-tus), prospectus. T. T has the sound of s in argutie (ar-gu-si), quibble ; ineptie (i-nep-si), absurdity; minutie (mi-nu-st), trifle; pati- ence (pa-si-an-s), patience ; quotient (ko-sian), quotient; sati- ete (sa-sie-te), satiety ; also before final ien in proper nouns and adjectives, as Domitien (do-mi-sim), Domitian ; venitien (ve-ni-siln), Venetian ; and in the verbs balbutier (bal-bu-sie), to stammer; initier (i-ni-sie), to initiate. 1. T final is pronounced in aconit (a-ko-nit), aconite; azi- mut (a-zi-mut), azimuth; Brest (brest), Brest; brut (brut), rude ; chut (shut), hush ! deficit (de-fi-sit), deficit ; dot (dot), dowry ; est (est), east ; fat (fat), foppish ; fret (fret), freight ; granit (gra-nit), granite ; lest (lest), ballast ; luth (hit), lute ; malt (malt), malt ; mat (mat), checkmate ; net (adv.) (net), entirely ; occiput (ok-si-put), occiput ; opiat (o-pi-at), opiate ; ouest (ou-est), west ; pat (pat), stale mate; Pest (pest), Pesth ; preterit (pre-te-rit), preterite ; rapt (rapt), abduction ; tran- sept (tran-set), transept ; transit, (tran-zit), transit. 2. T final preceded by c is usually pronounced (see G.) ; as direct (di-rekt), direct ; exact (eg-zakt), exact ; suspect (sus- pekt), suspected; strict (strikt), strict ; tact (takt), touch, tact. 3. T final of sept and huit is pronounced when these words stand alone ; and when they occur at the end of a phrase, or immediately before a vowel sound in connected discourse; §5. PRONUNCIATION. 401 as, sept hommes (se-to-m), seven men; huit ans (hui-tan), eight years. 4. T final of vingt is pronounced before a vowel sound in connected discourse, and in the series of numbers between twenty and thirty ; but never at the end of a phrase, nor in quatre-vingts and its compounds. 5. T final of Christ (krist) is pronounced; but not in Jesus- Christ (je-zu-kri). 6. T final is seldom carried to the next word ; never when r immediately precedes, nor in the conjunction et (e), and ; as mort affreuse (mo-raf-freu-z), dreadful death; lui et elle (lui-e-el), he and she. 7. T final of cent (san) is not carried in numerals com- pounded of cent ; as cent-un (san-un), one hundred and one. V. V is never pronounced at the end of words or sylla- bles in French. At the beginning of syllables it has a sound somewhat softer than the English v ; as vieux (vieu), old. "W. Wh is pronounced like the English w in whig (ouig), whig; whisky (ouis-ki), whiskey; whist (ouist), whist. ZSZ. Ex initial before a vowel sound is pronounced egz ; # as examen (e-gza-min),* examination. 1. In cases not included in the above rule, and in § 5, sc, in the body of the work, this letter usually has the sound of ks ; as Alexandre (a-le-ksan-dr),* Alexander ; sexe (se-ks),* sex. 2. JT final, though usually silent, is pronounced like ks in certain words of Greek and Latin origin ; chiefly proper names; as Ajax (a-jaks), Ajax; climax (kli-maks), climax ; Felix (fe-liks), Felix ; index (in-de-ks),* index ; lynx (links), lynx ; prefix (pre-fiks), prefix ; Styx (stiks), Styx ; thorax (to-raks), thorax. So in Aix-la- Chapelle (eks-la-sha-pe-1). Z. Z final is pronounced in gaz (gaz), gas ; and in cer- tain proper names, in which it takes the sound of s ; as Metz (mes), Metz. * See § 1, E, Note. 34* 402 SUPPLEMENT. §6. II. INFLECTION OF VERBS § G» AVOIR, to have. Conjugated Negatively. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. Je n'ai pas, Tu n'as pas, II n'a pas, Nous n'avons pas, Vous n'avez pas, lis n'ont pas, Je n'avais pas, Tu n'avais pas, II n'avait pas, Nous n'avions pas, Vous n'aviez pas, lis n'avaient pas, Je n'eus pas, Tu n'eus pas, II n'eut pas, Nous n'eumes pas, Vous n'eutes pas, lis n'eurent pas, Je n'aurai pas, Tu n' auras pas, II n'aura pas, Nous n'aurons pas, Vous n'aurez pas, lis n'auront pas, Je n'ai pas eu, Tu n'as pas eu, II n'a pas eu, Nous n'avons pas eu, Vous n'avez pas eu, lis n'ont pas eu, PAST PROGRESSIVE. PAST INDEFINITE. FUTURE. PRESENT PERFECT. I have not. thou hast not. he has not. toe have not. you have not. they have not. I had not. thou hadst not. he had not. we had not. you had not. they had not. I had not. thou hadst not. he had not. we had not. you had not. they had not. I shall not. thou wilt not. he will not. we shall not. you will not. they will not. I have not had. thou hast not had. he has not had. we have not had. you have not had. they have not had. INFLECTION OP VERBS. 403 past perfect (principal). Je n'avais pas eu, I had not had. Tu n'avais pas eu, thou hadst not had. II n'avait pas eu, he had not had. Nous n'avions pas eu, we had not had. Yous n'aviez pas eu, you had not had. lis n'avaient pas eu, they had not had. past perfect (subordinate). Je iv eus pas eu, / had not had. Tu n'eus pas eu, thou hadst not had. II n'eut pas eu, he had not had. Nous n'eumes pas eu, we had not had. Vous n'eutes pas eu, you had not had. lis n'eurent pas eu, they had not had. FUTURE PERFECT. Je n'aurai pas eu, I shall not have had. Tu n' auras pas eu, thou wilt not have had. II n'aura pas eu, he will not have had. Nous n'aurons pas eu, we shall not have had. Vous n'aurez pas eu, you will not have had. lis n'auront pas eu, they will not have had. CONDITIONAL MODE. PRESENT. Je n'aurais pas, i" shoidd not have. Tu n'aurais pas, thou wouldst not have. II n'aurait pas, he would not have. Nous n'aurions pas, we shoidd not have. Vous n'auriez pas, you would not have, lis n'auraient pas, they would not have. PAST. Je n'aurais pas eu, I shoidd not have had. Tu n'aurais pas eu, thou wouldst not have had. II n'aurait pas eu, he would not have had. Nous n'aurions pas eu, we should not have had. Vous n'auriez pas eu, you would not have had. lis n'auraient pas eu, they woidd not have had. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. Que je n'aie pas, that I may not have. Que tu n'aies pas, that thou mayst not have. 404 SUPPLEMENT. §6. Qu'il n'ait pas, Que nous n'ayons pas, Que vous n'ayez pas, Qu'ils n'aient pas, Que je n'aie pas eu, Que tu n'aies pas eu, Qu'il n'ait pas eu, Que nous n'ayons pas eu, Que vous n'ayez pas eu, Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, PRESENT PERFECT. Que je n'eusse pas, that I might not have. Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou mightst not have. Qu'il n'eut pas, that he might not have. Que nous n'eussions pas, that we might not have. Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you might not have. Qu'ils n'eussent pas, that they might not have. PAST PERFECT. that he may not have. that we may not have, that you may not have, that they may not have. that I may not have had. that thou mayst not have had. that he may not have had. that we may not have had. that you may not have had. that they may not have had. Que je n'eusse pas eu, Que tu n'eusses pas eu, Qu'il n'eut pas eu, Que nous n'eussions pas eu, Que vous n'eussiez pas eu, Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, that I might not have had. that thou mightst not have had. that he might not have had. that we might not have had. that you might not have had. that they might not have had. N'aie pas, N'ayons pas, N'ayez pas, Ne pas avoir, N'avoir pas eu, N'ayant pas, Pas eu, N'ayant pas eu, IMPERATIVE MODE. INFINITIVE MODE. PRESENT. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. COMPOUND. have not, let us not have. have not ye or you. not to have, not to have had. not having. not had. not having had. 7. INFLECTION OF VERBS. 405 § y # AVOIR, to have. Conjugated Interrogatively. INDICATIVE MODE. Ai-je ? As-tu ? A-t-il ? Avons-nous ? Avez-vous ? Ont-ils ? Avais-je ? Avais-tu ? Avait-il ? Avions-nous ? Aviez-vous ? Avaient-ils ? Eus-je ? Eus-tu ? Eut-il ? Efimes-nous ? Eutes-vous ? Eurent-ils ? PAST PROGRESSIVE. PAST INDEFINITE. have If hast thou t has he t have we t have you t have they f had I? hadst thou ? had he t had toe f had you t hud they t had It hadst thou t had he ? had we t had you t had they ? Aurai-je ? Auras-tu ? Aura-t-il ? Aurons-nous ? Aurez-vous ? Auront-ils ? Ai-je eu ? As-tu eu ? A-t-il eu ? Avons-nous eu ? Avez-vous eu ? OnMlS feu ) PRESENT PERFECT. shall I have ? wilt thou have ? will he have t shall we have t will you have f wiU they have t have I had t hast thou had f has he had ? have roe had? have you had t %uu they had? 406 SUPPLEMENT. §7. past perfect (principal). Avais-je eu ? Avais-tu eu ? Avait-il eu ? Avions-nous eu ? Aviez-vous eu ? Avaient-ils eu ? had I had ? hadst thou had ? had he had ? had we had ? had you had ? had they had f Eus-je eu ? Eus-tu eu ? Eut-il eu ? Eumes-nous eu ? Eutes-vous eu ? Eurent-ils eu ? past perfect (subordinate). had I had f hadst thou had ? had he had ? had we had ? had you had f had they had t FUTURE PERFECT. Aurai-je eu ? Auras- tu eu ? Aura-t-il eu ? Aurons-nous eu ? Aurez-vous eu ? Auront-ils eu ? shall I have had f wilt thou have had ? will he have had f shall we have had ? will you have had f will they have had ? Aurais-je ? Aurais-tu ? Aurait-il ? Aurions-nous ? Auriez-vous ? Auraient-ils ? CONDITIONAL MODE. PRESENT. should I have f wouldst thou have f would he have ? should we have ? would you have ? would they have f Aurais-je eu ? Aurais-tu eu ? Aurait-il eu ? Aurions-nous eu ? Auriez-vous eu ? Auraient-ils eu ? should I have had ? wouldst thou have had f would he have had f should we have had f would you have had ? would they have hadf 8. INFLECTION OP VERBS. 407 § 8. AVOIR, to have. Conjugated Negatively and Interrogatively. INDICATIVE MODE. PAST PROGRESSIVE. PAST INDEFINITE. N'ai-je pas ? N'as-tu pas ? N'a-t-il pas ? N'avons-nous pas ? N'avez-vous pas ? N'ont-ils pas ? N'avais-je pas ? N'avais-tu pas ? N'avait-il pas ? N'avions-nous pas ? N'aviez-vous pas ? N'avaient-ils pas ? N'eus-je pas ? N'eus-tu pas ? N'eut-il pas ? N'efimes-nous pas ? N'efttes-vous pas ? N'eurent-ils pas ? N'aurai-je pas ? N'auras-tu pas ? N'aura-t-il pas ? N'aurons-nous pas ? N'aurez-vous pas ? N'auront-ils pas ? PRESENT PERFECT. N'ai-je pas eu ? N'as-tu pas eu ? N'a-t-il pas eu ? N'avons-nous pas eu ? N'avez-vous pas eu ? N'ont-ils pas eu ? FUTURE. have I not f hast thou not ? has he not ? have we not ? have you not ? have they not f had I not f hadst thou not ? had he not f had we not ? had you not ? had t/iey not? had I not ? hadst thou not ? had he not ? had toe not ? had you not ? had they not ? shall I not have t wilt thou not have ? will he not have ? shall we not have f will you not have f will they not have t have I not had ? hast thou not had? has he not had? have we not had ? have you not had ? have they not had? 408 SUPPLEMENT. §8. past perfect (principal). N'avais-je pas eu ? had I not had f N'avais-tu pas eu ? hadst thou not had? N'avait-il pas eu ? had he not had ? N'avions-nous pas eu ? had we not had ? N'aviez-vous pas eu ? had you not had ? N'avaient-ils pas eu ? had they not had ? past perfect (subordinate). N'eus-je pas eu ? N'eus-tu pas eu ? N'eut-il pas eu ? N'eumes-nous pas eu ? N'eutes-vous pas eu ? N'eurent-ils pas eu ? had I not had f hadst thou not had t had he not had ? had we not had ? had you not had ? had they not had ? FUTURE PERFECT N'aurai-je pas eu ? N'auras-tu pas eu ? N'aura-t-il pas eu ? N'aurons-nous pas eu ? N'aurez-vous pas eu ? N'auront-ils pas eu ? shall I not have had? wilt thou not have had ? will he not have had ? shall we not have had ? will you not have had 1 will they not have had ? CONDITIONAL MODE. PRESENT. N'aurais-je pas ? N'aurais-tu pas ? N'aurait-il pas ? N'aurions-nous pas ? N'auriez-vous pas ? N'auraient-ils pas ? should I not have f wouldst thou not have ? would he not have ? should we not have 1 would you not have ? would they not have ? N'aurais-je pas eu ? N'aurais-tu pas eu ? N'aurait-il pas eu ? N'aurions-nous pas eu ? N'auriez-vous pas eu ? N'auraient-ils pas eu ? should I not have had t wouldst thou not have had t would he not have had t should we not have had t would you not have had f would they not have had t §9. INFLECTION OP VERBS. 409 CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. §9. £TBE A] [Mia, to be loved. INDICATIVE MODE PRESENT. Je suis aime, m., aimee, f., I am loved. Tu es aime, m., aimee, f., thou art loved. 11 est aime, he is loved. Eile est aimee, she is loved. Nous sommes aimes, m., aimees, I., we are loved. Vous etes aimes, m., aimees, f., you are loved. lis sont aimes, m., they are loved. Elles sont aimees, f., they are loved. PAST PROGRESSIVE. J'etais aime, m., aimee, f., I was loved, was being loved, * Tu etais aime, m., aimee, f., thou wast loved, wast being loved, 11 etait aime, he was loved, was being loved, -2 Elle etait aimee, she was loved, was being loved, > o Nous etions aimes, m., aimees, f., we were loved, were being loved, Vous etiez aimes, m., aimees, f., you were loved, were being loved, CO Us etaient aimes, m., they were loved, were being loved, o Elles etaient aimees, f., they were loved, were being loved, - PAST INDEFINITE. Je fus aime, m., aimee, f., I was loved. Tu fus aime, m., aimee, f., thou wast loved. 11 fut aime, he was loved. Elle fut aimee, she was loved. Nous fumes aimes, m., aimees, f., we were loved. Vous futes aimes, m., aimees, f., you were loved. lis furent aimes, m., they were loved. Elles furent aimees, f., they were loved. FUTURE. Je serai aime, m., aimee, f., I shall be loved. Tu seras aime, m., aimee, f., thou wilt be loved. 11 sera aime, he will be loved. Elle sera aimee, she will be loved. Nous serons aimes, m., aimees, f., we shall be loved. Vous serez aimes, m., aimees, f., you will be loved. lis seront aimes, m., they will be loved. Elles seront aimees, f., they will be loved. 35 410 SUPPLEMENT. §9. PRESENT PERFECT. J'ai ete aime, m., aimee, f., I have been loved. Tu as ete aime, m., aimee, f., thou hast been loved. II a ete aime, he has been loved. Elle a ete aimee, she has been loved. Nous avons ete aimes, m., aimees, f., we have been loved. Vous avez ete aimes, m., aimees, f., you have been loved. lis ont ete aimes, m., they have been loved. Elles ont ete aimees, f., they have been loved. past perfect (principal). J'avais ete aime, m., aimee, f., I had been loved. Tu avais ete aime, m., aimee, f., thou hadst been loved. II avait ete aime, he had been loved. Elle avait ete aimee, she had been loved. Nous avions ete aimes, m., aimees, f., we had been loved. "Vous aviez ete aimes, m., aimees, f., you had been loved. Us avaient ete aimes, m., they had been loved. Elles avaient ete aimees, f. they had been loved. past perfect (subordinate). J'eus ete aime, m., aimee, f., I had been loved. Tu eus ete aime, m., aimee, f., thou hadst been loved. II eut ete aime, he had been loved, Elle eut ete aimee, she had been loved. Nous eumes ete aimes, m., aimees, f., we had been loved. Vous eutes ete aimes, m., aimees, f., you had been loved. lis eurent ete aimes, m., they had been loved. Elles eurent ete aimees, f., they had been loved. FUTURE PERFECT. J'aurai ete aime, m., aimee, f., Tu auras ete aime, m., aimee, f., H aura ete aime, Elle aura ete aimee, Nous aurons ete aimes, m., aimees, f., Vous aurez ete aimes, m., aimees, f., lis auront ete aimes, m., Elles auront ete aimees, f. CONDITIONAL MODE. PRESENT. I shall have thou wilt have he will have she will have we shall have you will have they will have they will have been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved. Je serais aime, m., aimee, f., Tu serais aime, m., aimee, f., I should be loved, thou wouldst be loved. §9. INFLECTION OF VERBS. II serait aime, Elle serait aimee, Nous serions aimes, m., aimees, f., Vous seriez aimes, m., aimees, f., lis seraient aimes, *m., Elles seraient aimees, f., PAST. J'aurais ete aime, m., aimee, f., Tu aurais ete aime, m., aimee, f., II aurait ete aime, Elle aurait ete aimee, Nous aurions ete aimes, m., aimees,f., Vous auriez ete aimes, m., aimees, f., lis auraient ete aimes, m., Elles auraient ete aimees, f., 411 he would be loved, she would be loved, we should be loved. you would be loved. they would be loved. they would be loved. I should have thou wouldst have he would have she would have we should have you would have they would have they would have been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved, been loved. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. Que je sois aime, m., aimee, £, that I may be loved. Que tu sois aime, m., aimee, f., that thou mayst be loved. Qu'il soit aime, that he' may be loved. Qu'elle soit aimee, that she may be loved. Que nous soyons aimes, m., aimees, f., that we may be loved. Que vous soyez aimes, m., aimees, f., that you may be loved. Qu'ils soient aimes, m., that they may be loved. Qu' elles soient aimees, f., that they may be loved. PAST. Que je fusse aime, m., aimee, f., that I might be loved. Que tu fusses aime, m., aimee, f., that thou mightst be loved. Qu'il fut aime, that he might be loved. Qu'elle fut aimee, that she might be loved. Que nous fussions aime, m., aimees, f., that we might be loved. Que vous fussiez aimes, m., aimees, f., that you might be loved. Qu'ils fussent aimes, m., that they might be loved. Qu' elles fussent aimees, f., that they might be loved. PRESENT PERFECT. Que j'aie ete aime, m., aimee, f., Que tu aies ete aime, m., aimee, f., Qu'il ait ete aime, Qu'elle ait ete aimee, Que nous ayons ete aimes, m., aimees, f., that I may have been loved. that thou mayst have been loved. that he may have been loved. that she may have been loved. that we may have been loved. 412 SUPPLEMENT. §§ 9, 10. Que vous ayez ete aimes, m., aimees, f., that you may have been loved. Qu'ils aient ete aimes, m., that they may have been loved. Qu'elles aient ete aimees, f., that they may have been loved. PAST PERFECT. Que j'eusse ete aime, m., aimee, f., that I might have been loved. Que tu eusses ete aime, m., aimee, f., that thou mightst have been loved. Qu'il eut ete aime, that he might have been loved. Qu'elle eut ete aimee, that she might have been loved. Que nous eussions ete aimes, m., aimees, f., that we might have been loved. Que vous eussiez ete aimes, m., aimees, f., that you might have been loved. Qu'ils eussent ete aimes, m., that they might have been loved. Qu'elles eussent ete aimees, f., that they might have been loved. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sois aime, m., aimee, f., be loved. Soyons aimes, m., aimees, f., let us be loved. Soyez aimes, m., aimees, f., be ye loved. INFINITIVE MODE. PRESENT. Etre aime, m., aimee, f., to be loved. Avoir ete aime, m., aimee, f., to have been loved. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. , C aime, m., aimee, f., ) . . Etant < . , . , - > being loved. I aimes, m. p., aimees, 1. p., > PAST. / ,\ aime, m., aimee, f., > , 7 , Ete <.,-«- / been loved. I aimes, m. p., amiees, f. p., ^ COMPOUND. , , C aime, m., aimee, f., ) T . z . , Ayant ete < . / . , , > having been loved. J I aimes, m. p., aimees, t. p., ) The following is an example of a verb conjugated reflectively : — § 10, SE FLATTER, to natter one's sett. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. Je me flatte, I flatter myself. Tu te flattes, thou flatter est thyself. II se flatte, he flatters himself. 10. INFLECTION OP VERBS. 413 Nous nous flattons, Vous vous flattez, lis se flattent, Je me flattais, Tu te flattais, II se flattait, Nous nous flattions, Vous vous flattiez, Us se flattaient, Je me flattai, Tu te flattas, II se flatta, Nous nous flattames, Vous vous flattates, lis se flatterent, we flatter ourselves, you flatter yourselves, they flatter themselves. PAST PROGRESSIVE. I flattered myself. thou flatter edst thyself. he flattered himself. we flattered ourselves. you flattered yourselves. they flattered themselves. PAST INDEFINITE. I flattered myself. thou flatteredst thyself. he flattered himself. we flattered ourselves. you flattered yourselves. they flattered themselves. Je me flatter ai, Tu te flatteras, II se flattera, Nous nous flatter ons, Vous vous flatterez, lis se flatteront, I shall flatter myself. thou wilt flatter thyself. he will flatter himself. we shall flatter ourselves. you will flatter yourselves. they will flatter themselves. PRESENT PERFECT Je me suis flatte, m., flattee, f., Tu t'es flatte, m., flattee, f., II s'est flatte, Elle s'est flattee, Nous nous sommes flattes, m., flattees, f., Vous vous etes flattes, m., flattees, f., lis se sont flattes, m., Elles se sont flattees, f., I have flattered myself. thou hast flattered thyself. he has flattered himself. she has flattered herself. we have flattered ourselves. you have flattered yourselves. they have flattered themselves. they have flattered themselves. past perfect (principal). Je m'etais flatte, m., flattee, f., I had flattered myself. Tu t'etais flatte, m., flattee, f., thou hadst flattered thyself. II s'etait flatte, he had flattered himself. Elle s'etait flattee, she had flattered herself. Nous nous etions flattes, m., flattees, f., we had flattered ourselves. 35* 414 SUPPLEMENT. 10. Vous vous etiez flattes, m. lis s'etaient flattes, m., Elles s'etaient flattees, f., flattees, f., you had flattered yourselves, they had flattered themselves, they had flattered themselves. past perfect (subordinate). Je me fus flatte, m., flattee, f., Tu te fus flatte, m., flattee, f., II se fut flatte, Elle se fut flattee, Nous nous fumes flattes, m., flattees, f., Vous vous futes flattes, m., flattees, f., lis se furent flattes, m., Elles se furent flattees, f., I had flattered myself. thou hadst flattered thyself. he had flattered himself. she had flattered herself. we had flattered ourselves. you had flattered yourselves. they had flattered themselves. they had flattered themselves. FUTURE PERFECT. Je me serai flatte, m., flattee, f., Tu te seras flatte, m., flattee, f., II se sera flatte, Elle se sera flattee, Nous nous serons flattes, m., flattees, f., Vous vous serez flattes, m., flattees, f., lis se seront flattes, m., Elles se seront flattees, f., I shall have flattered myself. thou wilt have flattered thyself. he will have flattered himself. she will have flattered herself. we shall have flattered ourselves. you will have flattered yourselves. they will have flattered themselves. they will have flattered themselves. CONDITIONAL MODE. Je me flatterais, Tu te flatterais, II se flatterait, Nous nous flatterions, Vous vous flatteriez, lis se flatteraient, I should flatter myself. thou wouldst flatter thyself. he would flatter himself. we should flatter ourselves. you would flatter yourselves. they would flatter themselves. PAST. Je me serais flatte, m., flattee, f., I should have flattered myself. Tu te serais flatte, m., flattee, f., thou wouldst have flattered thyself. 11 se serait flatte, he would have flattered himself. Elle se serait flattee, she would have flattered herself. Nous nous serious flattes, m., flattees, f., we should have flattered ourselves. Vous vous seriez flattes, m., flattees, f., you would have flattered yourselves. lis se seraient flattes, m., they would have flattered themselves. Elles se seraient flattees, f., they would have flattered themselves. 10. INFLECTION OF VERBS. 415 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Que je me flatte, Que tu te flattes, Qu'il se flatte, Que nous nous nattions, Que vous vous flattiez, Qu'ils se nattent, Que je me nattasses, Que tu te nattasses, Qu'il se flattat, Que nous nous flattassions, Que vous vous flattassiez, Qu'ils se flattassent, that I may flatter myself. that thou may st flatter thyself. that he may flatter himself. that we may flatter ourselves. that you may flatter yourselves. that they may flatter themselves. PAST PROGRESSIVE. that I might flatter myself. that thou mightst flatter thyself. that he might flatter himself. that we might flatter ourselves. that you might flatter yourselves. that they might flatter themselves. PRESENT PERFECT. Que je me sois flatte, m., flattee, f., Que tu te sois flatte, m., flattee, f., Qu'il se soit flatte, Qu'elle se soit flattee, Que nous nous soyons flattes, m., > flattees, f., $ Que vous vous soyez flattes, m., | flattees, f., J Qu'ils se soient flattes, m., Qu'elles se soient flattees, f., Que je me fus flatte, m.. Que tu te fus flatte, m., flattee, f., Qu'il- se fut flatte, Qu'elle se fut flattee, Que nous nous fussions flattes, m., 1 flattees, f., ) Que vous vous fussiez flattes, m. flattees, f., Qu'ils se fussent flattes, m., Qu'elles se fussent flattees, f., that I may have flattered myself. that thou mayst have flattered thyself. that he may have flattered himself. that she may have flattered herself. that we may have flattered ourselves. that you may have flattered yourselves. that they may have flattered themselves, that they may have flattered themselves. PAST PERFECT. flattee, f., that I might have flattered myself. that thou mightst have flattered thyself. that he might have flattered himself. that she might have flattered herself. that we might have flattered ourselves, that you might have flattered your- that they might have flattered themselves, that they might have flattered themselves. Flatte- toi, Flattons-nous, Flattez-vous, IMPERATIVE MODE. flatter thyself, let us flatter ourselves, flatter yourselves* 4L6 SUPPLEMENT. §§ 10, 11. Se flatter, S'etre flatte, Se flattant, Flatte, in., flattee, S'etant flatte, The following is an iliary Eire : — §11. INFINITIVE MODE. PRESENT. • PAST. to flatter one's self. to have flattered one's self. PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. flattering one's self. PAST. f., flattes, m. p., flattees, f. p., flattered. COMPOUND. having flattered one's self. e of a neuter verb conjugated with the aux- EIVTRER, to enter. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. J'entre, Tu entres, II entre, Nous entrons, Vous entrez, lis entrent, J'entrais, Tu entrais, II entrait, Nous entrions, Vous entriez> lis entraient, J'entrai, Tu entras, II entra, Nous entrames, Vous entrates, lis entrerent, J'entrerai, Tu entreras, PAST PROGRESSIVE. PAST INDEFINITE. FUTURE. J enter. thou enterest. he enters. we enter. you enter. they enter. I entered. thou enteredst. he entered. we entered. you entered. they entered. I entered. thou enteredst. he entered. we entered. you entered. they entered. I shall enter, thou wilt enter. §11. INFLECTION OF VERBS. 417 II entrera, he will enter. Nous entrerons, we shall enter. Vous entrerez, you will enter. lis entreront, they will enter. PRESENT PERFECT. Je suis entre, m., entree, f., I have entered. Tu es entre, m., entree, f., thou hast entered. II est entre, he has entered. Elle est entree, she has entered. Nous sommes entres, m., entrees, f., we have entered. Vous etes entres, m., entrees, f., you have entered. lis sont entres, m., they have entered^ Elles sont entrees, f., they have entered. past perfect (principal). J'etais entre, m., entree, f., I had entered. Tu etais entre, m., entree, f., thou hadst entered. II etait entre, he had entered. Elle etait entree, she had entered. Nous etions entres, m., entrees, f., we had entered. Vous etiez entres, m., entrees, f., you had entered. lis etaient entres, m., they had entered. Elles etaient entrees, f., they had entered. past perfect (subordinate) Je fus entre, m., entree, f., I had entered. Tu fus entre, m., entree, f., thou hadst entered. II fut entre, he had entered. Elle fut entree, she had entered. Nous fftmes entres, m., entrees, f., we had entered. Vous futes entres, m., entrees, f., you had entered. lis furent entres, m., they had entered. Elles furent entrees, f., they had entered. FUTURE PERFECT. Je serai entre, m., entree, f., I shall have entered. Tu seras entre, m., entree, f., thou wilt have entered. II sera entre, he will have entered. Elle sera entree, she will have entered. Nous serons entres, m., entrees, f., we shall have entered. Vous serez entres, m., entrees, f., you will have entered, lis seront entres, m., they will have entered. Elles seront entrees, f., they will have entered. 418 SUPPLEMENT. CONDITIONAL MODE. PRESENT. J'entrerais, Tu entrerais, II entrerait, Nous entrerions, Vous entreriez, lis entreraient, * PAST. Je serais entre, m., entree, f., Tu serais entre, m., entree, f., II serait entre, Elle serait entree, Nous serions entres, m., entrees, f., Vous seriez entres, m., entrees, f., lis seraient entres, m., Elles seraient entrees, f M §U. I should enter, thou wouldst enter. he would enter. we should enter. you would enter. they would enter. I should thou wouldst he woidd she woxdd we should you would they tcoidd they would have entered, have entered, have entered, have entered, have entered, have entered, have entered, have entered. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PEE SENT. PAST PROGRESSIVE. Que j' entre, Que tu entres, Qu'il entre, Que nous entrions, Que vous entriez, Qu'ils entrent, Que j'entrasse, Quo tu entrasses, Qu'il entrat, Que nous entrassions, Qxie vous entrassiez, Qu'ils entrassent, PRESENT PERFECT. Que je sois entre, m., entree, f., Que tu sois entre, hi., entree, f., Qu'il soit entre, Qu'elle soit entree, Que nous soyons entres, m., entrees, f., Que vous soyez entres, m., entrees, f., Qu'ils soient entres, m., Qu' elles soient entrees, f., that I may enter. that thou mayst enter. that he may enter. that we may enter. that you may enter. that they may enter. that I might enter. that thou mightst enter. that he might enter. that we might enter. that you might enter. that they might enter. that I may have entered. that thou mayst have entered. that he may have entered. that she may have entered. that we may have entered. that you may have entered. that they may have entered. that they may have entered. §§ 11, 12. IRREGULAR VERBS. 419 PAST PERFECT Que je fusse entre, m., entrees, f., Que tu fusses entre, m., entree, f., Qu'il fut entre, Qu'elle fut entree, Que nous fussions entres, m., entrees, f., Que vous fussiez entres, m., entrees, f., Qu'ils fussent entres, m., Qu'elles fussent entrees, f., IMPERATIVE MODE. Entre, Entrons, Entrez, INFINITIVE MODE. PRESENT. PAST. Entrer, Etre entre, m., entree, f., entres, m. p., entrees, f. p., PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. that I might have entered. that thou mightst have entered. that he might have entered. that she might have entered. that ice might have entered. that you might have entered. that they might have entered. that they might have entered. enter (thou). let us enter. enter (ye). to enter, to have entered. Entrant, entering. PAST. Entre, m., entree, f., entres, m. p., entrees, f. p., COMPOUND. Etant entre, m., entree, f., entres, in. p., entrees, f. p., having entered. HI. IRREGULAR VERBS. § 155. The following list presents the inflection of those tenses which are wholly, or in part, irregular. The persons which are regularly formed are printed in Italics. For the principal parts, see § 36. AbSOUdre, to absolve. This verb wants the aorist (passe defini) and the past subjunctive. Its derived tenses are regnlarly formed from the principal parts (§ 36) ; but the past part, absous makes absoute in the feminine. Acqildrir, to acquire. Pres. Ind. J'acquiers, tu ac- quiers, il acquiert, nous acquero?is, vous acquerez, ils acquie- rent. Future. J'acquerrai, tu acquerras, &c. Con- ditional. J'acquerrais, tu acquerrais, &c. Pres. Subj. Que j'acquiere, que tu acquieres, qu'il acquiere, que nous ac~ querions, que vous acqueriez, qu'ils acquierent. 420 SUPPLEMENT. § 12. Aller, to go. Pres. Ind. Je vais, tu vas, il va, nous allons, vous allez, ils vont. Future. J'irai, tu iras, o,. Imperative. Fris. No plural. It is not used in the other simple tenses, the deficiency being supplied by the form f aire frire. Ex. Jefaisais frire. Gesir, to lie. Pres. Ind. II git, nous gisons, vous gisez, Us gisent.- Past Prog. Je gisais, tu gisais, &c. Not used in the other tenses, nor in the infinitive. Hair, to hate. This verb is regular, except that it loses the diaeresis in the singular of the present indicative, and the imperative; thus: Pres. Ind. Je hais, tu hais, il hait, nous haissons, &c. Imperative. Hais, haissons, ha'issez. Issir, to issue. This ancient verb (zz: sortir) is now used only in the pres. part, issant (used adjectively), and the past part. issu. Luire, to shine. This verb wants the aorist (passe defini) and the past subjunctive. All its derived tenses are regularly formed from the principal parts. (See § 36.) Mourir, to die. Pres. Ind. Je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt, nous mourons, vous mourez, ils meurent. Future. Je mourrai, tu mourras, &c. Conditional. Je mourrais, tu mourrais, &c. Pres. Subj. Que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure, que nous mourions, que vous mouriez, qu'ils meurent. The compound tenses take the auxiliary JEtre. MouVOir, to move. Pres. Ind. Je mens, tu meus, il meut, nous mouvons, vous mouvez, ils meuvent. Pres. Subj. Que je meuve, que tu meuves, qu'il meuve, que nous mouvions, que vous mouviez, qu'ils meuvent. Ouir, to hear. This verb is seldom used, except in § 12. IRREGULAR VERBS. 423 the past part, out, joined with another verb ; as, Je Vai oui dire, I have heard it said. Paitre, to graze. This verb wants the aorist (passe defini) and the past subjunctive. All its derived tenses are regularly formed from the principal parts. (See § 36.) Poindre, to dawn. This verb, in this sense, is used only in the infinitive and the future, il poindra. Pourvoir, to provide. Future. Je pourvoirai, tu pour- voiras, &c. Conditional. Je pourvoirais, tu pourvoirais. POTlVOir, to be able. Pres. Ind. Je peux, or je puis, tu peux, il peut, nous pouvons, vous pouvez, ils peuvent. Future. Je pourrai, tu pourras, &c. Conditional. Je pourrais, tu pourrais, &c. Pres. Subj. Que je puisse, que tu puisses, &c. Imperative. Wanting. Prendre, to take. Pres. Ind. Je prends, tu prends, il prend, nous prenons, vous prenez, ils prennent. Pres. Subj. Que je prenne, que tu prennes, qu'il prenne, que nous prenions, que vous preniez, qu'ils prennent. Pl*(Svaloir, to prevail. The principal parts of this compound follow those of its simple, valoir (§ 36) ; but its present subjunctive is regularly formed, thus : que je prevale, que tu prevales, quHl prevale, que nous prevalions, que vous prevaliez, quHls prevalent. Qu^rir, to fetch. The forms of this verb are obso- lete, except the infinitive, which is used with aller, envoyer, and venir ; thus, allez querir, go and bring; envoy ez querir, send for, &c. Requerir, to require. Like Acquerir. Rdsoudre, to resolve. The derived tenses of this verb are regularly formed from the principal parts (§ 36), but it has two past participles, resous (no fem.), resolved into, used only in speaking of material things, as brouillards resous en pluie, and resolu, e, resolved, used in all other cases. SaVOir, to know. Pres. Ind. Je sais, tu sais, il sait, nous savons, vous savez, ils savent. Past Prog. Je sa- vais, tu savais, &c. Future. Je saurai, tu sauras, &c. Conditional. Je saurais, tu saurais, &c. Pres. Subj. Queje sacke, que tu saches, quHl sache, que nous sachions, que 424 SUPPLEMENT. § 12. vous sachiez, qu'ils sachent. Imperative. Sache, sachons, sachez. Sourdre (of water), to spring forth, to rise. Used only in the infinitive, and in the third person singular of the pres. ind., il sourd. Surseoir, to supersede. Future. Je surseoirai, tu sur- seoiras, &c. Conditional. Je surseoirais, tu surseoirais, &c. Tistre, to weave. Obsolete, except the past part, tissu, and the compound tenses derived from it. Tenir, to hold. Pres. Ind. Je tiens, tu tiens, il tient, nous tenons, vous tenez, ils tiennent. Future. Je tiendrai, tu tiendras, &c. Conditional. Je tiendrais, tu tiendrais, &c. Pres. Subj. Que je tienne, que tu tiennes, qu'il tienne, que nous tenions, que vous teniez, qu'ils tiennent. Traire, to milk. This verb wants the aorist (passe defini) and the past subjunctive. The remaining forms are regularly derived from the principal parts (§ 36). Valoir, to be worth. Pres. Ind. Je vaux, tu vaux, il vaut, nous valons, vous valez, ils valent. Future. Je vaudrai, tu vaudras, &c. Conditional. Je vaudrais, tu vaudrais, &c. Pres. Subj. Que je vaille, que tu vailles, qu'il vaille, que nous valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent. Imperative. Wanting. Venir, to come. Pres. Ind. Je viens, tu viens, il vient, nous venons, vous veiiez, ils viennent. Future. Je viendrai, tu viendras, &c. Conditional. Je viendrais, tu viendrais, &c. Pres. Subj. Que je vienne, que tu viennes, qu'il vienne, que nous venions, que vous veniez, qu'ils viennent. Voir, to see. Future. Je verrai, tu verras, &c. Conditional. Je verrais, tu verrais, &c. Vouloir, to be willing. Pres. Ind. Je veux, tu veux, il veut, nous voulons, vous voulez, ils veulent. Future. Je voudrai, tu voudras, &c. Conditional. Je voudrais, tu voudrais, &c. — — Pres. Subj. Que je veuille, que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, que nous voulions, que vous vouliez, qu'ils veuillent. Imperative. Veuillez. " On dit aussi veux, voulons, voulez? — Bescherelle. INDEX The figures in this Index designate the sections and their divisions : and the following abbreviations are used : — conj conjunction. Exc exception. Exer. . . . exercise. /. feminine. m. ..... masculine. pr pronoun. prep preposition. Rem remark. voc vocabulary. * marginal note. A, preposition, for en, after verbs of motion or rest, § 133, Note 1. A, dans, and en, § 133, Note 1-4 ; a or de, § 69. Accents, where used, § 2, (2.) " effect of, § 2, (3.)-(5.) Acheter, to buy, construction of, § 110. Active Verbs, § 26, 1 ; active infinitives for passives, § 103. " " auxiliary avoir, § 28, 1. Active Voice, used in French for passive in English, §§ 96, 103. Adjective Pronouns, place of, § 25, Note 1. Adjectives, after c'est, complement of, § 78, 2. " " il est " " § 78, 2. " agreeing with nous or vous in the singular, § 99, 3, Note. " " " several nouns, § 74. " " " last noun, § 74.* " agreement of, § 23, Note 3 ; § 74. " comparison of, §§ 17-20. " complement of, § 78, 1-4. " differing in meaning before and after their nouns, § 77, 1, Note. " etymology of, §§ 15-23. " feminine of, § 15. " following their nouns, § 77, 3. " governing a common regimen, § 78, 4. " indeclinable when coming before their nouns, § 74, Exc. 2, and Note. " irregular comparatives, § 19, Rem. 1, 2. " " feminines, § 15, Exc. 1-3. 36 * (425) 426 INDEX. Adjectives, place of, § 23, Notes 1, 2 ; § 77, 1-4. plural of, § 16. " preceding their nouns. § 77, 1, 2. " requiring a different preposition in French and English, § 78, 3, (l.)-(3.) " syntax of, §§ 74-79. " used as adverbs, § 39 ; § 74, Exc. 2, Note. " used before or after their nouns, § 77, 4. Adverbial Adjectives, § 39. Adverbs, comparison of, § 40. " ending in ment, § 38. " etymology of, §§ 38-43. " formed from adjectives, § 38, Note. " irregular comparatives, § 40. " negative, § 125. " place of, § 37, Exer. 16, Note 2 ; § 124, Exc. 1, 2. " syntax of, §§ 124-127. A friend of mine, &c, § 111.* Age, avoir used for, § 104, 1. Agent, after passive verbs, § 134. Aiffle, masculine and feminine, § 11, 4. Aimer mieux, to prefer, § 115, Note 1. A la campagne, in the country, § 133, Note 2. Alley, to go, irregularity of tne imperative of, § 34, 4, Note 2. " " as an auxiliary, § 107. " " y omitted with future, and conditional of, § 87, Note 2. Alphabet, § 1. (1.) Ameney, Apportey, to bring, to carry to, § 109. An, year, never omitted after avoiy, § 104, 1. Answers in French, § 81. Aorist Tense, forms made from it, § 34 % 5. " " called past indefinite, why, page 52.* « use of, § 121, 3, and Note. Article, agreement of, § 8, Note 3. Article, Definite, inflection of, § 7. 2, 3. » " omitted after the preposition en before the names of countries, § 59, Exc. 1. " " omitted after prepositions in adjective or adverbial phrases, § 59, Exc. 4. " " omitted after verbs signifying going from, § 59, Exc. 2. " " omitted before the number of a sovereign, § 60, Note 2. « " omitted when the name of a country and capital is the same, § 59, Exc. 3. INDEX. 427 Article, Definite, omitted when the noun and verb express but one idea, § 59, Exc. 5. " " used as in English, § 58. " " used before day of the week or time of the day, § 62. " " used before measure or weight, § 57, Exc. 1. " " used before titles, § 60. " ** used before words taken in a general sense, § 59. " " used before words denoting parts of the body, or qualities of the mind, § 57, Exc. 2. " " etymology of, §§ 7, 8. Article, Indefinite, inflection of, § 7, 1. . " " omitted before nouns in apposition, § 57, Exc. 4. " «■ omitted before titles of books, § 57, Exc. 3. " " omitted in exclamations, § 57, Exc. 3. " " used as in English, § 57. Article, Partitive, for some or any, §§ 7, 63. " " genitive of, § 63, 1. " " inflection of, § 7, 4-7. " " omitted after ni, neither, § 63. Article, repetition of, § 64, and Exc. " «« " with superlative relative, § 64, "Note. " syntax of, §§ 57-65. Aspirate h, § 5, (A,) and Rem. 1, 2. Assez, enough, place of, § 124, Note 2. Aucun, inflection of, § 24, 9, B, (1). Aucun, plural of, § 24, 9, B, (1), Note. Aujourd'hui, to-day, place of, § 124, Exc. 2. Aune, masculine and feminine, § 11, 4. Autre, before a substantive, § 24, 9, A, Rem. Autres, added to nous and vous, § 24, 9, A, Rem., Note 1. Autrui, inflection of, § 24, 9, A, (1). " used of persons only, § 24, 9, A, (1), Note. Auxiliary Verbs, §§ 28, 107. " « paradigms, § 28. Avec, in the company of, § 131. Avoir, as an auxiliary, § 28, 1. " conjugation of, § 28, 5, 1. " expressing age, § 104, 1. " " size, § 112. " " the day of the month, § 104, 2. " in many other common idioms, § 139. " or etre, as an auxiliary, § 28, 3. 428 INDEX. B. Beau, Bel, handsome, fine, § 15, Exc. 2. Bieii, for Beaucoup, construction of, § 63, Exc. and Note. Billion, plural of, § 22, 1, Rem. 5. Caf6, with a definite and with a partitive article, § 61. Capitals, use of, § 21. Cardinal Numbers, § 22, 1. " " after names of sovereigns, § 76. " " for the day of the month, § 76. Case, § 7, Rem. ; § 9. Cases, names of, § 7, Rem. Ce, demonstrative adjective pronoun, § 24, 4. " he, she, it, they, used substantively, § 24, 5, Note; > -98, 7, Note 2. " repeated after ce qui, § 90, Note 3. Ceci, Cela, this, that, § 24, 6. Cedilla, § 2, 6; § 35, 1. Celui, he, followed by a relative or de, § 24, 5. " inflection of, § 24, 5. Celui qui, he who, § 24, 8, Note 5, (a.) Cent, hundred, plural of, § 22, 1, Rem. 3. Ce qui, Ce que, what, that, which, § 24, 8, Note 5. Ce qui, followed by ce before a verb, § 90, Note 3. Ce qui, which, § 90, Note 4. Cest, it is, becomes ce sont, § 98, 7. « " where used, § 98, 7, Note. Ckacun, each, inflection of, § 24, 9, A, (2). » " feminine of, § 24, 9, A, (2), Note. Changer, to change, in many idioms, § 139. Chaque, each, before a substantive, § 24, 9, A, Rem. Chez, at the house of, § 131. Ci-git, Ci-gisent, § 82, Note 2. Ci-inclus, without an article, § 74, Exc. 2, Note.t Collective Nouns with plural verbs, § 98, 6, 2. » " " singular " § 98, 6, 1. Comparison of Adjectives, §§ 17-20. " Adverbs, § 40. " Quality, § 18. 429 INDEX. Comparison of Quantity, § 19. Compound Nouns, § 13, 1, 2. " Tenses, use of, § 121, II. Conditional Clauses, § 121, III. Mode, use of, § 27, 1, (a) ; § 121, III. 1, 2. " Present, how formed, § 34, 1. Conjugation of Verbs, how distinguished, § 26, 3. " " inflection of auxiliaries, § 28, 5, (1), (2). " " negative and interrogative forms, § 33. " " passive, § 30. " " peculiarities of the forms of some verbs, § 35. " " principal parts, §§ 34, 36. " " reflective verbs, § 31. " " regular paradigms, comparative view, § 29. " «' table of irregular verbs, § 36. " " unipersonal, § 32. " " what auxiliaries to use, § 28. Conjunctions, definition of, § 48. " etymology of, §§ 48-52. " followed by, § 137. 11 list of simple, § 49, 1. " requiring the subjunctive, § 120, 5. " syntax of, §§ 137, 138. " two classes, § 49. w with de before an infinitive, § 137» 1. »' with the indicative, § 137, 2. « with the subjunctive, § 137, 2. Conjunctive Phrases, list of, § 49, 2. Connection of Tenses, § 122. Consonants, § 1, (2.) Consonant Sounds, § 5, (1), (2). r>. Dans (prep.), in, before a definite noun, § 133, Note 4. Dans and en in expressions of time, § 133, Note 4, Rem. Davanlage, more, tor plus, § 19, 2, Note; § 124, Note 1. " its place, § 124, Exc. 2; § 192, Note. Day of the month, or week, not preceded by a preposition, § 130. Day of the week, or time of the day, preceded by an article, but not by a preposition, § 62. De (prep.), after passive verbs, before the agent, § 134 ; de or d, § 69. 4?0 INDEX. De (prep.), before a number expressing excess in comparing sizes, § 112, Note 2. " " before the number expressing size, §112, Note 1. De (partitive article), inflection of, § 7, 6, 7. Demi, indeclinable, § 74, Exc. 2. Demain, to-morrow, place of, § 124, Exc. 2. Demander, to ask for, construction of, § 110. Devoir, to owe, as an auxiliary, § 107. Diaeresis, § 2, 7. Dimension, how expressed, § 112. Diphthongs, § 4. _Di< (partitive article), inflection of, § 7, 4, 5» Ducafe, § 61. Dm the, § 61. E. Elision of de, § 46. *« £ in s'il, s'ils, § 51. " ne, § 41. " pronouns, § 24, 1, Note 4. " que and its compounds, § 50. Emmener, Emporter, to take away, § 109. 22ft and y (pronouns), relative position, § 84. " referring to things, § 87. En (prep.), after verbs of motion or rest, § 133. " before participles, § 102, Note ; § 132. En (pr.), in answers to questions, § 86, Note. " of it, of them, place of, § 86. " " " with words of number or quantity, § 86, Note; §87. " " " referring to persons, \ 87, and Note \. t " " " referring to things, § 87. " " " supplying the place of a noun with de, referring to things, § 89, § 117, Note. " " " used for son, of inanimate possessors, § 93, Note. Encore, still; negative, ne — plus, not any more, § 125, 6, Note 2. Epouser, to take in marriage, § 111. Est-ce que, in interrogations, § 80, Exc. Et, in compound numerals, \ 22, 2, Rem. 3. Eire, as an auxiliary, § 28, 2 and 4. " a, with an infinitive, § 121, I. 4, Note. " comparing sizes, § 112, Note 2. " conjugation of, § 28, 5, (2). INDEX. 431 Etre, for aller, § 105. " to express the day of the month, § 104, 2. " unipersonal, to express the time of the day, § 104, 3* Etymology of the Article, §§ 7, 8. » " Noun, §§ 9-14. " « Adjective, §§ 15-23. « " Pronoun, §§ 24, 25. « " Verb, §$ 26-37. « » Adverb, §§ 38-43. « . " Preposition, §§ 44-47. «« » Conjunction, §§ 48-52. «* M Interjection, §§ 53-56. Euphonic £, § 35, 8. Every day, tons les jours, § 75. Exclamatory Sentences, § 80, Note 2. Exemple, m. and f., § 11, 4. Faire, before an infinitive, § 100. " past participle of, before an infinitive, § 99, 5. " impersonal, ilfait, referring to the weather, § 101. " in many other idioms, § 139. Falloir, to be necessary, to need, construction of, § 106. Feu,, late, § 74, Exc. 1. Final Consonants, § 5, (3), (4). Fractions of hours, how expressed, § 104, 3, Note 2. Futures, how formed, § 34, 1. " irregular formation of, § 34, 1, Note 1-3. Future Perfect, § 121, II. 4. " " after adverbs of time, for English perfect, § 121, II. Note. Future Tense, after adverbs of time, for English present, § 121, II. Note, " " use of, § 121, I. 4. Gr. Gannons, boys, jeunes gens, in respectful discourse, § 37, Exer. 16, Voc. Gender of Adjectives, § 15, Exc. 1-3 ; § 74. " Nouns, §§ 10, 11. " " by signification, § 10, 1-3. " " signification determined by, § 11, 4. 432 INDEX. Gender of Nouns, by termination, §11, 1-3. " " Natural, § 8, Note 1 ; § 10, 1. " Neuter, § 7, Note; § 10, 1. Ge?is, people, gender of its adjective, § 74, Exc. 3. " with tout, tel, quel, or certain, \ 74, Not& Grand? , for grande, § 139, Note, page 177. Be, she, or they, before the verb to be, § 98, 7, Note 2. Heure, hour, never omitted in expressing the time of the day, § 104, 3. Bier, j-esterday, place of, § 124, Exc. 2. Hour of the day, § 104, 3, Note 1, 2. Idioms, Phrases, &c, alphabetically arranged, § 159. 27, inflection of, § 24, 1, (3). II a tie, § 105. II est, where used, § 98, 7, Note 1. E est alte, § 105. Imperatives, how formed, \ 34, 4. " of reflective verbs, § 31, Rem. 1. " irregular formation of, § 34, 4; Note 1-S. 11 negative, of reflective verbs, § 33, 4, Rem. " peculiar form of those ending in e (mute), § 34, 4, Note 3. " third persons like the present subjunctive, § 28, (1), Note. " two imperatives in English, how expressed in French, § 113. Impersonal Verbs, § 26, 2. " " past participles of, not changed, \ 99, 5. Importer, n'importe, no matter ; qiiimporte, what matters it, § 90, Note 2. In, dans, en, a, § 133, Note 1-4. Indicative Mode, after que, § 120, 2. " " in a relative clause, § 120, 3. Infinitive Mode, after other verbs, § 102 ; active for passive, § 103. " " after verbs of joy and regret, § 120, Note 1. " " for imperative, § 113. " '« when the subject is the same as that of the principal verb, § 120, Note 1. " " present, forms made from it, § 34, 1. In order to, pour, § 135. INDEX. 433 Interjections, definition of, § 53. " independence of, § 54. « list of, § 55. Interrogative forms of Verbs, § 33, 2. " reflective forms of verbs, § 33, 5. " sentences, place of subject when a noun, § 67, and Exc. ; § 37, Exer. 17, Note 2. 4< sentences, place of subject when a pronoun, § 80. Irregular Comparatives, § 19, Rem. 1,2; § 40, and Note. Irregular Verbs, table of, § 36. It, before the verb to be, § 98, 7, Note 1. J. Je, I, inflection of, § 24, 1, (1). Je, I, never used alone, § 91. La plupart, construction of, § 63, Exc. and Note. Le, inflection of, § 7, 2, 3. Le cafe, § 61. Le mt'en, &c, inflection of, § 24, 3, and Note. L'on for on, § 24, 9, A, (3), Note. Le, so, it, &c, indeclinable, § 95, and Note. Lequel, which one, inflection of, § 24, 7, (3). Leqiielt which one? inflection of, § 24, 8, Note 3. Le thi, \ 61. Livre, m. and f., § 11, 4. Vun et Vautre, inflection of, \ 24, 9, B, (2). " " with plural verb, § 24, 9, B, (2), Note; § 98, 3. Vun Vautre, as reciprocal, § 24, 9, B, (7). " " " " number of the verb, § 24, 9, B, (7), Note. Hun ou V autre, inflection of, § 24, 9, B, (3). " " number of the verb, § 24, 9, B, (3), Note ,- § 98, 3. M. Madame, Mademoiselle, before titles and designations of relationship, § 60, • § 37, Exer. 17, Note 2, *. " used alone, \ 60, Note 1. Manche, m. and f., § 11, 4. 37 434 INDEX. Marier, to marry, active, passive, and reflective, § 111. Measure, Weight, &c , § 57, Ex. 1. Meilleur, §19, Hem. 1. Mime, self, § 24, 1, Note 2. Mc moire, m. and f., § 11, 4. Metier, to lead, § 109. Mettre, to put, in many idioms, § 139. Midi, noon, § 104, 3, Note 1. Mille, mil, § 22, 1, Rem. 4. Mieux, § 40. Million, plural of, § 22, 1, Rem. 5. Minuit, midnight, § 104, 3, Note 1. Mode, m. and f., § 11, 4. Modes in French, § 27. Moins de, less than, before a number, § 19, Note 2. Moi, toi, &c, iorje, tu. &c, § 91. J/oi and toi, for me and fe, accusative or dative, § 24, 1, Note 1. Moindre, § 19, Rem. 1, 2. Moins, § 40. Moins — 7noi?is, &c, § 62, Note. jl/on, ton, &c, agree with the object possessed, § 24, 2. Mon, ton, son, for wa, ta, sa, § 24, 2, Note. Monosyllabic first persons with and without est-ce que, § 80, Exc. and Note 1. Monsieur, &c, before titles and designations of relationship, § 60, § 37, Exer. 17, Note 2, *. " used alone, § 60, Note 1. Month, day of the, §§ 104, 2 ; § 130. N. Nasal Vowels, § 3, (3), and Note. Negative forms of Verbs, § 33, 1. " interrogative forms of verbs, § 33, 3. " interrogative reflective forms of verbs, § 33, 6. » reflective forms of verbs, § 33, 4. « second, when suppressed, § 125, 1-6. Ne — pas, place of, § 125. Ne — point for ne — pas, § 125, Note. * ISTest-ce pas que, in interrogations, § 80, Exc. Neuter Verbs, auxiliary avoir, § 28, 1. " « " etre, § 28, 4. INDEX. 435 Neuter Verbs, auxiliary avoir or etre, § 28, 3. " " with the auxiliary etre, participles agree with the subject, § 99, 3. Ni Fun ni F autre, inflection of, § 24, 9, B, (4). « " plural verb, § 24, 9, B, (4), Note; § 98, 5. Notre, vfitre, § 24, 2. Nouns, as regimens direct and indirect, § 68. " denoting parts of the body, or qualities of the mind, § 72. Nouns, etymology of, §§ 9-14. " general construction of, § 66. " in the possessive case, §§ 69, 70. " names of profession or occupation, § 71. " place of, as subjects in interrogative sentences, § 67, and Exc. « syntax of, §§ 66-73. " used as adjectives, § 69. Nous and vous, for je and tu, take participles and adjectives in the singu- lar, § 99, 3, Note. Nu, bare, indeclinable, § 74, Exc. 2. Nul, no, before a substantive, § 24, 9, A, Rem. " plural of, § 24, 9, A, Bern., Note 2. Nulle part, nowhere, § 133, Note 3. Number, § 12, 1-5. " of nouns denoting parts of the body or qualities of the mind, §72. Numeral adjectives, § 22, 1, 2. " « place of, § 23, Note 1. O. On, for I, § 96, Note 1. « you, § 96, Note 2. On, inflection of, § 24, 9, A, (3). On, with an active verb for passives in English, §§ 96, 103. On, when Fon, § 24, 9, A, (3), Note. Onze and onzihme, peculiarity of, § 22, 1, Bern. 1. Ordinal Numbers, § 22, 2. Ordinal Numbers, how formed, § 22, 2, Bern. 1. " " not used after names of sovereigns, or for days of the month, § 76. Ou, or, agreement of verbs with nouns connected by, § 98, 2. 436 INDEX. Par (prep.) after passive verbs, before the agent, § 134. Parents, how expressed in French, § 94, Note. Participial Nouns, after prepositions, § 102. Participle, Past, agreeing with nous and vous for je and tu, § 99, 3, Note. " " agreeing with the direct object, § 37, Exer. 16, Note 1; § 99, 4. " " agreeing with the subject, § 37, Exer. 14, Note; Exer. 15, Note; § 99, 3. " " forms made from, § 34, 3. " " invariable, § 99, 5. " " of reflective verbs, § 31, Rem. 2. " " without an auxiliary, § 99, 2. Participle, Present, as an adjective, § 99, 1. " " forms made from it, § 34, 2. Participles, plural of, § 16, Note. Parts of Speech, § 6. Parts of the Person, § 57, Exc. 2. Pas, or Point, omitted after comparatives and expressions of fear and hin- derance, § 125, 2. " " " after pouvoir, oser, cesser, and savoir, § 125, 4. " " " after depuis que, since, and il y a, there is, there are, § 125, 5. " " "in negative relative sentences, after negatives or in- terrogatives, § 125, 3. " " M in sentences depending on nier or douter, § 125, 3. " " " when ni, neither, rien, nothing, &e., occur, § 125, 1. " " used alone, § 125, 6, Note 1. Pas encore, not yet, § 125, 6, Note 2. Passive Yerbs, auxiliary etre, § 28, 2. " " how conjugated, § 30. " " in Enghsh, expressed by refiectives in French, § 103. " " in Enghsh, expressed by on and the active in French, § 96 ; § 103 ; expressed by active infinitives, § 103. " " participles agreeing with the subjects of, § 99, 3. Past Indefinite, § 121, I. 3. " " name, why used, page 51, *. ,^ast Perfect, preceded by des que, &c, § 121, II. 3. » principal, § 121, H. 2. *< " subordinate, § 121, II. 3. <*ast Progressive, how formed, \ 34, 2. INDEX. 437 Past Progressive, irregular formation of, § 34, 2, Note 1. " use of, § 121, I. 2. Payer, to pay, construction of, § 110. Pendule, m. and f., § 11, 4. P&re et Mbre, parents, § 94, Note. Per sonne, m. and f., § 11, 4. Pire, § 19, Rem. 1, 2. Pis, § 40, and Note. Place of adjectives, § 77, 1-4. " adverbs, §§ 124, 125. " en and y, §§ 86, 87. " nouns, as direct and indirect regimens, § 68. " nouns in interrogative sentences, § 67, and Exc. " pronouns as direct and indirect regimens, §§ 83-85; " pronouns in interrogative sentences, § 80. " subject in narration, § 82, Note 1. Plurals of adjectives, § 16; § 8, Note 2. " nouns, § 12, 1-5 ; § 13, 1, 2 ; § 8, Note 2. Plus de, more than, before a number, § 19, Note 2. Phtsieurs, § 24, 9, B, (5). Plus mat, for pis, § 40, Note. Plus mauvais, for pire, § 19, Rem. 2. Plus — plus, &c, § 62, Note. Poele, m. and f., § 11, 4. Porter, to carry, § 109. " to wear, § 109, Note. Se porter, to be, to do, § 109, Note. Possessives, in English, how expressed, § 69. " with the verb to be, § 70 ; § 83, Exc. 1. Poste, m. and f., § 11, 4. Pour, in order to, § 135. Pouvoir, je puis, je peuz, § 36, Note, page 83. Prendre, to take, construction of, § 110. " " in many idioms, § 139. Prepositions, compounded with a, list, § 128, 3. " " « de, list, § 128, 2. " definition of, § 44. " etymology of, §§ 44-47. " followed by what forms of pronouns, § 24, 1, Note 3 ; § 128, Rem. m government of, § 128. " governing directly, list of, § 128, 1. " not used before le matin, &c, § 130, Rem. 1. 37* 438 INDEX. Prepositions, not used before quelque part, somewhere, nulle part, nowhere, § 133, Note 3. " not used before a word denoting price, § 130, Rem. 2. " not used before the day of the week or month pointed out as the time of an event, § 130. '* not used before the day of the week or the time of the day, § 62. " repetition of, § 47, Note ; § 129, and Rem. " syntax of, §§ 128-136. 11 two classes, §45. Present Indicative, forms made from it, § 34, 4. " " irregularities of, § 36, Tables I. and II. Present Perfect Tense, followed by the past subjunctive, § 122, 1, Note 2. " " " use of, § 121, II. 1. " " " used for the aorist, § 121, I. 3, Note. Present Tense, followed by the past subjunctive, § 122, 1, Note 1. " " use of, § 121, I. 1, and Note 1, 2. Principal Parts of a verb, § 34. Profession or occupation, § 71. Progressive Action, how expressed, § 121, I. 4, Note. Pronouns, absolute demonstrative, § 24, 6. " agreement of, § 25, Note 1. " as subjects, omission of, § 90, Note 2. " demonstrative adjective, § 24, 4. " " substantive, § 24, 5. " different classes of, § 24. " etymology of, §§ 24, 25. *' indefinite, with a substantive, § 24, 9, A, Rem. " " without a substantive, § 24, 9, A, (l)-(6). " " with or without a substantive, § 24, 9, B, (l)-(6). " interrogative, referring to persons, § 24, 8, 1. « " " things, § 24, 8, 2. " " " persons or things, § 34, 8, Note 3. " personal, § 24, (l)-(3). Pronouns, place of, after affirmative imperatives, § 83, Exc. 6. " " " alter, &c, § 83, Exc. 5. « " dative of the person, when the accusative is of the first or second person, § 83, Exc. 4. « " when accusative or dative, § 37, Exer. 10, Note ; § 83. » " when indirect objects, not dative, $ 85. « " when several datives occur, § 83, Exc. 3. " " with reflective verbs, § 83, Exc. 2. Pronouns, possessive adjective, § 24, 2. INDEX. 439 Pronouns, possessive, agreeing with the object possessed, § 92 . " " substantive, § 24, 3. « reciprocal, § 24, 9, B, (7). « « number of, § 24, 9, B, (7), Note. « reflective, § 24, 1, (4). " relative, position of as direct and as indirect regimens, § 37, Exer. 17, Note 1 ; § 84. » « never omitted, § 94. " " referring to persons, § 24, 7, (1). « " " things, § 24, 7, (2). " " " persons and things, § 24, 7, (3). " repetition of, as objects, § 90. « « subjects, § 90, Note 1. " " demonstrative adjective, § 94. « " possessive adjective, § 94. " " • the chief person, § 91, *, § 98, 4, Note. " supplying the place of a noun with h, § 88, § 119, Note. " " " " rfe, § 89; § 117, Note. " syntax of, §§ 80-97. Q. ^t<5 (conj.), for si and other conjunctions, § 137, Note 2. •« than, and c?e before infinitives, § 115, Note 1. " that, never omitted, § 137, 4. " " used to strengthen an expression, § 137, 5. Que (pr.), and de before adjectives, § 63, Rem. Qwe, relative pronoun, never omitted, § 94. QueJ, which, what, § 24, 8, Note 4. Quelque as an adjective or adverb, § 120, 5, Note. " some, before substantives, § 24, 9, A, Rem. Quelque chose de, before an adjective, § 63, Rem. " " not used in negative sentences, § 24, 9, A, (5), Note 2. Quelque part, somewhere, § 133, Note 3. Quelqu'un, not used in negative sentences, § 24, 9, A, (5), Note 2. 11 and quelque chose, use of, § 24, 9, A, (5), Note 1. « inflection of, § 24, 9, A, (5). " feminine of, $ 24, 9, A, (4), Note 3. Qu'est-ce que, what, $ 24, 8, (2), Rem. Quiconque, whoever, inflection of, § 24, 9, A, (6). Qui, who, inflection of, § 24, 7, (1), (2). Qu»7 who? « § 24, 8, (1), (2). 440 INDEX. Qnoi de, what of, before an adjective, § 63, Rem. Quoi, what, for que, § 24, 8, Note 1. Quoi I what ! used in exclamations, § 24, 8, Note 2. R. Reflective Verbs, auxiliary etre, § 28, 2. " " conjugation of, § 31. " " for English passives, § 103. " " imperative of, § 31, Rem. 1. " " negative imperative of, § 33, 4, Rem. " " participles agreeing with direct object, § 99, 4. " " past participles of, § 31, Rem. 2. Regimen, common, only when, § 114. " direct and indirect, when nouns, place of, § 68. « " " when pronouns, " §§ 83-87. Repetition of articles, § 64. " demonstrative adjective pronouns, § 94. " nominative pronouns, § 90, Note 1. 11 objective pronouns, § 90. " possessive adjective pronouns § 94. " prepositions, § 129. Eien, inflection of, § 24, 9, A, (6). " de, before an adjective, § 63, Rem. s. Savoir gre, with dative, § 139, Note, page 174. Seoir, to become, construction of, § 106, Note. Si, if, after negatives, § 18, 1, Note. " followed by the past perfect of the subjunctive, called a past con- ditional, § 137, 3, Exc. " governing two verbs, the second in the subjunctive, § 137, Note 2. " not followed by the subjunctive, futures, or conditionals, § 137, 3. Si, whether, followed by the future or conditional, § 137, Note, 1. Si, yes, for oui, § 126. Simple Tenses, use of, § 121, 1. Soi, inflection of, § 24, 1, (4). So, le, indeclinable, § 95. Some or any, § 8, Exer., 3, Note ; § 7. Somme, m. and f.» § 11, 4. INDEX. 441 Souris, m. and f., § 11, 4. Speech, Parts of, § 6. Subject, agreement of verbs with, § 98, 1-7. ". place of after aussi, &c, § 82. *• " in interrogative sentences, § 37, Exer. 17, Note 2 ; § 67 j §80. " " in narration, § 82, Note. Subjunctive Mode, § 120. " " after negatives or interrogatives, § 120, 2. " " after certain conjunctions, § 120, 5. " " after verbs of consent, command, &c, § 120, 1. 11 « in elliptical phrases, § 120, 6. " " in relative clauses, § 120, 3. " " in relative, after interrogative or negative, clauses, § 120, 4. " " in relative clauses after superlative relatives, and after le seul, &c, § 120, 4. Subjunctive Past, after a present tense, § 122, Note 1. " " " historical tenses and conditionals, § 122, 2. " " " present perfect for the aorist, § 122, Note 2. " " how formed, § 34, 5. Subjunctive Present, after primary tenses, § 122, 1. 11 " how formed, § 34, 2. " " irregular formation of, § 34, 2, Note 2, 3. Superlative absolute, § 20, 2. " relative, § 20, 1. Syntax of the Article, §§ 57-65. Noun, §§ 66-73. Adjective, §§ 74-79. Pronoun, §§ 80-97. Verb, §§ 98-123. Adverb, §§ 124-127. Preposition, §§ 128-136. Conjunction, §§ 137, 138. T. Tarder, to long, construction of, § 106, Note. Tenses, connection of, § 122. " names and use of, § 121. The more — the more, &c, § 62, Note. ThS, with definite and indefinite article^ § 61. 442 INDEX. Time, dans, en, § 133, Note 4, Rem. Tour, m. and f., § 11, 4. Tout (adverb), euphonic change of, § 42. " (adjective), inflection of, § 24, 9, B, (6). " (indefinite), uninflected, \ 24, 9, B, (6), Note. " the whole, tous, every, § 75. Tu, inflection of, § 24, 1, (2). u. Un, une, a, inflection of, § 7, 1. Un de mes amis, &c, § 111, Note. Un, plural of, § 22, 1, Rem. 2. Un, une, not used before nouns in apposition, § 57, Exc. 4. Unieme, used only in composition, § 22, 2, Rem. 2. Unipersonal Verbs, § 26, 2. " « auxiliary of, § 28, 1. inflection of, § 32. << Use of Tenses, 5 121. Valoir mieux, to be better, § 115, Note 1. Vase, m. and f., § 11, 4. Fas y, for t>a, § 34, 4, Note 2. F § 35, 1. 443 INDEX. Verbs, ending in indre, § 35, 5. " " yer, § 35, 2. " etymology of, §§ 26-37 ; formation of, §§ 34-36. il governing the genitive with de, § 117. » " " dative with a, § 119. " " " infinitive with a, § 118. w •« « " with «fe, § 116. " «« " " alone, § 115. " neuter, § 26. " not separated as in English, § 115, Note 2. " participles of, their agreement, § 99, 1-5. " passive, § 26, 1 ; § 30. " reflective, § 26, 1 ; § 31. " " imperative of, § 31, Rem. 1. " syntax of, §§ 98-123. " unipersonal, § 26, 2. " with 6 in the penult, § 35, 3 ; with y before e mute, § 35, 2. " " several subjects, § 98, 2. F%£, plural of, § 22, 1, Rem. 3. Voile, m. and f., § 11, 4. Voter, to rob, steal, construction of, § 110. Vouloir, for «rc#, as a principal verb, § 108. Vowels, § 1, (2). Vowel sounds, § 3, (l)-(3). w. What, ce qui, ce que, § 24, 8, Note 5. Which, ce qui, § 90, Note 4. Whole, tout, § 75. Will, principal verb or auxiliary, § 108. Y. Y and en refer to things, § 87. Y avoir, inflection of, § 28, 5, (3). F, omitted for euphony, § 87, Note 2. " referring to persons, § 87, and Note 1. « « things, § 87. « supplies the place of a noun with d, which refer to things, § 88 ; §119, Note. " to it, there, place of, § 86. NEW AND VALUABLE TEXT-BOOKS IN PHYSICS FOR GRAMMAR AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS, HIGH SCHOOLS, AND ACADEMIES, W. J. ROLFE and J. A. GILLET, TEACHERS IN THE HIGH SCHOOL, CAMBRIDGE, MASS. THE CAMBRIDGE COURSE IN PHYSICS IN THREE VOLUMES: I. CHEMISTRY, #2.00. II. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, $2.00. III. ASTRONOMY, $2.00. ^H" New and revised editions of these books have been prepared, and the Series is now complete in a permanent form. The Electricity of the old " Chemistry and Electricity " has been transferred to the " Natural Philosophy " in the new edi- tion, and has been wholly rewritten, made somewhat briefer, and brought fully down to the present state of the science. There has also been added to the Appendix of the " Natural Philosophy " a chapter on the Physics of the Atmosphere, or Meteorology, containing all the recent discoveries and theories in this important and interesting field. As thus revised, the " Natural Philosophy " is complete in itself, containing Mechanics (under which head are included Hydrostatics, Hydraulics, Pneumatics, Motion, Machines, etc.), Sound, Light, Heat, Electricity, and Meteorology. The " Chemistry " has been carefully rewritten and ex- panded so as to fill the space occupied by the Electricity in the old edition. New chapters on Crystallography and Organic Chemistry, from the freshest sources, have been added, and the description of Elements has been enlarged. This edition (June, 1869) gives the nomenclature as adopted by the London Chemical Society, as taught at Harvard College, and as generally used in scientific journals. The new edition of the "Astronomy " contains, in addition to the Astronomy proper, a chapter on the Conservation of Energy and an account of the Constellations, illustrated by 17 full-page Star Maps from Argelander. These books are inductive in method, fresh in matter, simple in style, fully illustrated, and handsomely printed, and they ex- actly meet the wants of our advanced Seminaries and Acade- mies, and of those High Schools which can devote considera- ble time to these subjects. THE HANDBOOK SERIES IN THREE VOLUMES : I. HANDBOOK OF CHEMISTRY, $ 1.25. II. HANDBOOK OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, $ 1.25. III. HANDBOOK OF THE STARS, $1.50. These books contain (aside from the Appendix) respectively 159, 230, and 159" pages, in clear, open type, with no fine print, and they treat of all the topics usually included in school manuals of these sciences. The more theoretical portions of the subject are discussed briefly in Appendixes, and descrip- ' tions of apparatus and directions for performing experiments are added. Omitting the Appendixes, the books are not too difficult for the upper classes in Grammar and District Schools. With the Appendixes, they are exactly adapted to the wants of those High Schools and Academies which have not time for larger books. They are not abridgments of the larger works by the same authors, but are wholly new and independent books, differing from the others in the selection, arrangement, and treatment of topics, so far as was necessary to fit them for a briefer and easier course of study. They are simple in style, and emi- nently practical, yet thoroughly scientific, and giving the results of the latest discovery and research. They are sure of a hearty welcome from teachers who desire books that shall be brief without being dry, and easy without being puerile. gg=" E. S. Ritchie & Sons, of Boston, will furnish a set of apparatus for the thorough illustration of the Handbook of Chemistry for $30, and a set for the thorough iPustration of the Handbook of Natural Philosophy for $ 350. V* Circulars, containing notices and testimonials from emi- nent teachers, will be furnished on application. Copies for examination will be supplied at one half the advertised price, with twenty-five cents additional for postage. Special terms will be given for first introduction of any of the books. WOOLWORTH, AINSWORTH, & CO., 117 Washington Street, Boston. TESTIMONIALS. Below we give extracts from a few of the most recent testimonials to the merits of this popular series : — The Pennsylvania School Journal (April, 1869,) speaks thus of the series : " The progress of science teaching in our schools has un- doubtedly been retarded by the lack of suitable text-books. That want has been, in a great measure, relieved by the recent labors of Messrs. Rolfe and Gillet, in their double course, — a course of Hand- books for those who do not desire anything beyond elementary in- struction, and another of more comprehensive text-books on the same sciences, — the last of which has just been published. These text- books commend themselves as the work of men whose experience in the class-room has taught them the most effective methods of present- ing scientific truth, and whose design has been to present the results of the latest investigations in the several departments of each science treated. They aim throughout at nothing more than clearness, nothing less than accuracy. We remark, especially, the absence of any loose statement which could mislead the pupil or leave a half-formed idea. Teachers all know the difficulty of banishing a false impression which has for a time been accepted and applied as fact. Instead of the weakness which tends to enfeeble the growing mind by presenting the study of science as a play lesson, — a mere succession of interesting experiments, etc., — we have scientific truth here set forth as a study which the schoolboy may feel an honest pride in mastering. In none of these works is system sacrificed to simplicity, as in some others of their class ; yet the text-books of the Cambridge Course yield to none in point of interest At the end of each division of the subject, a carefully prepared Summary has been inserted, thus binding together and again classifying all the matter previously given. . , . . Indeed, take the Cambridge Physics throughout, the Course is greatly in ad- vance of any heretofore issued in this country. The publishers have TESTIMONIALS. also done their part well. It is a luxury to sweep the hand over these smooth, solid, glossy pages, — beautiful also to the eye, in their old- style type and in their wealth of scientific illustration, — and think of the books as specially designed for our Common Schools." The San Francisco Bulletin, (March 20, 1869,) in a review of the whole series, says : " These works embody the latest results of sci- entific discovery. The compilers wisely discard theory, however plausible and fascinating, unless it rests on a solid groundwork of truth. The arrangement and divisions of subjects are judicious ; the method of teaching is based on correct principles. The definitions are clear and concise ; the notes are models of perspicuity. There is no useless verbiage ; no vague generalization ; no rhapsodies of style. The student is directly introduced to the subject, and kept rigidly to it until he has mastered it. At the close of each section the ground gone over is reviewed, and the principles educed are summed up in a few pithy axioms. While these volumes are more immediately de- signed for the use of schools, they have high claims to recognition as scientific treatises. We can hardly think of any other source where so much valuable knowledge of physics can be found in so short a compass. The subjects are discussed with a freshness and oftentimes a grasp of thought rare in books of the kind." The Boston Courier says of the whole series : " They are in ad- vance, by a great stride, of other text-books in common use, not only because they pursue the only rational method, so long ago instituted by Bacon, and yet so much neglected, of deducing principles from facts, instead of supporting rules laid down by examples, but also be- cause they have kept pace with the progress of constantly accumulat- ing knowledge and furnish us with the latest results. They are Model Books." The Boston Daily Advei'tiser says : It is in their attempt to keep up with the progress and present condition of scientific knowledge, that these volumes differ most widely from the text-books generally used in our schools. Chemistry and electricity — heat, light, and sound — wear, in this Cambridge Course of Physics, a very different aspect from that which they present in similar treatises of five-and- TESTIMONIALS. twenty years ago We rejoice to believe that many myriads of the young — and not of the young only — will here be introduced to discoveries and speculations of so much interest and grandeur." The Commonwealth (Boston), in noticing the " Handbook of Natu- ral Philosophy," says : " The merit of this, as of the other volumes, is that it breaks away from the traditional method of preparation of such works, and by original arrangement, the introduction of the latest discoveries and experiments, and fee amplest illustration, gives at once the most complete and accurate data of the subject-matter treated. It is fresh and pertinent throughout, and is equally valuable in school, counting-house, or family." The Boston Journal of Chemistry (March, 1869,) says of the series : " We have carefully examined these books, and find them to be compiled with great accuracy and care ; and the arrangement of top- ics and the general style are admirable. The pleasing perspicuity and commendable exactness, with which the elementary principles and facts of the physical sciences are presented in these treatises, are in marked contrast with a number of text-books which have somehow found their way into many of our schools." The Round Table (New York) says of the " Handbook of the Stars " : " It is a very admirable specimen of the abilities of the authors. There is scarcely anything in it which young pupils cannot readily comprehend. The illustrations are really beautiful, and the collection of celestial maps at the end adds greatly to the value of the work. An Appendix discusses with considerable thoroughness some of the more abstruse subjects touched upon in the body of the book. The name scarcely expresses the full scope of this manual. It is really an elementary treatise on astronomy without mathematics, and is very good reading for any one with a taste for science but neither the time nor the inclination to go deeply into its study. It is brought down to the very latest dates, — another advantage in these clays of stereotype plates and non-revision. We hope that Messrs. Rolfe and Gillet will, at least once in every three or four years, go carefully over their text-books and bring them down to the time of the latest cor- rections and discoveries. By so doing, they will very effectually keep the start of those lazy writers who, when they have finished a school- TESTIMONIALS. 7 book on a progressive science, imagine it is to last without revision as long as they remain in the world to draw an income from its sales." Sillimari 's Journal (March, 1869,) says of the "Handbook of Chem- istry" : " On the whole, the book is a valuable addition to our mea- gre collection of text- books on the new system, and we commend it to the notice of teachers." « La Renaissance Louisianaise (New Orleans) says of the " Natural Philosophy " : " Cet ouvrage instructif convient a l'usage des gens du monde aussi bien qu'a celui des etudiants. C'est un manuel qui traite avec une grande clarte demonstrative sur tous les sujets ele- mentaires de la Physique, d'apres les plus recentes decouvertes Les auteurs ont, selon nous, completement reussi a produire un ou- vrage utile au plus haut point et dont personne ne devrait se dispenser." Mr. S. M. Capron, of the High School, Hartford, Conn., where the " Natural Philosophy " has been adopted, says : " We have ex- amined all the recent text-books on this subject which have appeared, and feel convinced that this is the best arranged of all for our purpose, and most fully up to the present state of scientific research." Professor Edward Conant, of the Vermont State Normal School, writes that his pupils have used the same book " with constant de- light, and, of course, with profit." Mr. L. R. Williston, of Cambridge, Mass., writes thus : " I will express my good opinion of the ' Handbook of Natural Philosophy' by simply saying that I intend to use it in my school. I shall also continue to use the • Handbook of the Stars,' and shall use your book in Chemistry, if I use any." Mr. W. B. Stickney, Master of the High School, Chicopee, Mass., says ; " The ' Handbook of the Stars ' bears the test of the school- room. My class is delighted with it." 8 TESTIMONIALS. Professor W. S. Smyth, of Wyoming Seminary, Kingston, Pa., who has adopted the same book, says : "For logical arrangement, clear- ness of expression and illustration, as well as for mechanical execution, it is unsurpassed." Professor John B. Burwell of the Charlotte Female Institute, North Carolina, writes : " I have been using the books for the last two or three years, and consider them superior in all respects to any others I have ever met with. I can also add the recommendation of Dr. Philips, whose reputation as a teacher is known throughout the South." The following is from the official report of the regular meeting of the Chicago Board of Education, May 7, 1869 : — " Mr. Carter moved to adopt the next recommendation of the Com- mittee, to wit : Rolfe and Gillet's Chemistry, in place of Wells's Chem- istry. " Carried. Yeas — Messrs. Ballantyne, Bond, Bonfield, Briggs, Carter, Guilford, Holden, King, Meserve, Runyan, Shackford, Tink- ham, and Walsh — 13. Nays — None." * # * This popular course of Physics has been officially adopt- ed by the State Board of Maryland and Minnesota, and is al- ready used, in whole or in part, in the cities of Baltimore, Pitts- burg, Wheeling, Richmond, Savannah, Charleston, Mobile, New Orleans, Galveston, Memphis, Nashville, Louisville, St. Louis, Chicago, Milwaukee, Racine, Bloomington, Detroit, Cin- cinnati, Columbus, Dayton, Cleveland, St. Joseph, Wheeling, Buffalo, Rochester, Newark, Worcester, Taunton, Lowell, Ban- gor, Lawrence, Haverhill, Bath, Milford, Hartford, New London, New Bedford, Boston, Cambridge, Dover, Concord, Nashua, Burlington, Dorchester, Manchester, Pittsfield, Chelsea, Chico- pee, Northampton, San Francisco, etc., etc. THE NEW LATH COUBSE. i. PREPARATORY LATIN PROSE BOOK, CONTAINING ALL THE LATIN PROSE NECESSARY FOR ENTERING COLLEGE; WITH REFERENCES TO THE GRAMMARS OF HARKNESS, ANDREWS AND STODDARD, ALLEN, AND BULLIONS. By J. H. HANSON, A. M., PRINCIPAL OF THE WATERVILLE CLASSICAL INSTITUTE. A HANDBOOK OF LATIN POETRY, CONTAINING SELECTIONS FROM VIRGIL, OVID, AND HORACE; WITH NOTES, AND REFERENCES TO THE GRAMMARS OF HARKNESS, ANDREWS AND STODDARD, ALLEN, AND BULLIONS. By J. H. HANSON, A. M., and W. J. ROLFE," A. M. III. SELECTIONS FROM OVID AND VIRGIL. A SHORTER HANDBOOK OF LATIN POETRY ; WITH NOTES AND GRAMMATICAL REFERENCES. By J. H. HANSON, A. M., and W. J. ROLFE, A. M. This volume comprises all the Latin Poetry, Notes, and References contained in the larger volume, with the exception of Horace. No. 1 embraces all the Latin prose requisite to preparation for col- lege, with reference to the grammars most in use, Critical and Explan- atory Notes, and a Vocabulary. No. 2 completes the plan, — furnishing all the requisite Latin poetry. The two volumes comprise all the Latin necessary to be read in preparing for a collegiate course, and all that is needed to complete the Latin reading of pupils who terminate their classical studies in our High Schools and Academies. No. 3 is the same as No. 2, omitting the Selections from Horace. 9 MAGILL'S FEEICH COUESE. i. A FRENCH GRAMMAR: BEING AN ATTEMPT TO PRESENT, IN A CONCISE AND SYSTEMATIC FORM, THE ESSENTIAL PRINCIPLES OF THE FRENCH LAN- GUAGE : TO WHICH IS ADDED A FRENCH, ENGLISH, AND LATIN VOCABULARY. Eleventh Edition. Enlarged and Improved. II. AN INTRODUCTORY FRENCH READER CONTAINING SELECTIONS FOR READING AND DECLAMATION. III. FRENCH PROSE AND POETRY: BEING AN ADVANCED FRENCH READER : CONTAINING SELECTIONS FROM THE PRINCIPAL CLASSICAL FRENCH POETS AND PROSE-WRITERS DURING THE PAST TWO HUNDRED YEARS, WITH BIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES OF THE AUTHORS; THE WHOLE CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. By EDWARD H. MA GILL, A. M., PROFESSOR OF ANCIENT AND MODERN LANGUAGES IN SWARTHMORE COLLEGE, PENNSYLVANIA. No. 1 now contains a complete course of Grammar, illustrated by copious exer- cises, English-French and French-English, together with a very full treatise on pronunciation, brought down to date according to the most recent authorities. No. 2 Contains selections progressively arranged ; and its very full vocabulary- gives the derivations of the words as well as their definitions and pronunciation, an entirely new feature in a work of this character. Both this work and No. i are highly recommended by M. Bescherelle aine, author of the Dictionnaire National. No. 3 is a combination of the best materials to make a useful French Reader which the author could obtain during a residence of some months in France, some of them already widely used in the French schools, and others, new selections, taken from the original sources. The whole series forms a very complete course of instruction in French, according to the most approved modern method, for our schools and colleges. 10 A NEW ELEMENTARY COURSE IN THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, FOR THE USE OP SCHOOLS. BY GABRIEL CAMPBELL, M. A., PROFESSOR IN THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA. i2mo. pp. 200. The aim of this work is to make a practical application of the improvements developed by the growth of the modern science of Comparative Philology. The author presents the German language to American learners, who are presumed to be acquainted with the English language, by way of comparison with the English in its points of similarity and of difference. The plan is simple, philosophical, and practical, and the work is proving itself eminently successful. It has received very nattering encomiums from high authorities in all parts of the country where Gjerman is taught. The book is divided into three parts : — PART I. General Principles ; Part II. Synopses — Forms of Words ; Part III. Special Principles, Reading and Analysis ; followed by a German and English Vocabulary to Part III. It con- tains also an English and German Vocabulary to Part I. 11 BARTHOLOMEW'S DRAWING SERIES, DESIGNED FOR THE PRIMARY, GRAMMAR, AND HIGH SCHOOL. By WILLIAM N. BARTHOLOMEW, PROFESSOR OF DRAWING IN THE ENGLISH HIGH AND GIRLS' HIGH AND NORMAL SCHOOLS, AND DIRECTOR OF DRAWING IN THE GRAMMAR SCHOOLS OF BOSTON. Bartholomew's Primary-School Writing and Drawing Slate. Bartholomew's Drawing-Books. New Series. In twelve numbers; with "Teacher's Guide" for No. I, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4. Bartholomew's Drawing-Cards for Blackboard Use. Bartholomew's Progressive Picturesque Drawing- Cards. In four numbers. Bartholomew's Linear Perspective. One vol. 8vo. 64 pp. Bartholomew's Sketches from Nature. In five numbers. BARTHOLOMEW'S DRAWING-BOOKS. This series of Drawing-Books embraces twelve numbers. Each con- taining twelve plates, executed in the highest style of lithographic art, ami twenty-four pages of drawing-paper of superior quality. Instruction relating to the examples is given on the covers of the books. The subject-matter of each book is as follows : — No. 1. — ■ Horizontal and vertical lines, together with plane figures and ornamental forms composed of these lines. Xo. 2. — Inclined lines and ornamental forms composed of horizon- tal, vertical, and inclined lines, curved lines, circles, and ornamental forms composed of curved lines. No. 3. — Initiatory lessons in Perspective j The method of drawing from objects explained ; The Laws of Light ; Shade and Shadow pre- sented. — Advanced lessons on the subjects presented in No. 3. — Lessons in drawing Fruit and Flowers. — Initiatory lessons on Foreground and Foliage. — Lessons on Landscape-drawing. — Marine Views and Landscape. — Initiatory lessons on Animal-drawing. — Advanced lessons on Animal-drawing. — Initiatory lessons on Figure-drawing. — Advanced lessons on Figure-drawing. 12 No. 4 No. S- No. 6. No. 7- No. 8 No. a. No. 10. No. 11. No. 12. Bartholomew's Drawing Series. The object aimed at in the first four numbers is to give to pupils in our public schools that facility of hand, that discipline of eye, and that knowledge of the principles of drawing which all should possess. The remaining numbers of this series are intended for the use of those who have the time and opportunity to pursue the study further. For the assistance of teachers the author has prepared a series of Manuals, called " The Teacher's Guide." With the aid afforded by these,manuals, any good teacher may guide a class to successful results. BARTHOLOMEW'S PRIMARY-SCHOOL SLATE, WITH A SERIES OF PROGRESSIVE LESSONS IN WRITING AND DRAWING. This is one of the most simple, practical, and useful arrangements which ingenuity has yet devised in the way of a slate for primary schools. BARTHOLOMEW'S PROGRESSIVE PICTUR- ESQUE DRAWING-CARDS. Four sets, or numbers. Each containing twelve cards, accompanied with instructions. These cards afford pleasing subjects for drawing. The object aimed at, however, is not so much to teach the art of drawing, as it is to nourish in the child a love for it, afford him a source of innocent occupation and amusement, and lead him to observe nature. No. I. — Elevations of familiar objects, principally of buildings; subjects simple in outline and treatment. No. 2. — Buildings and familiar objects in perspective. No. 3. — Buildings and foliage. No. 4. — Landscape. BARTHOLOMEW'S LINEAR PERSPECTIVE. I VOLUME, IN WHICH THTS SUBJECT IS SCIENTIFICALLY TREATED. BARTHOLOMEW'S SKETCHES FROM NATURE. IN FIVE NUMBERS, PAPER COVERS, EACH NUMBER CONTAINS FOUR PLATES, II BY 14. Accurate copies of the author's pencil sketches. Affording a pleas- ing variety of subjects, remarkable for simplicity and power. To those who have had some little practice in landscape drawing, these sketches will prove exceedingly useful as subjects for further study. BARTHOLOMEW'S DRAWING-CARDS, FOR BLACKBOARD USE. 1'3 PAYSON, DIMTON, & SCRIBNER'S NATIONAL SYSTEM OF PENMANSHIP IS USED ALMOST EXCLUSIVELY IN New England, the British Provinces, the Southern States, and the States of the Pacific Coast. It has been re*-engraved and republished in England, Scotland, and Canada. Large sales have been made in the West Indies, Sand- wich Islands, and New Mexico. The Publishers of this popular system of penmanship have spared no pains to make it worthy of the leading position which it holds in the country. We have endeavored to combine every practical point of excellence which can be secured through eminent sagacity and ingenuity of au- thorship, and the most artistic skill and precision in the mechanical execution of these books and charts. Our effort to advance the standard of good penmanship is shown in the progressive character of our succeeding editions ; the favorable reception which the books have met with, and the enviable reputation which they now enjoy, is regarded a reasonable subject of congratula- tion. The first four numbers have been recently revised, rearranged, and superbly engraved. The system comprises three distinct series, — COMMON SCHOOL SERIES, Nos. i, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. BUSINESS SERIES, Nos. 7, 11, and 12. LADIES' SERIES, Nos. 8, 9, and 10. 14 HANAFORD & PAYSON'S BOOK-KEEPING, COMPRISED IN THREE BOOKS, BY L. B. HANAFORD, A. M., and J. W. PAYSON SINGLE ENTRY — Common School Edition, with Blanks. DOUBLE AND SINGLE ENTRY — High School Edition, with Blanks. ACADEMIC EDITION — with Blanks. This work completely meets the wants of the older pupils in our Common Schools and Academies ; it has met a hearty reception, and given universal satisfaction. CROSBY'S GREEK SERIES. The series comprises the followirig looks : — GREEK LESSONS. Consisting of selections from Xenophon's Anabasis, with Directions for the Study of the Grammar, Notes, Exercises in Translation from English into Greek, and a Vocabu- lary. By Alpheus Crosby. i2mo. Price, $ i.oo. XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. Revised Edition. A Narrative of the Expedition of Cyrus the Younger, and of the Retreat of the Ten Thousand. By Xenophon of Athens. Edited by Alpheus Crosby. i2mo. Price, $ 1.25. GREEK TABLES. For the Use of Students. By Alpheus Crosby.' i2mo. Price, 62 cents. A GRAMMAR OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. Re- vised Edition. By Alpheus Crosby, late Professor of the Greek Language and Literature in Dartmouth College. i2mo. Price, $ 1-75- 15 PAYSON, DUNTON, & SCRIBNER'S STEEL PENS. Having added ONF new pen to our series, we feel that it embraces variety enough to meet all wants and suit all tastes. These Pens are made expressly for us by the best manufacturers in England and America ; and in quality of material, finish of points, easy action, and durability are unsurpassed by any in the market. No. 333. EXTRA FINE. No. 445. THE NATIONAL PEN. No. 7. THE BUSINESS PEN. No. 8. THE LADIES' PEN. No. 111. COMMERCIAL PEN. No. 117. THE EXCELSIOR PEN. These Pens are neatly put up in gross and quarter-gross boxes. Sample card of six pens (one of each kind) sent to any address on receipt of ten cents. These Sample Cards offered to the trade at 8o cents per dozen. RICHARD'S LATIN LESSONS. SAWYER'S LATIN PRIMER. WILSON'S TREATISE ON ENGLISH PUNCTU- ATION. BASCOM'S WORKS. 1. Esthetics ; or, The Science of Beauty. 2. Philosophy of Rhetoric. CHAMPLIN'S WORKS. 1. Text-Book in Intellectual Philosophy. 2. First Principles of Ethics. WOOL WORTH, AINSWORTH, & CO., Publishers, BOSTON AND CHICAGO. 16 i